Home

OPTOCONTROL USER'S GUIDE

Contents

1. 1 43 Configuring a Controller 1 16 Whats Next cecnscncrastccicccncaratesinctartoteanidatn 1 43 Opening the Strategy A strategy is a complete control program developed in OptoControl Our sample strategy controls a cookie factory Appendix C describes the sample strategy in detail but for now let s just open and explore it 1 Start OptoControl by clicking the Start button and selecting Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 1 OptoControl OptoControl OptoControl User s Guide 1 1 QUICK START The OptoControl main window opens OptoControl 10 x Fie Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Tools view Help E aae HOCA lk mG Oo Ali agM me E aE ja llya Aa a oi dh HEH Click the Open Strategy button fae on the toolbar or choose File Open Strategy 3 In the Open Strategy dialog box navigate to OptoCtr Examples 4 In the Examples directory double click the Cookies subdirectory to open it The strategy file Cookies cdb appears Open Strategy Look in E Cookies Sl c EE gel Cookies cdb ream FSC Files of type OptoContral Strategy Files cdb 7 5 Double click the Cookies cdb file to open it 1 2 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START as The Cookies strategy opens and the OptoControl window now shows the Cookies strategy _OptoControl _ 5 x Fie Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help Dee sex ms SSA Rmaoee AAS SAB NOR
2. ccccccscesessesestesesteeseeteseeesestesesteseseeeeseees 5 40 Deleting EVEMt EGON Sai sieicsscdedisncceastesancshheioscdbien aadendawbes Gacebredoekasaoeacanns 5 41 OptoControl User s Guide vii o Inspecting 1 0 in Debug Mode ccccccccscsescssesessesessesescesescsseacsnsacasssestessaceseecansaesees 5 41 nspecting AYN cit att eee de elie aha areal dea bucd ace cde 5 41 Inspecting Digital PD Points Leite sccecsszbsicanntstnedsaeeesendseacecidnnntdcnacndeccacecteeddadhxedeadebasencs 5 43 Inspecting Analog I O POints ccccscsssscssscsssscsssscsssscssssessssesccsessssescsseeceseeeeseecenees 5 44 Inspecting PID LOOPS 5 hes cect ecen sad canstcosiaces on bcs Mennasbasitsnctdeianbathatindtastndiniacencmecctatsniate 5 46 Inspecting EV EME REACTIONS asciiscrsseiescicincionatursacstardnaseaaneditiarendaemaians 5 47 MOMO Event Reactions satisacsscaesscscccescsptiascisaspastiataceaiecanmepdgioceeedanunenenieinaes 5 49 Using Watch Windows to Monitor Elements 0 c ccccccceccsccestesesteseseeeseeteseeesesteseseneans 5 50 Creating a Watch WIIG zis cancs steels Saeteascapsies desist ates cemnccedes haha tussetabremadoeeancaatis 5 50 Opening an Existing Watch Window 0 seci cet tial al axaasacsedueatiee Sochoutsatalead dnc daiamcedoaielenton 5 52 Working in Watch Windows 5 ocsecaciscoitxcdiecin daxcavceectstccescd ca oxcabdceesencantdendundandencadtenneds 5 52 Resetting 1 0 On Strategy Run suis terse esis uhaaaidancueasicv ats dea Se decade T
3. ccccceeeeee 6 1 SAVING ANd ClOSING c ceccceccesestesesteseeee 6 3 Saving to Flash and Archiving 6 4 Compiling and Downloading 004 6 6 Running and Stopping ccceeeee 6 10 Creating and Opening EOS MUNCIE MEA E 6 11 Viewing and PrINtING ceeceeeceeeeeee teen 6 19 Searching and Replacing 6 27 Expanding the Command Set c ce 6 30 A strategy is similar to a file in any Microsoft Windows program You use standard Windows menu items to create a new strategy to open an existing strategy or to save a strategy Creating a New Strategy Each OptoControl strategy must be located in its own directory When you create a new strategy you must create a new directory Having each strategy in its own directory keeps all its files in one place and makes it easy to copy a strategy to another location for modification or backup 1 To create a new strategy select File New Folder button fa on the toolbar 2 In the New Strategy dialog box navigate to be placed Create a new folder if necessary Strategy or press CTRL N or click the New the directory where you want the strategy to OptoControl User s Guide 6 1 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 3 Type the strategy name As you can see in the Files of type field OptoControl files have an extension of cdb 4 Click Open The new strategy is created Its Strategy Tree and Powerup charts appear in the OptoControl main wi
4. 4 Click Yes to proceed Two additional dialog boxes appear briefly The first displays the progress as the strategy is compiled The second shows progress as the strategy is downloaded to the controller Downloading to Cookie Controller my xi a 4 Assuming the strategy was compiled and downloaded successfully you are now in Debug mode OptoControl User s Guide 1 23 QUICK START D In the OptoControl window you ll notice that the Debug toolbar is now available The mode is shown at the bottom of the main window The open chart window shows that the strategy is stopped as shown in the following figure OptoControl Dough_Chip_Control aia xi E File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools Yiew Watch Window Help xj ded ties A S G mm Debug toolbar Dot Sa oe x oho eile E Ee amp QQ ob dh Cookies nls chart drops the dough ana chips on the conveyor belt a Controllers Lhe belt must be running between 50 and 09 of max rpm 2 BE Cookie Conti bd Ge GO ee ee Ra ok oe a A gt ws ke rock Subroutines Inch f The Powerup chart starts jo o amp Ext Instruction F this chart PE A AS ye ee a ee i karts SE ii maA i i f iy Alarms POSER ete Monee m Heber na ae Betas m Dough_Chip Thisvehart fins coe e Per cg Grice ee oe e hai sos a J El amp Dough_Vess 3 continuously oncethe LEK
5. 10 18 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Append Character to String From 32 integer literal represents a space To String_1 string variable Results in note the space character in position 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 String_1 O P T O lt Length is s Append String to String From 22 string literal To String_1 string variable Results in 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 String_1 O P T O 2 2 lt Length is gt Append Character to String From 13 integer literal carriage return To String_1 string variable Results in 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 String_1 OIPITIO 212 lt Length is gt OptoControl User s Guide 10 19 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS NO ee Comparison to Visual Basic and C The following table lists OptoControl string commands and their equivalents in Microsoft Visual Basic and C OptoControl Command Visual Basic Cc Append Character to String S S Chr MyChar i strlen str str i 0 str i 0 Append String to String S S Hello streat str Hello Convert Hex String Number 1 amp h S sscanf str x amp iNum Convert Number to Formatted Hex String S Hex 1 s
6. They should start at six o clock in the morning They need to run for 15 minutes What inputs and data do you have to work with List all the inputs Describe the data they provide Check for any inputs or data you need but don t have Input Data the input provides Hygrometer Humidity percentage from 0 100 Day Day of the week Sunday through Saturday Time Hour of the day 24 hour clock Sprinkler status Whether sprinklers are currently running on or off Input from timer Length of time sprinklers have been on in minutes OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY What do the outputs need to be List all the outputs Describe the results that are needed Check for any outputs you need but don t have Output What it does Sprinkler switch Turns sprinklers on or off Timer control Sets timer How many times does the process have to be repeated Our example is a simple sprinkler system in which the process happens twice a week on certain days In a more complex system however you might have one section of the sprinklers turn on followed by other sections repeating the process several times in different areas and then repeating the whole pattern on certain days Designing a Logical Sequence of Steps to Solve the Problem Now that you ve determined what you re trying to do and what your inputs data and outputs look like you re ready to outline the steps needed to so
7. gt Cookie Watch Docked watch window Cookie_Counter Integer 32 Variable PERROR OES mm Z C Program Files Opto22 OptoControl 41 Examples MyCookies Cookies Now we ll trip the latch that signals a bad cookie 7 On the Strategy Tree under the I O Units folder at the bottom of the window expand Digital_lO_Unit by clicking the plus sign at the left of the name You see two new folders Points and E Rs 1 38 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START rs 8 Expand the Points folder to display the digital 1 0 points configured for this 1 0 unit Cookies rE Variables Numeric Variables a0 Chart_Status E 314 Dough_Pressure_Setpoint 3 14 Setpoint_Minus_Deadbanc 840 Start_Flag String Variables Pointer Variables Numeric Tables E String Tables Pointer Tables I O Units PA Analog_IO_Unit J E Digital_1O_Unit EQ Points 9 Dough_Pressure_Conl 9 Dough_Dispense_Valy Fh Dough_Level_Switch O Chip_Dispense_Valve ER chip_Level_Switch Ha Inspection_Pass_Fail_ Cookie_Counter Points folder OF Reject_Valve Hh E_STOP E ERs 9 Double click Inspection_Pass_Fail_Switch near the bottom of the list In the reduced view dialog box click Expand to open the expanded view Inspection_Pass_Fail_Switch iew Digit lel x Name Inspection Pass_Fail Switc
8. l Next Block whether the timer c S a e pat has expired again ce E A Brevious Block Timers can be tricky For additional details see Using Timers on page 10 12 OptoControl User s Guide 3 17 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Using a Flag A flag is a way of controlling logical flow within a strategy You can set a flag in one part of the strategy and then test it in another part If the flag is set the logic flows one way if the flag is not set it flows another way For example a flag could be set to indicate that a port is busy with one process to prevent another process from using the port at the same time The following chart shows logic for one of the processes that uses the port If another process has already set the flag this process must wait until the flag is cleared Instructions Flag_Example_Chart Port Busy flag set x Is Add Variable True ze Hodiy Delete The condition block Flag_Example_Chart Next Block checks whether the see a aA a a i f Previous Block flag has been set paa indicating that AND another process is using the port If the flag has been set the chart logic loops until it has been cleared A Instructions Flag_Example_Chart Set Port_Busy flag Set Variable True Add Port_Busy This block sets the flag Hoary so another process can Delete see that the port is busy Next Block paek Previnus Block Instructions Fl
9. 7 2 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Working with Chart Elements What s In a Chart Charts can contain four kinds of flowchart blocks lines connecting the blocks and text Action Blocks are rectangles that contain one or more commands instructions that do the work of the strategy such as turning things on or off setting variables and so on See Chapter 9 Using Commands for more information Action blocks can have more than one entrance but only one exit Condition Blocks are diamonds containing questions that control the logical flow of a strategy Condition blocks can have many entrances but only two exits True and False OptoScript Blocks are hexagons containing OptoScript code a procedural language you may want to use to simplify certain tasks See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for more information OptoScript blocks can have more than one entrance but only one exit Continue Blocks are ovals that contain no commands but simply route chart logic to a new location such as to the top of a chart These blocks help keep charts neat by avoiding awkward connections between two blocks that are far apart Connections are lines with arrows that connect one block to the next directing the flow of strategy logic Text explains the chart s purpose and elements for anyone who needs to understand them later Using the Drawing Toolbar The drawing toolbar includes tools for each of the elements
10. The title bar shows whether scanning is occurring Scanning stops when you click one of the changeable fields Status Mode and Breakpoints and resumes once you click Apply another button or one of the other fields If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost 3 To stop run or suspend a chart click an arrow in the Status field to select the option Click Apply 4 To turn pausing on or off click an arrow in the Mode field to select Step On or Step Off Click Apply 5 To observe or ignore any breakpoints set in the chart click an arrow in the Breakpoints field to select Break On or Break Off Click Apply This action does not clear or set breakpoints but just determines whether the chart stops at breakpoints when it is running Chart changes occur as soon as you click Apply 6 To add the chart to a watch window so you can monitor it with other strategy elements click Add Watch In the dialog box choose what to watch Select an existing watch window to add this chart to or create a new watch window See Using Watch Windows to Monitor Elements on page 5 50 for more information on watch windows 7 When you have finished making changes click Close to return to the View Chart Status dialog box Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics You can print a chart or subroutine just as it appears on screen You can also print all charts within a strategy When printing a single chart or subrout
11. xX jenba f u 340 OTTSU S yOZOTTSU S FjuTAds u I4 wOTTEUn S f U I4 OTT Yua S s 729197 S ES ZS OTTSU S f aOTT Ya s Adoz4s ES ZS pOTTSUn S ES ZS pOTTSUn S suoss dx Buls zleosed joiIsva du3S0 dO OptoControl User s Guide F 3 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE pues p TALIL N utbeq op S gt F STTuM IT Tx T F T Z T Fletaer Aw G gt F TTUM puem T T T Z x T 4 eTQeLAW GS gt f STTuM pusm T T F Z x T T eTqQeLAW G gt T eTTuM y 30N 88S doo jrym pus Z x FT T eTQeLAW Z x FT T eTqeLAW TXON qxeu utbeq Z x T 4 eTqeLAW fZ x FT TF e9TqQeLAW op G 04 0 TF 103 47 G gt T f0 T 303 T desis OL 0 T 404 T deqs g 03 0 f 103 p 30N 88S doo 104 pus asTe butyjewos op este butyjewos op utbeq este ests pus este butyqewos op este butyqewos op JI pua Jtpue utbeq sT Hbutyjewos op esTe Hhutyjewos op S lt T JT ST S lt T JT ST esta esto pus este butyqewos op este butyqewos op Hutyjeuos op Butyjewos op ueylL G lt f JIesTa ueyd G lt F JF ST utbaq butyjewos op butyjewos op f F 3f z F Jf z f JI u y Z T JT JUBWA e s j S pu sT butyjewos op sT butyjewuos op utbaq este ests JI pug gTtpue pus sT Hbutyjewos
12. 20 mA To read this information you must configure the points NOTE The only way to write data to this module through OptoControl is to use the command Write Numeric Variable to 1 0 Memory Map See the OptoControl Command Reference for more information To set or change PID parameters using the brains built in Web pages see Opto 22 form 1263 the SNAP PID Module User s Guide 6 Double click point 1 In the Add Analog Point dialog box enter a name and description for the point and click OK Repeat for the other three points The PID module is configured Configuration Example SNAP Ethernet I O Points The following figure shows an example of a SNAP Ethernet I O unit that has been configured for the first four modules With all digital and analog points on the same unit you can clearly see all the modules and points controlled by the SNAP Ethernet brain 5 20 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O You can expand or collapse each module to see the points on it Point types and features such as counters are shown in the Features Subtype column Configure 170 Points OF Xx 140 Unit SNAP_Ethemet_Unit_X Type Je3000 Snap Mixed 1 0 SNAP B3000 ENET Modules and Points Type Features Subtype Units Enabled Be IERE 00 SNAPIDC5D 2 5 Digital Input n odify E a 01 SN4P ODCSSRC 5 Digital Output How 0 04 Motor_1_Switch None Enabl
13. 3 Press DELETE You can also right click the element s and select Delete from the pop up menu Block 0 cannot be deleted Changing Element Color and Size You can change the colors and sizes of blocks connections and text in your chart To change one element for example the color of one block use the steps in this section To change more than one at a time see Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window on page 7 3 Start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode OptoControl User s Guide 7 13 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks 1 Click the Select tool R and click the block to select it 2 Click one of the handles then drag it in the direction you want To resize horizontally and vertically at the same time drag a corner handle Changing Block Colors 1 Click the Select tool R l 2 Right click the block and choose Color from the pop up menu 3 Pick the color you want and click OK Changing Text You can change the size font font style or color of the text in any block 1 Click the Select tool R 2 Right click the block and choose Font from the pop up menu 3 In the Font dialog box make the changes you want Click OK 4 To change whether text appears at the left the center or the right of a block select the block and click the right mouse button From the pop up menu choose Justify from the sub menu choose Left Center or Right Ch
14. Greater Than or Equal x gt y F Greater Than Table Element x gt nt 0 F Greater x gt y F Host Task Received a HasHostTaskReceivedMessage On Port F Message Hyperbolic Cosine HyperbolicCosine Of F Hyperbolic Sine HyperbolicSine Of F Hyperbolic Tangent HyperbolicTangent Of F 1 0 Point Communication sloPointCommEnabled I O Point F Enabled 1 0 Unit Communication sloUnitCommEnabled I O Unit F Enabled I O Unit Ready sIoUnitReady I O Unit F Increment Variable ncrement Variable Variable x x 1 P Interrupt Disabled for Event sInterruptDisabledForEvent Event Reaction F Interrupt Enabled for Event sInterruptEnabledForEvent Event Reaction F Interrupt On Port0 sInterruptOnPort0 F Interrupt On Port1 sInterruptOnPort1 F Interrupt On Port2 sInterruptOnPort2 F Interrupt On Port3 sInterruptOnPort3 F Interrupt On Port6 sInterruptOnPort 6 F IVAL Set Analog from Table valSetAnalogFromTable Start at Index Of P Table On I O Unit IVAL Set Analog Point valSetAnalogPoint To On Point P IVAL Set Counter valSetCounter To On Point P IVAL Set Digital Binary valSetDigitalBinary On Mask Off Mask On P I O Unit IVAL Set Frequency valSetFrequency To On Point P OptoControl User s Guide E 11 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee _ Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Exam
15. PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Strings are referred to by their name Initially the previous string is empty giving it a length of zero Later during program execution seven characters are added to String_1 increasing its length to seven lt Width is gt String_1 OIPITIO 2 2 lt Lengthis gt Sample String Table e Declared Name Promo_Messages e Declared Width 26 e Maximum Possible Width 127 e Declared Length Number of indexes or items in table 5 e Maximum Possible Length Size 65 535 e Bytes of Memory Required Declared Width 4 x Declared Length 26 4 x 5 150 lt Width is gt Index 0 O P T O 2 2 FJA C T O R Y F LJO O R Index 1 Liejajd ijnig tihje wiayy Index 2 Tyiifg hyt tiy ijnitje g rja tjejd Index 3 Wrifn 9 5 Whi n N pjp l ijcja t ijojnis Index 4 Tjolp INiolticih Pirjoild ujc t Slulp plolr A string table is a collection of strings Each string is referred to by the name of the table it is in and the index where it can be found The length of the table is the number of strings it can hold Because string table indexes start with zero indexes can range from zero to the table length minus one The width of each string in the table is the same The length of each string can vary from zero to the config
16. Read String Variable from O ReadStrVarFromIoMemMap Length I O Unit F Memory Map Mem address To Read Word from PC Memory ReadWordFromPcMemory From Address F ISA only Read Word from PC Port ReadWordFromPcPort From Address F ISA only Receive Character via Serial ReceiveCharViaSerialPort From Port F Port Receive N Characters via ReceiveNCharsViaArcnet Put in Num F ARCNET Characters From Port Receive N Characters via ReceiveNCharsViaEthernet Put in Num F Ethernet Characters From Session Receive N Characters via ReceiveNCharsViaSerialPort Put in Num F Serial Port Characters From Port E 14 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS EE ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Receive String via ARCNET ReceiveStringViaArcnet Put in From Port F Receive String via Ethernet ReceiveStringViaEthernet Put in From F Session Receive String via Serial Port ReceiveStringViaSerialPort Put in From F Port Receive Table via ARCNET ReceiveTableViaArcnet Start at Index Of F Table From Port Receive Table via Ethernet ReceiveTableViaEthernet Start at Index Of F Table From Session Receive Table via Serial Port ReceiveTableViaSerialPort Start at Index F Of Table From Port Remove Current Error a
17. Spaces are converted to underscores Optional Enter a description of the PID Select whether the initial mode of the PID is automatic or manual In Automatic mode the PID is automatically calculated In Manual mode no calculation is made To set advanced options click Options and see Setting PID Loop Control Options on page 5 29 Enter a time in seconds representing the interval between PID loop calculations The smaller the number the more often the PID will be calculated The default of 0 1 specifies a PID calculation 10 times per second Select whether the input for the PID calculation will be read from an I O point or a host device the controller Your choice determines the other data required in the Input section of the dialog box If you choose Host see the figure on page 5 28 for additional fields to complete If 1 0 Point is selected at F Select from the drop down list the 1 0 point providing the input value If the point doesn t exist enter a new name and add the point OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 ee H If 1 0 Point is selected at F Enable or disable square root extraction and averaging of the input value prior to the PID calculation These options are disabled by default Specify the output to be driven by the PID by selecting an 0 point from the drop down list If it doesn t exist enter a new O point name and add the point J Specify the maximum absolute difference allowed for th
18. WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL The instruction shown below is for the condition block Button D3 On This block contains only one instruction As you look at the chart you can see that the answer to the question in the instruction determines whether the process flows to Turn LED D7 On or to Turn LED D7 Off Digital_Control L Instructions Digital_Control Button D3 On Instruction for the block ____ Button_D3 Add named Button D3 On i Modify r be we Delete o a tees oe a Next Block a Previous Block 5 4 2 Operator AND Eo i Ho C oR Lay 2 8 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL OptoControl Main Window With a strategy open OptoControl s main window looks similar to this OptoControl title ba OptoControl iol x Menu bar e Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help Toolbars DEH trex A eea hma aM e Beman 229 0 o b alaa h ee Strategy Tree gis Controllers Subroutines Included Ext Instruction Files Included a Charts Variables Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables Numeric Tables amp String Tables Pointer Tables amp Yo units Mode Status bar c program Files Optoz2 optoControl 41 Examples MyCookies Cookies Configure NUM Z Since OptoControl uses standard Microsoft Windows conventions you ll recognize the title bar and menu bar
19. You could create constant values called itera s for the minimum and maximum levels but creating them as variables lets you change their values in Debug mode Types of Data in a Variable A variable stores one of five types of data floating point integer timer string or pointer When you create the variable you designate the type of data it contains It is always best to choose the most appropriate data type for the information you are storing OptoControl can store an integer ina floating point variable but it has to convert the data first Unnecessary data conversions take up processor time e Numeric data stores numbers and can be one of the following types A floating point or float is a numeric value that contains a decimal point such as 3 14159 1 0 or 1 234 2 A good example of a float variable is one that stores readings from an analog input such as a thermocouple OptoControl uses IEEE single precision floats with rounding errors of no more than one part per million An integer is a whole number with no fractional part Examples of integer values are 1 0 1 999 or 4 568 The state of a switch for example could be stored in an integer variable as 1 on or 0 off Most integers used in OptoControl are 32 bit signed integers which can range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 These 32 bit integers should be used for general integer use such as status variables mathematics and indexes If you are using
20. paral Close Help Command Help 11 4 OptoControl User s Guide If substrings or individual characters within a string must be handled a standard OptoControl block can become quite large USING OPTOSCRIPT rs The OptoScript version of the String_Handler flowchart is more compact The string request can be built more easily and parsing the response takes up much less space If you handle more complex serial data than in the String_Handler example you will find OptoScript code even more useful lale Qel galis Alaala blt mofpcopv OptoScript Code sVehicle plane S Stall Request What type of svekicie is in stall sStall 133 TransStringViaSerialPort Request String_Handler J In OptoScript code several strings and variables can be combined to build the request in one line In OptoScript code the commands used to parse the response take up less space so they all can be seen at once A oresh ipt String_Handler Receive amp parse response JEES oel alta Alala OptoScript C ide ReceiveStringViaSerialPort Response 1 GetSubstring Response 1 1 Classification GetSubstring Response 2 2 Model Model Number StringToInt32 Model F 100 OptoControl User s Guide 11 5 USING OPTOSCRIPT D For Complex Loops Strategies that use complex loops for example to re
21. 0 o oo if Temp_Probe gt 95 then e GC Fan_2 1 Turn on fan 2 too if Temp_Probe gt 105 then Alarm 1 Send alarm temperature too high endif In OptoScript all the condition and Perry action blocks and their commands ey E oe are consolidated into one block Fan_1 0 Fan_2 0 endif DelaySec 60 77 Wait 1 min before checking temp again rf 11 8 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT For Combining Expressions Operators and Conditions The real power of OptoScript can be seen in complex operations S e fe yee Salts ty techs fn Ua fu la tal Bes ap Bes Sune This portion of a sprinkler RR control system uses standard Ce OptoControl blocks and ch ee ee oN as a he EG oo oe we ee a de commands to control a ee watering of grass and trees zz The OptoScript version of Grass Trees Control handles the See oo Oo _ loops conditions and operators ee Sig ee en Sy Oe tO en ee a Ar gt ee et ey eh we ee ek te ee ge ie Woe Ger E easily in a single block OptoScript Sprinkler_Control Grass Trees Control x Hae aE lezl Ajala raofrcra ry Z OptoScript Code Sets Grass and Trees sprinklers to run on Tuesdays and Fridays as long as it s not raining if GetDayOfWeek 2 or GetDayOfWeek 5 and Humidity lt 98 then if Max_Temp gt 80 or Max_Temp Yesterday_Temp 10 then Grass 1 DelaySec 1200 Wat
22. 4 22 Changing or Deleting a Controller 4 17 Downloading Firmware to the Controller 4 26 Using Redundant Communication 4 19 Configuring Controllers Before you can use a controller to run a strategy you must first define the controller on your PC and then associate the controller with your OptoControl strategy e Defining the controller on your PC identifies the connection through which the PC and the controller communicate Because this process writes to the Windows Registry on your PC you must define controllers for each computer that uses your strategy If your computer can boot to two operating systems you must configure controllers for both You can define controllers in OptoControl or in the software utility OptoTerm See page 4 2 to define a controller e Associating the controller with your OptoControl strategy identifies which defined controller is the active controller Although you can associate several controllers with the same strategy if necessary the strategy can be downloaded to only one at a time The controller set to receive the download is called the active controller You must use OptoControl for associating the controller with your strategy See the steps on page 4 15 OptoControl User s Guide 4 1 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Defining a Controller on Your PC 1 Choose one of the following e Using OptoTerm Choose Start Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilities OptoTerm
23. 4177 Many problems with Ethernet connections return a TCP IP Cannot Connect error If you receive this error first check the following Make sure the controller has been turned on Verify that you typed in the correct IP address for the controller If you are using an Ethernet adapter card make sure it has been assigned a valid IP address SNAP Ethernet adapter cards come from the factory with a default IP address of 0 0 0 0 which is invalid For help in assigning an IP address see the card s installation guide Make sure that the controller s configuration in the software matches the jumper settings for the controller in the field Make sure you have up to date drivers installed on your computer s Network Interface Card NIC Contact your system administrator or the manufacturer of the card for help Check the number of sessions open You can have a maximum of 32 total host and peer to peer sessions open at once For more information see the command Open Ethernet Session in the OptoContro Command Reference or online help If you still cannot connect continue to the next section OptoControl User s Guide A 11 Ping the Controller If you still cannot communicate with the controller after you have checked these items try to reach the controller using the PING protocol Choose Start Programs MS DOS Prompt At the prompt type ping controller s IP address For example type ping 10 192 54 40 If data is returne
24. 9 7 definition 2 7 deleting 9 5 deleting temporarily 9 6 for continue block 9 8 groups analog point commands 10 5 chart commands 10 9 communication l O commands 10 36 communication network commands 10 37 communication serial commands 10 33 controller commands 10 8 digital point commands 10 2 event reaction commands 10 23 I O unit commands 3 27 10 7 logical commands 10 32 mathematical commands 10 30 miscellaneous commands including timers 10 11 PID commands 10 42 point commands 10 40 simulation commands 10 49 string commands 10 14 time date commands 10 10 printing 6 23 comment 10 11 commenting out command 9 6 communication ARCNET troubleshooting A 10 Ethernet troubleshooting A 11 general troubleshooting A 6 I O commands instructions 10 36 network commands 10 37 optimizing throughput 3 20 overhead reducing by using event reactions 10 23 PC and controller 4 1 redundant 4 19 serial commands 10 33 troubleshooting A 8 Compile toolbar 2 11 compiling strategy 1 22 6 6 strategy without downloading 6 7 subroutine 12 7 condition block definition 2 5 7 3 increasing efficiency in loops 3 25 condition command definition 2 7 Configure mode definition 2 10 Configure toolbar 2 11 configuring continue block 9 8 controller 4 1 controller ports 4 15 direct connection to controller 4 4 Ethernet connection to controller 4 13 event reaction 5 32 0 points 5 11 I O uni
25. Add User Error to Queue Add User 0 Unit Error to Queue Get Error Count Get Error Code of Current Error Get ID of Block Causing Current Error Get Name of Chart Causing Current Error Get Name of I 0 Unit Causing Current Error Get Port of I O Unit Causing Current Error Get Address of 1 0 Unit Causing Current Error Disable 1 0 Unit Causing Current Error Enable O Unit Causing Current Error CRC Calculate Strategy CRC Retrieve Strategy CRC Calculate amp Store Strategy CRC The commands Get RTU M4I0 Temperature and Get RTU M4l0 Voltage are useful for monitoring remote M4RTU controllers Error Handling All good programmers must deal with errors The controller error handling commands are used to monitor errors figure out which I O unit caused an error disable or re enable the unit and clear errors from the error queue For a simple example of an error handler chart see page 3 13 Our BBS also contains sample error handler charts that you can download import into your strategy and customize to fit your situation http bbs opto22 com OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Chart Commands The following commands control charts and host tasks in the strategy Chart Control Host Task Start Chart Set Priority of Host Task Stop Chart Get Priority of Host Task Stop Chart on Error Host Task Received a Message Suspend Chart Start Default Host Task Suspend Chart on Error Suspend Default Host Task Continue
26. DIGITAL 43 42 4140 L GIGITAL F 47 46 45 44 a Ps 43 42 41 40 22 47 46 45 44 DIGITAL wr 51 80 49 48 _ 51 60 49 48 55 64 63 62 59 68 67 66 59 68 7 56 GIGITAL F 55 64 53 62 DIGITAL F F Je REE ARSE ERB EEE iii Wil SRABGSEEEERE CECE fe a a or oe on oy i b Ek b 63 62 6160 g 63 62 64 60 DIGITAL OptoControl User s Guide 5 9 WORKING WITH 1 0 SNAP ENET D64 I O Addressing The following figure shows point addressing for a digital only SNAP Ethernet based 0 unit with a SNAP ENET D64 brain DIGITAL 1 0 tif cme Alles o5 Rt Ey w ag i a ge 40 no0000 awel e sy aN guy B E 20 met Mo F oe 3210 M Bo L DIGITAL J F 4 7 6 6 4 gt m b DIGITAL 4 1 10 9 8 E enw L DIGITAL J F 4 15 14 13 12 a Bo k DIGITAL J 19 18 17 16 E ee F DIGITAL 4 23 22 24 20 gt E a p DIGITAL 4 27 26 26 24 aaa Bo L DIGITAL J F gi 31 30 29 28 3 7 en DIGITAL 1 0 9 3 ol el 7 J POINTS A 35 34 33 32 K ae te F 4 39 38 37 36 gt M fo L DIGITAL 4 F 4 43 42 44 40 M te L DIGITAL J F 4 47 46 45 44 ee b DIGITAL a J 1 50 49 48 E eo k DIGITAL T 66 54 63 62 POSNIONIN eo F DIGITAL 69 58 67 66 Mu eo F DIGITAL 7 63 62 64 60 M ee L nical J 4 Commands Not Available for SNAP Ethernet based I O Units If you are converting
27. F Get Day of Week Get DayOfWeek F Get Default Host Port GetDefaultHostPort Get Digital I O Unit as Binary GetDigitallIoUnitAsBinaryValue I O Unit F Value E 8 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS EE ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Get Digital 64 I O Unit as GetDigital6 4IoUnitAsBinaryValue I O Unit F Binary Value Get Digital I O Unit Latches GetDigitalloUnitLatches From State P On Latch Off Latch Get Digital 64 I O Unit GetDigital64IoUnitLatches From State P Latches On Latch Off Latch Get Error Code of Current GetErrorCodeOfCurrentError F Error Get Error Count GetErrorCount F Get Ethernet Session Name GetEthernetSessionName Session Put in F Get Event Latches GetEventLatches E R Group F Get Firmware Version GetFirmwareVersion Put in P Get Frequency GetFrequency From Point F Get High Bits of Integer 64 GetHighBitsOfInt64 High Bits From F Get Hours GetHours F Get ID of Block Causing Get IdOfBlockCausingCurrentError F Current Error Get Julian Day Get JulianDay F Get Length of Table Get LengthOfTable Table F Get Low Bits of Integer 64 Get LowBitsOfInt64 Integer 64 F Get Minutes GetMinutes F Get Mixed I O Unit as Binary GetMixedIoUnitAsBinaryValue I O Unit F Value Get Month GetMonth F Get Name
28. From the Configure menu choose Controller to open the Select Controller dialog box Skip to step 3 e Using OptoControl With a strategy open in OptoControl in Configure mode or Online mode double click the Controllers folder on the Strategy Tree You can also click the Configure Controllers button E in the toolbar select Configure Controllers or right click an individual controller on the Strategy Tree The Configure Controllers dialog box appears Configure Controllers x Active Controller Controllers Associated with Strategy Hodiy Delete Downoad Wpicns Set Up Controller Ports Cancel Help 2 Click Add The Select Controller dialog box appears Select Controller x Configured Controllers onea This dialog box lists all the controllers configured on your system whether or not they are associated with your strategy 4 2 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS 3 Ifthe controller you want appears in the list it has already been defined on this PC Click to highlight the controller s name and click OK Then skip to Associating the Controller with Your Strategy on page 4 15 4 Ifthe controller you want is not in the list click Add The Select Connection Type dialog box appears Select Connection Type of Select type of connection to controllers C Direct Select a non network connection for fastest communication using ARCNET or serial C Ethemet C
29. Get amp Restart Off Pulse GetRestartOffPulseMeasurement From Point F Measurement Get amp Restart Off Time GetRestartOffTimeTotalizer From Point F Totalizer Get amp Restart On Pulse GetRestartOnPulseMeasurement From Point F Measurement Get amp Restart On Time GetRestartOnTimeTotalizer From Point F Totalizer Get amp Restart Period GetRestartPeriod From Point F Get Active Interrupt Mask GetActiveInterruptMask F Get Address of I O Unit GetAddressOfIoUnitCausingCurrentError F Causing Current Error Get Analog Filtered Value GetAnalogFilteredValue From F Get Analog Lower Clamp GetAnalogLowerClamp From F Get Analog Maximum Value GetAnalogMaxValue From F Get Analog Minimum Value GetAnalogMinValue From F Get Analog Square Root GetAnalogSquareRootFilteredValue From F Filtered Value Get Analog Square Root GetAnalogSquareRoot Value From F Value Get Analog Totalizer Value GetAnalogTotalizerValue From F Get Analog Upper Clamp GetAnalogUpperClamp From Get ARCNET Host GetArcnet HostDestAddress F Destination Address Get ARCNET Destination GetArcnetDestAddressOnPort On Port F Address on Port Get ARCNET Peer GetArcnetPeerDestAddress F Destination Address Get Chart Status GetChart Status Chart F Get Controller Address GetControllerAddress F Get Controller Type GetControllerType F Get Counter GetCounter From Point F Get Day GetDay
30. Make the necessary changes and click OK You can also change an I O unit from the Configure 1 0 Units dialog box by double clicking the unit s name or highlighting it and clicking Modify Deleting Configured I O Units You cannot delete an I O unit if it has I O points configured or if the I O unit is referenced in an OptoControl command CAUTION Be careful when deleting 1 0 units You cannot undo a deletion 1 To delete a configured 1 0 unit make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Find the I O unit s name on the Strategy Tree Right click it and choose Delete from the pop up menu The 1 0 unit is deleted from the strategy You can also delete an 1 0 unit from the Configure 1 0 Units dialog box by highlighting the unit s name and clicking Delete Configuring I O Points Before you configure an individual 0 point such as a sensor or a switch you must configure the I O unit the point is on If you have not configured the 1 0 unit see Configuring 1 0 Units on page 5 1 Adding a SNAP Digital I O Point Dialog boxes differ for configuring SNAP and non SNAP 1 0 points For non SNAP points see Adding a Non SNAP Digital 1 0 Point on page 5 14 For SNAP I O points follow these steps OptoControl User s Guide 5 11 WORKING WITH I O 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the 1 0 Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree The Configure 1 0 Units dial
31. OptoCtrlTools dat File that lists software applications you ve configured in the Tools menu to launch from OptoControl OptoMous dll OptoControl support file OptoSnif log OptoSniff log file Readme txt README text file containing information about OptoControl Usercmds xid Template file for user defined instruction definitions C 2 OptoControl User s Guide APPENDIX D Sample Strategy Introduction The Quick Start in Chapter 1 introduced the Cookies strategy a sample project used to illustrate how OptoControl works Although this strategy is based on a mythical factory you may want to know more about the factory its process and its hardware This appendix gives you that information Factory Schematic The following schematic drawing summarizes the cookie factory PRESSURE CONTROLLER u __f PT 100 LOW LEVEL VESSEL HOPPER LOWALEVEL ed ALARM SWITCH 100 v 101 ALARM SWITCH SOLENOID SV aX Sar SOLENOID valve 100B VALVE CONVEYOR OVEN INSPECTION TT TY STATION 102 103 TIC 102 WASTE BIN TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER OptoControl User s Guide D 1 So Description of the Process Dough Vessel The first station in our process is the dough vessel This tank contains a pre made cookie dough mix Dough is dispensed onto the conveyor belt through a valve SV 100B at the bottom of the vessel The dou
32. OptoTerminal G70 OptoTerminal G75 and Sony Ericsson GT 48 see the product data sheet for specific warranty information Refer to Opto 22 form number 1042 for complete warranty information Opto 22 FactoryFloor Cyrano Optomux and Pamux are registered trademarks of Opto 22 Generation 4 ioControl ioDisplay ioManager ioProject ioUtilities mistic Nvio Nvio net Web Portal OptoConnect OptoControl OptoDisplay OptoENETSniff OptoOPCServer OptoScript OptoServer OptoTerminal OptoUtilities SNAP Ethernet 1 0 SNAP 1 0 SNAP OEM I 0 SNAP Simple 1 0 SNAP Ultimate 1 0 and SNAP Wireless LAN 1 0 are trademarks of Opto 22 Activex JScript Microsoft MS DOS VBScript Visual Basic Visual C and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Unicenter is a registered trademark of Computer Associates International Inc ARCNET is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Wiegand is a registered trademark of Sensor Engineering Corporation Nokia Nokia M2M Platform Nokia M2M Gateway Software and Nokia 31 GSM Connectivity Terminal are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation Sony is a trademark of Sony Corporation Ericsson is a trademark of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered tra
33. Pause Chart Here s an example of a paused chart Powerup Fa eT tg gs a a E a O E E E e a RR e bb eaa doughichip control pressure ee oo ee control and oveniinspection Status bar Step On See eee ewe cw ce ce EB ct ee a ck a A o a Break Off 11 134 Sec 100 7 Running Step On Hatch marks and a red outline appear on the Start block indicating that this block is to be executed next The status bar shows Step On which means you can step through the chart if you wish 6 12 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Stepping Through a Chart When you step through a chart you execute chart commands in a running strategy one block at a time or one line at a time You can see what commands are being executed when and you can monitor the status of variables and I O that are affected by the commands There are three types of stepping single stepping one block at a time single stepping one line at a time and automatic stepping Use single stepping to go through flowchart blocks at your own pace one block or one line per step Use auto stepping to watch the flowchart execute in slow motion CAUTION Since stepping through a running chart even auto stepping slows down execution be cautious if your strategy is running on real equipment For example stepping through a strategy might leave a valve open much longer than it should be Single Stepping by Block When you are debugging a strategy
34. SBE Name Enabled fres Unit Digital_ O_Unit Error None Event Type Momo Match Reaction Type Set MOMO Outputs IVAL XVAL Event Occurring Event Occurred Scan Status Interrupt Event Momo Match OnMask OF 0 0 0 0 o 60 OffMask OF 0 O00 00 0 0 Reaction Set MOMO Outputs OnMaskk OF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OffMask OF 0 00 000 0 00 0 90 001 E 000 B Unit Status DASO DODD DODD GODS C MOMO Display base Binay C Hex C Decimal Close Add Watch Help _Aadwatch Hep o O The example above shows on and off masks for both the MOMO Match event and the Set MOMO Outputs reaction You cannot change the internal or external values of the MOMO masks or of the I O unit status However other fields are the same as for other event reactions A Shows On and Off Masks for the MOMO event and reaction B Shows LEDs representing the external value of the digital 1 0 unit on which the event reaction is configured Green represents one on red represents zero off and gray represents no value reported If there is no MOMO reaction this set of LEDs appears below the event s on and off masks C Shows the display base for the MOMO event or reaction You can switch among binary hex and decimal values OptoControl User s Guide 5 49 WORKING WITH 1 0 O E Using Watch Windows to Monitor Elements While the strategy is running you can monitor several strategy elements at once in a
35. Smart Digital Input Simple Digital Output Smart Digital Output Counter Quadrature Counter On Totalizer Off Totalizer On Pulse Off Pulse Frequency Period TPO Digital Event Reaction Analog Input Analog Output PID Loop Analog Event Reaction Event Reaction Group Digital Remote Simple Digital Local Simple Digital Multifunction Analog Integer Variable Float Variable String Variable Pointer Variable Down Timer Variable Up Timer Variable Integer Table Float Table String Table Objects Chart Advantages of Using Pointers For certain types of operations pointers can speed up programming and make the strategy more efficient Pointers are usually recommended only for experienced programmers however because their misuse can result in unpredictable performance They also complicate strategy debugging If you use too many pointers it s easy to lose track of what s pointing to what If you choose to use pointers be sure you use the text tool to document your charts in detail Referencing Objects with Pointers Pointer Variables A pointer variable contains a single pointer to a single object You can set the initial value for a pointer variable when you configure it or you can set it later by using the command Move to Pointer Once the initial value is set you can reference it using any command you would use for that type of object For example if the pointer point
36. Strategy The software program you create using OptoControl is called a strategy The strategy includes all the definitions and instructions necessary to control the process Flowcharts Since most control applications are complex the strategy typically consists of a series of process flowcharts or charts that all work together Each chart controls one aspect of the strategy one piece of the automated process Together all the charts constitute the strategy The total number of charts in a strategy is limited only by the amount of memory available in the controller A chart can be running suspended or stopped A running chart is actively performing its assigned task A suspended chart is temporarily paused A stopped chart is inactive Every chart in an OptoControl strategy can change the status of any other chart in the strategy yet every chart is independent of every other chart Any combination of charts can be running simultaneously up to the maximum limit of 32 tasks See the following section on Multitasking Every strategy automatically contains a Powerup chart and an Interrupt chart The Powerup chart is automatically started when the strategy begins running so it starts other charts The Interrupt chart processes interrupts from I O units specially wired to the controller generally for critical events requiring immediate action All other charts you create based on the needs of your process 2 4 OptoControl User s G
37. The physical link connecting the computer to the controller can play a big role in throughput Throughput has many aspects The speed of the communication link is just one and it may be offset by the overhead of the link ARCNET provides the best throughput between the computer and the controller Ethernet is a close second and serial is a distant third If computer to controller throughput is important in your application be sure to use a controller that supports ARCNET or Ethernet If the communication link is serial you should run a test on your system to determine whether ASCII or binary is more efficient for computer to controller communications To run this test stop the strategy in the controller stop all applications that communicate with the controller and inspect the controller status with OptoTerm Compare communication loop time between ASCII and binary modes To ensure optimum system performance address both ends of the communication link by planning your OptoControl strategy in conjunction with your OptoDisplay project Controller Selection The CPU speed data bus and presence or absence of a math co processor on your controller all affect throughput The Opto 22 SNAP LCM4 controller has the fastest CPU 68030 at 40 MHz a 32 bit data bus a math co processor the largest available RAM and flash memory and expansion slots for ARCNET and Ethernet M4 cards as well as serial capability The M4RTU M410 M4 SNAP LCSX P
38. Type Name Target Value Float Literal 7 200 0 7 Arguments Down Timer Down Timer Variable v Timed X Cancel Help Command Heb OptoControl User s Guide 3 7 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Compiling and Debugging Each Flowchart Compiling and Debugging the Whole Strategy When all charts are completed and their instructions added the next step is to compile and debug the strategy But first check your hardware Check cabling pinouts and terminal connections Make sure the actual 1 0 matches the configured 1 0 in the strategy Now compile and debug the strategy For more information and step by step procedures see Chapter 6 If you have problems see Appendix A OptoControl Troubleshooting If you have multiple charts debug each one separately and then debug the strategy as a whole It is easier to find errors in one flowchart than in a group of interrelated ones Make sure the connections between charts are accurate For example is a chart started at the correct block in another chart Use the debugging tools discussed in Chapter 6 to find errors by stepping through a chart and setting breakpoints to discover which block contains the problem And if you ve tried everything and it still doesn t work contact Opto 22 Product Support See page xxii Using and Improving the Strategy Any strategy is one of several possible ways to solve a control problem One way may be more efficient under some circumstances
39. We re now in Online mode Online appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window and the drawing toolbar becomes available again Drawing toolbar OptoControl Dough_Chip_Control g Fie Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View window Help DSU Sex AN eSa KDOOeC Aa desa eaea 22 yalaka A o dh B E Cookies a Controllers a Cookie Conti IEE lt lll a E Subroutines Inch gt The Powerup chart starts gt Ext Instruction F this chart gt gt gt aus E E Sine Be E E eB alms MM tp a a a E S Dough chip lt This chart runs gt gt gt gt gt gt m Dough_Vess a aa he sae 2 continuously once the Be Interrupt PPP ee ee a Oven_Inspe RE IRE ee ee ee we Powerup B Variables Pe ae Te ee eC E E E S E E E Numeric vari JA Po Ta char SMM oo e30 Cookie_ ga Dough IPP aa hang Setpoint SEE a a L T Start FU l ll a String variat TG o a Pointer Varig Ce Numeric Tab JP Po 0 0 0 Us String table MIM REEETEE A EEEE E E EA E SE aa E a I O Units m Analog I0 o Mode f g Dough_Chip_Control ls Almost everything looks as it did in Configure mode Online mode is simply a scaled down version of Configure mode The main difference is that you cannot configure new 1 0 or variables 2 Double click the Oven_Inspection_Control chart on the Strategy Tree to open it 1 30 OptoControl User s Guide
40. click the Hex Integer Display button on the toolbar dhl or choose View gt Hex Integer Display Here s how the integers appear in hex BE El Cookie_Counter View Variable scanning Name Cookie_Counte Shrink Type integer 32 Variable Initialized fon Strategy Run Security jo Value jox00000076 Hex view The Ox before the number indicates that the number is in hex Apply _Addwatch Help OptoControl User s Guide 2 21 2 22 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL To return to decimal view click the toolbar button again or choose the same item again from the View menu Setting Hex String View You can also set strings to appear in hexadecimal notation Here is the View Variable window showing a string in regular notation STRING_VARIABLE View Variable scan EI EG Name STRING VARIABLE SCS k Type Sting Variable o width i27 Iritialized On Strategy Download Security 0 Value Item price Bytes O 73 116 101 109 Item 4 32 112 114 105 pri 8 99 101 32 61 ce 12 32 Close Apply Add watch Help To change to hex notation click the Hex String Display button on the toolbar 8 or choose View Hex String Display Here s how the string appears in hex STRING_VARIABLE View Variable scan Name STRING_VARIBLE Type Sting Variable o with i27 Initialized On Strategy Download Security fo Value 49 74 65 6D 20 70 72 69 63 65 20 Bytes Apply
41. it is easy to view information about them A subroutine appears in two places on the Strategy Tree in the Subroutines Included folder and in the folder for the chart that calls it G Cookies E Cookies G Controllers G Controllers Subroutines Included Subroutines Subroutines Included ariable_Inctease_Notification Included folder G Ext Instruction Files Included Passed Parameters Charts E Counter Alarms FA Previous_Counter amp Dough_Chip_Control 9 Hom Dough_Vessel_Pressure_Control G Variables Calling chart a Interrupt E Numeric Variables folder Oven_Inspection_Control G String Variables Pointer Variables E Numeric Tables G String Tables G Ext Instruction Files Included Ext Instruction Files Included Charts Variables G 1 0 Units G Ext Instructions Used amp Powerup Variables G 1 0 Units Be You can view add and change variables from the Strategy Tree as you would for a chart Viewing All Subroutines in a Strategy To see all the subroutines in a strategy double click the Subroutines Included folder on the Strategy Tree All subroutines associated with the strategy are listed in the Subroutine Files dialog box Click and drag the right
42. window like this lt gt Watch_1 Name type tv Day_of the Week Integer Variable For some elements the Add Watch Entry dialog box appears so you can specify what to watch Add Watch Entry SNAP_Analog Unit Items in this area vary depending on the element you are watching This example shows an analog unit In this example the dialog box appears because the analog unit was added by right clicking it on the Ja ZATA GV Man x ae Ipar Strategy Tree and choosing Watch from the pop up menu 4 Ifan Add Watch Entry dialog box appears click to place or remove the check mark next to any item When all the items you want to watch are checked click OK The element is added to the watch window The watch window is automatically saved OptoControl User s Guide 5 51 WORKING WITH 1 0 a Opening an Existing Watch Window If a watch window was open when you exited Debug mode it will automatically open again when you re enter Debug mode To open other watch windows follow these steps 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Debug mode 2 Click the Open Watch Window icon s on the toolbar or choose Watch Open 3 Navigate to the watch window you want to open and double click its name The window opens in the position you left it Working in Watch Windows Watch windows are flexible You can dock the window where you want it in the OptoControl main win
43. 3 27 Stopping the Host Task Ge fact ctactneca epost ut an dad tnapearacawtbsion GleGalancactandwceastantocs 3 27 Using Multiple Ports to Communicate with 1 0 ccccseecestesestesesteesteeseneaes 3 27 Handling 0 Errors EMG IGWB siccadincxadcavssstaariecansatseutechace ticked idaasibcenalsemakchateds 3 28 Chapter 4 Working with Controllers cccccsseeseeesseeseeeeeeeeneeseesenensennes 4 1 MO AUC oatad sensei hwcaretcet ac acttes mpemeoee a n neta oe 4 1 tnis Mel al fst ion ngewe mee rma E E 4 1 Configuring Controllers tS lees antec NS DP ots en dele a ceutaet ed aoondse 4 1 Defining a Controller on Your PC uo ceccecccceccstesescesescssescssestessscescsesesesesteseaeseecaseasesees 4 2 Configuring a Direct Connection gic cssascecneesndacscuaadisscnbiatacdsancs cia ucteadbiccagseiaaitenaceasacaas 4 4 Configuring an ARCNET Port s sssssssisssiisssiisssiisssissssinsssisssiissnisssrissnrnnnrinsnnrnennn 4 6 Configuring an AC37 G4LC32ISA or G4LC32ISA LT Port 0 cc ccccceseesesteeeees 4 7 Configuring a Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET Port cece 4 8 Configuring a COM Port coh stds scacetsces ccheatucencsechssaadadisicirenednca nant dindacaseneeseesaceeuchschsaces 4 9 Configuring a Modem Port Windows NT Onlly 0 c ccccscecesceesesestesseeseecesees 4 10 Configuring an ARCNET PCMCIA Port Windows NT Onlly ccccccceseeceeees 4 11 Finishing a Direct Connection ccccccesessesessesccsesessescssesesesesceseseesesesseseesescaneecans
44. 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E RS 62 3E gt 94 5E 126 7E 31 1F us 63 3F 95 5F _ 127 7F DEL 10 22 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Event Reaction Commands The following commands are used with event reactions Event Occurred Disable Scanning for Event Event Occurring Enable Scanning for Event Get Event Latches Disable Scanning for All Events Get amp Clear Event Latches Enable Scanning for All Events Clear Event Latch Disable Scanning of Event Reaction Group Clear All Event Latches Enable Scanning of Event Reaction Group Generating Interrupt Event Scanning Disabled Clear 1 0 Unit Interrupt Event Scanning Enabled Disable Interrupt on Event Read Event Reaction Hold Buffer Enable Interrupt on Event Interrupt Disabled for Event Interrupt Enabled for Event Additional commands used with event reactions are listed under Communication Serial Commands on page 10 33 Understanding Event Reactions An event reaction is a powerful feature that allows you to distribute control logic to an I O unit so that some of the logic in a strategy can be run on the 1 0 unit independently of the controller Event reactions are supported by most Opto 22 brains To verify check the data sheet for the brain you are using As the name suggests an event reaction consists of an event and a corresponding reaction The event i
45. 4 When you have finished configuring ports click OK Changing or Deleting a Controller This section shows you how to e Change a controller s definition on your PC e Change the active controller for a strategy e Remove a controller s association with a strategy e Delete a controller s definition on your PC Changing a Controller s Configuration Whenever necessary you can change a controller s definition on your PC its name the port the PC uses to communicate with it or the PC port setup such as timeouts and retries These changes can be made either in OptoControl or in the OptoTerm utility NOTE To change a controller s not a PC s port setup see Setting Up Controller Ports on page 4 15 1 Choose one of the following e In OptoControl With the strategy open in Configure mode or Online mode right click the controller name on the Strategy Tree and choose Modify from the pop up menu e In OptoTerm Choose Start Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 gt 0ptoUtilities OptoTerm From the Configure menu choose Controller 2 In the Select Controller dialog box click the controller you want to change and click Modify OptoControl User s Guide 4 17 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS 3 Make the necessary changes following the same steps you would for defining the controller initially For help see Defining a Controller on Your PC on page 4 2 Changing the Controller that Receives the Downloaded Strate
46. 5 38 10 26 flag 3 18 Interrupt chart 3 12 PID loop configuration 5 30 pointers indexing 3 19 repetitive actions 3 15 string building 10 18 string data extraction 10 17 string formats 10 16 string table 10 17 subroutine parameters 12 6 task queue 3 23 3 26 timer 3 17 exiting See closing exporting I O configuration 5 24 exporting chart 7 18 external instructions adding to OptoControl commands 6 30 F File toolbar 2 10 filter commands instructions 10 5 finding a block in a chart 2 19 firmware downloading to controller 4 26 requirements for OptoControl Intro xxiii flag programming example 3 18 flash See EEPROM floating point converting to integer 10 31 converting to string 10 21 definition 2 6 10 31 in logic 10 33 variable definition 8 2 flowchart See chart flow through logic 3 8 G gain definition of in PID loop 10 6 OptoControl User s Guide Index 5 H hardware requirements for OptoControl In tro xxiii help available documents Intro xxi online 2 27 See also troubleshooting hex display mode 2 21 hiding toolbars 2 11 host port 10 34 host task 3 22 commands instructions 10 9 definition 2 5 increasing frequency 3 25 increasing priority 3 24 starting in Powerup chart 10 34 stopping 3 27 0 changing configured point 5 23 configuring 5 11 deleting configured point 5 24 disabling 10 4 exporting configuration 5 24 importing configuratio
47. Alarms The Powerup chart starts gt SE Dough_chip_ce this chart Dough_Vessel F po Interrupt e Oven_Inspectio amp Powerup B Variables y Numeric variable 832 Chart_Statt fr Dough _Pre b i Setpoint_M 239 Start_Flag String Variables E Pointer variable E Numeric Tables String Tables E Pointer Tables 1 0 Units 8 Analog_1O_Unit E Digital_10_Unit gt Dough_Chip_Control OptoControl Ready Configure CAP NUM GZ 2 Click and drag the title bar of the chart window if necessary to see the maximize button at the upper right Click the maximize button The chart now covers the whole frame Notice the tab at the bottom of the main window which shows the chart s name OptoControl Dough_Chip_Control 15 xi E File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help x OSM sex A SOS ROCCO AEA A S enj 22 4 Ol or B amp Q Q fh dh e a EG Cokes Ew a a at ei a a ea a aa A aa a GB Controfers ee E E ee ee ee A le CO TE em ee Subroutines Include ne belt must be running between 9U and 99 7 of max rpm Ext Instruction Fies f c 0 ns r Charts The Powerup chart starts fg ee Alarms this chart gt RRB ccs amp Dough_chip_ce f Jo 7 S Dough vessel Po Aaaa 2 Interrupt This chartruns gt gt gt gt gt S Oven_Inspectio continuously once the Sower MN oarn bachaen etartad CCP cGy variables JJ J SE
48. Chart If an existing chart is similar to one you want to create it is easier to copy it than to create a new one from scratch To copy a chart in the same strategy follow the steps in this section To copy a chart to another strategy see Exporting and Importing Charts on page 7 18 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode select Chart Copy OptoControl User s Guide 7 15 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS The Copy Chart dialog box appears m From To Name Description Description Check the E Stop button and a the two level alarms Cancel Hep 2 In the From field choose the chart you want to copy from the drop down list 3 In the To field enter a name for the new chart The name must start with a letter and include only letters numbers or underscores Spaces are converted to underscores 4 Optional Enter a description for the new chart 5 Click OK The new chart is created and appears as the active window on the screen Renaming a Chart 1 Make sure the strategy is in Configure mode and that the chart you want to rename is the active window 7 16 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS 2 From the Chart menu choose Rename Rename Chart Eg Description Controls sprinklers for the front lawn 3 Enter a new name and description optional Click OK The chart is renamed Deleting a Chart You can delete any charts except for the Poweru
49. Configuring an AC37 G4LC321SA or G4LC32ISA LT Port on page 4 7 Select Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET if you are using a PCI20 CXS a PCI20 485 or a PCI20 FOG ST card to communicate Click Next and skip to Configuring a Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET Port on page 4 8 Select COM Port if you are connected to a controller through a standard serial port on your PC Click Next and skip to Configuring a COM Port on page 4 9 Windows NT only Select Modem if you are communicating with a controller through a modem Click Next and skip to Configuring a Modem Port Windows NT Only on page 4 10 Windows NT only Select ARCNET PCMCIA if you are using the Contemporary Controls PCM20 CXB ARCNET card to communicate Click Next and skip to Configuring an ARCNET PCMCIA Port Windows NT Only on page 4 11 OptoControl User s Guide 4 5 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring an ARCNET Port If you chose ARCNET in the Port Selection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure ARCNET Port Port Name JARCNET Port Retries fi Timeout msec frooo 1 0 Pott 0x240 Memory hex Oxc0000 m o OvD lt Back Cancel A Enter a descriptive name for the port All characters are valid B Enter the number of times you want OptoControl to reattempt communications Any integer from zero to 255 is valid the default 1 is a good choice It indicates a total of two at
50. Dough_Chip E Dough_Vess ic es Interrupt ies g Oven_Inspe w g Powerup B Variables B E Numeric vari 830 Chart_S fat Dough 4 Setpoint 538 Start FI String Variat amp Pointer variz Numeric Tab String Tables Pointer Table B Vo units he za wall C Program Files Opto22 OptoControl 41 Examples MyCookies Cookies cdb Configure wm Z 2 To change the width of the Strategy Tree s frame move your mouse over the right side of the frame When the cursor changes click and drag the side to make the frame wider or narrower Opening a Chart Every control process can be planned and mapped out using one or several OptoControl flowcharts or charts Because flowcharts are easy to follow OptoControl strategies are easy to understand For an example let s take a look at the Dough_Chip_Control chart 1 Double click the Dough_Chip_Control chart name on the Strategy Tree You can also open a chart by selecting Chart Open and navigating to the chart name 1 6 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START a i The chart appears somewhere in the large frame of the main window OptoControl 0 x File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help Deh ts Sex ME SSE RDOCOCO AEA wy Maximize 88 Mee gt ln 2240 Her b QQ Hh dh button cookies EF a Cookies Dough_Chip_Control Controllers Subroutines Include Ext Instruction Files E Charts E
51. EZI EZI EZ rewpap zg 1369 u zleosed 3 polsva d149S0 dO uosnedwo uopuny OptoControl User s Guide F 2 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE K ays x eTqetTTeae JON K lt lt x 14u HyS asimiig A Tus x etTqeTtTeae JON K gt gt x Yo PYS SIMLA 30x X 20x X A zox tq X HOX SsiMlig A pue x A puy x A pueqtq x CNV SIMA K zo x K 30 x K z0qtq x e SION 88S YO BSIMIIG x Jou x JON x JouqTq LON SIMYA A lt gt A zo 0 lt X Jou 0 lt i lt gt 20 0 lt X 4ON Jou 70 0 lt X Jou A pue 0 lt xX A puw 0 lt X A pue 0 lt X suoss dx eo 6o ATuo sue qooq q ION ATuo sue qooq q ION 0 lt gt X JON 0 lt gt X JON x Jou LON e9160 ATuo ATuo sue qooq q 20x eB suesqtooq A 10X x 0 lt gt A zox 0 lt gt x eTqeTTeae ON 0 lt gt A zox 0 lt gt x K TOX x Yox 20160 ATuo ATuo sue qooq q puy e suesTooqd A puy X 0 lt gt A puy 0 lt gt x 0 lt gt A puy 0 lt gt x A pue x ANY 129160 ATuo sue qooq q I0 e ATuo sue qooq q I0 0 lt gt 4 20 0 lt gt X 0 lt gt A 20 0 lt gt X I0 x aN 88S YO 122160 gt X K gt X lt X yenba Jo ugy seyeo6 K lt x K lt x A lt X ugy Jayeos6 gt Xx K gt x gt x jenba Jo uey sso K gt x K gt x K gt x ugy SSO lt gt x K lt gt X K lt gt x yenba jou K x K x K
52. Get amp Clear Quadrature Counter Latches Get Off Latch Get On Latch Clear Off Latch Clear On Latch Clear All Latches Get amp Clear Off Latch Get amp Clear On Latch Off Latch Set On Latch Set Counters Totalizers Get Off Time Totalizer Get On Time Totalizer Get amp Restart Off Time Totalizer Get amp Restart On Time Totalizer Pulses Generate N Pulses Start Off Pulse Start On Pulse Get amp Restart Off Pulse Measurement Get amp Restart On Pulse Measurement Get Off Pulse Measurement Get Off Pulse Measurement Complete Status Get On Pulse Measurement Get On Pulse Measurement Complete Status Others Start Continuous Square Wave Get Frequency Set TPO Percent Set TPO Period Get Period Get amp Restart Period Get Period Measurement Complete Status Not available on SNAP Ethernet brains Any digital input can be used as a counter to count the number of times the input changes from off to on Before using a counter you must configure the point as a counter See Configuring 1 0 Points on page 5 11 for help For any I O unit except SNAP Ethernet I 0 you must also start the counter with the command Start Counter for single inputs or Start Quadrature Counter for quadrature inputs Counters are usually started in the Powerup Chart For an example see Counting on page 3 14 For SNAP Ethernet I O units the counter begins counting as soon as It is
53. IsCallingChartRunning F Calling Chart Stopped IsCallingChart Stopped F Calling Chart Suspended IsCallingChart Suspended F Caused a Chart Error HasChartCausedError Chart F Caused an I O Unit Error HasloUnitCausedError I O Unit F Characters Waiting at Serial AreCharsWaitingAtSerialPort Port F Port Chart Running IsChartRunning Chart F Chart Stopped IsChart Stopped Chart F E 2 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee M Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Chart Suspended IsChartSuspended Chart F Clamp Float Table Element ClampFloatTableElement High Limit Low P Limit Element Index Of Float Table Clamp Float Variable ClampFloatVariable High Limit Low Limit P Float Variable Clamp Integer 32 Table ClampInt32TableElement High Limit Low P Element Limit Element Index Of Integer 32 Table Clamp Integer 32 Variable ClampInt32Variable High Limit Low Limit P Integer 32 Variable Clamp PID Output ClampPidOutput High Clamp Low Clamp On P PID Loop Clamp PID Setpoint ClampPidSetpoint High Clamp Low Clamp On P PID Loop Clear All Errors ClearAllErrors P Clear All Event Latches ClearAllEventLatches On I O Unit P Clear All Latches ClearAllLatches On I O Unit P Clear Counter ClearCounter On Poi
54. Mm Watchdog No Yes Cancel Help 3 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a name for the I O unit The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores Optional Enter a description of the unit Select the type of 1 0 unit from the drop down list Brain model numbers are listed in parentheses to help you determine which type to choose Analog and Mixed units only Choose whether temperatures will be handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius Specify the communication port on the controller to which this 1 0 unit is connected The choices are local and remote ports 0 1 2 and 3 and Ethernet ports 8 9 and 10 Use local if the I O is connected to the local port for example the built in 1 0 for the M4RTU Use the remote ports when the 1 0 is connected to COM ports 0 1 2 or 3 respectively Use Ethernet for Ethernet 1 0 Type in an address for the 1 0 unit The default is the lowest unused address on the port selected in E For Ethernet type the IP address of the Ethernet brain Otherwise valid addresses are zero to 255 and the address is configured by jumpers on the unit For SNAP 1 0 units other than Ethernet see the SNAP configuration example on the next page Select whether you want a Watchdog on the unit The default is No disabled If you select Yes a new field appears enter the Watchdog timeout value in seconds The defau
55. Mode The bulk of this chapter discusses how to configure I O in Configure mode But you may also want to inspect or change I O while you are running the strategy in Debug mode This section shows how to view information about I O and make changes while the strategy is running To monitor several I O elements at once in a window you can save with your strategy see Using Watch Windows to Monitor Elements on page 5 50 Inspecting I O Units 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click an I O unit in the Strategy Tree OptoControl User s Guide 5 41 WORKING WITH 1 0 The View 1 0 Unit dialog box appears showing information about the unit its points and PID loops and event reactions if applicable The title bar shows the name of the 1 0 unit and whether scanning is occurring amp SNAP_Digital_Unit View 170 Unit scanning Type e3000 Snap Digital Security fo EEPROM Set Clear Port Remote 1 Address 0 Firmware Version jar 01 Enable MESES Eror Noer S Show 1 0 Points PID Loops Event Reactions View Off Sprinkler_Status Digital Input 01 Not Used 02 Not Used 03 Not Used 04 Sprinkler_Switch Digital Output Off Off 05 Not Used 06 Not Used 07 Not Used Not Used Not Used Apply pasar Help NOTE Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resume
56. Move Analog 1 0 Unit to Table is four times faster than using the Move command 16 times once for each channel The command Move Table Element to Digital 1 0 Unit is 16 times faster than using Turn On or Turn Off 16 times It is also advisable to configure your 0 in groups putting together 1 0 elements that are related to the same task or section of equipment You can then spread these I O groups over as many communication ports as possible to enhance communication throughput Stopping the Host Task Under some circumstances you can consider stopping the host task to improve throughput between the controller and 0 You can stop the host task only if the controller does not need to communicate with a PC To reestablish communications you must start the host task again Stopping the host task gives you one fewer task in the queue so the remaining tasks can run faster See the commands Stop Host Task and Start Default Host Task for more information Using Multiple Ports to Communicate with I O For control systems with a lot of serial I O where 1 0 throughput is important it may help to use multiple ports to communicate with 0 All 0 related commands open the communication port the 1 0 is connected to send the command wait for the response and then close the port Since a chart can have only one port open at a time and a port can be used by only one chart at a time use one chart per port to simultaneously access 1 0 on multiple port
57. Multifunction a Modi Add Delete a Move fic Points that have not been configured yet show as Not Used 3 Double click the channel number for the point you want to add The Add Digital Point dialog box appears Add Digital Point x Name Description Type l Input Module G4IDCS 10 32 VDC 12 32 VAC ot Features None ga Default f No Watchdog No Yes C Yes IV Enable Security 0 4 Complete the fields as follows A O W gt moO IOT Enter a name for the 1 0 point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores Optional Enter a description of the 1 0 point Select input or output from the drop down list Select the O module or point type from the drop down list The list shows all available modules of the type specified OptoControl User s Guide 5 15 WORKING WITH 1 0 E Digital multifunction I O units only If you want to use a feature of the module choose it from the drop down list You can configure some input modules with a counter on pulse off pulse frequency period on time totalizer off time totalizer or quadrature counter feature Inputs are automatically configured as both on latches and off latches You can configure an output module as a time proportional output TPO F Jo seta default
58. My Cookies directory 1 4 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START rs Examining the Strategy Briefly our cookie factory includes a tank of pre mixed cookie dough a tank of chocolate chips an oven a visual inspection station a conveyor belt and some compressed air to blow rejected cookies off the belt The process starts when a ball of dough drops on the belt It moves along under the chip tank to receive some chips and then it moves into the oven to be baked The next stop is an inspection where rejected cookies are blown off the belt and good cookies move along to shipping Should anything go wrong we also have some alarms built in to stop the process when necessary The best way to see all the components of the strategy is to look at the Strategy Tree f Cookies SSE o Controllers 5 Subroutines Included E Ext Instruction Files Included Charts paa Alarms Dough_Chip_Control g Dough_Yessel_Pressure_Co cous Interrupt Oven_Inspection_Control bad Powerup Variables E Numeric Variables 848 Chart_Status i314 Dough_Pressure_Setpo 314 Setpoint_Minus_Deadbe a48 Start_Flag E String Variables Pointer Variables Numeric Tables E String Tables Pointer Tables I O Units E Ee Analog_IO_Unit H D Digital_IO_Unit oO P H A z The Strategy Tree As with any window in OptoControl you can move the Strategy Tree window by clicking and dragging the title bar y
59. Note F Base Address set by a jumpers on brain board H H z z z z E o D o a 3 a o o o z 2 z Ba k q z Al 9 a o 2 Lat gt gt 15 8 ie e K ire 0 Disabled Modify Delete 1 0 Points ED icons Event Reactions H Note that the PID Loops button is not available It is grayed out because the selected 1 0 unit the SNAP digital unit does not support PIDs For any 1 0 unit only those features supported by the unit are configurable OptoControl User s Guide 5 5 WORKING WITH I O Here s an example of the Add 1 0 Unit dialog box for a SNAP analog unit Add 170 Unit SNAP_Analog_Unit_ Notice that the address is the base address plus two which is the first analog address When our sample SNAP analog unit is added both the analog and the digital 1 0 units appear in the dialog box Configure 1 0 Units Rot Address Watchdog _Ref Count Desc Analog Remotel 2 Disabled 0 SN 5 g SNAP_Digital_ 5 6 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 CE ee Configuration Example SNAP Ethernet based I O Unit This section shows configuration for a SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 unit SNAP Simple 1 0 or SNAP Ethernet 1 0 For a SNAP 1 0 unit that s not Ethernet based see page 5 4 When you configure a SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 unit you configure all analog and digital 1 0 on the rack as one unit Here is
60. NumericExp PointerTable NumericExp Pointableldentifier Pointableldentifier gt null amp StringVariable amp NumVarldentifier amp ObjVarldentifier StrAssignmentStatement gt StringVariable StrExp Stringlable NumericExp StrExp gt StringVariable Stridentifier StringVariable Chr NumericExp StrExp gt StrAdditiveExp gt Stridentifier Chr NumericExp StrAdditiveExp gt StrExp StrExp Strldentifier StringVariable StringLiteral Stringlable NumericExp Numldentifier NumVarldentifier NumiTableldentifier gt StringCharldentifier NumVarldentifier NumericVariable ObjVarldentifier ChartVariable DigloUnitVariable OptoControl User s Guide F 13 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE MixedloUnitVariable Jableldentifier CommunicationHandle Num Tableldentifier NumericTable NumericExp Tableldentifier NumericTable gt StringTable StringCharldentifier StringVariable NumericExp NumericLiteral gt Integer32Literal Integer64Literal FloatLiteral LogicalUnaryExp not NumericExp ConditionStatement gt fStatement StatementListOrEmpty EndifStatement gt fStatement StatementListOrEmpty ElseStatement StatementListOrEmpty EndifStatement gt fStatement StatementListOrEmpty ElselfList EndifStatement gt fStatement StatementListOrEmpty Elsel
61. O unit whenever possible To use the Interrupt chart follow these steps 1 Wire the interrupt lines from remote 1 0 units to the controller 2 Use the Generating Interrupt command to determine which I O units are generating an interrupt 3 For each I O unit that is generating an interrupt do the following steps a Use the command Clear 0 Unit Interrupt b Use the command Event Occurred to determine which event reaction s caused the interrupt c For each event that occurred use the command Clear Event Latch React to each event as desired e IMPORTANT Check every event that may have caused the interrupt There may have been multiple events You can use the Event Occurred command or you can use the commands Interrupt on Port 0 Interrupt on Port 1 and so on See page 10 33 for these commands a See Using the Interrupt Chart for Event Reactions on page 3 12 for a simple example Storing Event Reactions in Flash EEPROM on the I O Unit Since event reactions are not automatically stored in the brain on the 1 0 unit if a power failure occurs at the 0 unit all event reactions are lost unless they were written to Flash EEPROM via OptoControl in Debug mode or by program command You can store the first 32 event reactions in flash EEPROM To store event reactions in flash EEPROM make sure your event reaction configuration is finalized then follow these steps 1 Open your Powerup chart or some other ch
62. ODCSSRC 5 60 VDC Source l1 SNAP ODCSR Form A Relay NO l1 SNAP ODCSRS Form B Relay NC l1 SNAP ODCS i 5 60 VDC Isolated Analog Input Modules 2 SNAP AIMA iSRC 2 SNAP AICTD Analog Output Modules 2 SNAP AOV 27 l SNAP AO0A 28 Totals Total Brains 2 Total Modules 17 NOTE Controllers power supplies and mounting racks are not specified ha nae ey eee ees ee OU ae PRES a em A TS You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all the data 2 To print the data click the print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the save button To search the data click the search button When finished close the window Searching and Replacing You can search a chart subroutine or strategy for missing connections empty condition blocks or any command or operand An operand is anything that can be affected by a command including charts O units analog points digital points PID loops event reactions and all kinds of variables Searching includes OptoScript code within OptoScript blocks You can also replace instructions or operands with similar items Searching You can search a strategy or one of its charts or you can search a subroutine 1 Open the strategy or subroutine and select Edit Find OptoControl User s Guide 6 27 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES The Find dialog box appears r Search Scope Q i i Bhat Em Local falas z Stop m Search For Br
63. OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL a i e A pointer does not store the value of a variable instead it stores the memory address of a variable or some other OptoControl item such as a chart an O point or a PID loop You can use variables that are individual pieces of information and you can also use table variables which are groups of related information in the form of a table Instructions Commands OptoControl commands or instructions tell the controller what to do at each step in the flowchart to control the process Each block in a chart contains one or more instructions such as Convert Number to String or Start Counter or Chart Running Commands are in two forms Actions and Conditions e Action commands do something in the process for example Convert Number to String and Start Counter are both action commands On the flowchart they appear as instructions in action blocks which are rectangular in shape They may also appear in hexagonal OptoScript blocks e Condition commands check a condition and are in the form of a question Chart Running and Variable False are examples of condition commands They appear as instructions in condition blocks which are diamond shaped or in hexagonal OptoScript blocks Condition commands are questions that always have two answers either yes or no true or false The answer determines the flow of logic and what happens next in the chart OptoControl User s Guide 2 7
64. Port command When CTS is enabled commands such as Transmit String Via Serial Port and Transmit Character Via Serial Port do not transmit until CTS is raised high Transmit String Via Serial Port turns RTS on before transmitting and then turns it off after transmitting Transmit Character Via Serial Port turns RTS on and leaves it on If you are talking to devices such as radio modems that require a delay between receiving a message and lowering RTS use the command Turn On RTS before using the transmit commands and use Turn Off RTS when necessary Changing Baud Rate and Number of Data Bits You can change baud rate number of data bits and similar information in the following ways e Under program control using the Configure Port command The changes take effect immediately and override all other means used to set port baud rates such as changing front panel settings or reconfiguring jumpers TIP Set all serial port parameters in the Powerup chart to ensure they are correct e For selected ports the baud rate can be changed from the controller front panel switches or jumpers Any changes made this way do not take effect until power is cycled In addition these settings can be overridden under program control using the Configure Port command e OptoControl can be used to set baud rates via the Set Up Controller Ports button in the Configure Controllers dialog Such a change takes effect only after a download and can be overridden using
65. Powerup a Variables E Numeric Variable eye Chart_Stat 38 Cookie_Cou 3414 Dough_Pre 3 14 Setpoint_M 832 Start_Flag String Variables Pointer Variable E Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables I O Units gt Analog_IO_Unit E Digital 10_Unit gt Name Type stv Cookie_ Counter Integer 32 Variable 175 Dough_Chip_Control oe Oven_Inspection_Control os EERE Debug mf Since we want to be able to see chart windows as well as the watch window let s dock the watch window at the bottom 6 In the watch window click the docking button J in the upper right corner OptoControl User s Guide 1 37 QUICK START a The watch window moves to the bottom of the main window OptoControl Dough_Chip_Control IP E Fie Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help l8 x Dae h ssex e Eea RmGBee ALA mw Hes ofag gt 24 4 8 lt eka A dhe cookies FE a Cookies a Controllers H Cookie Conti Subroutines Inch Ext Instruction F amp Charts Alarms Dough_Chip amp Dough_Vess Interrupt amp Oven_Inspe amp Powerup a Variables Numeric Vari 830 Chart_S e3 Cookie_ ban Dough 3 14 Setpoint Start FLT z 2 gt oe Dough_Chip_Control oe Oven_Inspection_Control The Powerup chart starts this chart This chart runs gt continuously once the gt
66. QUICK START The chart window looks something like this ith oS Ma oS PhS 4 A A A Ra Ou heck ah de aw ade os is out of spec set oven ae ae ae eee ae temperature to 200 Fe degrees Running Step Off Break Off pa Dough_Chip_Control 5 Oven Inspection_Control Near the bottom of the chart the Reject Cookie block determines whether a bad cookie has been found If one has the strategy moves to the next block Blow Off which is where the bad cookie gets blown off the conveyor When that happens we want to decrement the Cookie_Counter variable 3 Double click the Blow Off block to open its instructions window Instructions Oven_Inspection_Control Blow Off 1 xj Reset the on latch after it has been triggered Clear On Latch On Point Inspection_Pass_Fail_Switch Modify Turn on reject valve to blow away bad cookie Delete Turn On Reject_Valve Next Block Leave reject valve on for 2 seconds Previous Block Delay Sec 2 0 Thr att eninnt unahan zi Close Help Command Help This command block is executed only when a bad cookie has been found This block first resets the on latch triggered by the bad cookie so that the next cookie won t be marked bad too The block then turns on the reject valve The valve stays on for two seconds OptoControl User s Guide 1 31 QUICK START a 10 before being shut off Let s decrement the counter after the cookie is gone and the valve
67. Running on this task queue 3 530 usec 500 usec Host task gets 500 usec about 14 of the total time The best time to plan for optimum throughput is before you design your strategy As the table on page 3 20 shows you can maximize throughput between the PC and the controller by increasing the priority and frequency of the host task and by building efficiencies into your OptoControl strategy Increasing Host Task Priority The host task is given the first time slice by default However sometimes 500 microseconds is simply not enough time for communication with for example OptoDisplay You can give the host task more time by changing its priority To do so use the Set Priority of Host Task command early in the Powerup chart The priority you set is the number of consecutive time slices the host task receives from 1 to 255 For example if you set the recommended priority of 5 the host task receives five time slices or 2 500 microseconds every time the task queue starts 3 24 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY If you made this change to the sample task queue on page 3 24 the time used by the host task would increase from 500 to 2 500 usec and the total time to make the rounds of the task queue would increase from 3 530 to 5 530 usec Increasing Host Task Frequency Another way to optimize throughput between the PC and the controller is to minimize the number of tasks in the queue so that the host task is done
68. SNAP_Sprinkler_Control Timestamp of strategy in controller 02702799 14 02 45 Warning If you choose to continue the strategy that is currently resident and running in the controller will be STOPPED and REPLACED by this strategy Continue download This message tells you that the strategy to be downloaded doesn t match the strategy already loaded on the controller either because it is a different strategy or because it has been changed since the last download 3 To continue the download click Yes 6 6 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES As the strategy is compiled the Compile Progress dialog box appears usually very briefly Compile Progress Compiling Chart Alarms i o S If no errors occur the Download Progress dialog box appears Downloading to Cookie Controller x a 4 fal FENEEDACEANTAAANNANNE Percent Complete 92 0 Time Elapsed sec 2 Cancel When the download is complete you are in Debug mode If you receive errors see Appendix A OptoControl Troubleshooting Compiling without Downloading Sometimes you may want to compile without downloading just to see if a chart subroutine or strategy compiles correctly You can compile the active chart or subroutine only just the changes you have made to the strategy or the entire strategy Compiling the Active Chart or Subroutine Whenever a chart or subroutine window is open and active you can compile
69. There is a hold buffer for each event reaction specifically for this purpose Do event reactions have to be created in consecutive order No You can group together related event reactions that may need to be enabled or disabled at the same time You give a name to each group of 16 event reactions and then use event reaction group commands to manipulate all event reactions in a group at once Which is more important on the OptoC ontrol event reaction screen the IVAL or the XVAL Since event reactions occur entirely in the 1 0 unit the XVAL is more important because it shows the current status of the event reaction The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL only when an enabled 0 point or event reaction is read from or written to by the strategy in the controller Do not be concerned when the IVAL does not match the XVAL since 10 28 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS this means only that the program is not reading from or writing to the I O point or event reaction in question at that moment Using the Interrupt Chart to Handle Reactions that Generate an Interrupt There are two reasons to use the Interrupt chart e Tobe promptly notified of critical events that occur on the I O unit e To allow an event on one I O unit to quickly cause a reaction on another I O unit using logic in the Interrupt chart as the gateway For maximum speed and efficiency configure reactions to occur at the I
70. Timer Target Time HasUpTimerReachedTargetTime Up Timer F Reached Variable False IsVariableFalse Variable not x F Variable True IsVariableTrue Variable x F Verify Checksum on String VerifyChecksumOnString Start Value On F String Verify Forward CCITT on VerifyForwardCcittOnString Start Value On F String String Verify Forward CRC 16 on VerifyForwardCrcl6OnString Start Value On F String String Verify Reverse CCITT on VerifyReverseCcittOnString Start Value On F String String Verify Reverse CRC 16 on VerifyReverseCrcl6OnString Start Value On F String String Within Limits IsWithinLimits Value Low Limit High x gt nLoLimit and x F Limit lt nHiLimit Write Byte to PC Memory WriteByteToPcMemory Byte To Address F ISA only Write Byte to PC Port ISA WriteByteToPcPort Byte To Address F only Write I O Unit Configuration WriteIoUnitConfigToKeprom On I O Unit P to EEPROM Write Numeric Table to I O WriteNumTableToIoMemMap Length Start F Memory Map Index I O Unit Mem address Table Write Numeric Variable to O WriteNumVarToIoMemMap I O Unit Mem F Memory Map address Variable Write String Table to I O WriteStrTableToIoMemMap Length Start F Memory Map Index I O Unit Mem address Table Write String Variable to I O WriteStrVarToloMemMap I O Unit Mem F Memory Map address Variable OptoControl User s Guide E 19 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arg
71. Using an output point the controller might turn on a light or open a valve There are two types of 0 points digital and analog e Digital points can be either on or off True or False Push buttons and LEDs are examples of digital devices An LED is either on or off it has no other possible state OptoControl User s Guide 2 3 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL In the diagram on page 2 2 the photo eye is an example of a digital input device The photo eye is either on or off When it turns off as the box passes through its beam the digital 1 0 module tells the controller it is off and the controller responds as programmed by adjusting the proportional valve The pump is an example of a digital output device Based on information from the tank level input the controller turns the pump on or off as programmed e Analog points have a range of possible values Temperature and pressure are examples of analog information Temperature might be any number in a range 2 or 31 65 or 70 1 or many other possible numbers In the diagram on page 2 2 the tank level sensor is an analog input device It registers the changing level of water in the tank and reports the level to the controller which responds by turning the pump on or off The fuel pump is an example of an analog output device Based on information about the temperature in the furnace the controller adjusts the pressure of fuel through the pump as programmed OptoControl Terminology
72. _ two Equal commands in the same condition block and check the Or operator as shown at right Or operator OptoControl User s Guide Instructions Conyeyor_Operation Conveyor stopped x Conveyor_Speed Add Previous Block Operator DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY EE l Using a Timer Timers come in two forms e Up timers count up from zero and are generally used to measure how long something takes e Down timers count down to zero from a number you set and are frequently used to determine when events should begin Here s an example of a down timer This process starts every 1 5 seconds Instructions Timer_Example_Chart Block 0 x Set Down Timer Preset Value The starting value for the timer is set in Block 0 Target Value 1 5 Down Timer Process_Timer l Start Timer Delete Timer Process_Timer Next Block Timer_Example_Chart The condition block checks whether the timer has reached zero If it hasn t the chart loops until it has se E a eo lt Instructions Timer_Example_Chart Process Timer Expired Eq Down Timer Process_Timer Add Down Timer Expired When the timer has ma expired it is E restarted and the DS a ee N proren pgi D instructions Timer Example_Chart Start Process Timer Dek we j Start Timer Poi Timer Process_Timer z When the process ee i ends the logic loops Low aaa eee back to check eeo a E e
73. _Addwatch Help Customizing Toolbars You can customize toolbars in OptoControl for the way you work You can choose toolbars to match your screen resolution You can move toolbars to another place in the window You can move a button into another position or toolbar or delete it if you don t use it You can even create your own toolbar with just the buttons you use OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Ue Toolbars tab Choosing Toolbars for Your Screen Resolution You can choose toolbars to match your screen resolution and place the most frequently used toolbar buttons all on one line To do so follow these steps 1 Choose View Toolbars 2 In the Customize dialog box make sure the Toolbars tab is open Toolbars Commands Toolbars MV Show Tooltips New Drawing I Cool Look Configure a Reset Compile ese Mode Debug VJA Toolbar Buttons Basic 1152x864 Basic 1024x768 Basic 800x600 Toolbar name Fie Cancel Apply Help 3 Click to place a check mark next to the toolbar for your current screen resolution Click OK The most commonly used tools appear in a single line in the main window If you want to change the tools see Moving and Deleting Buttons on page 2 24 Moving Toolbars To move a toolbar click on its edge to outline the whole toolbar Then drag the toolbar where you want it You can pl
74. a State OY occ cckeccssasscssccecacacssccssstscesesessestnetseassccacensetanescs 12 7 Adding a Subroutine Instruction c ccccscsscscesessescesesceteseeteseeeseeseseeeseensseeneseeneseeess 12 8 Viewing and Printing Subroutines sss ssssissssisssiisssiisssisssisssiisssiisninrnienninnnrinenritnrnne 12 10 Viewing NUNS Sc ca cet cece ceded cc Daeacan eghtalead acvaces aces calc amn hs cane gsesse te 12 10 Viewing All Subroutines in a Strategy ccc tesesteseeteseeteesneeeee 12 10 Printing eo OU UUM Ss 2cdess cots nicacescdeaasonddeadacoudncasanlansatacnsadaused oelebeiadatallasiaibetacasinscns 12 10 Appendix A OptoControl Troubleshooting ssscsecceeeesseeeeeeeeenees A 1 How to Begin TroubleShooting c ccccsescsesessesessssestesescsssssssssessssesssseessestsseetesssnsseseees A 1 1 Read Any Error Message BOX sessissssisssiissiisssissniisssiissniisniisninnnrinsnrinsnrinennersnnnns A 1 2 Check Communication with the Controller cccccceccseesesestescsesesescaeseeeeseeeenees A 2 3 Check the Error LUNN codes 9c jacazacsnecesdassasescasdicascasjats dda canbsionesagtanceaccaaueebiapatenaals A 2 4 Check Status Codes in Your Strategy cscsiostiaesssaciverssveacenessmastivesscrcubeetacastenseiaess A 2 5 If You are Using Ethernet Check the User s Guide 0 00 0 ccecececstescstesceteesteeeeesees A 2 6 Call Product SUI IOI pxcansictacasencensdisesacdendssnaaiatiasahannemasviatesesacrsutactactuatiatsmeduateasssessth
75. a display panel you can read this address from the front panel using the setup menu On other controllers you may need to examine the address jumper configuration C The port configuration for the computer that will communicate with the controller is shown in C If the correct port configuration is listed highlight it Click Modify to check or change It If you know it is correct click Finish and skip to Finishing a Direct Connection on page 4 12 If the correct port configuration is not listed click Add 4 4 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS When you click Modify or Add the Port Selection dialog box appears The following figure shows port selections for Windows NT If you are running Windows 95 or Windows 98 the Modem and ARCNET PCMCIA choices do not appear Opto 22 Port Selection x Select a port type C ARCNET C AC37 G4LC321S4 or G4LC321ISA LT C Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET C COM Port Modem ARCNET PCMCIA lt Back Cancel Choose the port type for the computer that will communicate with the controller Select ARCNET if your PC has an ISA bus based ARCNET card connected via cable to your controller Click Next and continue with Configuring an ARCNET Port on page 4 6 Select AC37 G4LC32ISA or G4LC32ISA LT if you are using one of these Opto 22 cards as your communication card or in the case of the ISA cards as your controller Click Next and skip to
76. a host port Port 5 Front panel keypad and LCD display of the G4LC32 It is also the ISA port for the G4LC32ISA and G4LC32ISA LT Port 6 Parallel local I O port This port is not present on all controllers Referred to as the Local 0 Port Also the port number of the local 1 0 on M4RTU and M410 controllers Port 7 ARCNET a virtual port when used as a peer port It uses the same physical connector as port 4 Port 8 Ethernet Usually used as a host port Ports 9 and 10 Ethernet Virtual ports usually used as peer ports They use the same physical connector as Port 8 for external connections OptoControl User s Guide 10 37 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Ports 11 and 12 Twisted Pair Dual ARCNET on M4 slot 0 Ports 13 and 14 Twisted Pair Dual ARCNET on M4 slot 1 Ports 15 and 16 Iwisted Pair Dual ARCNET on M4 slot 2 Ports 17 and 18 Iwisted Pair Dual ARCNET on M4 slot 3 Transmit and Receive Buffers Each port has a separate location in memory known as its receive buffer Messages sent to the controller automatically go in this buffer for later retrieval by the program The typical size of a receive buffer is 253 characters although the receive buffer for port 5 holds only one character and the receive buffer for the Ethernet port can hold up to 1 500 characters However the length of the buffer of a host task is only 127 characters When you are using the commands Transmit Character via ARCNET or Transmit Chara
77. a sample Add 1 0 Unit dialog box for a SNAP Ethernet 1 0 unit For a SNAP B3000 ENET brain use B3000 Snap Mixed 1 0 For a SNAP ENET D64 brain use Add 170 Unit x Name SNAP_Ethernet_Unit_X Snap Digital 64 Description For a SNAP ENET S64 brain use SNAP Simple 64 Type B3000 Snap Mixed 1 0 SNAP B3000 ENET Default port is 2001 If you have changed the port on the brain for security purposes also change it here See the SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 Units User s Guide for security information Fahrenheit Celsius Pott Ethernet hal Address 10 22 3 61 Security fo Watchdog No C Yes Cancel Hep Address is the IP address of the SNAP Ethernet based I O unit Here s an example of how the unit appears in the Configure 1 0 Units dialog box when it is added Configure 1 0 Units xi Name Type nalog_I0_Unit G4 nalog Multifunction Disabled Digital_I0_Unit G4 Digital Multifunction Disabled SNAP Ethernet Unit Ethernet 2001 10 22 55 61 Disabled 1 0 Points EID Loops Eyent Heactions When you add modules and address points on a SNAP Ethernet based unit analog addresses are different than on a non Ethernet SNAP unit The figures on the following pages show how to address points on SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 units OptoControl User s Guide 5 7 WORKING WITH 1 0 D SNAP B3000 ENET I O Addressing The following figure illustrates point addressi
78. a table to the watch window expand or collapse it by clicking its plus or minus sign lt gt Watch_1 of x Day_of the Week Integer Variable SNaP_Analog Unit B3000 Snap Analog 4 E Points i 08 Hygro Analog Input H 0 68 26196 Event Reactions Pid Loops To rearrange elements in the watch window list click the item you want to move and drag it to a new location or right click it and choose Move Up or Move Down from the pop up menu You can also sort elements in the window by clicking on the column label For example to sort by Type click the label Type in the column heading Click again to change the order from ascending A Z to descending Z A To move an element from one watch window to another open both windows and drag the element where you want it To copy an element to another watch window so it will appear in both windows hold down the cTRL key while you drag it To delete an element right click it and choose Delete from the pop up menu To inspect an element double click it The inspect dialog box opens For information on using it see Inspecting 1 0 in Debug Mode on page 5 41 Resetting I O On Strategy Run Sometimes it is helpful to have 1 0 points automatically reset to their default state whenever an OptoControl strategy is started Resetting can be especially useful if You have deleted PID loops or event reactions and are re downloading
79. an O point or a PID loop You can perform any operation on the pointer that you could perform on the object the pointer points to Pointers are an advanced programming feature and are very powerful but they also complicate programming and debugging Variables in OptoControl In OptoControl there are six types of variables e numeric e numeric table e string e string table e pointer e pointer table Numeric string and pointer variables contain individual pieces of information Numeric table string table and pointer table variables contain several pieces of related information in the form of a table Table Variables In a table variable the variable name represents a group of values not just one Table variables are one dimensional arrays which means that each table is like a numbered list of values You OptoControl User s Guide 8 3 USING VARIABLES refer to each item in the list by its number or index Indexes start at 0 not at 1 Here are two table examples Index Value 4 Float table values are Index Value 0 82 0 DEES 0 Maria 1 86 1 String table values gt 1 Tom 2 85 0 ue 2 Su 3 74 8 3 Andre 4 72 3 5 72 7 When you define a table you must specify its length which is how many values the table can store The length of a table is NOT the value of the last index Since indexes start at 0 a table with a length of 100 contains indexes 0 through 99 Tabl
80. and gain you make sure that values read are accurate Offset is the difference between the minimum input of an analog input point and the actual minimum signal received from a field device For example if a 50 mV to 50 mV input receives a minimum signal that is slightly off not exactly 50mV the difference between the two minimums is the offset Reading Offset Actual Value If minimum input 4 000 mA and zero scale reading 4 003 mA then offset 0 003 mA Gain is the difference in the full scale reading but expressed differently Measured Value Gain Actual Value If maximum input 20 00 mA and measured value 20 50 mA then gain 0 9756097560976 If you already know the offset and gain for a point you can use the commands Set Analog Offset and set Analog Gain to set them in OptoControl If you do not know the offset and gain you can use the commands Calculate amp Set Analog Offset and Calculate amp Set Analog Gain to have the brain calculate them Calculate offset first and then calculate gain Analog Totalizers Analog totalizers are used to track total volume or quantity For example if an analog point measures gallons per minute you could use an analog totalizer to determine the total number of gallons moved over a period of time To read the value and leave the totalizer running use the command Get Analog Totalizer Value To read the value and set the totalizer back to zero use the command Get amp Cle
81. and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Optional Enter a description of the variable C Inthe Type drop down list select the type of data for the table Possible types are shown in the following table For more information see Types of Data in a Variable on page 8 2 NETaE Te Possible Data Types Numeric table Integer 32 integer 64 or floating point String table String Pointer table Pointer to any data type and the data type may change over time D Enter the number of elements in the table This number must be an integer between 1 and 1 000 000 The number is limited by your controller s memory The greater the number the more memory required to store the table E For string tables only Enter the maximum number of characters allowed in the string The number must be an integer between one and 127 The greater the number the more memory required to store the string F To set each element of the table to the initial value G each time the strategy is run click Initialize on Strategy Run To set elements to the initial value only when a strategy is downloaded click Initialize on Strategy Download If you are setting individual initial values for each table element see Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables during Strategy Download on page 8 9 click Initialize on Strategy Download G For numeric and string tables only Enter the value to which each
82. and the switch to turn on the sprinklers You configure these physical inputs and outputs as the 0 points OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Here are the 1 0 points you might configure for the simple sprinkler system Physical I O Type I O Point Name Hygrometer Analog Input Hygrometer Sprinkler status Digital Input Sprinkler_Status Sprinkler switch Digital Output Sprinkler_Switch Determining and Configuring Variables Some of the inputs and outputs you defined when you solved the problem were not physical I O but information For example the day of the week is not a physical input it s a piece of information you can get using a command in OptoControl These inputs and outputs become variables You also need variables to store the information that input points give you And you may need variables for manipulating information To determine the variables you need think about the pieces of information your process requires Then look at the OptoControl commands in the OptoControl Command Reference Find the commands you need and check them to see what types of variables each command requires For example you need to know what day of the week it is Will the controller give you this information as a string for example Wednesday or in some other format When you check the command Get Day of Week you discover that the day is returned as a number Wednesday 3 so you set up this var
83. another way may be better for others As you use the strategy over time as control needs change and as you become more knowledgeable about OptoControl you ll find ways to make the strategy better Basic Rules The sprinkler strategy we just created is a simple example This section gives basic rules to keep in mind when you re solving more complex control problems When you create a new OptoControl strategy two charts are automatically included Powerup and Interrupt You add all the other charts you need and the number is limited only by the controller s memory Program logic moves through a flowchart in one of two ways flow through or loop e Achart with flow through logic performs a set of specific commands and then stops It has a beginning and an end and at the end is a condition or action block that has no exit Powerup charts Interrupt charts and subroutine charts should always have flow through logic So should any chart you create that does not need to run continuously In complex strategies avoid using delays and condition looping waiting for something to occur in charts with flow through logic e Achart with loop logic has no end It loops through a set of actions and conditions continuously A loop logic chart can have several paths through which the direction of the 3 8 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY logic may flow depending on certain criteria Use loop logic for a chart that needs to run
84. are zero characters waiting then there is no reason to use the Receive command It is also a good idea to start a Receive_Timeout_Timer and then loop on the Get Number of Characters Waiting on Ethernet Session command until either there are more than zero characters waiting or the timer expires The only way to determine that a session is still good and another peer is still connected is to transmit something to the other peer Using a Receive command will not do this you need two directional communication to ensure that both ends can manually close out a bad session before opening a new session to prevent using up all 32 sessions Be careful not to have a peer send information to another peer faster than the receiving peer can pull it out of the receive buffer When an M4SENET 100 receives data from the Ethernet network it holds the data in memory the buffer until the OptoControl flowchart removes it with a Receive command If the data is not removed fast enough the receive buffer will fill up If you find you cannot communicate with the card soon after going into Debug mode and you can ping the card but not access it using Telnet this may be the problem An easy way to foresee this problem is to use Telnet to inspect incoming bytes If the number of incoming bytes grows over time information is being received by the M4SENET 100 card but is not being removed from the card s receive buffer by the controller The value in the incoming bytes c
85. atia ccs kee nen sen eeaacerde 10 13 A Noten PSG ON HC misss a eacielbanane 10 13 String Commands lsc ate ace tcelc ee a a oaaae 10 14 Using Strings acces cease ences Neetu telee leaden chee iedecaneennae angRenieseeedcebatecoiedcdn 10 14 String Length and Width sts cahedscscaszatnastesiisiceca thiaiedesasiaanidenigcs aaa ee ssauaneaasseinanseideati 10 15 Using Numeric Tables as an Alternative to StringS cccccccscecseenseeteeeseen 10 15 Strings and Multitasking cic nseaieah aves ce cliorernes eau oeaeebecaaiatdguersctentadanteaucens 10 15 Adding Control Characters to a String ccscersscsctscassassnsncensceasnstscuceacactdcsceasanudevaarsciseoses 10 16 Sample String Val AINE 10x sasicenseacixedcedsendardsachacsadiekacdasdiuaarisieatadonaviarinenestanasasdzacealedios 10 16 Sample String Table i et neta anune tenets ie Schill ato woh tetas peta caetadnc 10 17 String Data Extraction Exanniles csc icccncdss czcateacsonasasesesvasccsdscistacdicndess Guncacdossssnsasactstan 10 17 Find Substring in String Example 1 oo ec eee es estes tesestetestesestetesteneseeees 10 18 Find Substring in String Example Dies sccscccanseaiinctccsatiawwciecstssieaaessntetanciasiuubtesiens 10 18 String Building Example 5c ehcancaseesic ances criduacealdae exe aesioeWatiacsnidcabsatendcaiecets tds ences 10 18 Move String acs oceaatxscaaceectcaae amp scausceenacias adee onde aacaadinccssceuccanssidcohouadebacaciaiants 10 18 xii OptoControl User s Guide EE ee Appe
86. bits on to indicate True in an integer variable A digital input or output that is on also returns a True 1 A True or any non zero value sent to a digital output turns it on 10 32 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS For individual bits within an integer variable bits that are set 1 indicate True values Bits that are cleared 0 indicate False values NOTE Some programs that communicate with the controller use 1 rather than 1 for logical True This is only a problem when such programs read Boolean values from the controller An easy way to convert a 1 Boolean result to a 1 is to use the command Absolute Value While floats can be used in logic integers are strongly recommended whenever any bits are referenced Since OptoControl does not permit bits in a float value to be altered float values must be converted to integers before bits can be evaluated See Mathematical Commands on page 10 30 for further information on integers and floats Using Masks A mask is an integer variable or literal with one or more specific bits set These bits define a set of bits for other actions to work on For example a mask of 255 the eight least significant bits set is used with BIT AND either to keep the value in the least significant byte of an integer variable or to force the 24 most significant bits to zero For more information see the BIT AND command in the OptoContro Command Reference or online Help Commu
87. boxes in OptoControl follow Microsoft Windows standards You can minimize maximize move resize and tile them as needed See your Microsoft Windows documentation for information on how to do these things The following sections describe other useful features in OptoControl Using tabs to view open windows Docking windows Splitting zooming and redrawing chart windows Changing column width and sorting data in some dialog boxes OptoControl User s Guide 2 13 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Using Tabs to View Open Windows When multiple chart and subroutine windows are open especially if they are maximized windows can become lost behind each other However you can quickly move to another open window by clicking its tab at the bottom of the main OptoContro window OptoControl Sprinkler_Control File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help Be EI la x HHEMECLALCEdOCECCCARN Cered J P a Hesla sle Ble elel ilal B E SimpleSprinkler Controllers G Subroutines Included Ext Instruction Files Included Charts B Variables Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables E Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables S 1 0 Units pAs Analog_Unit eB Digital_Unit Tabs show open windows Click a tab to bring its window into view Sprinkler_Control Deg NM A OptoControl Ready Docking Windows You can place
88. condition Here are some common causes and solutions for out of sync errors The timeout interval is too short Increase the timeout value to reduce out of sync errors Try a timeout value of one to two seconds 1000 or 2000 mSec The controller is attempting to talk to an 1 0 unit that is not responding While the controller is waiting for a response from the 1 0 unit it is not able to respond to the host computer Get the 1 0 unit back on line by verifying cable connections cycling the power checking fuses and so on Several tasks are running on the controller and the host task on the controller is not getting enough processor time Increase the priority of the host task using the Set Priority of Host Task command in OptoControl To verify if this is the problem simply shut down all charts using OptoControl in Debug mode The ARCNET network is noisy An ARCNET network that is noisy or that frequently reconfigures causes delays in ARCNET transmissions which may result in out of sync errors Active ARCNET nodes usually have a reconfigure LED that blinks if this is the problem To resolve the problem verify your ARCNET cabling and verify that all nodes on the network are functioning properly If the problem persists cycle power to the active hub Also see Checking the ARCNET LED on page A 10 Changing the Retry Value to Zero Usually the retry value is greater than zero so that in the event of a communication error the comma
89. data types are incorrectly mixed For example you cannot assign an integer to a string Make sure data types are correct It is easier to keep track of data types if you use Hungarian notation when naming variables See Variable Name Conventions on page 11 14 for help Debugging Strategies with OptoScript Before trying to debug strategies containing OptoScript code make sure the code has been compiled within each block or choose Compile All to do all blocks at once When you begin debugging the strategy start by stepping through whole blocks If you run across a problem then step within that block Stepping within the block is discussed in Chapter 6 Working with Strategies 11 30 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT Ue Converting Existing Code to OptoScript You may want to convert some existing OptoControl code into OptoScript code in order to take advantage of OptoScript s strengths In some cases conversion may be fairly simple in other cases it may be complex Back up your strategy before starting so you can go back to it if conversion becomes too difficult Do not delete existing code until you are sure the new code compiles and runs properly To convert single action blocks follow these steps 1 Open the action block and select all the instructions Right click the selection and choose Copy from the pop up menu 2 Open an OptoScript block Right click in the editor and choose Paste from the pop up
90. either analog or digital I O so each 1 0 unit is either digital or analog Racks for Ethernet brains however hold up to 64 points and can be either digital only or both analog and digital If the rack attached to a SNAP Ethernet brain accommodates both analog and digital modules the 1 0 unit includes both analog and digital modules Configuring 1 0 is one of your major planning steps in developing an OptoControl strategy Generally it s best to configure all 1 0 units and points at once but if necessary you can also configure 1 0 as you add commands to the blocks in your strategy Adding an I O Unit 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree double click the 1 0 Units folder You can also click the Configure 1 0 icon on the toolbar or select Configure 1 0 The Configure 1 0 Units dialog box opens Address Watchdog Ref Count Description Add Modify Delete I O Ports Epi icaps Eyent Feactons Heo 2 To configure a new I O unit click Add or double click anywhere in the box below any listed units 5 2 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O rs The Add 1 0 Unit dialog box appears Add 170 Unit x A Name B Description C i B3000 Snap Mixed 1 0 SNAP B3000 ENET D _ Temp Fahrenheit Celsius E _ Pot Ethemet 20 Iv Enable H Security J0 l F Address 0 0 0 0 G
91. every 16 milliseconds With this quick control pass all charts appear to run simultaneously Running more than 10 charts simultaneously plus the host and Ethernet handler tasks may negatively impact the host port throughput however See Optimizing Throughput on page 3 20 for suggestions to improve host port throughput Blocks Each chart is made up of blocks connected by arrows which show how the process flows In each chart the process begins with block 0 Action blocks are rectangular in shape and indicate action within the process Condition blocks are diamond shaped and indicate a decision point OptoScript blocks are hexagonal and contain OptoScript code an optional method of programming Continue blocks are oval and simply point to another block in the chart to continue the process OptoControl User s Guide 2 5 2 6 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Action condition and OptoScript blocks are shown in the chart below Math_Expressions Ox Action block Condition block OptoScript block Variables A variable is a holding place that represents a piece of information in a strategy such as the temperature reported by a thermocouple the name of a chart or a group of words and numbers to be sent to a display The information a variable represents is called the va ue of the variable As a strategy runs the variable s name remains the same but its value may change For example the value of a variable name
92. fill in the details on the following pages First solve the problem e Define the problem What am trying to do What inputs and data do have to work with What do the outputs have to be How many times does the process have to be repeated e Design a logical sequence of steps to solve the problem Break down the larger process task into sub process tasks Break down the sub process tasks into detailed steps e Test the steps OptoControl User s Guide 3 1 3 2 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Next build the strategy Configure hardware Controllers 1 0 units 1 0 points Determine necessary variables and configure them Create charts one for each sub process and add instructions Compile and debug each chart Compile and debug the whole strategy Finally use and improve the strategy Now let s take a look at each of these steps in order Solving the Problem You can avoid a lot of extra time and rework if you define and solve your problem before you ever start building a flowchart in OptoControl Defining the Problem Start by asking yourself or others questions about the control process you re trying to do What are you trying to do Start with the big picture and work down to the smaller details Big picture l m trying to control this sprinkler system Smaller details The sprinklers should turn on every Sunday and every Wednesday They should not turn on if it s raining
93. gt n 2 6 Oh or B AAA ot he Cookies Controllers Subroutines Included Ext Instruction Files Included Charts 5 Variables Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables 1O Units Saving the Strategy Now let s save the strategy to a new name so we can change it while leaving the original intact 1 Select File Save Strategy As Save in fa Cookies z fa c EE Cookies cdb esme Save as type OptoContral Strategy Files cdb 7 Cancel Since each OptoControl strategy must be located in its own directory we cannot save the strategy to a new name in its current location 2 Click the Up One Level button a to move up to the Examples directory OptoControl User s Guide 1 3 QUICK START 3 Click the Create New Folder button El The new folder appears in the list Save Strategy s Save in Gexamples ssi El c Er Cookies Provelt Save as type OptoControl Strategy Files cdb 7 Cancel 4 Type my Cookies to replace New Folder Double click the folder to open it 5 Click in the File name field and type Cookies The dialog box now looks like this Save Strategy As BEI Save in E My Cookies x Sl c EE mee Save as type OptoContral Strategy Files cdb 7 Cancel 6 Click Save The strategy is saved as Cookies in the
94. hairainceontandenienecrs aed 11 2 For Math Expressions cess inrasnensccrctnensestpienetaxesausessanecanasnasteaetnerastastactaakeadzeesveentett teats 11 3 For String et AIM CUMIN ace esate 2 ded oa sa ascd od aca eossanaanecescsins ce esuaaeaiecebe aaa Sieclaaees 11 4 kor Complex LOODS cenina a a tia ceadtatiacitansas 11 6 For Case Statements cccireseasaccxdsceacadvadehdecanesdanaatoctosnseatactedearcuncszesteaisipacensted edcansaplicties 11 7 For OMMN EN N ci capa cccecenad2ag Scns tain scctsceesceed anscencanostaaisameataa osu teaineetinunmamemanaeacans 11 8 For Combining Expressions Operators and Conditions ccccccseeceecteestesesteseees 11 9 Converting to QOtO SHOE sacsccsccsccscesdsccesehecthatcessascancacenssnestedbecetsossedaretavtdshastuchaanceledensndtes 11 10 Duplicate Object Names cca tc casatasteotcossut cocrosa naasaciost piediestan caste eianicarcieeeecartaks 11 10 File tater laches cece ce cece nd a teense a alae estado 11 10 Changing Code to OMtOSENDE acescitacsrsccasshsseceanspieasies Rasika alaahavhielasncdebcadsedvetoaicbacss 11 10 xiv OptoControl User s Guide EE ee OptoScript Functions and Commands scsccscasccsscsscarcscacescsnassacesesssascaresterasesnsesdeanesceseasinsanae 11 11 Standard and OptoScript Commands tsi sae eecinisntsschrhoslesnieintdadceaiaelandaciduientin 11 11 Using 1 0 in OptoSceript ces css caper ceah ectneatear castes dba cnejedapecandetdeesees tntdeinecdeutbanacedetealans 11 12 OS GENES VIAN s
95. if no changes are made and another table element is selected or when you click Apply A magenta background indicates that scanning is stopped 2 To change a table entry click its index number highlight the value and type in a new value Click Apply OptoControl User s Guide 8 15 USING VARIABLES 3 To monitor the table in a watch window click Add Watch The Add Watch Entry dialog box appears W Add Watch Entry 24 x Name Days_Table Length F m Select Indexes To Watch cii C Single Index C Range from to Select Watch Window o New Open Cancel Help 4 In the Add Watch Entry dialog box do one of the following e f the watch window you want to use to monitor the table variable is open choose it from the Select Watch window drop down list e f the watch window you want is not open click Open Navigate to it and double click it to open it e f you want to monitor the variable in a new watch window click New For help see Creating a Watch Window on page 5 50 5 Select the indexes you want to watch 6 When the Add Watch Entry dialog box shows the correct items to watch and the watch window you want click OK The table variable appears in the watch window Viewing Pointer Tables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the pointer table you want to view 8 16 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABL
96. in the I O unit 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the O Units folder until you see the PIDs folder for the I O unit you want Double click the PIDs folder The Configure PID Loops dialog box opens listing all configured PID loops gt Configure pio roops aT 140 Unit Type B3000 SNAP Analog B3000 Name Input Setpoint Output Mode Enable Ref Description 00 Temperatur Oven Hast Oven_Te Auto Enabl 0 TIC 102 01 NotUsed Modify 02 NotUsed 03 NotUsed Delete 04 Not Used v 05 Not Used 06 NotUsed OF Not Used Up and down arrows PID loops are scanned by the 1 0 unit in the order that they appear in this list 2 To move the PID loop to a different position on the 1 0 unit use the up and down arrows in the dialog box 3 To change the PID loop s configuration double click its name to open the Edit PID Loop dialog box Change the fields as necessary For help in completing the fields see Adding a PID Loop on page 5 25 Deleting a PID Loop Only PID loops that have a reference count of zero can be deleted Be careful when deleting PID loops you cannot undo a deletion 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the 1 0 units folder until you see the PID loop you want to delete 2 Right click the name of the PID loop and choose Delete from the pop up menu The PID loop
97. information None no reaction None Enable Scan for Event Select the event from a drop down list Disable Scan for Event Disable Scan for All Events None Set MOMO Outputs See page 5 36 5 34 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O a i For this type of reaction Enter this information Start On Pulse Start Off Pulse Specify the I O point to be pulsed and the length of the pulse in seconds Select the I O point from a drop down list or specify a new name for the point and configure it Start Counter Stop Counter Start Quadrature Counter Stop Quadrature Counter Clear Counter Clear Quadrature Counter Clear On Pulse Clear Off Pulse Clear Period Clear Totalize On Clear Totalize Off Read and Hold Counter Value Read and Hold Quadrature Value Read and Hold Totalize On Value Read and Hold Totalize Off Value Read and Hold On Pulse Value Read and Hold Off Pulse Value Read and Hold Period Value Read and Hold Frequency Value Specify the I O point to be affected Select the I O point from a drop down list or specify a new name for the point and configure it For analog l 0 units For this type of reaction Enter this information None no reaction Enable Scan for Event Disable Scan for Event Disable Scan for All Events Read and Hold Analog Input Data Read and Hold Analog Output Data None Select the event from the drop down list None Specify the I O point an
98. is shut Scroll down and click on the open spot below the other instructions The highlighted line marks the position of the next command to be added Click Add Add Instruction f i x Instruction Select Comment ES Type Name Of fall Valid Types x Chart_Status x Put Result in fall Valid Types Chart_Status 7 Cancel Help Command Heb You can use OptoControl without a mouse and to demonstrate how we ll use only the keyboard to enter data in this dialog box Type dec in the Instruction field The Decrement Variable command appears since it s the first command that starts with that text pattern This is the command we want to use Press TAB twice to move to the Comment field Type in a comment Press TAB again to move to the Type field Press the down arrow on your keyboard twice to select Integer 32 Variable Press TAB again to advance to the Name field and then press the down arrow until you see Cookie_ Counter Press TAB again and notice that an outline appears on the OK button An outlined button means that pressing the space bar or ENTER is equivalent to clicking the button 1 32 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START rs Now the dialog box looks like this Add Instruction Decrement Variable nteger 32 Variable Cookie_Counter 11 Press ENTER The dialog box closes and the new command appears in the Instructions
99. is required If the input engineering units are negative the output may move in the direction opposite from the one desired If so reverse the sign of the gain Integral The integral is required and must be greater than zero Input The input must not be bipolar An input range of 10 to 10 for example will not work Values such as 300 to 100 100 to 0 and 0 to 100 are acceptable If an application has a bipolar input range it will have to be rescaled to a generic range such as 0 to 100 The setpoint range will then have to match this generic input range 10 44 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Setting the output lower and upper clamps Setting clamps is particularly important if the device controlled by the output signal has dead areas at either end For example say the output is scaled 0 10 It is connected to a valve that begins to open at 1 25 and is effectively fully open at 5 75 even though it may only be 70 open Set Lower Clamp to 1 2 valve closed and Upper Clamp to 5 75 valve effectively fully open This prevents reset windup potentially resulting in dramatically improved control when the output value has reached either limit and has to suddenly reverse direction Setting the maximum change rate of the output The Max Change Rate can be ignored since it defaults to 100 per scan If you wish to limit the output rate of change set Max Change Rate to 10 or so to start This setti
100. is true then one action is taken if statement A is false or statement B is true a different action is taken fstatements are very flexible here are several examples of ways you can use them Any numeric value can be tested by the if statement if nl then fl 2 0 endif Complex logical operations can also be used if n1 gt 3 and not nl 6 then fl 2 0 f2 6 5 endif Multiple elseif statements can be used to chain together several tests The else statement is still allowed at the end if nl gt 3 then f1 2 0 f2 6 5 elseif nl lt 3 then F3 8 8 elseif nl 0 then f3 fl 2 else fl 0 F2 0 F3 0 endif 11 22 OptoControl User s Guide Since a comparison operator returns an Integer 32 value it can be used as the test value if nl gt 3 then fl 2 0 f2 6 5 endif An optional else statement can be added if nl gt 3 then fl 2 0 2 6 5 else 3 8 8 endif If statements can be nested Each if requires an endif if nl gt 3 then fl 2 0 f2 6 5 if nl 10 then fl f1 2 f2 2 3 else 3 0 endif endif USING OPTOSCRIPT Ue Switch or Case Statements A switch or case statement also offers branching logic and can be used in place of fstatements when the expression can match one of a number of numeric values The value for each case can be a numeric constant or a mathematical expression only Com
101. memory location 66 I O Point Mismatch a I O Unit Configuration doesn t match hardware configured point does not match the point type found on the I O board B 8 OptoControl User s Guide a M No Message 67 A requested I O feature has not been implemented Generated by I O Unit Possible Causes Different I O units support different features and commands Check the product s data sheet for more information 124 Old response to new command See Resolving Old Response to New Command Errors 124 on page A 7 List of Common Status Codes The following codes appear in a variable within the OptoControl strategy They are always generated by the controller and they indicate that an OptoControl command instruction was not executed correctly No Message Generated by Possible Causes 40 Port busy Controller Specified port already in use 41 Send timeout Controller CTS low on a serial port in RS 232 mode Sending long strings to a serial port Serial port timeout delay too short For ports 4 and 7 transmit buffer is full 42 Receive timeout Controller No carriage return character 13 in the receive buffer Serial port timeout delay too short 43 Notenoughdata Controller Invalid response to an OPTOMUX command returned 44 Invalid data Controller Incorrect first character in response to an OPTOMUX returned command 45 Bad checksum Con
102. more frequently You can run a simple test to see whether minimizing tasks will help PC to controller throughput To run this test start the strategy on the controller to initialize all variables and 1 0 With the strategy running inspect the controller see page 4 19 to see the communication loop time Now stop the strategy and check the communication loop time again If the loop time was significantly lower when the strategy was stopped you may be able to improve throughput by minimizing tasks Most strategies can be designed efficiently with only five or six charts running at once Here s how e Determine the processes that are time critical Put these processes in charts with looping logic that runs constantly Put all other processes in charts that use flow through logic and then use a master chart or two to call these other charts in sequence Each block in the master chart or chart handler uses the command Call Chart to start another chart The master chart cycles through the charts it calls in the same way the task queue cycles through its tasks Here s an example of a master chart Master Chart_1 The master chart s only purpose is to handle other charts When its time comes in the task queue the master chart receives the normal 500 microseconds of time The first time it calls Chart C If Chart C requires less than 500 usec Chart D begins and runs until the time slice is used up When the master chart receives its next time
103. must be converted to a numeric value if it is to be used in calculations Several Convert commands are available for this purpose e Do not use double quotes around strings in OptoControl You can use single quotes but they are not required String Length and Width The width of a string is the maximum length a string can be length is the actual number of characters contained in the string A string with a width of 100 may currently be empty which means Its length is zero A string with a width of 10 containing the characters Hello has a length of six five for Hello and one for the space after the o Although a string s length may change dynamically as the string is modified by the program its width remains constant When you configure a string variable or string table you set the width of the string All the strings in an OptoControl string table must be of the same width OptoControl supports a maximum string width of 127 For applications requiring wider strings you can use several strings to hold the data use string tables or use numeric tables as described in the next section Using Numeric Tables as an Alternative to Strings Since a string is nothing more than a sequence of characters you can store a string in a numeric table with each table element holding a character The advantage of using numeric tables for strings is that a numeric table can store strings of any size The disadvantages are e Mem
104. need to know about each group in order to program your OptoControl strategy effectively For detailed information on using a command see the OptoControl Command Reference where commands are listed alphabetically In This Chapter Digital Point Commands ccccce 10 2 Mathematical Commands c ccceee 10 30 Analog Point Commands c0cce 10 5 Logical Commands cccceseseeeeeeeees 10 32 I O Unit Commands c cccecceceeeeeee 10 7 Communication Serial Commands 10 33 Controller Commands c0cccceee 10 8 Communication l O Commanids 10 36 Chart Commands occ aces ctecccacdeSizieceacdees 10 9 Communication Network Commands 10 37 Time Date Commands 0000 10 10 Pointer Commannds c ccccccsceeeeeeees 10 40 Miscellaneous Commands 10 11 PID Commands cececeeccccseeceeeseeeeteeeees 10 42 String Commands ccccsceeeeeeeees 10 14 Simulation Commands ccecseeeeeees 10 49 Event Reaction Commands 10 23 OptoControl User s Guide 10 1 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Digital Point Commands The following commands are used with digital points 10 2 Basic Commands Turn On Turn Off On Off Counters Start Counter Stop Counter Get Counter Clear Counter Get amp Clear Counter Start Quadrature Counter Stop Quadrature Counter Get Quadrature Counter Clear Quadrature Counter
105. of Chart Causing GetNameOfChartCausingCurrentError Put in P Current Error Get Name of I O Unit GetNameOfloUnitCausingCurrentError Put in P Causing Current Error Get Nth Character GetNthCharacter From String Index x s n F Get Number of Characters GetNumCharsWaitingOnEnetSession On F Waiting on Ethernet Session Session Get Number of Characters GetNumCharsWaitingOnPort On Port F Waiting on Serial or ARCNET Port Get Off Latch See Off Latch Set F Get Off Pulse Measurement GetOffPulseMeasurement From Point F OptoControl User s Guide E 9 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example g Command Name Get Off Pulse Measurement GetOffPulseMeasurementCompleteStatus From F Complete Status Point Get Off Time Totalizer GetOffTimeTotalizer From Point F Get On Latch See Off Latch Set F Get On Pulse Measurement GetOnPulseMeasurement From Point F Get On Pulse Measurement GetOnPulseMeasurementCompleteStatus From F Complete Status Point Get On Time Totalizer GetOnTimeTotalizer From Point F Get Period GetPeriod From Point F Get Period Measurement Get PeriodMeasurementCompleteStatus From F Complete Status Point Get PID Control Word GetPidControlWord From PID Loop F Get PID D Term GetPidDTerm From PID Loop F Get PID Term GetPidITerm From PID Loop F Get PID Input GetPidInput Fro
106. on If a 29 timeout error occurs in binary communication mode try using ASCII mode instead Make sure you change both the software configuration and the jumper on the controller If you are using an Ethernet network a timeout error indicates that the host connected to the controller but the controller s intended host port did not respond Make sure the default host task is set for Ethernet or that you have started an Ethernet host task See the suggestions in the section Resolving Serial Communication Problems on page A 8 especially Checking Transmit and Receive LEDs If problems persist you can increase the length of time before a timeout occurs Choose Configure Controllers and follow instructions for your type of connection Change the Timeout mSec field to a larger number A 6 OptoControl User s Guide Ee Resolving Old Response to New Command Errors 124 Out of sync errors are caused when an old response is received for a new command Normal Sequence Out of Sync Sequence 1 Command A is sent to controller 1 Command A is sent to controller 2 Controller quickly responds to 2 Controller takes longer than usual to command with data respond with data 3 Computer receives response to 3 Computer tries to send command B command A 4 Computer gets response A and aware 4 Command B is sent to controller that it sent command B declares an out of sync
107. op sT Hbutyjzewos op butyjewuos op butyjewuos op esta este utbeq Hhutyjeuos op Hhutyjeuos op ueyd Z F JF z f Jf ueuL Z f JI ueyuy Z T JF JUBW e S S pus butyjewuos op butyjeuos op JI pug Jtpue utbeq Hhutyjeuos op Hhutyjeuos op u y Z T FT z f Ff ueul z f JI ueyd Z T Jf u w L S Z T gt gt T Z x T TUS X f Zs T gt gt F eTqeTtTeae JON 14141400000 d4id400003 pUe x Ff 14440000 0 3 X f 34440000H9 PUY X f pueqitq X f suojss 1dx SIMA zleosed joIsva duos0 dO OptoControl User s Guide F 4 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE awl Je asea auo juo s uea yduasozdo Gg safenue 19470 Y IM uowwos s se dooj e Ul puewwoas Jo adA yeaJg e aney JOUUeD zduasozdo Pp ani Se NJLA 01 Z UQU e pue ase Se NjeA 019Z e 231 4 pue JdudSo dg suaHaju asn 4 pue yduaso dQ adA e ep ueajoog e aAey jeased pue JISVg 9 pue diasojdg ul uey JuaJayjip Apueaypiu is s jeaseg pue J SVg Ul szuawazeys jeai oj Jo asn ayl E abenbue jessegjoalgg s puejog uo paseg Z abenBbue aiseg jens IA SOsoualy UO paseg 4 SO ON iyeeaq yo utTMspus izy O0 C 7 fyeerq q Tnejyep Z4 O C F fpue fyeoerq qoetTes pug 4 Tnezgep fZ x O 7 3 Ay 0 C F Z x OTC FT fyeorq este 2 NI GHMOTIV LON Z 9seo esTA oseo Kx OCT F KR x 0 z J fyeorg Ay 0O 7C
108. open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool Re 2 Right click the block and choose Name from the pop up menu 3 In the Name Block dialog box change the name Click OK Connecting Blocks To connect blocks start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode Remember that action blocks and OptoScript blocks have only one exit and condition blocks have two Action Blocks and OptoScript Blocks 1 To connect an action block or an OptoScript block to the next block in a program sequence click the Connect tool N 2 First click the source block and then click the destination block OptoControl User s Guide 7 7 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Although you can click anywhere inside the blocks to make a connection the connection is attached at the side closest to where you clicked In the figure below Block 0 is the source block and Block 1 is the destination block New_Chart olx 0 Block 0 To keep your charts neat try to draw the most direct connections possible To do so after clicking the source block move your cursor out of the block at a point closest to its destination 3 To create a bend or elbow in a connection click wherever you want the bend while drawing the connection 7 8 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS For example to draw the connection in the following figure we selected the Connect tool clicked Block 0 moved the cursor out o
109. passed in to it These passed in items called subroutine parameters are the only information that is shared between a subroutine and the calling strategy Eight parameters can be passed to a subroutine but since a table can be a parameter those eight parameters can include a large amount of data An item passed in to a subroutine may be called by one name in the strategy and by another name in the subroutine In fact if a subroutine is used for more than one strategy it is good practice to select generic names in the subroutine For example if you create a subroutine to average values in any float table the table might be named Float_Table in the subroutine You could use this subroutine to average pressures in a table named Pressure_Values from a strategy and Pressure_Values would be referred to as Float_Table in the subroutine 1 With the subroutine open select Subroutine Configure Parameters The Configure Subroutine Parameters dialog box appears Configure Subroutine Parameters Jof x Subroutine Name Group Variable Increase Notification Subroutines hd Subroutine s OptoScript Name Variable_Increase_Notification Comment po O Prompt Type S Name Ref Count Add 2 Modify 3 R 4 Delete Eeee 6 7 8 Cancel Help In this dialog box you determine the way the subroutine is called from the strategy 2 From the Group drop down list choose the command group you want the subro
110. persistent Pointer variables and timers cannot be persistent Global is the default scope For more information see Persistent Data on page 8 4 4 To add a new variable click Add OptoControl User s Guide 8 5 USING VARIABLES The Add Variable dialog box appears Add Variable x A Name B Description M a varies e pending on Ipe Sting H Sting width fi variable type Initialize on strategy download Initialization E a Initialize on strategy run Initial Value Cancel Help The figure above shows the Add Variable dialog box as it appears for string variables Fields are slightly different for other variables 5 Complete the fields as follows A Entera name for the variable The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Optional Enter a description of the variable C Inthe Type drop down list select the type of data for the variable Possible types are shown in the following table For more information see Types of Data in a Variable on page 8 2 NETaE Le Possible Data Types Numeric Integer 32 integer 64 floating point up or down timer String String Pointer to any data type D For string variables only In the String Width field enter the maximum number of characters permitted in the string The number must be an integer between one and 127 The greater the numbe
111. plus a Select tool or pointer for manipulating elements Select Connect Condition Block Text Action Block Continue Block OptoScript Block Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window You can change the background appearance of charts the color and size of blocks and text and the color of connection lines Depending on the scope you want to affect you can change these window properties at three levels e Across OptoControl to change the appearance of all new charts in all new strategies e Across a strategy to change the appearance of all new charts in the open strategy OptoControl User s Guide 7 3 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS e For the open chart or subroutine to change the appearance of all new elements in the open chart or subroutine IMPORTANT Note that most changes affect only new charts and their elements Existing charts and elements are not changed To avoid having to go back and change each item individually make sure you set the defaults the way you want them before you create new charts Once you have changed the defaults see page 7 5 to change existing elements to match the new defaults To change the appearance of charts and elements follow these steps 1 Choose one of the following depending on the scope you want to change e To change all new charts in all new strategies choose Configure OptoControl Default Properties to open the Configure OptoControl Default Properties dialog box
112. port from the Connect Using drop down list 5 In the COM port Properties dialog box choose the baud rate you are using under Bits per second Under Flow Control choose None Leave the other fields set as is Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Click OK If you reach this point the port is accessible A 8 OptoControl User s Guide Le Running a Loopback Test To verify that the port can at least transmit and receive you can jumper 1 Data Carrier Detect DCD pins 2 and 3 on the computer s COM Received Data RD port to cause transmitted characters to echo back to the screen while you Transmitted Data TD reay peal Data Terminal Ready DTR For reference the RS 232 9 pin assignments are shown in the table at right Data Set Ready DSR Request to Send RTS Checking Transmit and Clear to Send CTS Receive LEDs Ring Indicator RI Pin Name Abbreviation Signal Ground oloi NI oJ Aa AJ OJIN A good approach to troubleshooting communications is to see how far the message gets Watching the transmit TX and receive RX LEDs on an Opto 22 controller can help As you check LEDs keep the following information in mind Opto 22 controllers and communication cards include TX RX LEDs but serial ports on PCs do not usually have LEDs If a TX or RX LED remains constantly on the wiring may be faulty or the biasing jumpers may be set incorrectly At high baud rates LEDs flash very briefl
113. required To switch to direct simply reverse the sign of the gain For example a gain of 1 28 would become 1 28 Note that this is not negative gain The minus sign only serves to change the type of PID output from reverse to direct This velocity PID algorithm also referred to as the incremental PID algorithm is inherently anti windup since it has no summation in the integral term to saturate The algorithm is described on pages 160 162 of the book Microprocessors in Instruments and Control by Robert J Bibbero published by John Wiley and Sons Velocity PID Equation Change in output Gain Error Last Error Integral Time Error Derivative Time Error 2 Last Error Oldest Error where e Error is Setpoint Input in Engineering Units e Time is Scan Rate 60 which results in time in minutes All values are in Engineering Units The change in output calculated by this formula is added to the existing PID output If the input span and the output span are different the change is normalized and then added to the output This is accomplished by converting the change to a percentage of the input span The same percentage of output span is then added to the output Gain P For those familiar with the term proportional band gain is simply the inverse Gain acts directly on the change in error since the last scan Error is the setpoint minus the input value in engineering units Th
114. right click the controller and choose Download Controller Kernel from the pop up menu In the Download File dialog box click Browse In the Open dialog box locate your OptoKernel directory Opto 22 0ptoKrnl by default Click Files of Type and choose the name of your controller from the list When the correct firmware file for your controller appears double click the file name Once the full path to the correct kernel file appears in the Download File dialog box click OK The firmware download begins and a dialog box shows its progress After the new firmware is downloaded turn power to the controller off and then back on again Check the controller s configuration and then download the strategy you want to use OptoControl User s Guide 4 27 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS 4 28 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 5 Working with 1 0 Introduction This chapter shows you how to configure and work with I O units and the I O elements they contain In This Chapter Configuring I O Units 5 1 Configuring Event Reactions ccecceceeseeees 5 32 Configuring I O Points 0 5 11 Inspecting 1 0 in Debug Mode ccceeceeeee 5 41 Copying O Configurations 5 24 Using Watch Windows to Monitor Elements 5 50 Configuring PID Loops 06 5 25 Resetting I O On Strategy Run cee 5 53 Configuring I O Units In addition to configuring a controller to run
115. runs the variable s name remains the same but its value may change For example the name of the variable Oven_Temperature stays the same but its value the temperature of the oven may change several times while the strategy is running OptoControl User s Guide 8 1 USING VARIABLES To illustrate variables suppose you are regulating the amount of water in a tank You must keep the tank filled C D beyond a minimum level but you cannot let it get too full Leyel_ Meter P 1 You ve already configured the 0 points Tank unpa e Level_Meter is an analog input point that registers the quantity of water in the tank e Pump_ is a digital output point that turns the Drain_1 pump on or off T e Drain_1 is a digital output point that opens or closes the drain Next you configure variables as places to hold information that these 1 0 points must work with e To avoid constantly polling Level_Meter to find out the quantity of water in the tank you create a variable called Tank_Level_Reading in which to store the level The input point Level_Meter is periodically checked and the value of Tank_Level_Reading updated e To establish the maximum and minimum levels you create variables called Tank_Max_Level and Tank_Min_Level The value in Tank_Level_Reading can be compared to the values in these two variables to determine whether the pump should be turned on or off or the drain opened or closed to maintain the proper level
116. sets the time the down timer will start from but does not start the timer Use the Start Timer command to start the timer counting down to zero Since the default preset value for a down timer is zero nothing will happen if you use the Start Timer command before setting a value Alternatively you can use the Move command to set the time the down timer will start from If you use Move the down timer begins counting down immediately If program execution speed is a priority use the Move command and put an integer value rather than a float into the timer This action eliminates the float to integer conversion time Note that if you use the Move command any value you set using Set Down Timer Preset Value is overwritten and subsequent Start Timer commands start the timer from the value last sent by the Move command To determine if the timer is finished use the condition Down Timer Expired This condition is true any time the down timer has a value of zero The resolution is 1 millisecond Down Timer Expired is much faster than using the condition Equal to compare the timer to a value of zero The Stop Timer command forces the timer to stop and puts its value at zero f you want to halt the timer and have it maintain its value at the time it was stopped use the Pause Timer command instead When you use Pause Timer you can move the timer s value at the time it was stopped to a variable You can also use the Continue Timer command to resu
117. start by stepping one block at a time Stepping by block may be all you need to find any problems If necessary go back to Configure mode and change to full debug see Choosing Debug Level on page 6 11 so you can step through one line at a time see Single Stepping by Line on page 6 14 1 Pause the chart to be stepped through by pressing the Pause Chart button ul 2 To step to the next command block click the Step Block button A or press F10 or select Debug Step Block The commands in the highlighted block are executed the hatch marks move to the next command block and the chart pauses again Compare the chart below to the one on page 6 12 The hatch mark has moved to the next block Powerup Jof x d doughichip control pressure control and oveniinspection J Running Step On Break Off l 0 000 Sec OptoControl User s Guide 6 13 6 14 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Single Stepping by Line When you single step by line you step nside flowchart blocks and move through them one instruction at a time or in OptoScript blocks one line of code at a time Especially if you are using OptoScript code stepping one line at a time can help you find problems in your strategy that are not apparent when stepping by block 1 Make sure you have downloaded your strategy at the full debug level See Choosing Debug Level on page 6 11 for help 2 Pause the chart to be stepped through by pressing the Pause C
118. steer cx ceeeerede danse 9 8 OptoControl User s Guide xi So Chapter 10 Programming with CommandS ssssssusssssesenesnnennunennnenenennne 10 1 IntrodUCION cctinctAcesacsaauasstendcle sig is earned clan AON E AR 10 1 UO This Gl PO act it sc edie aioe toll eal sade EAEL 10 1 Digital Point Commands scecsts cess onc cacccexs etc etnedsiactsteseitiosentnrescavtauscnseotestsctuciorsastaecutadaciae 10 2 ET STU g lgSaeceeneae eer ene ek E E E een ae eee 10 2 MEU II S ninini aaa aaa E aan canenentacaen 10 3 otalizers scoseazee cca echo ctentnatnadt dchacssoneshusbextecuessactavnevoet seveereatesebeaasstieestetahtatante tata te oactes 10 3 PUI ieee elastance scat a sonicated E be natomaci les 10 3 VALAA AVA n a ee Oe Rn DEE en ODS ONO EEE Ee aR a 10 4 Simulation and Test The Real Use for XVAL and IVAL uw ec ccceeecesteteeee 10 4 Additional Commands to Use with Digital POInts 0 cccscseceeeseeeeeneseeeteeeee 10 4 Analog Point Commands c scescccccsssecssessstecsecssisaceccssessusaecacesautaceaseressersencescacaccastseaeace 10 5 Deri VISIT VANES ecresiscascivecvaiankucecdeachacsctehaasveraeauiceltecieaataeacaanceieadenees 10 5 Offset and Gain Commands seadsedeescalsersesatsnercaedasdcsasanads seungeracssedaepautacifessieatassnedasteatiancen 10 6 Analog MOR ANIZCNS sacs ascatchetideuesaccnscSllactstccasesicccosataaceaecegea he iia tdleanded eteoneneneiaooes 10 6 0 Unit Commands scaseasceecacatieactasaasaiacsadautectinai aes pacbs
119. step 7 9 2 OptoControl User s Guide USING COMMANDS TE Ue Arguments 4 If you don t know the command name click Select to open the following dialog box Select Instruction Ea Groups Instructions Absolute Value Analog Point Chart Communication 1 0 Arecosine Communication Network Aresine Communication Serial Arctangent Controller Digital Point Event Reaction 140 Unit Clamp Float Table Element Clamp Float Variable Clamp Integer 32 T able Element Clamp Integer 32 Variable Logical Complement Cosine Miscellaneous Decrement Variable PID Divide Generate Random Number Hyperbolic Cosine Hyperbolic Sine zi Hyperbolic Tangent Pointers Simulation String Subroutines Cancel Help Command Heb Click the name of a command group in the left column to display all the commands in that group In the right column click the command you want For more information on any command click the command name and press F1 to open online help You can also look up the command in the OptoContro Command Reference When the command you want is highlighted click OK to return to the Add Instruction dialog box Optional Enter a comment about the purpose of the instruction Comments help explain the command s purpose in this block and are helpful to anyone who debugs or updates the strategy later Complete each argument for the command by typing in the Type and Name fiel
120. string table adding 8 7 example 10 17 subroutine adding commands instructions 12 6 adding local variables 12 6 calling from a chart 12 8 changing appearance 7 3 changing scale 2 17 compiling 12 7 configuring parameters 12 4 configuring parameters example 12 6 creating 12 2 definition 12 1 OptoControl User s Guide Index 9 including in strategy 12 7 list of files in C 2 parameters 12 1 printing commands instructions 6 23 printing graphics 6 20 replacing elements 6 29 saving 12 7 searching 6 27 stepping into from a chart 6 15 viewing 6 19 12 10 zooming in or out 2 17 system requirements for OptoControl In tro xxiii T table commands 10 7 10 11 numeric table as alternative to strings 10 15 table variable 8 3 adding 8 7 configuring 8 7 optimizing throughput 3 27 setting initial values 8 9 task queue 3 22 10 9 example 3 23 3 26 TCP IP cannot connect error resolving A 11 text changing color or size 7 3 7 13 text block deleting 7 13 moving 7 12 selecting 7 11 throughput optimizing 3 20 time date commands instructions 10 10 timeout error resolving A 6 timer commands instructions 10 11 10 12 definition 2 6 programming example 3 17 resolution 10 13 variable definition 8 3 timing a process commands used for 10 10 toolbar 2 10 buttons moving and deleting 2 24 customizing 2 22 2 25 Index 10 OptoControl User s Guide o drawing 7 3
121. the SNAP ENET D64 digital only Ethernet brain you can use 64 bit integers to address the entire I O unit at once Integer 64 commands are slower than integer 32 commands and should be used only for the SNAP ENET D64 brain 8 2 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES ne A timer stores elapsed time in units of seconds with resolution in milliseconds Up Timers count up from zero and Down Timers start from a value you set and count down to zero Timers can range from 0 001 to 4 611686 x 10 Note that timers are independent of the controller clock so when a timer has been running for thousands of seconds it probably is not in sync with the controller clock e A string stores text and any combination of ASCII characters including control codes and extended characters For instance a string variable might be used to send information to a display for an operator to see When defining a string variable you must specify the width of the string The width is the maximum number of characters that the variable may hold A string variable can contain numeric characters but they no longer act as numbers To use them in calculations you must convert them into floating point or integer numbers Conversely a numeric value to be displayed on a screen must first be converted into a string e A pointer does not store the value of a variable instead it stores the memory address of a variable or some other OptoControl item such as a chart
122. the Configure Port command OptoControl User s Guide 10 35 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Communication I O Commands The following commands refer to communication with 1 0 units SNAP Ethernet 1 0 Units Other 1 0 Units Read Numeric Variable from I O Memory Map Convert Mistic I O Hex to Float Read Numeric Table from 1 0 Memory Map Convert Number to Mistic I O Hex Read String Variable from 1 0 Memory Map Transmit Receive Mistic 1 0 Hex String Read String Table from 1 0 Memory Map with Checksum Write Numeric Variable to 1 0 Memory Map Transmit Receive Mistic 1 0 Hex String Write Numeric Table to 1 0 Memory Map with CRC Write String Variable to 1 0 Memory Map Transmit Receive OPTOMUX String Write String Table to 1 0 Memory Map SNAP Ethernet Based I O Units These commands make it possible to read from or write to the memory map of a SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 unit such as one with a SNAP B3000 ENET brain You can use these commands to read or write to any address within the memory map Make sure that you read or write the correct type of data integer float string to match the specified memory map address The controller doesn t know what type of data is in any particular address so it cannot convert the data type See the SNAP Ethernet Based Programming amp Protocols Guide Opto 22 form 1465 to determine the memory map addresses and data types you need to use 10 36 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS C
123. the Strategy Tree and watch windows where you want them dock them in the OptoControl main window Docked windows do not have tabs but are contained in their own frames OptoControl remembers their position the next time you open that strategy 1 To dock a window click the docking button wl in the window s title bar OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Ue The window moves to its own frame Compare the following figure with the one on page 2 9 to see the difference in the Strategy Tree window Pe ER Cogs Cont Suvine Cong Moie Jode Yow row Hep Er oela ee a elel me S Aj ae eea E E P sifu tlla slol DIe ele Aal Docked Strategy Tree E Controllers E Subroutines Inc Ext Instruction Charts 3 6 Variables a Numeric Ye String Varie Pointer Var E Numeric Te String Tabl E Pointer Tat G 10 Units Confiwe NUM 4 2 To change the docked position click and drag the window s title bar to any edge of the main window 3 To change the docked window s width or height click and drag the edge of its frame in the direction you want 4 To free the window from its docked position click the docking button aj in its title bar Splitting a Chart Window In chart and subroutine windows you can split the view of a window to see two horizontal views two vertical views or even four views of the same chart or subroutine You can
124. the examples above the date is February 28 2000 The time stamp T is in the format hh mm ss In the examples above the time is 51 seconds past 11 43 A M Archiving to the Controller When you archive a strategy to the controller you are placing the zipped file in battery backed RAM If power to the controller is lost the archive is still there Archiving to the controller as well as the computer makes sure that an older strategy can always be found and updated even after personnel changes occur and years pass Make sure the controller has sufficient memory available to store the archive file Since only one strategy can be on the controller at any time only the latest archive for that strategy is on the controller Other archives are erased during strategy download 4 22 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Follow these instructions to archive a strategy to the controller 1 In OptoControl choose File Strategy Options Archive I Archive strategy to disk when strategy is closed Jo Download archive te controller during debug download Cancel Help 2 In the Strategy Options dialog box click Archive strategy to disk when strategy is downloaded Also click Download archive to controller during debug download Archive I Archive strategy to disk when strategy is closed IV Archive strategy to disk when strategy is downloaded Cancel Hel 3 Click OK The strategy will be arc
125. the strategy You want to reset all 1 0 to a known state without having to turn it off OptoControl User s Guide 5 53 WORKING WITH 1 0 When you choose Reset 1 0 all configured 0 points are reset to their factory default conditions whenever the strategy is run Default conditions are Analog Digital All modules are configured as generic input All modules are configured as input All module offsets are cleared to zero The Event Reaction table is cleared All module gain coefficients are set to 1 0 Global event interrupt is disabled All totalization and averaging is halted All counters are cleared All PID loops are stopped TPO outputs are stopped All PID data is cleared The Event Reaction table is cleared Global event interrupt is disabled To have I O automatically reset each time the strategy is run make sure the strategy is in Debug mode From the Debug menu click to place a check mark next to Reset 1 0 If you do not want I O automatically reset click to remove the check mark next to Reset 0 5 54 OptoControl User s Guide Introduction CHAPTER 6 Working with Strategies A strategy is the software program you create in OptoControl The strategy includes all the definitions and instructions necessary to contro your process This chapter is a step by step reference for working with strategies in all three strategy modes Configure Debug and Online In This Chapter Creating and Opening
126. they overshoot and oscillate There will be a point that is the best the PID loop can be tuned and it will not be possible to get a faster stable response There are trade offs between having a fast response and having a stable PID loop that does not overshoot the setpoint Starting the Tuning Process for a New PID Loop A simple and safe method is to start out at a very low gain and integral lower left chart see page 10 48 Increase the gain without changing the integral until the fastest response is achieved without oscillation It still won t reach the setpoint but the key here is getting a fast response that doesn t oscillate middle left graph Now leave the gain alone and increase the integral until it reaches the setpoint without oscillating middle graph This completes the tuning When increasing the gain and integral it is fastest to just keep doubling them When the process variable starts oscillating then make smaller gain and integral changes For example start out with a gain of 0 1 and an integral of 0 1 Next try a gain of 0 2 while keeping the integral at 0 1 then a gain of 0 4 then 0 8 then 1 6 then 3 2 If the PID loop starts oscillating with a gain of 3 2 then try a gain of 2 0 or something in the middle between 1 6 and 3 2 Then make smaller changes until the best gain is found Suppose the best gain was 2 3 the next step is to keep the gain at 2 3 and then change the integral to 0 2 to 0 4 and then to 0 8 an
127. this example two event reactions are required The first watches the Start_Motor button an event and turns on the Motor_Run output if the button is pressed a reaction The second watches the Stop_Motor button and turns off the Motor_Run output if the button is pressed Event Reaction 1 Start_Motor Input changes from off to on Turn on Motor_Run output 2 Stop_Motor Input changes from on to off Turn off Motor_Run output Follow these steps to create this example event reaction 1 Launch OptoControl 2 Create two digital inputs Start_Motor and Stop_Motor and one digital output Motor_Run on a digital multifunction I O unit assuming one has already been configured 3 Add an event reaction to the same 1 0 unit 4 Configure the event reaction in the Add Event Reaction dialog box as follows a Enter Start_Motor as the name of the event reaction b Tab down to the Event Type field leaving intervening fields at their defaults c Under Event Type select MOMO Match d When the Configure Mask button becomes available click it to open the Configure MOMO dialog box Set the MOMO for Start_Motor to On and press ENTER f Tab down to the Reaction Type field and select Set MOMO Outputs g Click the Configure Mask button for the reaction to open the Configure MOMO dialog box again h Set the MOMO for the Motor_Run output to On and press ENTER i Click OK or press ENTER in the Add Event Reaction dialog box to accep
128. to a controller e Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 2000 workstation operating system with the most recent service packs e Atleast 128 MB RAM 256 MB recommended e Atleast 135 MB of available hard drive space e VGA or higher resolution monitor Super VGA recommended e Mouse or other pointing device e Installed Windows printer optional Additional Hardware Requirements To download and run OptoControl strategies you ll need an Opto 22 controller Check the controller s data sheet for required ports adapter cards cables or other hardware required to communicate with the controller Firmware Requirements Firmware is loaded on your Opto 22 controller so that you can download and run OptoControl strategies If your controller s firmware is not at the required release number you ll receive an error message You can download the firmware called OptoKernel to the controller as explained on page 4 26 OptoKernel is installed on your computer with OptoUtilities The most recent version of the firmware is always available on our Web site www opto22 com downloads OptoControl User s Guide xxiii rr NOTE If you have a non flash controller you will need to contact Opto 22 Product Support for an EEPROM upgrade Important Note on Disk Drives Opto 22 applications including OptoControl perform best when using files from a local hard disk Network drives may be used but performance may suffer and depends upon the speed and rel
129. to put comments about a strategy is directly on its flowcharts Start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode 1 To add text to a chart click the Text tool Al When you move the mouse onto the chart a rectangle representing the text area appears 2 Click the mouse button and type your comments If you type in more text than the text frame holds it expands in length 3 When you have finished typing click anywhere on the chart outside the text frame The frame becomes invisible and only the text appears To change the size or shape of the text block see Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks on page 7 14 4 Click in another location to create another text frame or release the tool by right clicking in the chart or choosing another tool from the toolbar 7 10 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Editing Text 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool R 2 Double click the text block you want to change A blinking cursor appears at the beginning of the text 3 Change the text as needed You can use any standard Windows CTRL key combinations when editing including CTRL arrow keys and CTRL HOME or END for navigation You can also use CTRL X cut CTRL C copy and CTRL V paste 4 When you have finished changing text click outside the text frame The text block stays the same width but changes length to accommodate additional or
130. ume EAE 2 3 Controlle S constanti ai wit A ene aeseusciaces AT U 2 3 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs ccc cssscsescssssessesescssescssesceseecessseessecenens 2 3 OptoControl Terminology lt x a sastecaccsacescastccasacdatasaiaacsisccancatscheelcdess gate eluieltaseatumsients 2 4 BE escalate a S 2 4 BNI MUA ct achat eft tudor A E ncaa mua tachorian 2 4 Multita s KING sedcosscastasinsansctsascrcuesapsescsenspnadiettatpansmapnsts iiaee iei eanais 2 5 EOI Sena E Ge hestakcaeteitvcesateiceas 2 5 IOV UO tht eeauue ectneeage eee odenad ah tacencotat E E mn atias 2 6 Instructions COMMANAS c ccececccesececeseseseseceseccecescesecerevecesvevececvevecesavevevseeveveeeeaes 2 7 OptoControl Main WindoW cached cath cedex Danced vc tbc aaldemigatcc dscns 2 9 Status B aree e ae E E E a E e accented 2 9 Mode oiee a 2 10 NS VA nen eenn a r E E 2 10 Moving TOOIDES ccicsinstendcceccakecestatdcasnitiddeash sean kontesctacbacicsscaconlehdesnceencedsmnaasbarascdeds 2 11 Hiding and Showing Toolbars c cccccescesesceseetesestesesssestesestssesesseseesssesteneseneaes 2 11 Strategy AE ats tceutt nda teases eae tenet nes cdapseesas tes outa aa ceca puted adindha snesassseteatatczeiveeaes 2 12 Windows and Dialog Boxes in OptoContrOl ou cccccseeescesestesesteseeteseeeeseetesesteteseeneseeees 2 13 Using Tabs to View Open Windows ccccsceccscsescesescseseseseseseseeseseeseseesescseseaneeeane 2 14 Docking WIndows texan ccxscsceseen
131. window Instructions Oven_Inspection_Control Blow Off Turn off reject valve Turn Off Reject_Valve Decrement cookie counter to account for reject New command Decrement Variable Cookie_Counter Command Help 12 Click Close to return to the Oven_Inspection_Chart Compiling and Downloading the Change Now we ll compile and download the modified strategy 1 Click the Debug mode button on the toolbar or choose Mode Debug A message box appears warning you that changes have been detected and asking if you want to download them 2 Click Yes to continue OptoControl User s Guide 1 33 QUICK START o You see the progress indicators as the changes are integrated into the running strategy 3 When a message asks if you want to initiate online changeover click Yes 4 When a message tells you how much memory is available click OK Now let s see what we ve accomplished 5 In the Oven_Inspection_Control chart click the Auto Step Chart button You see three blocks being processed Speed OK Oven On and Reject Cookie The strategy doesn t move into the Blow Off block That s because an inspector has to flag bad cookies but we don t have an inspector right now So we ll simulate what would happen by tripping the digital input that flags a bad cookie 6 In the Oven_Inspection_Control chart click the Auto Step Chart button again to stop auto stepping Step Auto changes to Step Off in the status b
132. 2 and stopped 1 Sometimes it runs at high speed sometimes at low speed but before a box can be put on the conveyor the conveyor must be stopped And it can only be stopped from low speed not from high speed Here s a portion of a chart showing the case statements that control this process Instructions Conveyor_Operation Get conveyor speed x Conveyor speed is aaa oe aa pe Add checked and moved From Conveyor_Speed_Sensor copied into a ee ee x To Conveyor_Speed HModity variable a a Ti ah ae Delete Next Block Each condition ee ai block checks for oa fa e ak Equal a particular a ee To 3 idol speed This one Lf sees checks for high speed 3 3 16 Next Block Previous Block ard nok i Soh He dca be Add From 2 eG To Conveyor_Speed_Control Modify Boa E Re a em es Swe I Delete Sa a hoe ee If speed is too hte GA L WewtBieck high itis shifted ar ee ee Previous Block down to the next Beh aa SER a en eae oe a level unt the conveyor is finally Help stopped and the box can be put on The example above shows three cases because there are three possible speeds and each speed demands a different action If you had only two possibilities for example if the box could also be put on the conveyor at low speed you could handle both id 1 Ee possibilities within one condition a Conveyor speed O block For example you could put Newt Block
133. 28 27 26 2524 23 2221 2019181716 1514131211100908 0706050403 02 01 00 Using Floats All analog values read from an I O unit are floating point numbers floats In OptoControl a float is a 32 bit IEEE single precision number ranging from 3 402824 x 10 to 3 402824 x 10 Note that this format guarantees only about six and a half digits of significance in the mantissa Therefore mathematical actions involving floats with seven or more significant digits may incur errors after the sixth significant digit For example a float to integer conversion of 555444333 0 yields 555444416 note the error in the last three digits Controlling Rounding Use the Round command to control rounding Note that 1 5 rounds up to 2 1 49 rounds down to 1 To round down only divide an integer by an integer 5 3 1 Mixing and Converting Integers and Floats An analog value read from an I O unit and put into an integer is converted from float to integer automatically However to maintain the integrity and accuracy of a numeric type float or integer keep all item types the same For example use the Move command to copy an integer value to a variable float when you want float calculations OptoControl User s Guide 10 31 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Logical Commands The following commands perform logical functions Equal AND Bit AND Equal to Table Element AND Bit AND Not Equal NOT Bit NOT Not Equal to Table Element NOT Bit NOT
134. 4 Creating Your Own TOMEI cisacsatiortstasiehreachachavtaxthedeshantncisdindizasouahcaetceiuas vas vedwendas 2 25 Setting Up Applications to Launch from OptoContrl cc cccceseeteseetesestesesteneees 2 26 Online TVS Ue oan ac ea sso seabed cece cease gl EA A 2 27 Chapter 3 Designing Your Strategy ssssssssussussnnurunnunnnnnnunnnnnnnununnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 1 UR ENE exh can ntsc kets ac etd a a aaa a a 3 1 My This Chapter crutair a a e o ducted 3 1 SIETOM LOM DIE o L EEE EE E E E EE 3 1 Solving the Problem cea serastassasicentendctcrnceassinchasacinecbactis actives encotschainichcesseacnseavedtacsinalccis 3 2 Defining the PRON ON ostsscisn nesacchaccosiaetacs cx esos wy xcestlnaWelap wopced cede iedhaseaet atid ciaoniades 3 2 Designing a Logical Sequence of Steps to Solve the Problem cccceeees 3 3 Testing the Steps icc ceecs2t ce daca codes ap en iceiantandagboseacndaaosaineatcastipteeaspuasastacmni tans 3 3 Building the EPUB cases stccoietas cteeacedehaccccainsta iaohsueted veetiniantedbeanmnstintacaeseeeiaadane 3 4 Configuring Hardware ah acacia sath ccna ec sen cece anne ect eatin caleba aadenlantaende taaees 3 4 Determining and Configuring Variables cccceccsssessesescescseesescsesesseseateseaeesees 3 5 Creating OptoControl Charts and Adding INStructions 0 cccceccsecesesesteneseeees 3 5 Compiling and Debugging Each Flowchart Compiling and Debugging the Whole Strategy esac cccincaszncaleceasesdacdeededendiieacas ad ac
135. 4 12 Configuring an Ethernet Connection ais scicscascsnishaceadsesscnsersusaedetaniinciatloaisancuesonccacitalaes 4 13 Configuring a Server Connection sxicccsciacsacinccstarewaeranetioatielasaheadymreenaniedud enters 4 14 Associating the Controller with Your Strategy c ccccscccsssceseeteseetestetesesteseetesneee 4 15 Setting Up Controller Ports secscastncacserdtetncencncunsrscmadtatssenctensnimscimsiratanteratiaciactsiassisncemnenstiatiass 4 15 Changing or Deleting a Controller c ccccccccecessesesteseseesescsesesesesnsseseseseeseseessscsneneaencans 4 17 Changing a Controller s Configuration c ccccseteccsscicasecccssacacsacesdsccealtassesbeneeaccssaiaedbes 4 17 Changing the Controller that Receives the Downloaded Strategy ccccceeeceee 4 18 Removing a Controller s Association with a Strategy ccccccsceeecesteteeeteseeteeeeen 4 18 Deleting a Controller from Your PU ctccirarpacsnai stensansetatcencencanntapcebarvasinonsusineduatnathcoudes 4 18 Using Redundant Communication sscsce secsvatsnescencannapaceccasast extends tacinetestactacisnatasdasdnadeatiaiiess 4 19 Inspecting Controllers and Errors cescecsececseseeceesecseeseeseceeseseneseeeseeenesesseeseneneenseaeeess 4 19 Inspecting Controllers in Debug Mode sc cccseseeseeseeseseeeseeeeseseeseeseesteeneeeeneanees 4 19 Viewing the Error Queue cccsecceceeseeseeseesesseeneenssecseeneenseecseaneeeeeeeseaeeteeeseeaneeeeeess 4 21 Inspecting Con
136. 40 VAC 0 Closed 1 Open LAL 101 Chip Level Alarm Input G4IAC5 90 140 VDC VAC 0 OK 1 Low XS 103 Inspection Signal Input G4IAC5 90 140 VDC VAC 0 OK 1 Reject SV 103 Reject Valve Output G40AC5 12 140 VAC 0 Closed 1 Open XS 105 Emergency Stop Input G4IAC5 90 140 VDC VAC 0 Stop 1 OK OptoControl User s Guide D 3 D 4 OptoControl User s Guide APPENDIX E OptoScript Command Equivalents Introduction This appendix compares standard OptoControl commands to their equivalents in OptoScript code See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript and Appendix F OptoScript Language Reference for more information on OptoScript The following table lists both action and condition commands in alphabetical order The Type column shows whether the OptoScript command is a function command F or a procedure command P Function commands return a value from their action procedure commands do not For more information on command type see More About Syntax with Commands on page 11 13 Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Absolute Value AbsoluteValue Of F Accept Session on TCP Port AcceptSessionOnTcpPort TCP Port F Add x y F Add User Error to Queue AddUserErrorToQueue Error Number P Add User I O Unit Error to AddUserloUnitErrorToQueue Error Number P Queue I O Unit AND x and y F AND See A
137. 6 on String Verify Forward CRC 16 on String Generate Reverse CRC 16 on String Verify Reverse CRC 16 on String NOTE All numbers in this discussion of strings are decimal unless otherwise stated An OptoControl string is a sequence of characters that can be grouped together Characteristics of strings include the following e e Each character is represented by one byte characters from one device to another Strings are always referred to by name and if in a table by index Each character is represented by its ASCII code 0 to 255 A string containing no characters is referred to as an empty string Strings are frequently used in serial communication as a container for moving numeric Although a string may appear to contain numeric values it does not Digits 0 through 9 are characters just as much as A through Z they do not represent numeric values To illustrate let s look at the number 22 This is a decimal number representing a quantity of 22 The number 22 can be represented in a string in several ways here are two of them As 22 two character 50 s The ASCII 10 14 OptoControl User s Guide code for 2 is 50 As 16 a character 49 1 and a character 54 6 The hex value of 22 is 16 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Note that the string representation of the number 22 is no longer a number It is simply one or two ASCII characters The string representation of a number
138. 909 695 3000 Modem m o OWP mm Protocol lt Back Cancel A Enter a descriptive name for the port All characters are valid B Enter the number of times you want OptoControl to reattempt communications Any integer from zero to 255 is valid the default 1 is a good choice It indicates a total of two attempts at communication If your modem line is susceptible to errors you may want to increase the number of retries C Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in B Any positive integer is valid the default of 1000 is a good choice D Using numbers and hyphens enter the phone number you are calling E Select the type of modem The drop down list shows all modems configured on your computer F Select ASCII protocol Click Finish and skip to Finishing a Direct Connection on page 4 12 4 10 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring an ARCNET PCMCIA Port Windows NT Only If you chose ARCNET PCMCIA in the Port Selection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure Arcnet PCMCIA Port Port Name JARCNET PCMCIA Porl Timeout msec 11000 Select Card Manufacturer OL Retries Contemporary Control Systems Inc PCM20 D 1 0 Pott 0x300 E Interrupt 7 F N
139. 96 60 1 01 a SOH 33 21 6 41 A 97 61 a 2 02 B STX 34l 2a 66 42 B 98 62 b 3 03 C ETX 35 23 67 43 c 99 63 c 4 04 D EOT 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 5 o5 E ENQ 37 235 69 45 E 101 65 e 6 06 F ACK 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 7 07 G BEL a9 or 71 47 G 103 67 g 8 08 H BS 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 9 o9 HT 41 29 73 49 105 69 i 10 0A J LF 42 2A 74 4a J 106 6A j 14 0B k VT 43 B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0c L FF 44 20 76 4c L 108 6c 13 0D Mm CR 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 0E N so 46 2E 78 4E N 10l 6E n 15 0F 0 s 47 2F 79 4F o 111 6F o 16 10 P DLE 48 30 0 80 50 P 12 70 p 17 11 Q Det 49 3i 14 81 51 a 13 71 q 18 12 R DC2 50 32 2 82 52 R 14 72 r 19 13 S DC3 51 33 3 83 53 s 115 73 s 20 14 T DC4 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 U NAK 53 35 5 85 55 u 17 75 u 22 16 v SYN 54 36 6 86 56 v 118 76 v 23 17 w ETB 55 37 7 87 57 w 119 77 w 24 18 X CAN 56 38 8 88 58 x 120 78 x 25 19 aY EM 57 39 9 s9 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A z SUB 58 3A 90 5A z 122 7A z 27 1B ESC 59 3 9 5 I 123 7B 28 1c A FS 60 3c lt g2 5c 124 70 29 1D 4 GS 61
140. Auto appears in the status bar The hatch marks move from block to block as each block s commands are executed When you reach a block whose code is currently being executed the highlight around the block becomes changing shades of green instead of solid red If the chart contains flow through logic the chart stops when it has been stepped through If the chart contains loop logic the autostepping continues until you stop it by pressing the Auto Step button again Stepping Into a Subroutine If a block in a chart calls a subroutine you can examine the subroutine s execution by stepping through it just as you would a chart 1 With the calling chart open turn on single stepping block or line or autostepping You must be stepping through a chart to step into a subroutine the chart calls 2 Click the Debug menu and make sure Step Into Subroutines is checked When the chart reaches the block that calls the subroutine a window opens for it Hatch marks within the subroutine window show its progress You can turn off stepping or pause or stop the subroutine but you cannot set breakpoints OptoControl User s Guide 6 15 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES When the subroutine is finished its window closes You return to the calling chart and continue stepping through it Setting and Removing Breakpoints Sometimes you want to see the action at one or two blocks without having to step through an entire chart You can use a breakpoint to stop a r
141. Causes 29 Timeout No Controller When this error appears as a queue error it response Possible indicates a problem between the controller and the cause bad cable bad I O unit address power shut Improper jumper settings address baud protocol off etc at the I O unit Low power supply voltage at the I O unit No power at the I O unit or bad communication link to the I O unit Missing terminator on the ends of the communication cable Two or more I O units with the same address See Resolving Timeout Errors 29 or 29 on page A 6 30 Invalid port number Controller Valid Ethernet session numbers are 0 to 127 Valid target address or ARCNET addresses are 1 to 255 session number Sending a peer message to the same controller analogous to talking to yourself Firmware error 31 Return checksum Controller CTS low on an RS 232 host port error Sending long strings to a host port Port timeout delay too short Loose communication wiring Firmware error 32 Bad table index Controller Negative table index value Table index value greater than the table length Using Move Analog I O Unit to Table without having 16 table elements available 35 Invalid number error Controller A math operation resulting in a complex or imaginary number such as the square root of a negative number 36 Divide by zero error Controller A math operation tried to divide a constant or on controller varia
142. Chart Start Host Task ASCII Chart Running Start Host Task Binary Chart Stopped Stop Host Task Chart Suspended Get Chart Status Set Priority Get Priority Call Chart Calling Chart Running Calling Chart Stopped Calling Chart Suspended Continue Calling Chart For information about charts in an OptoControl strategy see OptoControl Terminology on page 2 4 For information about host tasks see Optimizing Throughput on page 3 20 Questions and Answers about the Task Queue How much CPU time can a task use Up to 100 Suppose there are three tasks in the 32 task queue each with one time slice a priority of 1 In this case each task uses 33 33 of CPU time If you use Set Priority to give the third task two time slices a priority of 2 the first two tasks would each use 25 of CPU time and the third task would use 50 of CPU time two consecutive 25 time slices The number of consecutive time slices allowed for each task ranges from 1 to 255 and can be changed on the fly under program control See the commands Set Priority and Set Priority of Host Task What about subroutines Whenever a chart calls a subroutine the subroutine temporarily inherits the task in use by the calling chart along with its priority Does a task always use all of its allocated time Not always If a chart or subroutine runs in a loop all allocated time is used If a chart or subroutine does not need all of its allocated time to com
143. Control commands See Appendix E OptoScript Command Equivalents for more information 5 Click OK The command appears in the OptoScript code 6 To use a variable table I O unit or point chart counter event reaction timer PID loop or similar item place your cursor where you want the item to appear in the code If you know the item s exact name enter it and skip to step 8 If you re not sure of the item s name click the Select Variable button in the toolbar Select Variable x Name Cancel Help 7 From the Type drop down list in the Select Variable dialog box choose the type of item you want to use From the Name drop down list choose the item Click OK The item appears in the code OptoControl User s Guide 11 27 USING OPTOSCRIPT 8 Use the TAB key on the keyboard as you type to indent lines as needed To increase or decrease indentation for a line of code you ve already typed highlight the line and click the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent button in the toolbar 9 Enter comments to document what the code does so anyone who must debug or maintain the code can clearly see your intentions Comments appear in green Line comments must be preceded by two slashes for example This is a line comment Block comments must be preceded by one slash and an asterisk and be followed by the same two elements in reverse For example This is a block comment that goes beyond one line 10
144. Control you download the software program to an Opto 22 controller and the controller runs it as a stand alone application Since the instruction set is stored in the controller s electronic memory much as a small computer would store it the PC can be turned off or used for other operations while the controller runs the program And the instructions can easily be modified when necessary In the diagram on the previous page one controller runs the program that controls three areas of automation Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs An industrial process can include many different hardware components switches pumps tanks valves furnaces conveyors photo eyes thermometers and so on All the components communicate with the controller by way of input output I O points Input points are wired to hardware that brings information into the controller from the process Examples of devices that can be wired to input points are thermocouples switches and sensors The controller takes the information from the input points such as whether a switch is on or what temperature is registered on a sensor processes it using the software instruction set and returns information to the process through output points Output points are wired to hardware that receives information from the controller and uses this information to control components of the process For example lights motors and valves are all devices that can be wired to output points
145. Control Errors appear in dialog boxes on the computer screen e Queue Errors appear in the controller s error queue e Status Codes appear in variables OptoControl Errors OptoControl errors indicate a problem within OptoControl that may have been reported by the controller or may have occurred before controller communication OptoControl errors appear in dialog boxes on the computer running OptoControl Some of these errors appear as numbers some as descriptions and some show both numbers and descriptions An example of an OptoControl error is Controller Type Invalid See page B 3 for a list of common OptoControl errors and their possible causes See OptoControl Troubleshooting on page A 1 for additional help OptoControl User s Guide B 1 o Queue Errors Queue errors indicate an error during strategy operation and they appear in the OptoControl error queue For information on viewing the error queue see Inspecting Controllers and Errors on page 4 19 Here s an example of an error queue If an OptoControl command caused the error the chart and block number the command appears in are listed View Errors T Ioj x Number of Messagefs 2 Show Errors First10 C All Emut Evo Code Deseo at Pop First Enor Timeout No response Possible cause b INIT_IO Timeout No response Possible cause b INIT_IO Clear Errors Queue errors are generally shown as positive two digit numbers althoug
146. Customizing OptoControl for Your Needs Setting Decimal Binary or Hex Display Mode You can set up OptoControl to show the values of all integers and integer tables in decimal the default binary or hexadecimal format Binary and hex formats help you use masks Hex format is particularly useful for entering integer literals and initial values for a digital only SNAP ENET D64 Ethernet brain Hex view is available in all modes Configure Debug and Online The default view is in decimal notation as shown in the following figure Cookie_Counter Yiew Variable scanning PEG Name Cookie_Counter Shrink Type integer 32 Variable Initialized On Strategy Run Security 0 Value 118 Apply Add Watch Help To view integers and integer tables in binary view click the Binary Integer Display button on the toolbar EJ or choose View Binary Integer Display The integers appear as shown below Decimal view Cookie_Counter View Variable scanning PEG Name SERRE _ Shrink E Initialized fOnStrateyRun Security o Binary view All the bits cannot be shown at once Value 20000000 oO000000 ooo00000 01110 Bits 31 16 00000000 00000000 Here you can see all the bits shown in bytes so masks are easy to understand Click on a line to see its place in the string 15 0 00000000 01110110 Ay _Addwatch Help To view integers and integer tables in hex view
147. ED UGIIG ican caccnniacactariwencenc dan entenkscanierdsnuceutsaceddedspvaneandacdecdesatdoctscacetee 6 4 Closing a Strategy censctcbscactaccchisncsa ttle Gent habaai Ai A A cee RAA AN ccelag 6 4 Saving to Flash and Archiving vices sh seactasnaciathccatcahaasaata sha ciecaians eases cen sncsedabiamectaanestaninuigeieass 6 4 Saving a Strategy to Flash eset aicaichastarchssbechesecvniehceaciesedichstinasttaisadsdekolesinebnenchdchacencaasentate 6 4 Archiving Strategies ah i a8 eka taeda tae tae Sled ec spouse dnd lnenlaasdabacieSes 6 5 Archiving to the Computer as cecacracasatsaasantmsevadbsenseaccncassans satendimctasts atatineediacastneinsaaaias 6 5 Archiving to the Controller scciccccstisccssscacdcsdseveschhashdeteseisdesastencasadeckansatesesdehssiasnesedte 6 5 Compiling and Downloading ssa eS ocd candace sasccacdaascasecdiabsctpaneidaatesosdaecatheateanncdhenapaesadindss 6 6 Compiling and Downloading in One Step oo cccccssescsesessesestesestesesteseesaseseaseecanens 6 6 Compiling without DOW A IING vices ciscseceessestsveacauensdectecsnieatiauradtccevadaatenteutssncensndecs 6 7 Compiling the Active Chart or Subroutine oo cscesesesessesestesesteseetesestaneananens 6 7 Compiling Changes Only saciscdpcraiarcsecsccnacelctscaceheunee oedneueiatasvadnesteciiebeesachacenetcastadcans 6 7 Compiling the Entire Strategy s0s11s0s11ssisssisiniisssiisssisssiinssnisisnissnnesnrinnnrrnenns 6 8 Downloading Only ss cate tes 0s cra ct versa da dnednasc ise d
148. ENAP Analog Unit A Type E3000 Snap nalog B3000 B3000 HA Add Modify Analog Out Delete Move 1o 03 Not Used 04 Not Used 05 Not Used 06 Not Used Expand All NOTE To see how this dialog box might look after configuring SNAP Ethernet I O points see the figure on page 5 20 OptoControl User s Guide 5 17 WORKING WITH 1 0 8 Highlight the point you want to configure and click Add Add Analog Point E x Name Description Ww gt Type Output v C Module SNAP AOV 27 10 10 VDC Scalable E Scaling F D Full Range Clamping Actual Scaled Units voc voc poe ooo Lower jio Upper fio Clear Default Default f No C Yes Watchdog No C Yes JV Enable Security fo Cancel Help 9 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a name for the point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Optional Enter a description of the point C Type and module are inserted for you You may be able to choose a different range or a scalable module from the drop down list Full range and units for this module If the module is scalable use F to change scale E SNAP outputs only optional Enter upper and lower clamp if necessary to limit output to th
149. ES CE Ee The View Table dialog box appears showing the pointer table s name length and the items pointed to You cannot change a pointer table entry in this dialog box s Pointer_T able View Table scanning Iof x Name Pointer_Table Length a Initialized Jon Strategy Run Security jo Leo Switch_0_Status Process_Timer 2 null 3 Port_Busy LS Inspect Add Watch Help 2 To view the status or value of the item pointed to highlight it in the table and click the Inspect button If you need help follow the steps in Viewing Numeric and String Tables on page 8 15 OptoControl User s Guide 8 17 USING VARIABLES 8 18 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Using Commands Introduction This chapter shows you how to use the commands or instructions in OptoControl and discusses the mechanics of adding commands to your strategy flowcharts For command information to help you program your strategy effectively see Chapter 10 To find out how to use commands in OptoScript code see Chapter 11 For a list of all standard OptoControl commands and their OptoScript equivalents see Appendix E In This Chapter Adding COMMAS serrian 9 1 Configuring a Continue Block Changing or Deleting Commanids 9 5 Viewing and Printing Chart Instructions 9 8 Cutting Copying and Pasting Commands 9 7 Adding Commands To make a block in a strategy flowchart do the wor
150. Flash After you have downloaded a strategy you may want to save it to your controller s flash EEPROM By default a strategy is downloaded to the controller s RAM However if you save the strategy to the controller s EEPROM it is protected in case of a power loss and in case the RAM backup battery also fails If your controller has flash EEPROM when you finish working on your strategy and have downloaded it you should save it to flash With the strategy in Debug mode choose Controller Save Strategy to Flash 6 4 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Archiving Strategies Strategy archives help you track changes during development and provide a backup in case of a failure on the controller or on the computer where the original files are kept Archive files are date and time stamped and zipped for compact storage We recommend you archive both to the computer and to the controller Archiving to the Computer Archiving strategies to the computer is an excellent way to track changes over time and to produce a zipped file you can copy to another computer or disk for backup Archives are always placed in the same folder as your strategy Since a new archive file is created each time you archive a strategy remember to manually delete any old archive files you do not want to keep OptoControl offers three ways to archive strategies to the computer e To make an archive at any time choose File Archive Strategy A dialog bo
151. G WITH COMMANDS 10 50 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Using OptoScript Introduction This chapter shows you how to create and use OptoScript an optional programming language that can simplify certain types of operations in OptoControl Modeled after computer languages such as C and Pascal OptoScript code gives you an alternative to using standard OptoControl commands You will find OptoScript easy to use if you already have computer programming experience Beginning programmers may also want to try it for control operations involving extensive math calculations or complex loops and conditions This chapter assumes that you have some programming experience Experienced programmers may want to see Notes to Experienced Programmers on page F 6 In This Chapter About OPTOSCHi pt ccccccascessenssssenctecaers 11 1 OptoScript Expressions and Operators 11 19 When To Use OptoScript c eee 11 2 OptoScript Control Structures 0 11 22 Converting to OptoSceript 11 10 Using the OptoScript Editor 11 25 OptoScript Functions and Commands 11 11 Troubleshooting Errors in OptoScript 11 29 OptoScript SYA ca acscaien dan caccccascacnstes 11 13 Debugging Strategies with OptoScript 11 30 OptoScript Data Types and Variables 11 14 About OptoScript Converting Existing Code to OptoScript 11 31 OptoScript is a procedural type of computer language similar to Pasca
152. GY Using the Interrupt Chart for Event Reactions We mentioned earlier that the purpose of the Interrupt chart is to handle interrupts from 1 0 units specially wired to the controller These interrupts are generally used for critical events requiring immediate action The Interrupt chart floats in the queue always ready if needed To use the Interrupt chart for event reactions you need to create three basic blocks e A condition block that determines whether an event has occurred e Action block s to clear latches and interrupts so the Interrupt chart won t keep on running e Action block s to take whatever action is necessary when the event reaction occurs for example to start an alarm chart or stop a process Here s how a simple Interrupt chart might look Interrupt 0 aaa a Block Condition block determining whether an event has occurred Action block clearing latches and interrupts CA oe se E bs a gt Action blocks taking necessary eoa a oei Foii e action when event occurs 10 Start Alarm Handler Notice that the Interrupt chart uses flow through logic so that it takes up no more time than absolutely necessary in the task queue For more information about time in the task queue see Optimizing Throughput on page 3 20 For more information about event reactions see Event Reaction Commands on page 10 23 3 12 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Error Handling Eve
153. Greater OR Bit OR Greater Than or Equal OR Bit OR Greater Than Table Element XOR Bit XOR Greater Than or Equal to Table Element XOR Bit XOR Less Bit Off Table Element Bit Clear Less Than or Equal Bit On Table Element Bit Set Less Than Table Element Bit Clear Table Element Bit Test Less Than or Equal to Table Element Bit Set Test Equal Within Limits Bit Rotate Test Not Equal Variable False Bit Shift Test Greater Variable True Bit Test Test Greater or Equal Set Variable False Test Less Set Variable True Test Less or Equal Get High Bits of Integer 64 Test Within Limits Get Low Bits of Integer 64 Make Integer 64 Move 32 Bits Understanding Logical Commands For condition blocks the Instructions dialog box provides options to designate AND or OR for multiple commands If you have more than one command in the same condition block and you choose the AND option all of the commands must evaluate true for the block to exit true If you have more than one command in a condition block and choose the OR option the block exits true if any of its commands evaluates true Logical actions and conditions work with integers individual bits within an integer a single digital 1 0 channel or a group of digital 1 0 channels a digital 1 0 unit These values are treated as Boolean that is they are either True or False Logical True and Logical False True can be represented by any non zero value OptoControl always uses 1 all 32
154. IDCSD 2 5 Digital Input fu ot User a Se a a A the or sign in the box ANa Usi fogNotUsed Jo o Too Soo So Points E 01 Not Used Ooo To T S ee 74 02 Not Used iF 03 Not Used 7 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a name for the point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Optional Enter a description of the point C Type and module are already filled in for you OptoControl User s Guide 5 13 5 14 WORKING WITH 1 0 D To use a feature of the module choose it from the drop down list You can configure some input modules with a counter on pulse off pulse frequency period on time totalizer off time totalizer or quadrature counter feature Inputs are automatically configured as both on latches and off latches You can configure an output module as a time proportional output TPO E To set a default state for the point when the strategy is run click Yes and choose the state Off or On To leave the point in the state it was before click No F Output modules only To set a Watchdog click Yes and choose On or Off from the drop down list G Select whether you want communication to this I O point enabled or disabled on startup Enabled is the default H Leave at 0 Security levels are not used except with a G4LC32 controller which has front panel access 8 When you have complete
155. Ifinspection station sees ae tee 4 atta gt abad ceokie open reject Brin rect a ee s valve for0 5 second Etim Points SE Pe pe a a a Q Dough_Pressure_Controi iga 1 S o a a L 9 Dough_Dispense vave JHI L Bloom 2 Hi Dough_Level_Switch 92 Chip_Dispense_Valve 4 1 It Chi An Chip_Level_Switch Sa ipi E st 0 e k 0 20005 3 Ka Inspection_Pass_Fail_Swi endeledd smi dart ii aac gt oe Dough_Chip_Control pa Cookie Watch Oven_Inspection_Control Cookie Counter Integer 32 Variable Inspection Pass Fail Switch Digital Input ED Nm 2 Counter decreased by one On latch reset to Of 18 Click the Auto Step Chart button to go back to autostepping The counter does not decrease again because the on latch is no longer set But the counter won t increase until we start the Dough_Chip_Control chart again 19 Click the Dough_Chip_Control chart tab Click the Pause button to unpause the chart Verify that Step On changes to Step Off in the chart status bar The watch window shows the Cookie_Counter value going up again 1 42 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START Te Ma Closing the Strategy and Exiting Before we finish this tutorial you may want to explore the sample strategy on your own You can double click items in the Strategy Tree or open up other charts to see what they do You can also double click command blocks to se
156. K START After zooming out the chart looks something like this Running f Step Off Break Off Dough Chip_Contol You can zoom back in if you wish using the Zoom In button on the toolbar or one of the other methods The chart s status bar indicates that it is running but we can t see much happening 8 Click the Pause button f One of the command blocks appears with hatch marks 9 Now click the Step Block button El The next command block is hatched 10 Continue clicking and watch how the program proceeds from Speed OK to Drop Dough to Drop Chips to Back to Speed OK and back up to Speed OK When a block that contains several commands is being executed you ll see it pulse in green While you are stepping through and anytime the Pause button is clicked the chart status indicates Step On 11 Click the Pause button again to run the strategy at full speed Step Off now appears in the chart status bar Auto Stepping The final stepping option is auto stepping You can select this option whether or not the chart is currently paused 1 28 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START Ue 1 Click the Auto Step Chart button and watch the program move from block to block At one time or another your chart looks like this The Powerup chart starts Sthischat oe ee This chartruns gt gt gt gt gt gt continuously once the Notice that in the OptoControl toolbar the
157. LUS and SNAP LCSX controllers all have the same processor 68020 at 16 MHz and a 16 bit data bus The SNAP LCSX and SNAP LCSX PLUS are limited to serial communication but M4 units have expansion slots for ARCNET and Ethernet M4 cards as well OptoControl User s Guide 3 21 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Understanding OptoControl Multitasking The Opto 22 controller can run up to 32 tasks at once using time slicing Tasks can include e Host task s which are usually vehicles for communicating with a PC running FactoryFloor e Ethernet handler task if an M4SENET 100 card is installed in the controller e Interrupt Chart e Powerup Chart e Any other chart or subroutine in your strategy that is running or suspended A subroutine assumes the time slice of the chart that called it The 32 tasks are not actually run simultaneously but in a round robin where each task gets 500 microseconds 500 usec of time before the controller moves to the next task in the queue If a task is finished before its 500 usec are up the controller moves to the next task sooner For example a suspended chart takes only about 10 usec Host Tasks Host tasks function as slaves which means they never originate messages but only respond to inquiries or commands The default host task runs by default if necessary you can add additional host tasks for other communications The default host task communicates with the PC running FactoryFloor It is specified o
158. ND F Append Character to String sl a P Append String to String sl s2 P Arccosine Arccosine Of F ARCNET Connected IsArcnetConnected F ARCNET Message Address IsArcnetMsgAddressEqual Address F Equal to ARCNET Node Present IsArcnetNodePresent Address F Arcsine Arcsine Of F Arctangent Arctangent Of F OptoControl User s Guide E 1 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS a Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Bit AND x bitand y F Bit AND See Bit AND F Bit Clear BitClear Item Bit to Clear x bitand bitnot 1 lt lt F nBitToClear Bit NOT bitnot x F Bit NOT See Bit NOT F Bit Off IsBitOff In Bit not x bitand 1 lt lt F nBitToTest Bit On IsBitOn In Bit See Bit Test F Bit OR x bitor y F Bit OR See Bit OR F Bit Rotate BitRotate Item Count F Bit Set BitSet Item Bit to Set x bitor 1 lt lt F nBitToSet Bit Shift x lt lt nBitsToShift F Bit Test BitTest Item Bit to Test x bitand 1 lt lt F nBitToTest Bit XOR x bitxor y F Bit XOR See Bit XOR F Calculate amp Set Analog Gain CalcSetAnalogGain On Point F Calculate amp Set Analog Offset CalcSetAnalogOffset On Point F Calculate amp Store Strategy CalcStoreStrategyCRC P CRC Calculate Strategy CRC CalcStrategyCrce F Call Chart CallChart Chart F Calling Chart Running
159. NTEGER_VARIABLE 456 789 for FLOAT_VARIABLE String Variable Test String for STRING_VARIABLE and to have pointer PTR_POINTER_VARIABLE point initially to INTEGER_VARIABLE you would include the following text in the initialization file 123 INTEGER_VARIABLE 456 789 FLOAT_VARIABLE STRING_VARIABLE SIN String Variable Test String INTEGER_VARIABLE MoveToPointer PTR_POINTER_VARIABLE Integer Table Example To set initial values of 10 20 30 40 and 50 for elements zero through four of an integer table named My_Int_Table include the following text 10 0 My_Int_Table TABLE 20 1 30 2 My_Int_Table TABLE 40 3 My_Int_Table TABLE 50 4 My_Int_Table TABLE My_Int_Table TABLE OptoControl User s Guide 8 9 USING VARIABLES Float Table Example For a float table the initial values must include a decimal point To set initial values of 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 and 5 5 for elements zero through four of a float table named My_Float_Table include the following text 1 0 My_Float_Table TABLE My_Float_Table TABLE My_Float_Table TABLE My_Float_Table TABLE oa AeA W N Oo A W N F BW NY F My_Float_Table TABLE wu wu wu String Table Example To set initial values of String 0 String 1 String 2 String 3 and String 4 for elements 0 4 of a stri
160. Natural Log Clamp Float Variable Clamp Float Table Element Clamp Integer 32 Variable Clamp Integer 32 Table Element Trigonometry Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent Hyperbolic Sine Hyperbolic Cosine Hyperbolic Tangent PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Using Integers In OptoControl an integer is a 32 bit signed number ranging from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 42 billion An integer can only be a whole number 1 0 1 2 3 etc In other words integers do not include a decimal point The result of an integer operation is always an integer even if it is placed in a float variable For example if 9 is divided by 10 the result is zero 0 9 truncated to an integer To receive a float result at least one of the operators would have to be a float A special feature of integers is that when all 32 bits are on the value is 1 since negative numbers are represented in two s complement form When all 32 bits are off the value is 0 A digital I O unit is considered a 16 bit unsigned integer For example if the status of all 16 channels of a digital O unit is copied to an integer using the command Get Digital O Unit as Binary Value the lower 16 bits bits 15 to 0 contain an exact image of the status of all 16 channels whether they are inputs or outputs The upper 16 bits of the target integer are not used The 32 bits are numbered left to right 31 to 0 as follows Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0 31 30 29
161. None IMAL VAL State OnLatch Do Oft Latch E Add Watch Help Close Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost Asterisks in a field indicate an out of range value Dashes in an XVAL field indicate a communication error 3 Change the fields as necessary A Current point status Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled To change the status click one of the arrows then click Apply B The point s current internal value Switch between On and Off then click Apply The point s current external value Switch between On and Off then click Apply D The state of the point s on and off latches if the point is on a digital multifunction or remote simple I O unit Also internal and external feature values if the point has been configured with any special features such as counter or pulse measurement O 4 To add the point to a watch window click Add Watch and see page 5 50 Inspecting Analog I O Points You can review an analog point s data modify its status or set its internal or external values in Debug mode To monitor the point in a watch window see page 5 50 To change the point follow these steps 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the 1 0 point on the Strategy Tree
162. OK A small box appears in the upper left corner of the main window You build your custom toolbar by placing the buttons you want in this box 4 In the Customize dialog box click the Commands tab Customize Commands tab e e a Dice tal sam sj 2lgj amp OptoControl User s Guide 2 25 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL 5 In the Categories list click the name of the standard toolbar that contains the button you want to place in the custom toolbar The buttons in that toolbar appear in the Buttons area 6 Click the button you want and drag it to its place in the small gray box Repeat until you have all the buttons you want in the custom toolbar 7 When you have finished building the custom toolbar click it to outline it and drag it into position in the OptoControl main window 8 When you have finished customizing toolbars click OK in the Customize dialog box Setting Up Applications to Launch from OptoControl You may find it useful to launch other software applications directly from OptoControl For example you may want to launch OptoDisplay Notepad or the Calculator from OptoControl You can set up OptoControl so that these applications appear in the Tools menu NOTE If you launch an application from within OptoControl when that application is already running a second instance of the application may open It depends on the application some check to see whether the application is already running and some d
163. OPTOCONTROL USER S GUIDE FORM 724 050810 AUGUST 2005 oOoPTO 22 43044 Business Park Drive e Temecula e CA 92590 3614 Phone 800 321 OPTO 6786 or 951 695 3000 Fax 800 832 OPTO 6786 or 951 695 2712 www opto22 com Product Support Services 800 TEK OPTO 835 6786 or 951 695 3080 Fax 951 695 3017 Email support opto22 com Web support opto22 com OptoControl User s Guide Form 724 050810 August 2005 Copyright 1998 2005 Opto 22 All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America The information in this manual has been checked carefully and is believed to be accurate however Opto 22 assumes no responsibility for possible inaccuracies or omissions Specifications are subject to change without notice Opto 22 warrants all of its products to be free from defects in material or workmanship for 30 months from the manufacturing date code This warranty is limited to the original cost of the unit only and does not cover installation labor or any other contingent costs Opto 22 1 0 modules and solid state relays with date codes of 1 96 or later are guaranteed for life This lifetime warranty excludes reed relay SNAP serial communication modules SNAP PID modules and modules that contain mechanical contacts or switches Opto 22 does not warrant any product components or parts not manufactured by Opto 22 for these items the warranty from the original manufacturer applies These products include but are not limited to
164. OptoControl in Debug mode or from the OptoTerm utility Inspecting Controllers in Debug Mode 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode click the Inspect Controller button R in the toolbar You can also double click the active controller the first one under the Controllers folder on the Strategy Tree or right click the controller and choose Inspect from the pop up menu or select Controller Inspect OptoControl User s Guide 4 19 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS The Inspect Controller dialog box opens Inspecting Controller Cookie Controller 5 xj A Controller Type SNAP LCM4 expanded flash B Loader Version B3 3g Firmware Version OptoKernel B4 1c C Revision Time 15 05 03 17 November 2004 D Available RAM 3 68 MB free E Controller Time 16 37 49 18 November 2004 Synce time to PC F Eror Queue 2 View Errors r Strategy Name Cookies G Time 16 36 01 12 November 2004 Status Running Run Stop H Archive NOT AVAILABLE l m Communication J LoopTime 170 msec K Eror No Error Here we see data relating to the controller A Controller type B Version of the loader software The loader is used to download firmware to the controller C Type and version number of the firmware kernel loaded on the controller and the date and time the version was released If a Cyrano kernel is loaded on the controller use OptoTerm to download th
165. OptoScript blocks extensively Many programmers like OptoControl s simplicity not for themselves but for the field technicians and maintenance personnel who will use it in the field While you could write an entire chart or conceivably an entire strategy in one block doing so would eliminate all the advantages of using OptoControl Consider limiting your use of OptoScript to math operations complex string manipulation and other logic most suited to scripting so you retain OptoControl s advantages for non programmers Language Syntax In the same way OptoScript syntax is meant to be simple enough for a beginner to understand but also easy for an experienced programmer to learn quickly Some programmers may wonder why OptoScript is not modeled after just one existing language such as BASIC or C Instead one can clearly see influences from Pascal BASIC and C OptoControl s target audience is one reason internal consistency with existing OptoControl commands and the capabilities and limitations of OptoKernel the Opto 22 controller firmware are other reasons Some aspects of OptoScript were designed to be consistent with existing commands For instance the bitwise and operator was named bitand in OptoScript because there is an existing command in OptoContro named Bit AND OptoScript provides all the functionality of the OptoKernel but is subject to its limitations For instance OptoScript provides some convenient ways of working with
166. Re ata k Pog aio ee YG Qy Numeric Variable ff fo PTs 3 Chart_Statr barf Dough Pre PP bay Setpoint IP PP De fal Start Flag WM ww ke Pe ee a a a String Variables 2 2 2 2 2 2 a Pointer Variable gt GRR Tab shows Numeric Tables Jo 7 te String Tables pak 5 i a b iR igis chart name Pointer Tables a Yo units ir Analog_IO_Unit Be Digital_IO_Unit Dough_Chip_Control OptoControl Ready Configure CAP NUM Z OptoControl User s Guide 1 7 QUICK START Let s take a closer look at what this chart does Even without its descriptive comments it s easy to see that this program segment begins by starting a conveyor belt If the belt is not running at the correct speed the process goes into a loop until the speed is correct When it is correct dough is dropped on the belt and then chips are dropped on the dough The process then loops back to re evaluate the conveyor speed waiting if it s incorrect and dropping more dough and chips if it s correct The rectangular shaped blocks are called action blocks They do things The diamond shaped blocks are condition blocks They decide things Charts may also have oval shaped blocks called continue blocks which route the program logic back to another block in the same chart Connections link the blocks together and show how the program logic flows Action
167. Run and Auto Step Chart buttons are depressed The chart status bar shows us the chart is running and in Step Auto mode The time indicator to the right of Break Off shows the time it took for the most recent block to execute 2 Click the Auto Step Chart button again to end auto stepping Step Off appears indicating the program is again running without interruption Now let s see how many cookies we ve produced to this point 3 On the Strategy Tree double click the numeric variable Cookie_Counter The Value field should increase every time a cookie is produced adding to the total number of cookies produced since the strategy run began The Cookie_Counter above shows this figure as 151 Yours may be different But Cookie_Counter tells us the total number of cookies put on the conveyor belt without considering that some of them may be rejected by the inspection station We need to subtract the number of bad cookies so that Cookie_Counter keeps track of the number of cookies sent out the door not just sent to the oven That requires a minor programming change We don t need to configure additional I O points or add a new variable We just need to make a quick change to one chart and the strategy can keep running while we do it OptoControl User s Guide 1 29 QUICK START Making an Online Change 1 Close the Cookie_Counter View Variable window Click the Online mode button on the toolbar or choose Online from the Mode menu
168. S ERORIS reee a E 10 34 Communication Modes s cccniccsaceassccscscssescesccreccenucidnsssacsasscantsessessanderdanecncuctdstasaceseases 10 34 Selecting ASCII Mode for a Host Port cccccceseseeestesescessseesescsescsneseseneees 10 34 Modes for Serial Ports csi cacsincescascescaaceadacsacsanchalanints mnendaavearhiedsinasanchtedncscetactbackte 10 34 Flow Control on Serial Ports sss11ssssisssiissssisssiissiisssiissnnisssrinniinsnnisnrnrsnrrnenrnnan 10 35 Changing Baud Rate and Number of Data Bits c ccccccccceseeceseeteseetesesteseseeeees 10 35 Communication l O Commands c ccccsscscsecccscscsssscsssscstssssccseseesecceseseseseseneeneseese 10 36 SNAP Ethernet Based 0 Units i cccccuscccsssssasantanaitacsclacaateiieaccapesedicsatedcsnagadlaseasansensans 10 36 Communication Network Commands ccccccescccssesesesteseseseseeseseeseseesesesesesteeeaeesees 10 37 Controller Port Assignments cccccsccsesscsecesesescsseseesescsuescsnssesneseseeseseesescsnescaeneane 10 37 Transmit and Receive Buffers sc scseasaiea cetiedinctec eaten utpiutsaceiacaevaahadeddadasccselandtatoatasheate 10 38 Buffer celts eV ops cescasersenereatenetseicanctesapscaaastanumaneaeaaiantantectactsctcacesbvedanatiaeaceacsies 10 38 Ethernet SESSIONS scceccincctissacsicseesaeraicat decks anastord sea bnadaasateciacd see ucseanivgrenceauseuaerincaes 10 38 OptoControl User s Guide xiii So Peer to Peer COMMUNICATION cececcsesess
169. Side 3 is evaluated only at the beginning of the loop not each time through the loop nSide 5 for nLength 0 to nSide 3 step 1 nSide 1 next For loops can be nested and can contain other types of statements Each for requires a next at the end Using the OptoScript Editor 1 To use the editor create an OptoScript block in the flowchart where you want the code to appear For more information on creating charts and blocks see Chapter 7 Working with Flowcharts Double click the OptoScript block to open the editor OptoControl User s Guide 11 25 USING OPTOSCRIPT The editor is similar to the editor for Microsoft Visual Basic OptoScript Oven_Control Block 3 x Toolbar yae ale jezl AAA A saopceofpv Z OptoScript Code Type OptoScript code in this area See results of test compile in this area Column and line numbers You can resize the editor window as needed to see the code The toolbar includes the following buttons Clear all bookmarks Insert action command Go to previous Increase Cut Paste Redo Replace bookmark indent Select variable ESE aE So AAAA E raofcofv Sf Test compile Copy Undo Find Go to next Toggle Insert condition command bookmark whitespace Set clear bookmark Decrease indent 2 Begin typing OptoScript code in the top area You ll notice that what you type is automatically color coded to help you e Blue operators and control structures
170. To Seconds On Point P E 16 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS EE ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Set Up Timer Target Value SetUpTimerTarget Target Value Up Timer P Set Variable False SetVariableFalse Variable P Set Variable True SetVariableTrue Variable P Set Year SetYear To P Shift Table Elements ShiftTableElements Shift Count Table P Sine Sine Of F Square Root SquareRoot Of F Start Chart StartChart Chart F Start Continuous Square StartContinuousSquareWave On Time P Wave Seconds Off Time Seconds On Point Start Counter StartCounter On Point P Start Default Host Task StartDefaultHostTask F Start Host Task ASCII StartHostTaskAscii On Port F Start Host Task Binary StartHostTaskBinary On Port F Start Off Pulse StartOffPulse Off Time Seconds On P Point Start On Pulse StartOnPulse On Time Seconds On Point P Start Quadrature Counter StartQuadratureCounter On Point P Start Timer StartTimer Timer P Stop Chart StopChart Chart P Stop Chart on Error StopChartOnError P Stop Counter StopCounter On Point P Stop Host Task StopHostTask On Port P Stop Quadrature Counter StopQuadratureCounter On Point P Stop Timer StopTimer Timer P String Equal to String Table s st 0 F Element String Eq
171. Trees Control 39 GetDayOfweek 4 occurrence s found For more information on any item in the search results try double clicking the item 6 28 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 5 To save the search results to a file or to print them click Print In the window that opens click the disk button to save or the printer button to print your search results 6 When you have finished your search close the Find dialog box Replacing You can also replace any operand or instruction with a similar item As in searching you can replace items in a strategy or one of its charts or you can replace items in a subroutine 1 Open the strategy or subroutine and select Edit Replace The Find and Replace dialog box appears Find and Replace x m Search Scope ryageprengeneees Find Next Globa Chari C Local alarms Replace r Search For Replace All Operand Instruction Close Type Name Find fal Valid Types 7 alarms Help Replace with fai Valid Types 7 alarms 2 Under Search Scope to search the entire strategy click Global To search one chart only click Local and choose the chart name from the drop down list If you are searching a subroutine the search is Local and the subroutine s name is shown 3 Under Search For choose one of the following e To search for a chart an O unit or point a PID loop an event reaction or a variable click Operan
172. Type E3000 Snap nalog Add 001 Not Used Modif 002 Not Used 003 Not Used Delete 004 Not Used v 005 Not Used Not Used Name Groups es Delete Group Name Reaction Not Used Not Used 3 Ifthe correct I O unit is not shown select the unit from the drop down list Since only multifunction units support event reactions they are the only units listed 4 Highlight an unused line and click Add or double click an unused line 5 32 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 rs The Add Event Reaction dialog box appears Add Event Reaction A EEE B EE C oi C D i s 9 B This figure shows the fields in the E dialog box when you first open it Depending on the type of event or reaction you select other fields may appear F G H 5 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a name for the event reaction The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores spaces are converted to underscores B Optional Enter a description of the event reaction C If you want the 0 unit to begin scanning for the event automatically as soon as the strategy is run click Yes If you want scanning to wait until it is started by a command in the strategy click No D Tohave the 0 unit generate an interrupt to the controller over the communication lines if the event occurs click Yes If not click No E From the drop down list select an event
173. UR STRATEGY other things For more information on delays and using controller time effectively see Optimizing Throughput on page 3 20 Each block in the chart contains the OptoControl commands instructions that do the work in the system For example here are the instructions for the block Turn sprinklers on Set timer Wi Instructions Sprinkler_Control Turn sprinklers on Set timer E3 Sprinkler_Switch Modify Set Down Timer Preset Value Target Value 900 0 pelete Down Timer Timer Next Block Start Timer Timer Previous Block As you create charts and enter instructions keep referring to the OptoControl Command Reference The Command Reference describes the arguments for each command which are pieces of information you must enter in the instruction You can also press F1 to open online help for commands which gives you the same information as in the printed Command Reference For example one of the commands shown above Set Down Timer Preset Value has two arguments The Command Reference and online help tell you that the first argument the target value or the value from which the timer counts down can be a float variable or a float literal and that the second argument is the name of the down timer variable You need this information when you enter the instruction in the Add Instruction dialog box Add Instruction x Instruction Set Down Timer Preset Value 7 Select Comment
174. Use the Bookmark buttons in the toolbar as needed to set or clear temporary bookmarks within the code and to move between them Bookmarks mark lines of code so you can easily find them and jump from one bookmark to the next Bookmarks only remain while the editor is open they are not saved when the dialog box is closed 11 When you have finished entering all the code for an OptoScript block click the Test Compile button in the toolbar to compile the code for this block The code is compiled and the results appear in the bottom part of the OptoScript window OptoScript Table Repeat Loop x aals Afr 0 rvobeopv F OptoScript Code repeat repeat ntTable nl nl set the table element to be equal nl nl 1 7 increment the counter until n1 10 break out of the loop every 10 10 20 30 etc ntTable nl1 nl until nil 100 wil Results after code is compiled Cancel Help in 12 Col20 NOTE The next time the chart is compiled all OptoScript code within the chart will be compiled again If errors are found you can fix them now or later Begin with the first one the one on the lowest numbered line since later errors are often a result of earlier errors If you need to add variables or other items that don t exist in the strategy do so after step 12 11 28 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT CE Ee 12 When you have finished with the code in t
175. Viewing and Printing INStruCtions secant citastnctcsaoeeicencuscangetbca ods ciniaetesbachaedsesaattecanisins 6 23 Viewing and Printing Strategy Elements ccccescesscececsseecsseetsseseeteseetsseeteseeeees 6 24 Viewing and Printing a Cross Reference c cccscescsssscesestessscessseesesteteseetsseeteseeenes 6 25 View and Print a Bill of Materials ccc ccecccccsestecestesestetestesesteesteesesseesseeeeeeess 6 26 Searching and REOIACING xiscecedcesaasdeicedcusessiscadgoedbeaatanhenasecsachscasssuassnsdbevaddalsatdserdensadgeeasaes 6 27 BU NNN accep ate connsestcs cede kadnedea seasasers A 6 27 PVC PU AGO iaio e deca ccc daz ae cteaaeclessestteceamboesacedesans E 6 29 Expanding the Command Set sivesiconcenckndiaieateccertictiovieeeusseeasCectatealerneselndaerieamanmanaccnteuaieniee 6 30 Including an External Instruction File ace ccascosenseseexsacacsccsscanaayazisaeiecs sesnatnsceadnadiactacideoncac 6 30 the SUBrOutNE innara nannaa a aE 6 31 Inthe Strategy as tp hat sesh ci heh as Maca a dedi ei 6 31 How to Include the File io Sic aidcus nce cede eatcicedasdctdeendesdcaseatactddendentabiacednateacas 6 31 Downloading the Associated Forth File c ccccccccessesesteesesesceseseesescstesesteseseeeseens 6 32 Adding an External Instruction to a BOG Ki cos ostsciaceceacasedzarccsechotasbasacsateeecaetaescsassiacian 6 33 OptoControl User s Guide ix So Chapter 7 Working with FlowchartS ssssssssssesunenunnnnunununnnenennununennnnun
176. a strategy previously used with a multifunction 1 0 unit to now use a SNAP Ethernet based I O unit or if you are writing a new strategy for a SNAP Ethernet based I O unit be aware that the commands listed below and on the following page are not available for these I O units as Ethernet based brains do not support their functions Generate N Pulses Get amp Clear Analog Filtered Value Get amp Clear Analog Totalizer Value Get amp Restart Off Pulse Measurement Get amp Restart Off Time Totalizer Get amp Restart On Pulse Measurement Get amp Restart On Pulse Measurement Get amp Restart On Time Totalizer Get amp Restart Period Get Analog Filtered Value Get Analog Square Root Filtered Value OptoControl User s Guide Get Off Time Totalizer Get On Pulse Measurement Get On Pulse Measurement Complete Status Get On Time Totalizer Get Period Get Period Measurement Complete Status Ramp Analog Output Set Analog Filter Weight Set Analog Totalizer Rate Set TPO Percent Set TPO Period WORKING WITH 1 0 as i Get Analog Square Root Value Start Continuous Square Wave Get Analog Totalizer Value Start Off Pulse Get Off Pulse Measurement Start On Pulse Get Off Pulse Measurement Complete Status Changing Configured I O Units 1 To change a configured 1 0 unit make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Find the I O unit s name on the Strategy Tree Double click it to open the Edit 1 0 Unit dialog box 3
177. ac celcs cases tend ccnmte sect octet borbetreebdonedancon sex achachde ata senensontesnsaeuinsceetiants 11 13 More About Syntax with Commands oiia ccic cccctcissscssdssdestsnoencsnctastastnsaexedccosedeaciacanantae 11 13 OptoScript Data Types and Variables c cciccscctacsacsccssanncsctensensesserecsaenssasatsasineisstssesatantiainas 11 14 Variable Name Conventions cccccsscsssscessscsssscsseessssecsssseessessssseessecessstetssneseseess 11 14 Using Numeric Literals emeeea ete ee me renT neeEa te tern e Done er annmnerIe center Stef tr 11 15 Making Assignments to Numeric Variables 0 ccccccccecescsecteseeteseeteseetsesnesesnees 11 16 Using WANN Sect sega escaadeseests asaaiasactasascaniacedaetantnoaoniapndsebea eacecasteatecansetuanenesemamays 11 16 Working with OIMNES s orexs Ae cece anes ci sea scetacteetschceraulstssbestareisenmesteisuctenchtaeeedncns 11 17 Working with Tables sescasccisacedcetsetastiradietecticbineieianaceanttoniuausantivaeanaueaa ise 11 18 OptoScript Expressions and Operators cies ddviedsastcsadecsdonnostsaateadatiecielisalicdadectastn 11 19 Using Mathematical EXOreSSiOMS cc sciccsccrsesncadsetssensoncctsanncadsetsaciecaseisastessentasticesnenansd 11 19 Using Comparison Operators siczicaincisctcsdcasssccssabsassdocasconcssasucdecsaeecasdenashivacataasasanes 11 20 Using Logical MEG Te ONY Geb tot oca dts ois ces sedate cdensttaa tes onceesteabaetaghabacteesih ciacshtseinasaainaiss 11 20 Using Bitwise Operators c c cc
178. ace it at the top bottom left or right of the main window or of any docked window OptoControl User s Guide 2 23 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Moving and Deleting Buttons 1 Choose View Toolbars 2 In the Customize dialog box click the Commands tab Customize EI Toolbars Commands Commands tab Categories m Buttons pele seex al ej l amp l Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to any toolbar Description Cancel Apply Help 3 In the Categories list click the name of the toolbar you want to move the button from The buttons in that toolbar appear in the Buttons area 4 To change a button s position in its current toolbar click the button in the OptoControl main window not in the dialog box and drag it to the position you want 5 To move a button to another toolbar click the button either in the dialog box or in the main window and drag it to the toolbar in the main window where you want it 6 To delete a button from a toolbar click the button in the main window and drag it out of its toolbar 2 24 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL EE M Creating Your Own Toolbar 1 Choose View Toolbars 2 In the Customize dialog box make sure the Toolbars tab is open Customize Toolbars tab Basic 800x600 Toolbar nanie Sa S a LL 3 Click New Enter a name for the custom toolbar and click
179. actoryfloor c ccscecscscescscsescssesessesesceseateseacaseecaseaeenens A 15 Problems with Permissions in Windows NT uu ccccccsesesesesesestesescesesteseseesescsseseeneseeess A 15 Appendix B OptoControl Errors sccccsesscscseccessccsscsnesesssssnsencessssseesessansissesie B 1 TE Te EE See waar a e ea En B 1 Opto ontrol EOTS siirinsesi ianiai raatira aa Eara a iai B 1 PO ES erari rae E EE e B 2 Status COBS nenni ann a A ast achee asucals B 2 List of Common OptoControl Ertors isccccsctscicescascitscecsdcascsseseassessdbvadsaucssssacsvansescansascctsecedectla B 3 List of Common Queue Errors sssssssssiessssssrsteesssssstrteeesssrtrrieessssnrtrerestssnrrrerestnssrirerestnnss B 5 List of Common Status Codes scvatianssssssisatseastanocsess anncancattasuacaasnactacniviautrarsaseenensesseiseisentienesale B 9 Appendix C OptoControl Files sssssssssssenenenununnununununenennununununununnunununenenenen C 1 UI AU ANI gcncethc cence cue cecseased pac aneacds atasescedsecosaneasosesaaneuciamanasencaseaeiceseesepeeseasaumndionetaaeatea ie C 1 Files Related to a Strategy os ac anscnals acer cuter ticasseacseodienhi chcensticanstaulatnarteenncnasteinsdmabatnesiediiatnctld C 1 Files Associated with a Subroutine ccascecnsciscinasencdsetiatheesdennancasacaviatecesnctestantaciinatasdcenebianiets C 2 Files in the OptoControl Directory c ccccccsssscsssesseecssssescssesssseessseessseeeseesssesseesseeeseeess C 2 Appendix D Sample Strat
180. adecimal Integer 64 Literals assigned Hex notation starts with Ox Digits A F may be upper to variables or lower case dVariablel 0x0i64 nVariablel 0x0 dVariable2 0x10i64 nVariable2 0x10 daVariable3 nVariable3 0x12AB34CD nVariable3 0x12ab34cd 0x1234567890ABCDEFi 64 Float Literals assigned to variables Float literals may use scientific notation fVariablel 0 0 fVariable2 12 3 fVariable3 123 456 fVariable3 1 23456e2 fVariable3 12345 6e 2 OptoControl User s Guide 11 15 USING OPTOSCRIPT Making Assignments to Numeric Variables Values are easily assigned to variables Simple Integer 32 assignments Simple Integer 64 assignments nl 1 nnl 2164 n2 nil nn2 nnl Simple Float assignments Simple assignments between different data types fl 3 0 Types will be automatically converted to match PEE nli 4 0 nnl nl fl n1 Using Strings As noted in the section on syntax a string must be in double quotes An individual character can be used either as a string in double quotes or as an integer value representing that character in ASCII in single quotes When you assign a single character to a string use double quotes to avoid a syntax error Wan r sString a To change a single character integer into a string use the chr keyword as shown below sString Chr a n 97 sString Chr 97 sString Chr 97 Strings can be used
181. ag_Example_Chart Clear Port_Busy flag x eC Add Port_Busy Modity When this process is complete this block poe clears the flag Enee indicating that the port z is now available for 4 f arne use 3 18 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Pointers and Indexing This example of using pointers shows a traditional indexing problem The purpose of this small chart fragment is to get an index value and based on this value to read one of three inputs Without pointers the chart might look like this Mil x Without_Pointers i Indexing Chart OptoControl User s Guide 3 19 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Using pointers however this process can be streamlined With pointers the chart would look like the one on the right The chart first sets initial values for a pointer table Index retrieval remains the same using the Move from Pointer Table command you move the value from the pointer table to a pointer variable where it can be used The advantage of using pointers in an indexing situation becomes more obvious when the index range is much larger The traditional method of indexing shown in the first chart becomes cumbersome to program and consumes more controller memory due to the large number of conditional and action blocks required to resolve the index and get the data Optimizing Throughput See additional related information on throughput in Opto 22 form 723 the Opt
182. al Output Hom 0 a 4 Delete Add Instruction 2 Sedit Instruction Instruction x dialog box in 7 the strategy Subroutine Instructio m file name Prompt and Type parameters from the subroutine define the instruction in the strategy Is Greater Than The Pulse On Adding Commands and Local Variables Adding commands instructions to subroutines is exactly like adding instructions to charts For help see Chapter 9 Using Commands If you are using OptoScript code within a subroutine see Chapter 11 for help on creating code You may also need to add local items to be used in the subroutine only and discarded when the subroutine is finished Adding variables to subroutines is also like adding variables to charts For help see Chapter 8 Using Variables Note that commands and OptoScript code within a subroutine can use only the items in the subroutine s tag database 12 6 OptoControl User s Guide USING SUBROUTINES Ue Compiling and Saving the Subroutine 1 With the subroutine open select Compile Compile Subroutine When the subroutine has finished compiling the cursor returns to its normal form 2 Select Subroutine Save Using Subroutines This section shows how to use a subroutine in a strategy by including it in the strategy and then adding it as a command instruction so it can be called from a chart Including a Subroutine in a Strategy Since subroutines are independent of
183. alled MOMO must on must off A MOMO Match event monitors several inputs and or outputs on an I O unit for a match to a specific pattern A Set MOMO Outputs reaction defines a set of values for outputs on an I O unit You can use just a MOMO event just a MOMO reaction or both The following figure shows the additional fields and buttons that appear if you select the MOMO Match event or the Set MOMO Outputs reaction Add Event Reaction x The gray Must On Mask and A Must Off Mask fields show any Name Ay y current mask Description f Scan on Run f Yes C No Interrupt on Event C Yes No Event Type MOMO Match PaA Wi Must On Mask oMigure Mask ee A Event section Must Off Mask VE Decimal C Hex C Binary ZA Reaction Type Set MOMO Dutputs v Reaction Type tpu a Must On Mask Configure Mask Reaction section Must Off Mask Decimal C Hex C Binary V Enable Security fo Cancel Hep 1 To set up or change the must on pattern or must off pattern called the mask click Configure Mask in the Event or Reaction sections 5 36 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O a Le The Configure MOMO dialog box appears listing all 1 0 points you can set in the mask Configure MOMO 2 For each I O point click the scroll arrows to select On Off or X ignore When you have finished the mask click OK You return to the Add Event Reaction dialog box and the numerica
184. alled ARCTest can help you pick a good address ARCTest is available on the Opto 22 Web site at www opto22 com products upgrades utility htm Also take a look at the Application Note AN9809 available at www opto22 com support reference Checking the ARCNET LED The ARCNET LED on the controller indicates when the controller is transmitting to the ARCNET network ARCNET LEDs on older G4LC32 controllers indicate any ARCNET activity The Forth language commands used by a controller are called words Using OptoTerm you can query the words loaded on a controller and watch the ARCNET LED to make sure it stays on solid indicating that ARCNET communication is working A 10 OptoControl User s Guide Le To query a controller for its host words follow these steps 1 From the Start menu choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilitiesOptoTerm In the OptoTerm window right click the controller you want and choose Words from the pop up menu The Searching for Words dialog box shows that the query Is in progress Watch the ARCNET LED for activity as the query progresses When the query is complete the List of Control Words dialog box appears indicating that communication was successful Resolving Ethernet Communication Problems In addition to the suggestions in this section make sure you check the Troubleshooting appendix in the SNAP Ethernet Brain Users Guide for more help Resolving TCP IP Cannot Connect Errors
185. an This is not an error See Optimizing OptoServer Scanning in Chapter 2 of the OptoServer User s Guide List of Common Queue Errors The following errors or messages may appear in the controller s error queue The table shows them as positive numbers but they may appear in the queue as positive or negative numbers No Message 1 Undefined command The controller did not understand the command Generated by controller Possible Causes A digital I O unit with the address and port of an analog I O unit or vice versa Old controller firmware Not specifying a required command library file to be downloaded See Downloading Additional Files for a Strategy on page 4 24 A downloaded library file does not include the referenced command Typo in a file being downloaded library file G4LC32 TRM file or include file Checksum or CRC error I O unit or controller it s communicating with controller while communicating with a PC Incorrect or loose communication wiring High noise level on the communication line Missing terminator on the ends of the communication cable RS 485 422 only Twisted pair cable not used RS 485 422 only Incorrect cable used for ARCNET or Ethernet connections Two or more I O units with the same address Buffer overrun or bad length error I O unit Incorrect or loose communication wiring High noise level on the communication line Missin
186. and down arrow buttons 5 Repeat step 4 for each parameter To change a parameter highlight it and click Modify To change the order of a parameter in the list highlight it and click the up or down arrow button in the dialog box To delete a parameter highlight it and click Delete NOTE You cannot delete a parameter that has a reference count greater than zero indicating that it is used by another item in the subroutine 6 When the parameters appear the way you want them in the list click OK The parameters you have named can now be used in the subroutine s commands OptoControl User s Guide 12 5 USING SUBROUTINES oe Configured Parameters Example Here s an example of a completed Configure Subroutine Parameters dialog box showing three parameters to be passed into the subroutine When the subroutine is called from the strategy these parameters appear in the Add Instruction dialog box Configure Subroutine Parameters OF x Subroutine Name Group Variable Increase Notification Subroutines hd Subroutine s OptoScript Name Names used in the subroutine variable_Inctease_Notification may differ from those used in Comment the strategy Pulse on horn output arg 3 if Counter arg 1 is greater than Previous_Counter arg 2 Prompt Lie N TE Add Integer 32 Variable Counter Greater Than Integer 32 Variable Previous_Counter D Modity The Pulse On Digit
187. and already be familiar with some of the menus such as File Edit View Window and Help This section discusses some things that may not be familiar Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the window shows you information about OptoControl When you move your mouse over the toolbar a description of the button you re pointing to appears in the status bar The status bar also indicates the mode OptoControl is in To hide or show the status bar choose View Status Bar A check mark next to the menu item means the status bar will show no check mark means it is hidden If there is an error when the controller tries to run the strategy the word ERROR appears ina red box in the status bar Click the red box to open the Inspect Controllers dialog box see Inspecting Controllers and Errors on page 4 19 OptoControl User s Guide 2 9 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Mode You can run OptoControl in three modes Configure Debug or Online The current mode is shown in the status bar on the right Toolbars and menus change depending on the mode e Configure mode is used to create modify save and compile strategies and flowcharts to configure controllers I O and variables and to work with subroutines e Debug mode is used to download run and debug strategies and to view controller and communication status and errors while the strategy is running e Online mode is a scaled down version of Configure mode used to change a strategy
188. and run in Debug mode Chapter 2 What Is OptoControl An introduction to OptoControl key terminology and the main windows and toolbars Chapter 3 Designing Your Strategy Programming in OptoControl how to get from your real world control problem to a working strategy Chapter 4 Working with Controllers All about configuring and communicating with controllers Chapter 5 Working with 1 0 How to configure and communicate with input output 1 0 points OptoControl User s Guide xix Chapter 6 Working with Strategies Detailed steps for creating compiling and running strategies Chapter 7 Working with Flowcharts Detailed steps for creating and working with the flowcharts that make up your strategy Chapter 8 Using Variables Steps for configuring the six types of variables you can use in programming numeric string pointer numeric table string table and pointer table variables Chapter 9 Using Commands Adding the commands that control 0 Chapter 10 Programming with Commands mportant tips on using OptoControl commands to accomplish what you want in your strategy Chapter 11 Using OptoScript Details on the optional scripting language available in OptoControl for complex loops conditions and mathematical expressions Chapter 12 Using Subroutines What subroutines are used for how to create them and how to use them in a strategy Appendix A OptoControl Troubleshooting ips for resolving com
189. anging an Element Back to the Defaults 1 Select the item and click the right mouse button 2 From the pop up menu choose Properties From the sub menu choose Copy from Default To change defaults see Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window on page 7 3 7 14 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Opening Saving and Closing Charts Opening a Chart Make sure the strategy is open In the Strategy Tree double click the chart you want to open You can also open a chart by selecting Chart Open and then double clicking the chart name in the Open Chart dialog box which lists all charts that are not currently open If a chart is open but not visible on the screen click the chart s name tab at the bottom of the window to make it visible Saving a Chart 1 Make sure the chart is open and is the active window 2 From the Chart menu choose Save Charts are automatically saved when you choose File Save All If you choose File Save Strategy or click the Save Strategy button i on the toolbar you can choose which charts to save in the Save Strategy dialog box Closing a Chart To close a chart click the close box in the upper right corner of the chart s window not the OptoControl window You can also close a chart by pressing CTRL F4 when the chart window is active If you have made changes to the chart you are prompted to save them Copying Renaming and Deleting Charts Copying a
190. anianasosaagadsaecamanseeteaenaanecwesoseue 10 7 TAMA A S iiir nasrai saaana aeei an aranan ia aniani 10 7 Controller CommandS cc cchentochss tects cased acradeachdoacnadasaadeGctacisesednats athsch dvsetbanrdkbepiconsciachacseabeaien 10 8 PRIMO YU ONION Sic ateacedec cnt theron cae dtatestantaciabien cleleasta deen cdaaiecdace Meacaiactanteeauts 10 8 Error Tle NMG ismeret a ai esdaanant watsaiaatences tectautactatheckevaeseuasecsstheaean 10 8 Chart Commands cS deadeactansccaceacardcnta ete dinchiachetoaae chemouton dha each denceanten antontasrcestonammeentianveters 10 9 Questions and Answers about the Task QU UC ccceceesceeetesesteseetesesteteseeteseeees 10 9 Time Date COMMING S cate nceienonteiteetiearzencecancantGestesiansctaeancbesscsadsastactsesiediioumeteseametestianate 10 10 Miscellaneous Commands tcscnacnansssmsecsccsecsencesesteeeeesacninrsatnctmjettessetoctactscsianiusdnadmaswnssstisese 10 11 Delay COMUNE NS secisecstkcaececzuesuedasciaicicebcasusaiee coekepdacate mamoaeuemcebuchahas Weieasibcadedeaeleasals 10 11 Comment Commands a cesses eccancasesaazaseasnscnsohs esesteastesenass oucancaesannieattsshstaticuassasincthendese 10 11 Using Ulin g DeaeMPeeP oa enpRE OR RBne oie e te ane ERISA RDS RPP RPE mOnnE RTE AI SIT AEE pO TED rOR BAD Re nop nUaT Tver re 10 12 Down Timer Operation eepeemepeeeneneeneeere te Rerter reenter oirt ee teapinnrnien oheereter renertnee neers 10 12 Up Timer PGA acs ehh ctciesenses crass eutash mada ta Seated Shee
191. ar 7 Click the Pause button Step Off changes to Step On 8 Click the Breakpoint Too button w and click once on the Blow Off block A breakpoint hand appears on the block 9 Click the right mouse button or press ESC to release the tool Notice that Break On now appears in the chart status bar While conveyor speed ae 5 r ee is out of spec set oven a de hia Be Bp Sees temperature to 200 ii cop e 23 ke E R a degrees N a E E E E 3 Set oven temperature to gt aren 450 degrees A hs SS SSA Break On eter aa D a Foe ah to et Dl ae ae Running StepOn Break On 5 376 Sec fioo z Dough_Chip_Control tab Dough Chip_Contro Oven_Inspection_Control 10 Click the Dough_Chip_Control tab at the bottom of the OptoControl main window The chart appears 1 34 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START rs 11 Click the Pause button to pause the chart The Powerup chart starts gt thischart gt 0o This chartruns gt gt gt gt gt continuously once the gt J Running Step On Break Off 0 000 Sec 100 E Dough Ctin Conto Using a Watch Window To see clearly what we re doing we ll create a watch window to monitor cookie production 1 In the Strategy Tree double click Cookie_Counter The value is frozen at some number such as the 175 shown above Since the counter is no longer increasin
192. ar All to select none of the charts or click Select All to select all of the charts 3 When only the charts you want to save are highlighted click OK The strategy and the highlighted charts are saved OptoControl User s Guide 6 3 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Saving the Strategy to a New Name 1 To save the strategy and all its charts under a new name choose File Save Strategy As 2 In the Save Strategy As dialog box navigate to where you want the new strategy to be Create a new folder if necessary Remember that each strategy must be in its own directory 3 In the Strategy Name field enter the new strategy name Click Save The strategy and all its charts are saved under the new name in the new directory Saving Before Debugging When you change to Debug mode you are prompted to save a strategy you have modified If you don t want to be prompted to save before entering Debug mode choose Configure OptoControl Options and click to remove the check box for Prompt To Save Strategy Before Running Debugger Closing a Strategy To close a strategy click the close box in the Strategy Tree or choose File Close Strategy NOTE Since only one strategy at a time can be open in OptoControl creating a new strategy or opening an existing strategy automatically closes any current strategy first If you ve made changes to the current strategy you are prompted to save them Saving to Flash and Archiving Saving a Strategy to
193. ar Analog Totalizer Value 10 6 OptoControl User s Guide I O Unit Commands PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS The following commands are used to communicate with Opto 22 brains which control a group of I 0 points an 1 0 unit Digital 1 0 Units Get Digital 1 0 Unit as Binary Value Get Digital 64 I O Unit as Binary Value Set Digital 1 0 Unit from MOMO Masks Set Digital 64 1 0 Unit from MOMO Masks Move Digital 1 0 Unit to Table Move Table to Digital 1 0 Unit Move Digital 1 0 Unit to Table Element Move Table Element to Digital 1 0 Unit Get Digital 1 0 Unit Latches Get Digital 64 O Unit Latches Get amp Clear Digital 1 0 Unit Latches Get amp Clear Digital 64 I O Unit Latches Analog 1 0 Units Move Analog I O Unit to Table Move Table to Analog 0 Unit Table Commands Mixed 1 0 Units Get Mixed 1 0 Unit as Binary Value Set Mixed 1 0 Unit from MOMO Masks Move Mixed 1 0 Unit to Table Move Table to Mixed 1 0 Unit Simple 64 1 0 Units Get Simple 64 0 Unit as Binary Value Set Simple 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks Move Simple 64 I O Unit to Table Move Table to Simple 64 0 Unit Get Simple 64 0 Unit Latches Get amp Clear Simple 64 1 0 Unit Latches All 1 0 Units Configure 1 0 Unit Set I O Unit Configured Flag Write 1 0 Unit Configuration to EEPROM Set Number of Retries to All 1 0 Units I O Unit Ready The table commands listed above for digital analog mixed and simple I O units affect the states or valu
194. ar Counter PID Commands The following commands are used with proportional integral derivatives PIDs Note that these commands cannot be used with SNAP Ethernet brains or SNAP PID V modules Set PID Setpoint Get PID Mode Set PID Input Get PID Output Set P Term Get PID Output Rate of Change Set Term Get PID Control Word Set D Term Get PID Scan Rate Set PID Mode to Auto Clamp PID Output Set PID Mode to Manual Clamp PID Setpoint Set PID Control Word Disable PID Output Set PID Output Rate of Change Disable PID Output Tracking in Manual Mode Set PID Scan Rate Disable PID Setpoint Tracking in Manual Mode Get PID Setpoint Enable PID Output Get PID Input Enable PID Output Tracking in Manual Mode Get P Term Enable PID Setpoint Tracking in Manual Mode Get Term Get D Term Using PIDs The PID algorithm used with mistic protocol brains such as the serial B3000 and the G4A8R is the velocity PID algorithm It is an interacting type with a reverse output e nteracting means that the gain is distributed to each term in the equation Therefore if you double the gain you also double the integral and derivative terms 10 42 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS e Reverse output means that the output increases as the input decreases The reverse output mode is used for pump up control such as maintaining level pressure and flow as well as heating For cooling or pump down control direct output is
195. art that doesn t get executed very often that you can easily start and stop Open an action block and add one Write 1 0 Unit Configuration to EEPROM instruction for each 0 unit containing event reactions to be stored OptoControl User s Guide 10 29 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 2 Using OptoControl in Debug mode download and run your strategy Running your strategy causes the chart to execute Or you can double click each appropriate 1 0 unit on the Strategy Tree and click the Save to EEPROM button in the View 1 0 Unit dialog box Removing Event Reactions Previously Written to Flash EEPROM at the I O Unit 1 Using OptoControl in Debug mode download a program to the controller but don t run it with the specified 1 0 unit configured but with no event reactions defined 2 From the Controller menu select Reset 0 3 Open the Powerup chart and click the Pause Chart button 4 Click RUN to clear the RAM at the 1 0 unit 5 On the Strategy Tree double click each 1 0 unit containing event reactions and then click the Save to EEPROM button in the View 1 0 Unit dialog Mathematical Commands The following commands perform mathematical functions Add Subtract Multiply Divide Modulo Decrement Variable Increment Variable Maximum Minimum Round Truncate Generate Random Number Seed Random Number Absolute Value Complement Square Root Raise to Power Raise e to Power 10 30 OptoControl User s Guide
196. artup 6 2 load last strategy at startup 6 2 local subroutine parameter 12 2 local variable 12 2 log file C 2 logic converting Boolean true to standard true 10 33 in charts 3 8 3 25 logical commands instructions 10 32 logical true and false 10 32 loop logic 3 8 M mask 10 33 master chart 3 9 3 25 mathematical commands instructions 10 30 message on screen programming example 3 11 minimum maximum value 10 5 mode Configure definition of 2 10 Debug definition of 2 10 Online definition of 2 10 Mode toolbar 2 11 modem port 4 10 modifying See changing MOMO 5 36 5 49 10 25 monitoring See inspecting and viewing moving block 7 12 connection line 7 12 I 0 point 5 21 text block 7 12 to another window or chart 2 14 toolbar 2 23 toolbar buttons 2 24 toolbars 2 11 multitasking 2 5 3 22 and strings 10 15 must on must off See MOMO N naming block 3 10 7 7 chart 3 10 7 16 conventions 3 9 1 0 points 3 10 variables 3 10 number converting to string 10 21 as i numeric table adding 8 7 as alternative to strings 10 15 numeric variable adding 8 5 0 offset and gain commands instructions 10 5 10 6 offset definition 10 6 online help 2 27 Online mode avoiding memory problems 2 10 definition 2 10 opening applications from OptoControl 2 26 chart 7 15 strategy 6 2 watch window 5 52 operator AND OR 9 4 OptoControl customizing 2 22 definition 2 1 desi
197. asses the inspection it moves on to packaging and shipping Conveyor The conveyor and its motor continuously move the cookies from the dough vessel to the inspection station The conveyor speed is controlled through an analog output SY 104 from a speed controller SC 104 D 2 OptoControl User s Guide Ue Required Emergency Stops Wired at key locations around our bakery are emergency stop buttons If something goes wrong with the process an operator can press any of these E STOP buttons The buttons are wired in series and are normally closed so pressing any E STOP button breaks the circuit One digital input can monitor all the buttons The system can be restarted by resetting the button I O Here s the list of analog and digital I O modules required for the cookie factory Analog 1 0 Name Description Type Module REW PT 100 Dough Vessel Pressure Input G4AD3 4 20 mA 0 15 psig TT 102 Oven Temperature Input G4AD10 100W RTD 50 350 C TY 102 Oven Temperature Control Output G4DA5 0 10 VDC 0 100 SY 104 Conveyor Speed Control Output G4DA5 0 10 VDC 0 100 Digital 1 0 Name Description Type Module States SV 100A Pressure Control Valve Output G40AC5 12 140 VAC 0 Closed 1 Open SV 100B Dough Dispense Valve Output G40AC5 12 140 VAC 0 Closed 1 Open LAL 100 Dough Level Alarm Input G4IAC5 90 140 VDC VAC 0 OK 1 Low SV 101 Chip Dispense Valve Output G40AC5 12 1
198. atch window 5 50 See also changing cross reference window 6 25 customizing toolbars 2 22 cutting block 7 13 command instruction 9 7 connection line 7 13 text block 7 13 Cyrano opening an older strategy 6 2 D data sorting in a dialog box 2 20 date commands 10 10 Debug mode definition 2 10 inspecting controller 4 19 inspecting 1 0 5 41 Debug toolbar 2 11 debugging changing speed 6 11 delay commands 10 11 using in condition block loops 3 25 deleting chart 7 17 chart elements 7 13 command instruction 9 5 command temporarily 9 6 controller from strategy 4 18 event reaction 5 41 1 0 point 5 24 1 0 unit 5 11 PID loop 5 31 Index 4 OptoControl User s Guide So toolbar buttons 2 24 variable 8 12 designing basic rules for strategies 3 8 for faster throughput 3 20 steps for 3 1 dialog box sizing columns 2 19 sorting columns 2 20 digital adding non SNAP I O point 5 14 adding SNAP digital point 5 11 changing 1 0 while strategy is running 5 43 counter 10 2 1 O unit commands 10 7 latches 10 2 10 3 MOMO event or reaction 5 36 point commands 10 2 point definition 2 3 pulse 10 2 pulse commands instructions 10 3 totalizer 10 2 disabling 0 10 4 docking Strategy Tree 2 14 watch window 5 52 DOS batch file 6 10 down timers 10 12 downloading additional strategy files 4 24 files using OptoTerm 4 26 firmware to controller 4 26 initialization file for table varia
199. ategy and convert it to an OptoControl strategy 1 Select File Open Strategy or press CTRL 0 or click the Open Strategy button S on the toolbar 6 2 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES EE l 2 In the Open Strategy dialog box click the Files of type arrow and choose Cyrano Strategy Files gml Navigate to the strategy you want to open and click Open When you open the Cyrano file it is automatically converted to an OptoControl strategy For more information see the online file Tips for Cyrano Users Choose Help Manuals Tips for Cyrano Users Saving and Closing Saving the Strategy and All Charts To save all your work quickly choose File Save All The strategy and all modified charts and subroutines are saved Saving the Strategy and Some Charts NOTE You cannot save changes to a subroutine this way To save a subroutine use File Save All or use Subroutine Save or Subroutine Save All 1 To save changes to some charts but not others click the Save Strategy button on the toolbar or choose File Save Strategy or press CTRL S The Save Strategy dialog box appears highlighting all charts modified since the last save In this example the Interrupt and Powerup charts have been modified Save strategy and selected charts Select All Clear All cme e 2 To save some charts and not others press CTRL and click any charts you don t want to save You can also click Cle
200. ave ars ap gn Gk Hap Gnas Bis Sain we wads OD gh ah ee ah eee degrees SRS ee Sek a a S Cat anan hammnmanntima ba Split bar is out of spec set oven temperature to 200 degrees 100 x 5 To return the window to full view double click the split bar again or click and drag it back to the top of the scroll bar You can divide a window into four views by splitting horizontally and vertically at the same time Remember that when you split a window you are looking at multiple views of the same chart or subroutine You do not create two different charts subroutines when you split a window Zooming in a Chart or Subroutine Window You can change the scale of any chart or subroutine window by using the zoom feature You can view chart elements at seven sizes from one eighth to eight times the normal size There are several ways to zoom e Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons on the toolbar e Press the or keys on the keyboard e With the flowchart window selected hold the CTRL key and scroll the mouse wheel e Right click an empty spot on a chart or subroutine window to display a pop up menu Select Zoom and choose In to zoom in at twice the size Out to zoom out at half the size or Reset to return the zoom to 100 percent e From the Window menu choose Zoom In Zoom Out or Zoom Reset OptoControl User s Guide 2 17 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL e To pick the zoom percentage you wa
201. ay Sec DelaySec Seconds P Disable Communication to All DisableCommunicationToAllIoPoints P I O Points Disable Communication to All DisableCommunicationToAlllIouUnits P 1 0 Units Disable Communication to DisableCommunicationToAnalogPoint Point P Analog Point Disable Communication to DisableCommunicationToDigitalPoint Point P Digital Point Disable Communication to DisableCommunicationToEventReaction Event P Event Reaction Reaction Disable Communication to DisableCommunicationToIoUnit I O Unit P I O Unit Disable Communication to DisableCommunicationToPidLoop PID Loop P PID Loop Disable Event Reaction DisableEventReactionGroup E R Group P Group Disable I O Unit Causing DisableIoUnitCausingCurrentError P Current Error Disable Interrupt on Event DisableInterruptOnEvent Event Reaction P Disable PID Output DisablePidOutput Of PID Loop P Disable PID Output Tracking DisablePidOutputTrackingInManualMode On P in Manual Mode PID Loop Disable PID Setpoint DisablePidSetpointTrackingInManualMode On P Tracking in Manual Mode PID Loop Disable Scanning for All DisableScanningForAllEvents On I O Unit P Events Disable Scanning for Event DisableScanningForEvent Event Reaction P Disable Scanning of DisableScanningOfEventReactionGroup E R P Event Reaction Group Group Divide x y F Down Timer Expired HasDownTimerExpired Down Timer F Enable Communication to All EnableCommunicationToAllIoPoints P I O Points Enable C
202. between zero and 100 units Edit PID Loop fx Name Temperature_Controller Description rica 02 Oven Temperature Controller Mode Auto 7 Options Scan Rate fi sec Input fio Point x Oven_Temperature x I Square Root MV Average Output Oven_Temperature_Control 7 Max Chg Rate Lower Clamp fo Upper Clamp 100 Setpoint Host 7 Initial Value fo Lower Clamp 32768 Upper Clamp 400 fi Integral 0 1 Derivative fo IV Enable Security 0 Cancel Hep The maximum change rate has been set to the full range 100 which means we are allowing the output to change as much as it needs to during each cycle The setpoint is read from the host device the controller and is initially set to zero It is clamped at 400 at the upper end For the PID calculation the gain term is one the integral term is 0 1 and the derivative term is zero The sample PID would appear in the Configure PID Loops dialog box like this i Type B3000 SNAP Analog B3000 Name Input Setpoint Output Mode Enable Description Add Temperatur Oven_ Host Oven_Te Auto Enabl 0 TIC 102 Not Used Modify Not Used Not Used Delete Not Used v Not Used i a 140 Unit Not Used Not Used 5 30 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 as Changing a PID Loop You can change the PID loop s configuration and its position
203. ble 8 11 strategy 6 6 6 8 without using ioControl 6 8 Drawing toolbar 2 10 drawing toolbar 7 3 drum sequencers using event reactions for 10 24 E editing See changing EEPROM 5 42 6 4 10 3 event reactions 10 29 elapsed time 6 18 emergency stop buttons using event reac tions for 10 24 error cannot delete item A 3 commands for error handling 10 8 different OptoControl version A 3 invalid port A 8 old response to new command A 7 port setup failed A 10 queue 4 21 B 2 send error A 10 status codes B 2 TCP IP cannot connect A 11 timeout A 6 types B 1 See also troubleshooting error handler programming example 3 13 Ethernet configuring controller 4 13 network communication commands 10 37 reading writing to brain memory map 10 36 troubleshooting communications A 11 event reaction adding 5 32 changing 5 40 changing while strategy is running 5 47 commands 10 23 configuration example 5 38 configuring 5 32 definition 10 23 deleting 5 41 example 10 26 execution speed 10 27 groups 5 39 hold buffer 10 25 Interrupt chart 3 12 10 29 interrupt commands 10 34 IVAL and XVAL 10 28 MOMO 5 36 5 49 monitoring in watch window 5 50 storing in EEPROM 10 29 viewing all in a strategy 6 24 6 25 example case statements 3 16 configuring SNAP 1 0 unit 5 4 control system 2 2 as i counter 3 14 creating messages to display on screen 3 11 error handling chart 3 13 event reaction
204. ble by zero 38 Bus error Controller An attempt to access invalid or protected memory areas firmware or library bug Failure in the controller hardware 39 Port already lockedon Controller Attempt to have more than one port open in a controller chart 40 I O unit not configured Controller Communicating to an I O unit that has not been configured I O unit configured as the wrong type 41 Reading hold for I O unit Attempt to read the event reaction data hold buffer wrong reaction type for an event reaction that is not configured with a read and hold reaction 43 Had to relock host port Controller An error occurring after an unlock command in QUIT OptoControl User s Guide B 7 No Message Generated by Possible Causes 44 Command not validon Controller The command is only for a specified controller and specified board doesn t apply to this one Example the command Get RTU Voltage Temperature applies only to an RTU controller 45 Destination string too Controller String variable too short for data specified short Attempt to put the date or time in a string with a length less than eight 48 Unknown response Controller Ethernet expansion card did not respond to from Ethernet controller Card may have failed to may require the daughter card controller to be rebooted A firmware problem or a task performing Ethernet communication that gets stopped by a bus
205. blocks exit through just one connection since they always go in one direction Condition blocks exit through two connections one for a true evaluation and the other for a false evaluation Opening a Block Let s see what s in a block 1 Double click the Drop Dough block The Instructions dialog box appears Instructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough x Open the dough valve Ladd Turn On Dough_Dispense_Valve Modify Delete 2 0 Next Block Close the dough valve Previous Block Turn Off Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Delay Sec Dough_Dispense_Valve Close Help Command Help This block contains three instructions Turn On Delay Sec and Turn Off Each one has a description above it 2 Double click the first instruction Turn On to see more about it You could also click it once and click Modify 1 8 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START as i The Edit Instruction dialog box for the Turn On command appears Edit Instruction I xj Instruction unon 7 Select Comment Open the dough valve Type Name Digital Output x Dough_Dispense_Valve OK Cancel Help Command Help Caneel Hep Command Helo Here we see the details of the command which simply turns on the digital output Dough_Dispense_Valve In other words it opens the valve 3 Close the Edit Instruction dialog box by clicking OK or Cancel 4 Back in the Drop Dou
206. cannot delete a variable that is referenced within the strategy Be careful when deleting variables since you cannot undo a deletion 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 On the Strategy Tree expand the Variables folder until you see the name of the variable you want to change Right click the name and choose Delete from the pop up menu The variable is deleted You can also delete a variable from the Configure Variables dialog box by highlighting the variable s name and clicking Delete Viewing Variables in Debug Mode While the strategy is running in Debug mode you can view Its variables and modify the value of a variable or of entries in a table You can also view several variables at once as well as other strategy elements by putting them into a watch window 8 12 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES EE Ue Viewing Numeric and String Variables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the variable you want to view The Inspect Variables dialog box opens The title bar includes the name of the variable and indicates whether scanning is occurring Name Mmea Type integer 32 Variable initialized On Strategy Run Security 0 Value RO O O OOOO Close Apply Add Watch Help Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before yo
207. cccsccssersssscsdscccsssccsccessesssesessaderscenscceessestecndescceneesaese 11 21 FG LE Macca ose ctccscatascazasa teas sasssce accancapuspinics ontavouetannce nen seoacecastucaunepeylaanionedieaas 11 21 OptoScript Control Structures 2c c0p occeorantamecmacnaccneAcest any xtanaciaciacdasisistdssnateatrncnetueunsestndencacds 11 22 f Statements ccc assets cicasssderiecansasatineciacaatasctndonisendenmene ti eee 11 22 Switch or Case es LR NSTI Sadat daca hea dea dates wt lalate ina deem atnaiead ads 11 23 While LOOPS riores iueiai sar sate tnd EEE E E 11 23 Repeat UO swscesuctes dsc aaasncdatesalsasisepinedsatapisasancatintecosaaunce ou sauvaasntieadietataasaaattese 11 24 Fop LOOPS Pe cca cde ct cece A us audaeacdiostattec trea hedtaseaceaedtacaaies 11 24 Using the DLO GE IEE ONEOM cc casacs ccasensstactcaenicdncanduacodsesearsstasdhcdnatsaseccaneheesethdeaceacestessatancs 11 25 Troubleshooting Errors in OptOSCript cccccsccsesesseseeteseeteseetsseetessseessstetsseesseeeseees 11 29 Unable To Find Me iniinis 11 29 For HOMMMMUMCINA Sa scsssnece ls ceeanectarnetddetduavesesnaheasasiackesdtasendeepdcscte Siedacddctastecadetdetalaes 11 29 For Variables or Other Configured It MS c cccccccsesesescsesestescsteseseseseseane 11 29 Common Syntax Errors cased sccrrsaseasieccasiassschcntstestncesenascnnoiantia Sintncaadctalaelanastastaceescten 11 30 Missing CUS acaba secatiets deste cencanec n aa E RAEES 11 30 MOEN GIRS Serenaan cies cass ase
208. cccseeestesesteteseeseees 10 27 Event Reaction Questions and ANSWETS c ccccccsessesetesesesteseseeesesescstesestesesneeeees 10 27 Using the Interrupt Chart to Handle Reactions that Generate an Interrupt 10 29 Storing Event Reactions in Flash EEPROM on the 1 0 Unit cece 10 29 Removing Event Reactions Previously Written to Flash EEPROM atthe AVIMPIAIN csaeectsts ceacater aceescerstsasiauestts tastes veshatavaneestis ot dinctatanadieem enter 10 30 Mathematical Commands assesses nceadasczecacdadslsacahcasteectasinachiosdesdbescheekintnaduchicittacesiastnataas 10 30 USING i 21s o paar ea ere eneeroer net Ser sts eee eR EDO AD ar a eMC MSR TR aaa a 10 31 RIED OAS pcaeccaeatescrscssenescestteneseegesatsseusacanenesaohcaesnsucutedennssaatactaass EEEE Aa 10 31 Controlling ROMINA cs soe eSetaas ans itesigsbensteaeaceneecaes i hacdensesueraeeed cha eindess 10 31 Mixing and Converting Integers and Floats cccccecesseseseeseeeseesesesescseseseneeee 10 31 lo ical STAIN ANN i se ieai inn n as aiaia Eas 10 32 Understanding Logical Commands si sccsicscssceccrsauscascecsacsvesssstessenscecasraiscncteccdestesnisedees 10 32 Logical True and Logical False sccncinsapscovancannssteaccacisesnapastettnetnassednednadtatiacascasass 10 32 Using SN etches ace essences se cdnctneede ath nln seh to ener neciaeeesshccuare te veaeeceee 10 33 Communication Serial COMMANAS c ccecccsccsesseeseeesessescsesesesseseeseseeseseeseseaeneaeneass 10 33 HO
209. ccurred or is occurring whether scanning is occurring and whether an interrupt is to be generated when the event occurs If the reaction type involves a read and hold operation a Read amp Hold Value field also appears in this area together with its internal and external values You can change any of the internal or external values If you do click Apply C Parameters of the event together with their internal and external values This example shows an I O point being monitored for the event For a MOMO Match event MOMO data will appear instead See MOMO Event Reactions on page 5 49 You can change the internal or external values If you do click Apply D Parameters of the reaction together with their internal and external values This example shows the PID to be activated and the sources of its input output and setpoint 5 48 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 a values We also see the internal and external values of the input output and setpoint Depending on the reaction type other parameters that can appear here include an 0 point an event to be triggered or MOMO data You can change any of the internal or external values If you do click Apply 3 To add the event reaction to a watch window click Add Watch and see page 5 50 MOMO Event Reactions When a MOMO must on must off event or reaction is involved the bottom of the event reaction dialog box looks different Start_Motor scanning
210. cedcentendahauheetoubacdedednaatasss 1 26 OptoControl User s Guide iii So Auto US MMA ts aceachchaetcas ack voce chide enacedtote ct wec con tenest leesedeitt sckaseckacbackbockechecheueiaoee 1 28 Making an Online Change rc wcrnnca bd ScvsigaecadiesdideteateandanmensStaancdassuanseeaeaaerale sbdeermmaliuents 1 30 Compiling and Downloading the Change c c ccccccscseeseseseseseseseseseseseeseseesesesnesesencans 1 33 Using a Watch Window hc acaccae gcc cas ccc acs seg tcc cardagcchascdcabsbonndaatenbua ouaeuaccaeuse anedtanaasiasaane 1 35 Closing the Strategy and Exiting se csesessecscrcsencsdapaseantaceasanatancerzetsensesaeisaslcsdcssiencunescensceaenataces 1 43 What s Next aera tcasc seeds see cates cptenacancceceh cont ducseacSon otha tise case eabtrccekecsoatoteacsiememsadtatiaateas 1 43 Chapter 2 What Is OptoControl s s sssssnsusununennunununununenununenennunenennnnunnnnnnna 2 1 Introdu CHON seee e a E eE E E a 2 1 In This Chapter ass os oa c Zecca catete cece tO sl pele carts cts SS ance cal Sage ek cdi ea toca aden eeaions 2 1 About TAO i PON coos ctsccceadeecbacaetjattsa ant iaas snesnecandenaanindocecenednnstantes tna cuscesaeauanesenagsaiannBieos 2 1 Control System Ae NINN cece sczcehec stage cache ec anctas carats eearenincbencohs Siac tavastanbecadeend 2 2 General Control Concepts cnc ccccescassniasncvacbscvacatsntisscucededsadenssteatsacasekas cicestadehebentrchelicisteteans 2 3 PUB ROI ND ash acces alc oan adeeb cm siete ed
211. chedaadacasatehoxists odassdvtanseeatencetastarsieasostectnecntabcens 3 21 Computer to Controller Communication LINK ccccccccseeeeeeeseeesesteseeteseeneees 3 21 GOIMUPCINE FT Al ECE We crseactnccsrntemasssesatustssedheasatixeuatseahastaetaetdelechachcnscnedmateaciaisaeheansice 3 21 Understanding OptoControl Multitasking 0 0 ccceccsccccsteseseetesesteseeesestesesteseseeneseees 3 22 HOSET ASKS dct oa ene tee Snead aoc ce Nadas TEE 3 22 Ethernet Handler TASK sccccnaticczcedcencesssscdsiaszanisescdielacl acldendesacstestactdosdecottadinasttaleacss 3 23 OptoControl User s Guide v So Interrupt Chart ee at aks semanas bac ncheessesehetoesshace te bosesceeaesncetaa teas tcseel nace Mediewivnscnted 3 23 Optimizing PC lt gt Controller Throughput cccincicssncscdseacsescsacsscssnensascnacaccsantentseaceccateniacs 3 23 Increasing Host Task PriOrity lt cc cscscoscaicscecssessectessccexsnseccccceassacacconesseccseasansaceed 3 24 Increasing Host Task Frequency ccccsccsesesesceseseesescesescssesessesesceseaceseaceseeeesees 3 25 Increasing Efficiencies in Your Strategy cccccccsescsesesescsteseseseseseseseseneees 3 25 Ensuring Data Freshness for OptoDisplay c cccccccccseesestetesceeseetesestesesereaee 3 27 Optimizing Controller lt gt 1 0 Throughput ccccccceescesesteesteeseeseseeesesteseaeeeaee 3 27 Using 1 0 Unit GOINGS 3 oxeacischscenesncesdeachasacnnrdasctaduriacs npiecnsstankarnsvhesnaseassteutensaies
212. cify the initial value for the input for the PID calculation This value must be between the low scale and high scale values B and C By default this value is set to zero B If Host is selected as Input source Specify the lowest possible input value The default is 32 768 C If Host is selected as Input source Specify the highest possible input value The default is 32 767 D If O Point is selected as Setpoint source Select from the drop down list the 1 0 point providing the setpoint value If the point doesn t exist enter a new name and add it OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O a il Setting PID Loop Control Options If you clicked the Options button in the Add PID Loop dialog box on page 5 26 the following dialog box opens PID Loop Control Options E x Automatic Mode Output Enabled Disabled A m Manual Mode Output Enabled Disabled 7 B Output Track Input C Yes No C Setpoint Track Input Yes C No D Reset C Yes No E 1 Set the options as follows NOTE Since you can switch between automatic and manual modes through the View PID Loop dialog box in Debug mode you may want to configure options for both modes A Automatic Mode If you want the PID calculation transferred to the output click Enabled the default If you do not want the PID calculation transferred to the output click Disabled In either case the PID will continue cal
213. configured You do not need to use the Start Counter or Start Quadrature Counter commands to start it OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS To keep a counter active after a power failure at the I O unit use OptoControl in Debug mode to write or burn the current I O unit configuration to EEPROM after the counter is started or use the command Write 1 0 Unit Configuration to EEPROM an 1 0 Unit command see page 10 7 Latches Latches are an extremely high speed digital function Both on latches and off latches are available Latches do not have to be configured When the value of a digital input point changes from off to on an on latch is automatically set While the value of the point may return to off the on latch remains set until cleared as a record of the change Similarly an off latch is set when the value of a digital point changes from on to off and it remains set until cleared To read a latch and clear it at the same time use the command Get amp Clear On Latch or Get amp Clear Off Latch Totalizers Digital totalizers track the total time on or off for a specific point For example you could track how long a pump fan or motor has been on Digital totalizers are useful for periodic maintenance Before using a totalizer you must configure the point with this feature See Configuring 1 0 Points on page 5 11 for help To check total time and leave the totalizer running use Get Off Tim
214. continuously The simple sprinkler chart has loop logic it runs continuously Chart Guidelines As you design your strategy put each sub process of your overall control problem into a separate chart within the strategy Remember that although you can have a maximum of 31 charts plus one host task running at once performance is usually better if only five or six are running at once For more information see Optimizing Throughput on page 3 20 In general follow these chart guidelines e Use the Powerup chart just to set initial values for variables perform setup commands and start the main charts Use flow through logic so the Powerup chart will stop as soon as the other charts begin e Use the Interrupt chart only for critical event reactions that send interrupts through direct lines from an I O unit to the controller If you are not using interrupts stop the Interrupt chart in the Powerup chart to reduce the number of tasks in the queue e Create one to three charts to monitor essential or time critical pieces of your process such as emergency stops on dangerous equipment or 1 0 that must be monitored continuously These charts should use loop logic so they are constantly running e Create a master chart or two to sequence through other charts which control all the other pieces of your process One of these master charts can check for errors manage alarms and do other general functions that are not time critical such as
215. copying the current time to a string for use by OptoDisplay e f a set of operations is used several places in your strategy put it in a separate chart and call the chart when needed If a set of operations may be called by two charts at once or is used in more than one strategy put it in a subroutine e Use the text tool to type a descriptive title in each chart and add any necessary explanations Keep blocks far enough apart to easily see the flow and if possible design the chart so its entire flow can be seen within one window If a chart becomes too complex split it into smaller charts e fyou use OptoScript code remember that it is not self documenting Be sure to add comments so that you or others can easily see what the code is doing e Within a chart use the start block for setting initial values but not for control If a block contains more instructions than can be easily traced and debugged break it down into two or more sequential blocks Naming Conventions To save trouble in the long run it s wise to establish naming conventions for charts blocks variables I O units and points controllers subroutines and so on If you name these elements in a consistent way from the beginning it is easier to find them in lists to see related elements and to know their functions without opening them OptoControl User s Guide 3 9 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Since OptoControl automatically alphabetizes these names you can p
216. cter via Ethernet the character is put in the transmit buffer but not sent To send what is in the transmit buffer you must use the command Transmit NewLine via Serial Port see page 10 33 Buffer Capacity For ports 4 and 7 the receive buffer can hold up to four messages with a maximum total length of 253 characters The Ethernet receive buffer can hold any number of messages totalling no more than 1 500 characters Ethernet Sessions Up to 128 host peer to peer and 1 0 unit sessions can be concurrently established on ports 8 9 and 10 This limit includes a maximum of 100 Ethernet 1 0 unit sessions per controller Note that the number of open sessions affects the speed of your controller Peer to Peer Communication Peer to peer communication is a method for two or more controllers to communicate with each other via ARCNET or Ethernet All communication via ARCNET or Ethernet is CRC error checked OptoDisplay and OptoControl in Debug mode can use ARCNET or Ethernet at the same time it is being used for peer to peer communication Peer to peer communication uses port 7 a virtual ARCNET port in the controller or port 9 or 10 virtual Ethernet ports in the controller 10 38 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Using ARCNET Peer to Peer Certain commands must be used to send data to port 7 such as Set ARCNET Peer Destination Address See example peer applications included with the OptoControl SDK or on the Opt
217. culating and will not be reset Manual Mode If you want the PID calculation transferred to the output click Enabled the default If you do not want the PID calculation transferred to the output click Disabled Manual Mode If you want the output to assume the input value click Yes You can use this option to create a signal converter for example 4 20 mA input to 0 10 V output since the output is proportional to the input Manual Mode If you want the setpoint to be set to the input value click Yes You can use this option to smooth the transfer when returning to automatic mode Manual Mode If you want to force the PID loop to reset when entering manual mode click Yes This option stops all calculations sets all process errors to zero and resets the scan rate timer leaving the output unchanged If you want the PID calculation to continue click No When you enter automatic mode however you cannot force a reset 2 When you have set the options click OK to return to the Add PID Loop dialog box OptoControl User s Guide 5 29 WORKING WITH 1 0 rr PID Loop Configuration Example Here s an example of a completed PID configuration for a temperature controller The PID modifies an output automatically every second The input is an 1 0 point called Oven_Temperature Its value is averaged before being applied to the PID calculation The output being driven is an I O point called Oven_Temperature_Control which must remain
218. d In the Find Type and Name fields choose the operand you want to replace from the drop down list In the Replace With Type and Name fields choose the operand you want to use instead e To search for an instruction click Instruction Click Action or Condition and choose the instruction you want to replace from the Find drop down list In the Replace With drop down list choose the instruction you want to use instead 4 Click Find Next When the first occurrence of the operand or instruction is found the Instructions dialog box it appears in is displayed 5 To replace this occurrence click Replace To skip it and find the next one click Find Next If you are replacing operands you can replace all occurrences at once by clicking Replace All If you are replacing instructions you must verify each one OptoControl User s Guide 6 29 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 6 If the Edit Instructions dialog box appears make any necessary changes and click OK to save them before moving on 7 When replacements are finished close the Find and Replace dialog box Expanding the Command Set While OptoControl includes an extensive set of commands instructions the command set can be expanded by using external instruction files External instruction files define commands in the format required by OptoControl and associate each command name with a Forth language command This associated Forth command is contained in a file required by the contro
219. d Oven_Temperature may change several times while its strategy is running but its name remains Oven_Temperature A variable stores one of five types of data floating point integer timer string or pointer When you create the variable you designate the type of data it contains e A floating point or float is a numeric value that contains a decimal point such as 3 14159 1 0 or 1234 2 A good example of a float variable is one that stores readings from an analog input such as a thermocouple e An integer is a whole number with no fractional part Examples of integer values are 1 0 1 999 or 456 The state of a switch for example could be stored in an integer variable as 1 on or 0 off e A timer stores elapsed time in units of seconds with resolution in milliseconds Up Timers count up from zero and Down Timers start from a value you set and count down to zero For example you could set a down timer to make sure a value is updated at precise intervals e A string stores text and any combination of ASCII characters including control codes and extended characters For instance a string variable might be used to send information to a display for an operator to see A string variable can contain numeric characters but they no longer act as numbers To use them in calculations you must convert them into floating point or integer numbers And a numeric value to be displayed on a screen must be converted into a string first
220. d from the controller it can be found on the network If the PING command cannot be found Verify that the PC has TCP IP bound to and configured on the network adapter If you are running Windows 95 or Windows 98 follow these steps 1 Choose Start Settings Control Panel and double click Network 2 Highlight the adapter in the list Make sure both NetBEUI and TCP IP appear just below the name of the adapter Click Properties 3 Highlight TCP IP and click Properties Verify that the IP address and subnet mask are appropriate for your network If you are running Windows NT follow these steps 1 Choose Start Settings Control Panel and double click Network 2 Click the Protocols tab Make sure both NetBEUI and TCP IP are listed Highlight TCP IP and click Properties 3 Highlight the adapter name in the list Verify that the IP address and subnet mask are appropriate for your network If you see the message Destination host route not defined the controller probably has an IP address and subnet mask that are incompatible with those on the computer Subnetwork numbers and netmasks must be identical on the controller and the computer If you see the message No response from host check the following e Are the computer and controller correctly connected Is the controller turned on e Are the IP address and subnet mask on the controller compatible with those on the computer If your host computer has more than
221. d so on until the best integral is found Derivative Tuning the derivative term is not addressed in these graphs because most PID loops are fine without it Derivative in the Opto 22 implementation of the velocity PID algorithm works fine for disturbance rejection the derivative should be kept very very low However using derivative does not work well for setpoint changes because it will cause spikes in the output This is because the derivative term of the velocity PID algorithm is calculated based on the error which is the difference between the setpoint and the process variable If the setpoint changes then instantly a jump in error occurs and results in a jump in output Therefore it is best to use a derivative term of 0 when cascading PID loops OptoControl User s Guide 10 47 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Tuning Graphs 0 5 x Integral Optirral integral Hoh Gin Lowintega Hgh Gin Optimal Itega 2x i Cotimd Gain Low tega Hgh Gain Hgh megad Optima Gain Optimal tega Optimal Gain Low Gain Lowlntegral LowGan Optima Integra Low Gin Hgh htegral 05x Gain an Vie Jid 10 48 OptoControl User s Guide Simulation Commands PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS The following commands are used for simulation and program testing Disable Communication to 1 0 Unit Disable Communication to All 1 0 Units Disable Communication to Digital Point Disable Communication to Analog Point Disable Communication to All 1 0 Point
222. d the fields click OK The new point appears in the list Configure 1 0 Points e Xx 120 Unit SNAP_Digital_Unit_A Type e3000 Snap Digital 83000 B3000 HA Desci Le Modules and Points Type Features Units Enabled _ Ref Count ii 00 SNAP IDCS5D 2 5 Digital Input 00 Pump_1_Status Te 01 Not Used z 2 elete Enabled Ie i Move To ij 01 Not Used ieee i A 02 Not Used Eee EA 103 Not Used _Expandall perca gt NOTE To see how this dialog box might look after configuring SNAP Ethernet I O points see the figure on page 5 20 Adding a Non SNAP Digital I O Point Dialog boxes differ for configuring SNAP and non SNAP 1 0 points For SNAP points see Adding a SNAP Digital 1 0 Point on page 5 11 For I O points that are anything other than SNAP use the following steps 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the 1 0 Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree 2 Highlight the digital 1 0 unit the points are on and click 1 0 Points OptoControl User s Guide The Configure 1 0 Points dialog box appears Configure 1 0 Points 1 0 Unit EERSTE Name oo Not Used 01 Not Used 02 Not Used 03 Not Used 04 Not Used 05 Not Used 06 Not Used oF Not Used 08 Not Used na Alak l land w WORKING WITH I O lolx Type a4 Digital
223. d the file choose All Files from the Files of Type drop down menu The download begins and a dialog box shows its progress Downloading Firmware to the Controller Before you can run an OptoControl strategy the correct version of the OptoKernel firmware must be downloaded to the controller and the brain The latest kernels are available on our Web site www opto22 com For flash based controllers those that contain flash EEPROM rather than EPROM chips you can use the OptoTerm utility to download If you have used Cyrano note that OptoTerm replaces the Flash200 utility used to download firmware for Cyrano 4 26 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS CAUTION When you download new firmware to a controller any strategy that s running on the controller is stopped and deleted from the controller s memory If you are running OptoControl either close it or return to Configure mode before downloading new firmware Debug mode interferes with the download 1 Put the controller into Boot to Loader mode Setting up the controller to boot to loader usually requires changing jumpers See the controller user s guide for instructions On the computer click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilities OptoTerm EE OptoTerm yx File Tools Configure View Help Cookie Controller mistic1 SNAP_LCSX OptoRuntimePC Number of Controllers 4 In the OptoTerm window
224. d type of data current average maximum minimum or total to be read Select the I O point from a drop down list or specify a new name for the point and configure it Activate PID Loop Deactivate PID Loop Specify the PID loop to be affected Select the PID from a drop down list or specify a new name for the PID and configure it Set PID Loop Setpoint Specify the PID loop to be affected and the setpoint value Select the PID from a drop down list or specify a new name for the PID and configure it Set Analog Output Ramp Analog Output to Setpoint Specify the I O point and the value to set it to Select the I O point from a drop down list or specify a new name for the point and configure it Specify the I O point the ramping speed in units per second and the end point value to ramp to Select the I O point from a drop down list or specify a new name for the point and configure it OptoControl User s Guide 5 35 WORKING WITH 1 0 G To enable communication to this event reaction click to place a check mark next to Enable To disable communication click to remove the check mark H Leave at 0 Security levels are not used except with a G4LC32 controller which has front panel access 6 Click OK The event reaction appears in the Configure Event Reactions dialog box Adding a MOMO Event or Reaction On a digital multifunction I O unit a special type of event or reaction you can configure is c
225. deleted text To change the size or shape of the text block see Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks on page 7 14 Selecting Elements Before you can manipulate most elements you need to select them Start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode 1 Click the Select tool RR 2 To select an action condition continue or text block click the block Handles appear around the block 3 To select a connection click it Handles appear at the elbows and end points of the connection Handles 4 To select all connections entering or exiting a block click the block click the right mouse button and choose Select Connections from the pop up menu OptoControl User s Guide 7 11 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS 5 To select more than one element do one of the following e Select the first element hold down the SHIFT key and select additional elements e Click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle completely around the elements you want to select e To select all items of the same type right click an empty spot in the window and choose Select from the pop up menu From the sub menu choose the item type you want Moving Elements 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool Re 2 To move any action condition continue or text block click it Then click and hold the mouse button anywhere on the selected item except on its handles and drag it t
226. demarks of their respective companies or organizations OptoControl User s Guide Table of Contents Welcome to OptoControl sicsscccsiciescsscecacaseceisessectecesccacedentcnsessadestnnsace Intro xix About This Guide ax tsattas theceesce nev ece esos tassi ead nadi stants ocala axknsdieecsaembanbechectinienadt eas Intro xix Document Conventions Scie coecnccten Gacd Esta cd pctice teed tas auesnidctneede dea danetastactuetaniions Intro xxi Other FactoryFloor Resources s ssisssiisssiisssisisssiississsinssiisisiinnrinniireninniirerin Intro xxi Documents and Online Help c cceccseesesescessscesescsssecssssessssesteseetsseetsseeteseseees Intro xxi ROCIO OF Biz sactscacctaccassacdsnisassseeina sxecapueneescatsatcvossdassee ea eocuetenmucdiansetaasceaaces Intro xxii Installing OptoControl ssaasteses acnsiotascastamanstewsaceccstuects ciaencasnaty eancenetoangatenasnsduacuschacoatiasbac Intro xxiii System Requirements 0 cececceccscsescssescsseseseseasessesessessssassssstessstessseeesseesseeesesees Intro xxiii Installation Requirements ss st oan Caer at eel ced as sec habachacat Intro xxiii Additional Hardware Requirement ccccccccccsceecteseetssesteestseseseseensees Intro xxiii Firmware Requirements cscs 25st an teataacsicsheatssciatsndaeskeseideeacapadlacaethenas Intro xxiii Important Note on Disk Drives os eusnexcass acs ecnnca acide veupom asusbisciectesacdecteelzeicaitcdaseat Intro xxiv Chapter 12 Quick Start wsisisceccesss
227. do not have separate variables to receive data and status but return both in the same variable A successful command returns data in the variable an unsuccessful one returns a negative number to indicate an error For example suppose you use the command Copy Date to String and designate the string variable DATE_STAMP to receive the date If the command was correctly executed the date appears in the variable DATE_STAMP However if the string was too short to receive the date the status code 48 appears in the variable DATE_STAMP See page B 9 for a numerical list of common status codes See OptoControl Troubleshooting on page A 1 for additional help List of Common OptoControl Errors The following errors may appear in message boxes on the computer running OptoControl The error numbers may or may not appear No Error Message ARCNET card not responding at configured address Possible Causes Invalid ARCNET configuration Check PC ARCNET card settings File name of strategy file is already in use Strategy is being used by another user or by another instance of OptoControl on the same computer NetBIOS connect error Controller is not configured properly NetBEUI protocol is not configured Controller power is off Undefined Command The controller did not understand the command A digital I O unit has the address and port of an analog I O unit or vice versa Controller firmware is outdated A req
228. dow You can also move delete and inspect elements in the window 1 To dock the watch window click the docking icon ol in its title bar The window moves to its own frame OptoControl lolx File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help oela Heel als elel miele sj Aj Pa eA D Al alae Bley 212 al SNAP Sprinkler_Control o x SNAP_Sprinkler_Control Controllers Subroutines Included G Ext Instruction Files Included SE Charts Interrupt El Powerup amp Sprinkler_Control 6 6 Variables B E Numeric Variables E Day_of_the_week Humidity E Status_Trashcan FA Time_of_Day G Timer 6 6 Sting Variables Time_of_Day Pointer Variables E Numeric Tables String Tables G Pointer Tables sprinklers at 6 00 a m every Wednesday and Sunday unless it is raining Sprinklers stay on for 5minutes 7 Docked watch window Day_of_the Week Integer Variable E SNAP_Analog Unit B3000 Snap Analog Points 08 Hygro Analog Input H 0 68 26196 ent Reactions iE Pid Loops C Opto22 My strategies Simple Sprinkler System SimpleSprinklerSNAP SNAP_Sprinkler_Control Debug NUM 2 See Docking Windows on page 2 14 for more information 5 52 OptoControl User s Guide Expand or collapse the unit or table by clicking the or sign in the bo X WORKING WITH I O 2 If you add an 1 0 unit or
229. dress power shut off etc See the List of Common OptoControl Errors on page B 3 Find your error in the list and check the possible causes For errors indicating problems communicating with the controller see Checking Communication with the Controller on page A 5 OptoControl User s Guide A 1 A 2 Check Communication with the Controller If there is no error message box or the error indicates that there may be a communication problem check whether the PC running OptoControl is communicating with the controller See Checking Communication with the Controller on page A 5 3 Check the Error Queue If communication with the controller is OK check the error queue To open the error queue see Inspecting Controllers and Errors on page 4 19 In the List of Common Queue Errors on page B 5 look up any errors you find in the queue Errors are listed in numerical order Queue errors may indicate problems with a command or with communication to 1 0 Check the possible causes for help in fixing problems e For help with a command look up details about the command in the OptoControl Command Reference e For help with communication to I 0 see Resolving General Communication Problems on page A 6 Many of these suggestions apply to 1 0 as well as to controllers 4 Check Status Codes in Your Strategy If all is well up to this point check Status Codes in your strategy Status Codes are responses to a c
230. ds Set Day of Week Set Time Get Julian Day Get System Time Set Date Copy Time to String Copy Date to String DD MM YY Copy Date to String MM DD YY These commands can be used for timing a process For example you could use the command Get Seconds Since Midnight at the beginning of a process and again at the end of the process and then subtract the two numbers to find out how long the process took When you download a strategy the time on the controller is synchronized with the time on the computer After download you can use these commands to set the time and date manually Just remember that the manual settings are overridden if the strategy is downloaded again 10 10 OptoControl User s Guide Miscellaneous Commands PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS The following commands are used for timers and other purposes Many of these commands are commonly used Timers Start Timer Stop Timer Pause Timer Continue Timer Timer Expired Set Down Timer Preset Value Down Timer Expired Other Commands Comment Block Comment Single Line Delay mSec Delay Sec Move Move to Table Element Move from Table Element Set Up Timer Target Value Up Timer Target Time Reached Move Table Element to Table Move Table to Table Get Length of Table Shift Table Elements Generate Reverse CRC 16 on Table 32 bit Float Valid Delay Commands Delay commands are used frequently in strategies to pause the logic Here are two reason
231. ds or by choosing from the drop down lists Add Instruction x Instruction Move x Select Comment Set oven to 325 degreed Type Name From Integer 32 Literal 7 325 7 To Analog Output 7 Oven_T emperature_Contr x Cancel Help Command Heb OptoControl User s Guide 9 3 USING COMMANDS o If the argument type is a literal or constant you must type it in If you type in the name of an item that doesn t exist for example a variable or I O point you are prompted to add it to the strategy Each command requires a certain number of arguments from zero to eight For help in completing arguments see the OptoContro Command Reference or the online help for the specific command you re using 9 When the arguments are complete click OK You return to the Instructions dialog box which now shows the command you just added Notice that the comment you entered appears just above the command The arguments you entered appear as part of the instruction The highlight shows where the next command will be placed if you add another command to this block Here is an example of an Instructions dialog box for an action block Instructions New_Chart Block 2 Eg Comment Set oven to 325 degrees Command Arguments From 325 Modify Oven_Temperature_Control Delete Highlight Hert Block Previous Block Close Help Command Help 10 To add another command click to place the hig
232. e to be host ports A host port is always used by OptoControl in Debug mode and by OptoDisplay There are two types of host ports the default host port and additional host ports Additional host ports differ only in that they do not support kernel downloads A controller always has a default host port usually port 0 4 or 8 Additional host ports can be started under program control If the port that has been configured as the default host port is not physically present then the default host port reverts to COMO Communication Modes All serial host ports support either Opto 22 controller binary communication mode the default or Opto 22 controller ASCII communication mode e Binary mode uses an 11 bit frame 1 start 8 data 1 stop 1 parity with the parity bit used to indicate that the current byte is an address byte Since most modems do not support this use of the parity bit binary mode cannot be used with most modems For this reason ASCII mode is also available e ASCII mode uses a 10 bit frame 1 start 8 data 1 stop no parity with all characters being printable 0 9 A F In this mode any eight bit binary data is sent as two ASCII hex characters Any modem works with ASCII mode However be sure to select ENABLED for CTS under PC COM Port Configuration in OptoControl Also be sure to connect CTS from the modem to the PC a standard PC to modem cable does this automatically Selecting ASCII Mode for a Host Port F
233. e 1 0 l Delete unit that caused it Instructions Simple_10_Unit_Error_Handler_Chart Ena Eg is enabled jtatunt Add Modify Delete A I Nert Block _ E Previous Black AERE Instructions Simple_10_Unit_Error_Handler_Chart Go to EA Add Modify Delete Next Block Previous Block to that unit is restored O error Remove Current Error and Point to Hext Error The top error is removed from the queue and the chart checks for more errors This chart is designed to be started by the Powerup chart and to run continuously If necessary you might modify this chart to take different actions depending on the error code using the command Get Error Code of Current Error Or you might want to track problem 1 0 units with the command Get Name of 1 0 Unit Causing Current Error and then save the I 0 unit names to a string table These and other commands used in error handling are listed on page 10 8 OptoControl User s Guide 3 13 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Counting If an I O unit supports counting any digital input on it can be used as a counter Counters count the number of times the input changes from off to on You must start the counter before you can read it except for Ethernet 1 0 units See Counters on page 10 2 for more information Counters are often started in the Powerup Chart For example suppose you wanted to count the number o
234. e OptoKernel firmware instead See page 4 26 for details Amount of memory RAM available on the controller Current date and time recorded on the controller Any communication errors See Viewing the Error Queue on page 4 21 for details Name date and time and status of the strategy currently running on the controller Information about the strategy currently archived on the controller if any Buttons to start or stop the strategy This example shows the strategy running Time required to gather the inspection data from the controller Number of errors encountered when attempting to run the strategy on the controller AT raTtmmap 2 To synchronize the controller s time and date to that of the PC running OptoControl click the Sync to PC s Time Date button 4 20 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Viewing the Error Queue 1 lf any communication errors are shown in the Inspect Controller dialog box and you want more information about them click the View Errors button The View Errors dialog box appears listing the contents of the error queue including the reference number code and description of each error as well as the chart and block being executed when the error occurred Number of Message s 2 Show Errors First10 All JEnort EnorCode Description _ _ Pop First Enor 0 29 Timeout No response Possible cause b INIT_IO 1 29 Timeout No response Possible cause b INITIO Clea
235. e Purple values e Green comments e Black commands and names of variables I O points charts and other items e Red string literals If you want to see white space marks to help line up code click the Toggle Whitespace button in the toolbar To hide the marks click the button again 11 26 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT CE ee 3 To use a command place your cursor in the OptoScript code where you want the command to appear Click the Insert Action Command or Insert Condition Command button in the toolbar Instructions Communication 1 0 Communication Network Communication Serial GetAnalogFilteredV alue GetAnalogM ax alue GetAnalogMin alue GetAnalogS quareRootFilteredy alue GetAnalogS quareRootV alue GetAnalogT otalizer alue GetClear4nalogFiltered alue GetClear nalogh ax alue GetClear nalogMin alue GetClear nalogT otalizer alue Ramp nalog0utput SetAnalogFilterW eight SetAnalogGain SetAnalogOffset SetAnalogT otRate zi Subroutines hd Cancel Help Command Heb 4 Inthe Select Instruction dialog box select the command group from the left hand column and then select the command name from the right hand column For information on any command highlight it and click Command Help or just double click the command name NOTE If you know the command name you can just type it into the OptoScript code Remember that OptoScript command names may be different from standard Opto
236. e To change all new charts in the open strategy only choose File Strategy Properties to open the Configure Strategy Properties dialog box e To change new elements in the open chart or subroutine only choose Chart Properties or Subroutine Properties to open the Configure Chart Properties or Configure Subroutine Properties dialog box The dialog box that opens looks like this except that its title may be different Configure Chart Properties xi m Flowchart Parameters A e Background Color Grid Color Oo M isplay Grid MV Display Block ID s Smooth Scrolling r Action Block Parameters Connection Width ja Height 48 Color E Font Arial 10 point m Condition Block Parameters Tiue x a _ False mmm B ____ OptoSeript Block Connection Width fas Height jas Color E Font Avial 10 point Continue Block Parameters Also Apply To D T Strategy m Text I All charts C Width fise Height fize Font arial 10 point I All subs Cancel Hep Reset Al E 2 Complete the fields as follows A Specify general chart display in this area To apply these changes to existing charts or subroutines as well as to new ones click All charts or All subs in D Jo change the chart background color from the default of white click the Background Color box Choose a new color from the Color dialog box To change the chart s grid color from th
237. e Totalizer or Get On Time Totalizer To check total time and reset the totalizer to zero use Get amp Restart Off Time Totalizer or Get amp Restart On Time Totalizer Pulses Pulsing commands send on and off pulses to an output point Generate N Pulses The command Generate N Pulses is frequently used to flash a light or sound an alarm For example you could sound a two second alarm four times In the arguments you set the number of times the on pulse is sent the length of the on pulse and the length of the off pulse Generate N Pulses always starts with an off pulse If you resend this command make sure to leave sufficient time in between so it does not interfere with itself Start On Pulse and Start Off Pulse The commands Start On Pulse and Start Off Pulse send a single pulse cycle e Start On Pulse starts with an on pulse of a length you determine and ends with an off pulse e Start Off Pulse starts with an off pulse of a length you determine and ends with an on pulse OptoControl User s Guide 10 3 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Both of these commands can be used as time delays For example if a light is on and you want to turn it off after 30 seconds you can send a Start On Pulse command setting the on pulse to be 30 seconds long At the end of that time the off pulse is sent to turn off the light You can also use this type of command in a loop to turn a digital point on or off for short intervals For example you c
238. e a communication error 3 Change the fields as necessary A Current point status Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled To change the status click one of the arrows then click Apply B The point s current internal value You can change it to any value within the valid range of the analog point For an input the valid range may exceed the apparent range that is you may be able to enter a value lower than the zero scale value or higher than the full scale value For an output however you cannot enter a value outside of the range defined by the zero scale and full scale values After you change it click Apply C The point s current external value You can change it to any value within the valid range of the analog point then click Apply 4 To add the point to a watch window click Add Watch and see page 5 50 OptoControl User s Guide 5 45 WORKING WITH 1 0 Inspecting PID Loops You can review a PID loop s data modify its status or set its internal or external values in Debug mode To monitor the PID loop in a watch window see page 5 50 To change the PID loop follow these steps 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the PID loop on the Strategy Tree or double click it in the View 1 0 Unit dialog box The View PID Loop dialog box appears showing the configuration parameters for the PID loop and several values you can change The title bar shows the name of
239. e archive file For instructions see page 4 22 OptoControl User s Guide 6 5 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Compiling and Downloading Before your strategy can be tested or run it must be compiled and then downloaded to a controller When a strategy is compiled all the commands OptoScript code and charts it contains are verified and converted into a format that the controller can understand Then the strategy can be sent downloaded to a controller Only compiled strategies can be downloaded NOTE Before you can download your strategy make sure you have downloaded the latest firmware to your controller or have installed updated EEPROM if your controller doesn t have flash memory For instructions see Downloading Firmware to the Controller on page 4 26 Compiling and Downloading in One Step 1 With the strategy open in OptoControl click the Debug Mode button on the toolbar or choose Mode Debug Changing to Debug mode automatically saves and compiles the strategy including all code in OptoScript blocks 2 If you see a Powerup Clear Expected message click OK A download warning message may appear Download Warning x Warming The name and or timestamp of the strategy to be downloaded does not match the name and or timestamp of the strategy already loaded in the active controller Name of strategy to download SNAP_Cookies Timestamp of strategy to download 02704799 11 01 53 Name of strategy in controller
240. e arias ts idsatsadraecnieneruareeeeendl ais 6 14 AUTO III reece aias esanean denies iateactaateat acteotschirctensdtasvathadkcaleslannscemics 6 15 Stepping Into a Subroutine sc cecciaceadesdzacsacssaraacainacacsceacanchecaatt deiatscahrachoycaccbestechdndasscee 6 15 Setting and Removing Breakpoints scicccinincticscsaaceeacscrutecdionnsiinsanteddadadsscedstaedeadeditiacss 6 16 Managing Multiple Breakpoints 0 ccecccceccecescccesestescsteseseeseseeseseeseseesssesteseseeneseees 6 17 Interpreting Elapsed Times cscc0ciidcsdisdscesccsescuhcasassusstssticaacarspateed scl naselsabeeidemedsesadieds 6 18 Viewing and Printing 2s cag Sec cascasgs aces tec cecaeciea ectaaa actadodn ne te bactaetcedbpiacsaeadalaseaieasnce 6 19 Viewing an Individual Chart or Subroutine ccc cece eeces ces eeteseseeseseesesteteseeteseeneees 6 19 Viewing All Charts in a State ys acveirainasiraiciacidissnsisavarsadantaianianaurdariens 6 19 Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics vaste cineatannnzersersenses senses aciacisiestasdssaveniaesnsbtncatates 6 20 Setting Up the Page otk acre acaba becitoatcanoananeecceacs sivoueresstesaesalenh eed sbdecatales 6 21 Previewing a Flowchart FIIMEQUES 205 fc ieccocisnessieiasicleQsceccieaned dade aleseatantned stitacdoaltes 6 21 Printing One Chart or Subroutine ceccccccescssestesescsssscesescaseateseacaseacaseacaseaasens 6 22 Printing All Charts in a VANS Osco cts chacs caiescausicssaddncrabeehisbeauanebedaslarieeminanen 6 23
241. e chart or subroutine ina different chart or subroutine or in a different strategy A connection can be cut or copied but it cannot be pasted unless its original source and destination blocks have also been pasted Block 0 cannot be cut 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool Re 2 To cut or copy element s click them Press CTRL X to cut or CTRL C to copy You can also select the element s and then choose Edit Cut or Edit Copy or click the right mouse button and choose Cut or Copy from the pop up menu 3 To paste blocks press CTRL V select Edit Paste or right click an empty spot on a chart and select Paste from the pop up menu Text blocks are pasted immediately For action condition or continue blocks a message appears asking if you want to keep the original name of the block being pasted If you paste to a different strategy or a subroutine OptoControl checks the referenced variables to make sure they match Variables that do not exist are created Variables that exist but are different for example a table with the same name but a different table length are noted in a log file that appears when the paste is complete Deleting Elements 1 Make sure the chart is open and the strategy is in Configure or Online mode 2 Click the Select tool iL Click the element s to select them CAUTION Make sure you have selected the element you want You cannot undo a deletion
242. e default of black click the Grid Color box 7 4 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS The grid and block ID numbers are displayed by default To remove them click Display Grid or Display Block ID s to remove the check mark To enable or disable smooth scrolling in a flowchart click Smooth Scrolling this option is disabled by default B Define the appearance of action blocks condition blocks OptoScript blocks and continue blocks in this area These changes affect new blocks only not existing blocks To change existing blocks see Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults on page 7 5 In the Width and Height fields type the block size in pixels For action and continue blocks the default width is 96 and the default height is 48 the minimum parameters are 48 width and 32 height For condition blocks the default height is 64 Note that the numbers you enter are rounded down to be evenly divisible by 16 for example if you enter 81 click OK and then reopen the dialog box the parameter reads 80 To change the color of the blocks from the default click the Color box To change block name text formatting click the Font box In the Font dialog box change the font font style size effects and color The default font is black 10 point Arial bold To change text alignment right click the Font box and choose left center or right from the pop up menu To change the colo
243. e device attached to the point If fields are left empty no clamp is applied To empty the fields click Clear F Scalable modules only optional Use to assign custom units and values to the module For example you could scale the readings of a 10 to 10 VDC input point to measure its input as zero liters per second when the real world reding is zero VDC and 1000 liters 5 18 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 as il per second when the real world reading is five VDC This example for a SNAP analog point would look like this Add Analog Point p xj Name Fluid_Outpud Description In this example units are Type Output changed to liters second and Module SNAP ADV 27 10 10 VDC Scalable x lower and upper values are changed Although the module Scaling has a output of 10 to 10 volts Full Range Clamping Actual Scaled the device attached to the point Units voc i VDC Liters second outputs only 0 5 volts Scaling ieee fo o co ae the penne bi n this case Clamping protects Upper 10 f fiooo the device by ensuring that Default out of range voltage will never be sent to it NOTE applies to modules attached to all brains except SNAP Ethernet based brains If the scale is very small scaled readings will not be accurate since the fixed point calculations done by the brain cannot track enough digits past the decimal point For example a scaling range of 0 2 will give
244. e just generalizations They won t be valid in all possible cases they are just a guide to help These tuning guidelines can be used both to solve tuning problems in an existing loop or as a help to start tuning a new loop IMPORTANT NOTE Textbook tuning rules such as Ziegler Nichols tuning methods DO NOT work for tuning the velocity PID algorithm Solving Tuning Problems Oscillations Oscillations can be caused either by gain that is too high or integral that is too high If the process variable oscillates below the setpoint it is probably caused by the gain being 10 46 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS too high If it oscillates at the setpoint it is not possible to know by looking at the graphs which tuning parameter is causing the problem Try cutting either the gain or integral but not both at the same time to find out which one is causing the problem Overshoot Overshoot is usually caused by the integral being too high Gain that is too high can also cause overshoot but that is usually in conjunction with the integral being too high Any PID loop can be made to not overshoot and not oscillate if the gain and integral are set low enough but the response will be slow Performance here is a limit on how fast a good stable response can be The middle chart is the best that can be done with no overshoot and no oscillation The ones with the gain and integral too high move toward the setpoint faster but
245. e length is limited only by the amount of memory in the controller Numeric tables store either integer values or floating point numbers but not both in the same table String tables store strings Because pointers can point to any data type for example an I O point a chart or even another table pointer tables can store an assortment of data types Persistent Data Most variables can be either global or persistent in scope Global variables are set to an initial value which you specify during configuration either whenever the strategy is run or whenever it is downloaded Persistent variables however are initialized only when the strategy is first downloaded The variable s value is saved in the controller s memory it does not change when the strategy is run stopped or started and it does not change if the strategy is changed and downloaded again A persistent variable s value remains the same until one of the following events occurs e A strategy with a different name is downloaded e The RAM memory on the controller is cleared e Anew firmware kernel is downloaded to the controller e The persistent object is changed in some way for example the length of a persistent table changes Persistent data can be very useful in certain situations For example suppose you have a PID setpoint that is fine tuned as your process runs If the setpoint is configured as persistent its value won t be lost if you must re download the
246. e method OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Move from Pointer Table pn pt 0 F Element Move from String Table s st 0 P Move from Table Element x nt 0 F Move Mixed I O Unit to Table MoveMixedIoUnitToTable I O Unit Starting P Index Of Table Move Simple 64 I O Unit to MoveSimple64IoUnitToTable I O Unit P Table Starting Index Of Table Move String sl s2 P Move Table Element to Digital MoveTableElementToDigitalloUnit From P I O Unit Index Of Table Move to Move Table Element to Table nt1 0 nt2 5 P Move Table to Analog I O MoveTableToAnalogloUnit Start at Index Of P Unit Table Move to Move Table to Digital I O Unit MoveTableToDigitalloUnit Start at Index P Of Table Move to Move Table to Mixed I O Unit MoveTableToMixedIoUnit Start at Index Of P Table Move to Move Table to Simple 64 I O MoveTableToSimple64IoUnit Start at Index P Unit Of Table Motve to Move Table to Table MoveTableToTable From Table From P Index To Table To Index Length Move to Pointer pn amp n F Move to Pointer Table pt 0 amp n F Move to String Table st 0 s P Move to Table Element nt 0 x P Multiply x y F Natural Log NaturalLog Of F NOT not x F Not Equal
247. e output value as the result of one PID calculation For example a maximum change rate of 10 specifies that even if a PID calculation suggests an output change of 20 units the maximum change allowed during the loop will be 10 units You can use a maximum change rate to avoid sudden dramatic increases or decreases in the output value Note that the maximum change rate must be between one percent and 100 percent of the range of the output itself which is the difference between the output s high scale value L and low scale value K The value representing this full range will appear by default K Specify the minimum value allowable for the output This value cannot be less than the zero scale value of the output module L Specify the maximum value allowable for the output This value cannot be greater than the full scale value of the output module M Select whether the setpoint for the PID calculation will be read from an 1 0 point or a host device the controller The setpoint is the value to which the input will be driven Your choice determines the other data required in the Setpoint section of the dialog box If you choose I O Point see the figure on page 5 28 for additional fields to complete N If Host is selected at M Specify the initial value for the setpoint This value must be between the lower clamp and upper clamp values O and P The default is zero O If Host is selected at M Specify the lowest possible setpoint value Defaul
248. e result In the following example the value of sName would change to Smith John sName Smith sFirstName John sName sFirstName The Chr keyword can be used to convert a numeric value into a one element string sString5 sStringl sString2 Chr sString5 sStringl sString2 Chr 33 Working with Pointers Pointers can be tricky but they are powerful tools For more information on using pointers see Pointer Commands on page 10 40 For the following examples assume that nl 5 fl 9 2 sl test 123 Set the pointer The types must match To see if a pointer is pointing to something use the or the controller will generate an error comparison operator see page 11 20 to compare it to pnl null null This use is similar to standard OptoControl condition pnl amp nl commands such as Pointer Equal to NULL For example pfl amp fl n2 pn1 null psl 6sl n2 null prnl pchtl amp Powerup if pt1 0 null then Use to de reference a pointer it will then behave just like the variable to which it is pointing The following two statements are equivalent n2 pnl pfl n2 ni 1 OptoControl User s Guide 11 17 USING OPTOSCRIPT Pointers are very useful when you don t know what variables need to be used until runtime For instance the next example uses a switch statement see page 11 23 to determine which variable to use based on the day of t
249. e section Associating the Controller with Your Strategy on page 4 15 4 14 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Associating the Controller with Your Strategy After you have defined the controller on your PC see page 4 2 it can be associated with your strategy 1 If you are in OptoTerm close OptoTerm Open the strategy in OptoControl Configure mode or Online mode and choose Configure Controllers In the Configure Controllers dialog box the controller appears in the list Configure Controllers x Active Controller Cookie Controller Active controller Controllers Associated with Strategy List of controllers Set Active Modify Delete Download Options Set Up Controller Ports OK Cancel Help 2 Check to make sure the correct controller appears in the Active Controller field If it doesn t highlight the one you want and click Set Active Only one controller can be active at any time If only one controller is listed it automatically becomes the Active Controller Your controller configuration is complete Setting Up Controller Ports In addition to configuring the PC ports used to communicate with the controller you may need to configure the ports of the controller itself Typically the controller uses these ports to communicate with I O units However the ports can also be used to communicate with other devices such as modems barcode readers or ev
250. e valid B Enter the number of times you want OptoControl to reattempt communications Any integer from zero to 255 is valid the default 1 is a good choice It indicates a total of two attempts at communication C Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in B Any positive integer is valid For a baud rate of 115 200 2 3 seconds 2000 3000 milliseconds is a good starting point For a slower baud rate start with a higher timeout value D Select the serial port for communication to the controller E Select the baud rate for communication to the controller This rate must match the baud rate configured on the controller itself F Select the type of protocol to use when communicating with the controller Binary is recommended for Windows NT users ASCII is recommended for Windows 95 or Windows 98 users and for those connecting to a controller over a modem Make sure the same protocol is configured on the controller itself G Click Finish and skip to Finishing a Direct Connection on page 4 12 OptoControl User s Guide 4 9 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring a Modem Port Windows NT Only If you chose Modem in the Port Selection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure Modem Port Port Name Modem Port Retries fi Timeout msec frooo Phone fi
251. e what they contain To learn more about the sample strategy see Appendix C 1 When you re ready to stop click the Stop button in the toolbar This action prevents the strategy from running continuously unattended on the controller 2 To close the strategy select File Close Strategy or select File Exit to quit OptoControl If dialog boxes ask whether you want to remove breakpoints and take charts out of stepping mode click Yes What s Next Your introduction to OptoControl is now complete Using the sample Cookies strategy you have learned how to e Open save and close a strategy e Work with the Strategy Tree e Work with charts and add commands in blocks e Configure a controller e Compile run step through and add breakpoints to a strategy e Make an online change e Use a watch window to monitor variables and 0 points The rest of this book expands on the knowledge you ve just acquired Now may be a good time to look at the table of contents or thumb through the book and familiarize yourself with its contents Some sections you may want to read others you ll probably just refer to as needed OptoControl User s Guide 1 43 QUICK START 1 44 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 2 What Is OptoControl Introduction The tutorial in Chapter 1 introduced you to OptoControl without explaining much about it In this chapter we ll learn more about OptoControl and see its main windows and toolbars In This C
252. e you created Highlight its name and click Open The 1 0 units and points are updated from the configuration file To see them click the plus sign next to the I O Units folder on the Strategy Tree Configuring PID Loops PID loops or simply PIDs are used to drive an analog input toward a particular value the setpoint and to keep the input very close to that value Temperature control is a typical application for a PID PIDs require a gain term abbreviated P for proportional which is the inverse of gain an integral term I and a derivative term D All three of these must be specified when configuring the loop For more information on using PID loops see PID Commands on page 10 42 Within OptoControl PID loops can be configured only on B3000 brains and G4A8R bricks NOTE If you are using a SNAP Ethernet brain you cannot configure PID loops in OptoControl but you can use a special purpose module SNAP PID V to monitor input signals and adjust output signals to control one proportional integral derivative PID loop All necessary PID calculations are performed in the module itself To configure a PID module see page 5 20 For more information on using the module see Opto 22 form 1263 the SNAP PID Module User s Guide Adding a PID Loop 1 To configure a PID loop make sure you have a strategy open in Configure mode 2 On the Strategy Tree double click the 1 0 Units folder not the individual unit s icon 3 In
253. ear in the Instructions dialog box as gray Using Timers Timers are a special type of numeric variable An OptoControl timer stores elapsed time in units of seconds with resolution of milliseconds Down timers continuously count down to zero and up timers continuously count up from zero Timers can be paused and continued To create a timer in OptoControl configure a numeric variable and select the type Up Timer or Down Timer You can use any OptoControl command for example Move that references a numeric variable to access a timer You can view the current value of a timer at any time in OptoControl Debug mode Timer range is 0 001 to 4 611686 x 10 seconds Timers are best used for short time intervals Since the timer is independent from the controller s clock over thousands of seconds the timer and the controller s clock will not match For example over a 15 hour time period the timer is likely to be different from the controller by about 10 minutes While the controller s clock is fairly accurate if timing is critical make sure to synchronize the controller s clock to the PC daily Timers do not place any additional load on the CPU As noted timers are numeric variables Internally the timer is a 64 bit integer in units of 0 0005 seconds For convenience this value is shown as a float with units in seconds The default is a down timer stopped with a value of zero Down Timer Operation The Set Down Timer Preset Value command
254. ears in the Download Options dialog box 5 Click OK The initialization file sets values for the variables and table elements immediately after your next full strategy download IMPORTANT When you create each variable you must check Initialize on Strategy Download in the Add Variable dialog box See Adding Numeric String and Pointer Tables on page 8 7 Since download options are specific to each controller make sure you set the initialization file as a download option for every controller on which the strategy will run OptoControl User s Guide 8 11 USING VARIABLES oe Changing and Deleting Variables You can change and delete variables but you cannot change a variable s type or delete it from a strategy where it is currently referenced Changing a Configured Variable 1 To change a configured variable make sure the strategy is open and in Configure or Online mode 2 On the Strategy Tree expand the Variables folder until you see the name of the variable you want to change Double click its name to open the Edit Variable dialog box 3 Make the necessary changes and click OK If you need help see Adding Numeric String and Pointer Variables on page 8 5 or Adding Numeric String and Pointer Tables on page 8 7 You can also change a variable from the Configure Variables dialog box by double clicking the variable s name or by highlighting it and clicking Modify Deleting a Variable You
255. ecectaxhsesenten tha civtacestasoastaciaedaed 7 15 Copying eM ss eseris enina elder on arcu eines A A 7 15 Renaming a LINGUA cecpacastniectcindessnst ad badesaksethinccesapacendavantestietis iserastestarbietedzsdvesadcats seeds 7 16 Deleting a Chart cde tat ate staat scatrchacteeskncvet aes o aceceeci sea tecats seh deta oxctscb andi dekceseastnaetuas 7 17 Printing GhartS siessen etree rime tect ean Sure E E EREN 7 17 Exporting and Importing Charts css iessastascasceicccius cietseheasaaesccnitasheabin mansetamainaplmuamaame 7 18 Exporting ahh 2 aca ch essen hacesboreiecned es edecns ob bucens eccrhaelnah ta lnsihecenestesientacteoasooes 7 18 UO TG IV UN cans anes ceatsaealasctidcnwe Dieses ceadh ach aco ctu si cle bed Sca ATRN 7 19 x OptoControl User s Guide EE Ee Chapter 8 Using Variables scccscssccscascconsssessacecaccosssasessssssnasccesesesaeverasssesesntee 8 1 MirOdUCHON srecen r aAA ERE EER 8 1 Mk TRIS CHAPEL eisir irneteiteitottairesiiaene eiiieaenii 8 1 About Variable Seica a tices a E a 8 1 Types of Data in a Variable wari cesccacgasicaiecntdaadieceicedatcentessdsicaueteaatad nda dvabeabsasaletmaciae 8 2 Variables in OptoControl cs aces nata ns agaeciacpecntdaad nice acacia bisa ees tbcaecnasdea ae eaeeabsansaeseuccnans 8 3 Table A a OF eierniie 8 3 Persistent DANG csccsatcateaskaac vieacesaec ges aiscisieeciale ciswubsdsnedeabcondetegelaacatemeaciestioaereaateauioleams 8 4 DEVS ANS sare bas edge nea antes E tectetiantete 8 5 Adding Nu
256. ed ANALOG POINTS Refrigeration Chart Referenced Block Referenced Morning Check refrigeration Morning Check refrigeration Morning Check refrigeration Start Chart Instruction Line 3 Line 11 Line 11 You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all the data Notice that the Instruction column at right shows the line number the operand appears in when it is in OptoScript code 3 To print the data click the print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the save button To search the data click the search button When finished close the window View and Print a Bill of Materials You can view and print a bill of materials BOM that lists all the 1 0 units and 1 0 modules analog and digital required to run the strategy Special purpose modules are not included in the BOM 1 To produce a BOM for a strategy open it and select File gt View Print Bill of Materials OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES EE M OptoControl processes the data and puts it in the Bill of Materials window Save Search B New Strategy Bill of Materials TITLE Bill of Materials STRATEGY New Strategy DATE 11 19 04 TIME 13 39 08 Brains l B3000 SNAP Mixed I 0 SNAP B3000 ENET l B3000 SNAP Analog Digital B3000 Digital Input Modules 2 SNAP IDCSD 2 5 28 VDC 2 SNAP IDCS SW Dry Contact Switch 2 SNAP IDCS SW NC Dry Contact Switch Digital Output Modules l1 SNAP
257. ed 0 Delete 0 05 Motor_2_Switch None Enabled 0 i 02 06 Not Used Move To 9 07 Not Used me E ma 02 SNAP A0W 27 Analog Out Expand Al EI a 03 SNAP ICTD Analog Input Erara Qf 12 Tank_1_Temp ICTD Temp Probe Degree Enabled 0 Collapse All Ie 13 Not Used Gj 04 Not Used EEE a Moving a Configured I O Point You can move most configured I O points to an empty channel on the same I O unit or on a different unit If the I O point is referenced in a PID loop or event reaction you can move it only within the same 1 0 unit Moving a SNAP I O Point Use these steps to move a SNAP point For non SNAP points see page 5 22 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode double click the 1 0 Units folder on the Strategy Tree 2 In the Configure I O Unit dialog box highlight the unit the point is on and click 1 0 Points OptoControl User s Guide 5 21 WORKING WITH I O The Configure 1 0 Points dialog box opens It looks something like this Configure 1 0 Points SNAP Digital Unit_A Medios ndParns Type Featues Subype Unis Enatied Ref Gout A snac 25 oaea jaf usnaPoocssnc s DoidOupa Eu 2 UsedtySrepande S Dee Ei eE i Moye IG Ean Eea 3 If necessary expand the modules by clicking Expand All 4 Highlight the point you want to move and click Move To Move Point To SNAP Digital Unit A 00 Pump_1_Status 01 Pump_2_Status 02 Pump_4_ Status 03 No
258. efined within a word that is being defined A semicolon is missing from a Forth word definition An unfinished loop construct was used when terminating the definition for example an IF without a THEN A semicolon is missing from a Forth word definition A program is too large to fit in memory See Resolving Invalid Port Errors 100 on page A 8 Port is not configured correctly See Resolving Port Setup Failed Errors 102 on page A 10 ARCNET cable is not connected properly PC s ARCNET card is not connected to the network or controller Active hubs are not turned on Defective ARCNET cables WinRT is not installed Registry is corrupt Hardware conflict This user of Windows NT does not have full privileges Make sure you have administrative privileges NetBIOS or NetBEUI is not running or might not be installed on PC OptoCDS may not be running on server Flash download failed Call Opto 22 Product Support Usually a hardware problem Strategy was created on a computer with different controller name s than those on the current computer Choose Configure Controllers and add the controllers For help see Configuring Controllers on page 4 1 Controller TCP IP settings are incorrect No Error Message 42 Controller has been locked or acquired by other host while other host performs a download or compile 51 Dictionary full error Control
259. egy If you need to use similar configurations for SNAP Ethernet 1 0 you can import the configuration file into the SNAP Ethernet 1 0 Configurator and send it to multiple Ethernet 1 0 units at once For more information on using the SNAP Ethernet I O Configurator see Opto 22 form 1112 the SNAP Ethernet Brain Users Guide Only 1 0 units and points can be exported PID loops and event reactions cannot Creating the Configuration Export File 1 In the Strategy Tree right click 1 0 Units and choose Export from the pop up menu The Export I O Units to an Opto Tag Database dialog box appears 2 Navigate to the location where you want to place the export file Type the file name and click Save The export file is created It is a comma delimited ASCII file If you wish you can open it in Notepad or Excel Importing the Configuration File When you import the 1 0 configuration file it does not delete any 1 0 units or points that are already there If the import file contains O units with the same names as those already in the strategy you can choose whether to update them Updating changes points that have the same name and adds new points but does not delete points 1 Open the strategy into which you want to import the 1 0 configuration 5 24 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 CE ee 2 In the Strategy Tree right click I O Units and choose Import from the pop up menu 3 Navigate to the location of the export fil
260. egy scicccsscsssssscccsesecsesccssessscessesoesesdoosstessaraerescsors D 1 MET NM AW ee cossenacesepsctnedchsnesyditessaduatdseuctsccaeansdeesoncot ERa EE aTa anis i Pi reniei aiamaa iai D 1 Factory Schematic ataccatscetenseaecedasdeacuasuctac cdSenaciwepstncuneatacdadscaiceassiceseticitieedis dou eipastintucovactacteed D 1 Description of the FIO SS cs aac tec eereer neo cara nepteeeatenemeeete eens D 2 AVA AOS SAMs ssonacorecessinsenipnseratcatscedtapanciceacesancsbuttndetaataasaatactactacie chceifinetiusdtaep nesses aiiai D 2 Chip HOPPET aes 8 oot xt act edncetcsaceczncsscoececeetesd ac ehcteennia nasatadplerneotstsectectieteniteacaae scenes D 2 D caches Scent desea E tanta aes onset EE D 2 Inspection sc VEO Mec cpo thea cnsatshext cs dalton cl ckarawandb tp dee cede dar eactantact ov deta ocatentantaresertene D 2 ROY OU aca ace seco cece ein a EAN shake Shea cesee RE N D 2 PEM STE EN Oleg sec ct ces iesi a a e con a Era aa D 3 Required 0 ca vtcotcctqatextscicekcet eek shndhpchndhScnese esdecdacunsdosstdeeseatedfensatdes chpcakcdecebeuaacanetleeslaslebes D 3 Analog Onse mionn tes dander E adaets cendenonch eta E D 3 Pe ct tac ch ness a A E cat tate E E D 3 Appendix E OptoScript Command Equivalent sscesseseeeneneees E 1 MR UMA sranani ES E 1 OptoControl User s Guide xvii So Appendix F OptoScript Language Reference sssssususesenenenenennununenenennnnns F 1 NODE TICES innara E E A E F 1 OptoScript Comparison with Standard Prog
261. ements T3 Printing CORS sn acsacacscnscensasdcicsacascaasntasencon 7 17 Opening Saving and Closing Charts 7 15 Exporting and Importing Charts 0 7 18 Creating a New Chart 1 With your strategy open and in Configure mode select Chart New or right click the Charts folder on the Strategy Tree and select New from the pop up menu The Add New Chart dialog box appears Add New Chart Name Description Lok ca e OptoControl User s Guide 7 1 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS 2 Enter a name for the new chart The name must start with a letter but may also include numbers and underscores If you type spaces they are converted to underscores All other characters are ignored 3 Optional Type a description 4 Click OK The new chart is listed on the Strategy Tree under the Charts folder and the new chart window appears Block 0 the starting block is shown automatically No matter how many other blocks you add or where you place them block 0 is always the first block to be executed in the chart New_Chart of x NOTE Because chart windows show a small portion of a potentially large chart a small movement with the scroll bar can mean a big change in what you see If you lose your flowchart in the window select View Center on Block and choose the block you want to see in the middle of the screen For information on splitting and zooming chart windows see page 2 15
262. en with another PC running OptoControl or OptoDisplay 1 With the strategy open in configure mode double click the Controllers folder on the Strategy Tree OptoControl User s Guide 4 15 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS The Configure Controllers dialog box appears Configure Controllers x Active Controller Cookie Controller Controllers Associated with Strategy Set Active Modify Delete Download Options Set Up Controller Ports OK Cancel Help 2 Click Set Up Controller Ports The Controller Port Setup dialog box appears Controller Port Setup x Type Baud Mode CTS Host l Enable Redundant Enabled Settings Send to Controller 3 Complete the fields as follows A Highlight the port to be configured Some ports are grayed out because they are not available for configuration The number and type of ports available depends on the controller and its expansion cards B Port type for the port highlighted in A Types of ports are serial ARCNET Ethernet AC47 ARCNET and user defined When you configure a port as AC47 ARCNET there must be two consecutive ports available starting on an even boundary for example 12 and 13 14 and 15 16 and 17 OptoControl does not allow you to configure a port as an AC47 ARCNET port unless its pair is available C Select the baud rate for the communication port from the drop down list Make sure the baud rate matches the
263. ency Value None Enable Scan for Event Disable Scan for Event Disable Scan for All Events Read and Hold Analog Input Data Read and Hold Analog Output Data Activate PID Loop Deactivate PID Loop Set PID Setpoint Set Analog Output Ramp Analog Output to Endpoint One of the most powerful features of event reactions is their ability to start and stop one another This feature allows dynamic restructuring of the control logic running on the 1 0 unit using the reactions Enable Scan for Event Disable Scan for Event and Disable Scan for All Events Both analog and digital O units have read and hold reactions These reactions are used to capture a count period analog value or frequency at the moment the event occurs and store it in a hold buffer for later retrieval by the controller Each event reaction has a dedicated hold buffer OptoControl User s Guide 10 25 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Simple Event Reaction Example As an example of an event reaction suppose you are building a motor controller It consists of two inputs and one output on the same digital multifunction I O unit The two inputs are wired to two momentary push buttons that are normally open Start_Motor and Stop_Motor The output called Motor_Run is connected to a motor starter The operation of the motor starter is simple When the Start_Motor button is pressed the motor starts and remains on until the Stop_Motor button is pressed To build the logic for
264. ene dctaclast entacesen caneatdeseoncietortucduease 6 8 Downloading Without Using OptoContrl ccc ee cseeesteeseeesteesteseesseseaseeeanen 6 8 Creating the Controller Download cdf File cecccccccscesessesessssessesessssesteseseees 6 8 viii OptoControl User s Guide EE ee Downloading the cdf File using OptoTerm c ccccccccscesesteseseeescsescseseaseseseesees 6 9 Downloading the cdf File Using a DOS Batch File cc ceceeeeeeeteeeneees 6 10 Running and Stopping ices tecetact enentsaaketaha lua ead detec deanbeneenecnadned aiacaiasastiaedantares 6 10 Running a Strategy score oahinch echt ccc connect sae hadi cescensesinencenseatenndertataraeoAocboedonaiacns 6 10 Stopping coy OU cS OY ccsaatacsscdaaa sab cccececancapcapcancn ccna crsacan ban eosasceatmcaaa tie usacssasealaezancaei 6 10 DFU PAn E EE 6 11 Choosing Debug LEVEL cccccscsccaceacsscsssnacessa saedicanssseasreacsdeusoieetdeecescnicalinideachdcaseasdnadeases 6 11 Changing Debugger 5 EC scr ce ansemonnssis casey eacaaraeiec boone sesnitchs Gears eetastadiaentennsens 6 11 Pausing a Chart ot scazecs ath detoes ntenieecbsnne tncsantantoetccsc dacs Aas cate hsase tactdaeten atid doentnaaes 6 12 Stepping Through a Chart sats ccsccsza Siaiacdicazaaclentantdcinoscbeandasincssiossnedsed suasomneptastasuetenanaas 6 13 Single Stepping by BNSCN oa tnecctncu ota incsnctostinsctraesttaetcesanatekeuias ta civancha Seseasteciaeizetteiains 6 13 Single Stepping by NNN sci sc ne dosdis ceeaecaxiane
265. ens hn asta nets seca E 11 30 Debugging Strategies with OptoScript occ ccceseesesteteseeseseetessstessstesesneeseesseees 11 30 Converting Existing Code to OptoScript cccccccsccsesesesesteseseseseeseseeseseesescseseanencaes 11 31 Chapter 12 Using Subroutine cscsiccsessssssceascsssnceccansssscsssceacessusnsssacsensesese 12 1 MEE OP AW kesaenan en eean a aea a e E attetasaata a a a a 12 1 In This Chapter wncsi cesta hacciecs cot antatcs acaasdos cetncepneaseuel eabechuctaesaed evabearceteeetsotca acts 12 1 About Subroutine eee eR ER Eee rena at err TE TTP gee 12 1 Creating oy UNO INOS Ss castscactnats sheanesranctestsmesmaduathaehedtsansapscsacasaghsesitescenntadestiatnesteatmestedetiesics 12 2 Drawing the FIO G IN IE oasis ces ckecpeniiesiectesaceacaaseapatesdinGaescasantaseXdnabestaceheohecishcceach stausesncdhs 12 2 Configuring Subroutine Parameters tes thc iecsess teats catesicitaltcsnssiat niet talkadceactats sokecnctncale 12 4 OptoControl User s Guide xv So Configured Parameters ExAMple ccccccscsesessescssesescesessesesceseassseseeseansseeeeseecess 12 6 Adding Commands and Local Variables c cccccccscsscsssscsssscsssseesssesessesceseeeeseeeenees 12 6 Compiling and Saving the SUDrOUtING 0 c ccc cccccescstesestesesteseseeseseeseseeseseateseseeeane 12 7 Using Subroutines sca caccassixcacesessstdcndsndeutearaspanc csiiecbanintassndine des seiedl ca oteksecesscaenplinesdetaathions 12 7 Including a Subroutine in
266. ent reactions rely on the results of previous event reactions Keep in mind that event reactions execute in the order in which they were configured in OptoControl Are event reactions permanently stored on the 1 0 unit Not automatically Unless they are stored in flash EEPROM event reaction definitions are lost if the 1 0 unit loses power See Storing Event Reactions in Flash EEPROM on the 1 0 Unit on page 10 29 for more information Can event reactions be individually started and stopped by the strategy by OptoControl in Debug mode and by each other Yes Can event reaction groups be started and stopped by the strategy and by each other Yes Can the event criteria be changed on the fly by the program Yes by using the Transmit Receive Mistic 1 0 Hex String command Are all reactions latched Yes When a reaction occurs a latch is set on the 1 0 unit The latch can be checked by using one of the OptoControl commands to get the event latch The latch is set the first time the event occurs and remains set until it is cleared no matter how many times the event actually occurs Can the same event be used in multiple event reactions Yes but use care when the event references a counter In these cases it is usually best to use the reaction as the event for subsequent related event reactions to guarantee reliable performance unless the counter is very slow Can counts analog values and so on be captured as part of a reaction Yes
267. enting out one or more commands can help you pinpoint problems in a strategy 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command s you want to comment out NOTE To comment out commands in OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 11 25 2 In the Instructions dialog box click the first command you want to comment out Click Add 3 In the Add Instructions dialog box choose the instruction Comment Block Click OK You return to the Instructions dialog box and all the instructions in the block from that point on are grayed out indicating that they will be ignored when the strategy runs 4 Click just beyond the last command you want to comment out Add another Comment Block instruction When you return to the Instructions dialog box all commands between the two Comment Block instructions are grayed out 5 When you no longer want the strategy to ignore the command s delete the two Comment Block instructions NOTE The Comment Block command is used for this purpose The Comment Instruction command just places an explanatory comment in the Instructions dialog box It does not affect any commands 9 6 OptoControl User s Guide USING COMMANDS a i Cutting Copying and Pasting Commands You can cut or copy commands to the Windows clipboard and then paste them in the same block or in another block or even in a block of another c
268. er grass for 20 mins Grass 0 else Grass 1 DelaySec 600 7 7 Water grass for 10 mins Grass 0 endif while Soil_Moisture lt 30 Trees 1 Water trees wend el se DelaySec 3600 Wait one hour before checking the day again endif A Generally speaking the more complex the combination of math expressions logical and comparison operators loops and conditions the more convenient it is to use OptoScript code rather than standard blocks and commands OptoControl User s Guide 11 9 USING OPTOSCRIPT Converting to OptoScript When you first open an older strategy in OptoControl 4 x or when you change an existing strategy to include OptoScript be aware of the differences described in this section Duplicate Object Names When you open an existing strategy in OptoControl 4 x any duplicate object names will be assigned unique names Earlier versions of OptoControl allowed two different types of objects such as a variable and an I O point to be named the same Due to requirements for OptoScript OptoControl 4 x does not allow any duplicate names If a converted strategy contains duplicates you ll receive a message noting the necessary name changes If you are using another software application that references duplicate tags be aware that you need to change the tagnames in those applications too File Sizes A strategy file including OptoScript will probably be about the same size as one without OptoScr
269. erefore in the case of steady state error that is change in error 0 gain alone has no effect on the output For this reason gain cannot be used alone Gain is also used as a multiplier on the integral and derivative The velocity PID algorithm uses gain much as it is used in the Honeywell type A PID and the Bailey error input type PID Higher gain results in increased output change Too much gain results in output oscillation Too little gain results in very slow performance Integral I This term acts only on the current error It is used to reduce the current error to zero Note that during steady state conditions integral multiplied by current error multiplied by gain is the only thing affecting the output The larger the integral value the larger the change in output OptoControl User s Guide 10 43 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS A positive integral value is required Integral that is too low will result in undershoot Integral that is too high will result in overshoot Derivative D This term acts only on the change in slope of the input signal Its purpose is to anticipate where the input will be on the next scan based on a change in the rate of change of the input value In other words it changes the output as the input gets near the setpoint to prevent overshooting or undershooting Derivative is used in feed forward applications and in systems where the loop dead time is long Its action type is unlimi
270. eric String and Pointer Tables Adding Table Variables 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode click the Configure Variables button 4 on the toolbar or choose Configure Variables The Configure Variables dialog box opens listing all variables of one type in the strategy Configure Yariables x Scope Global Type MERE SES Y Name Type Initial Value ef Count Description R Day_of_the_W Integer 32 0 a Humidity Float 0 2 Status_Trashcan Integer 32 0 1 Time_of_Day Integer 32 0 3 Timer Down Timer 2 In the Type drop down list choose the type of table variable you want to add To have data in the table be persistent select Persistent in the Scope drop down list Pointer tables cannot be persistent Global is the default scope For more information see Persistent Data on page 8 4 To add a new table variable click Add OptoControl User s Guide 8 7 USING VARIABLES The Add Variable dialog box appears A Name l B Description D C Ippe Sting Table 7 Table Length fi String Width fi E Initialization F Initialize on strategy run Initial Value E G Initialize on strategy download Cancel Help The figure above shows the dialog box as it appears for string tables Fields are slightly different for other table variables 5 Complete the fields as follows A Entera name for the table variable The name must start with a letter
271. error Should not occur during normal operation 50 Empty stack error Controller during A command requesting more items from the stack Controller attempted a download or than are available to perform an while running An ENDIF Forth THEN without a corresponding operation that IF expected data on the An UNTIL Forth UNTIL without a corresponding controller stack LOOP UNTIL Forth BEGIN An ENDSWITCH Forth ENDCASE without a corresponding SWITCH Forth CASE A BREAK Forth ENDOF without a corresponding CASE Forth OF 52 Stack full error Controller A command leaving one or more items on the stack Controller stack has grown too big 59 Object pointer does Controller Pointer is null or invalid not exist 60 Wrong object type Controller Tried to move an object into a pointer configured for when doing a move a different type Object types must match from pointer table Using the command Enable I O Unit Causing Current Error when the current error in the error queue is not an I O error 61 Pointer was not Controller Tried to use a pointer variable that isn t pointing to initialized anything Make sure pointers are initialized before you use them 62 Cannot store local Controller Attempting to move a local subroutine object to a subroutine object into global pointer table Check subroutine programming a pointer table parameter 65 Invalid I O command VO Unit Might need new O firmware or bad
272. errors of about 20 percent A scale of 0 20 has a much lower error percentage but still gives some error A scale of 0 200 or larger should be error free lf you need a small range you can set custom scaling in millivolts rather than volts or use a larger range for accuracy and then have a chart re scale the readings by dividing the result by 100 or by 1000 Custom scaled values can be any floating point value as long as the upper value is higher than the lower value Note that inputs typically have under range and over range capability which means you can specify a lower or upper value beyond the standard value Outputs do not have under range or over range capability To return the units zero scale value and full scale value to the defaults for the module click Default G Toset the initial values for this I O channel when the strategy is run click Yes and define the value To leave the internal external values at their last state click No If communication to the point is disabled only the internal values IVALs are updated by the controller The real world external values XVALs for inputs don t change because they are controlled by external devices The IVALs for inputs are set and will be overwritten by the XVALs unless communication to the channel is disabled H Outputs only To set a Watchdog on this point click Yes and define the value to be assigned to the output if the Watchdog is triggered A Watchdog is triggered if no co
273. es of all points on the 1 0 unit at once For example you can use the command Move Digital 1 0 Unit to Table to read the states of all digital points on one 1 0 unit and place them into a table for easy retrieval Table commands move data very quickly for faster throughput Other commands relating to tables can be found in Miscellaneous Commands on page 10 11 Logical Commands on page 10 32 Mathematical Commands on page 10 30 Pointer Commands on page 10 40 and String Commands on page 10 14 OptoControl User s Guide 10 7 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Controller Commands The following commands refer to the controller and are primarily used in communication and 10 8 error handling Controller Status Get Controller Address Get Controller Type Get Firmware Version Get Default Host Port Get RTU M4I0 Temperature Get RTU M410 Voltage Low RAM Backup Battery Reset Controller ISA Set PC Byte Swap Mode ISA only Clear PC Byte Swap Mode ISA only Read Byte from PC Memory ISA only Read Byte from PC Port ISA only Read Word from PC Memory ISA only Read Word from PC Port ISA only Write Byte to PC Memory ISA only Write Byte to PC Port ISA only Write Word to PC Memory ISA only Write Word to PC Port ISA only Remote Controllers Error Handling Error Error on 1 0 Unit Remove Current Error and Point to Next Error Clear All Errors Caused a Chart Error Caused an 1 0 Unit Error
274. escdeondendacuanestaubactecanencds 3 8 Using and Improving the Strategy sciccsticsicocescanontseuciocdsccenssdsonaceoebvelsriaeeloadatiaasouen 3 8 BAe NN Seun te aana A ai E AAAA TEE REAA 3 8 Chart Guidelines cn hace aetna bec beseenceitvesl asa thetic ceathat acancasenestiesaacaachaetnsatnecsasedaaeneetoe 3 9 Naming Conventions acca nics caneseisaicnestichcendestieclel dea dearatiaundeeneeesaneeedauemen 3 9 Instruction Examples ass esha chica acetic oct otacanc ae daseaatawledecttuaenciaas 3 10 Creating Messages to Display On Screen ccccccccssesestesesteesceseseesesestesestesesteneseees 3 11 Using the Interrupt Chart for Event R actions ccccccccseeseseseseeeseeeseeeseeseseeseees 3 12 Error We UO NN ct aces exec ceanteea te capac a E E S 3 13 Countin eset oh eect obec tae ba epee net ni E E 3 14 Using a Count Variable for Repetitive Actions ccccccscecesceceseeesceteseeesesteseseeseseens 3 15 Programming Case StateMent c ccccccscscssescescesescesescssescssssssnssesceseatessscaseacaseaasees 3 16 Usinga Timer Schatten cde ett hnem ental ted oe esata aloes dalla lcalh ackea oats scdaeBe das 3 17 Using a lA teats casera tacts wits iarann E sb ETAR E NR EE 3 18 Pointers and Indexing s sesiisssissssisssisssiisssiissnissniissaiissnnisninnniinnretnnintnninnnnnnrrntnnnnt 3 19 Optimizing MECN IPN sec tdci dapieecodasacneqedassen ten sadoecacdecdsaspacaiaaidipiaatatasiaans 3 20 Hardware IS SUES cs cs seacncnaachach nice hcepaxsdva
275. eseeteseeeseeeseesesestesesteseseeseseeseseetesesteeeseees 10 38 Using ARCNET Pe rtO POGl ic ccnccczesreszesdestincharsectadseaisenataddbondoneddtedacsadeadcescaeants 10 39 Using Ethernet Peer to Peer cccccccccecesssseseetessecessstesesteestesseesseetesssneeseees 10 39 Pointer Commands ceca cccectdasasndoteonie ies esctetndoes torch she ceechnnctitecerantenctacaeduteadsendatastesicns 10 40 Understanding PG MIME Si cesses gaaascas sa tacetactacaasiace te dtsascicaaincdoulaaialpesabeahelaaaapianenaiesaies 10 40 Advantages of Using Pointers c ccccccescesescssescssesessesestesestesescsseacareacanestaceseeesees 10 41 Referencing Objects with POMPELS sccccssscsscissscetessscessstsstiversevsssstedsecnscesedsensecseasseisess 10 41 Pointer Variables ote sete rencemscresracrcsesoesatswescsn obhean sescaneace ted ssa chs setuatosGoiensdtaskattines 10 41 Pointer VADIES asses caccasntrats accatsescetchsusteciesdordacats insides guagcasuhishacksaasibeatstoasaceane 10 42 PID Commands ccc casescesecca ce cicacgnsantatesadeiante cece snccsgucneascencstasssaradaa bon evaiseseassascuasesteciageees 10 42 USMDRIDS esac t6h cen acts ccs aet E A 10 42 Velocity PID Equation sic cccc neaiauecetcescenestixadeettn coca aeeueneeneanes ray hake anlemaatouauiss 10 43 CGAP aE EEEE E E 10 43 WIESE SH PA EE A E etch E OE EEEE ES E ATATA 10 43 Derivative 1D OEE 10 44 Integral Derivative Interaction cccccccccseseessesescesescesescesescsseecsneseaseseeeeseeees
276. et the flag back to zero 3 Close the Start_Flag View Variable dialog box 4 In the Powerup chart window click the Pause button to turn stepping off Then close the Powerup chart 5 Double click the Charts folder on the Strategy Tree 1 26 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START Ue The View Chart Status dialog box appears zix Status Mode Breakpoint Status PausedAt Alarms Running Step Off Break Off Dough_Chip_Control Running Step Off Break Off Dough_Vessel_Pres Running Step Off Break Off Interrupt Suspended Step Off Break Off Block Id 0 Oven_Inspection_C Running Step Off Break Off Powerup Stopped Step Off Break Off This dialog box shows us all the charts in our strategy As you can see four of the charts are running one Interrupt is suspended and one Powerup is stopped Powerup is stopped because it has already done its job Interrupt is a special chart that currently has no commands so it remains in a suspended state Let s check the running charts 6 Close the View Chart Status dialog box and click inside the Dough_Chip_Control chart again 7 Click the Zoom Out button on the toolbar to view the window at a smaller percentage There are several other ways to zoom out too You can right click an empty spot on the chart and select Zoom from the pop up menu You can select Zoom Out from the View menu You can also press the or keys on the keyboard OptoControl User s Guide 1 27 QUIC
277. eteeeeeeneaneeee A 8 Resolving Invalid Port Errors 100 scccscsseessecsessessesssestesesseesecsecsecsessnseteeeeseesees A 8 Running a Loopback Test coccecc25scess ses coscacs seqtaeencsaistoassj tail aenacisiasalsalasiecaiuuandace A 9 Checking Transmit and Receive LEDs sccicc ctcuicsisutesasassnceasesanantasesoniouieoes oxsaacuadsadeneiacsaeie A 9 Resolving ARCNET Communication Problems ccccccscssescessseesesessescssescssescseseeteseeees A 10 Verifying that a Windows Driver Is Not Installed on the ARCNET Card 00 A 10 Resolving Send Errors 33 scincacceniencichicdetnachkaspeascasscaseiadstiantachianstinaseansduiteaduatdacaadeen A 10 Resolving Port Setup Failed Errors 102 0 0 c cccccccsecssessesesessessesesecseeecessneseeeneeees A 10 Checking the ARCNET LED eects sta cates cach sche stabbed eo acelin ce cstecteszusteed A 10 xvi OptoControl User s Guide Resolving Ethernet Communication Problems ccsceceseseseseseseseseseseeseseaseseeeeseaens A 11 Resolving TCP IP Cannot Connect Errors 4177 cesccsccsessesseesessessesseeseeseeseeseesneasee A 11 Ping the OTMEION ET hese ceestens dan sesceccheiwe vckcasina dd cacdasicaatecatiteeg esteccteutastanateeacetacdss A 12 Other Troubleshooting Tools sesceceecsessesessessesseeeseesessesseesesesneeseseeseeseesensseeseeeeeeeees A 13 Checking Detailed Communication Information Using OptoSniff cee A 13 Checking File Versions for F
278. etwork Address l 1 G H cTa 7mm Do Ee Enter a descriptive name for the port All characters are valid Enter the number of times you want OptoControl to reattempt communications Any integer from zero to 255 is valid the default 1 is a good choice It indicates a total of two attempts at communication Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in B Any positive integer is valid the default of 1000 is a good choice Select the manufacturer of the ARCNET PCMCIA card Select the port where the card is installed Select the interrupt Select the node address for the card Click Finish OptoControl User s Guide 4 11 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Finishing a Direct Connection The port you have just added now appears in the Configure Direct Connection dialog box The following figure shows a COM port as an example Configure Direct Connection Cookie Controller PC COM Port 1 1 Click Finish 2 In the Select Controller dialog box highlight the controller you want to associate with the strategy Click OK Continue with the section Associating the Controller with Your Strategy on page 4 15 4 12 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring an Ethernet Connection If you chose Ethernet in the Select Connection d
279. ew the variable value but you cannot change it OptoControl User s Guide 1 25 QUICK START 5 Click Expand Start_Flag Yiew ariable scanning gt 10 xj Nene Steg e Type integer 32 Variable Initialized On Strategy Download Security oo Value OO Close Apply Add Watch Help This dialog box displays current information on the variable Start_Flag You can see that the variable is initialized to zero on strategy download 6 Highlight the value zero in the dialog box and type over it with a one The field turns purple indicating a change has been made but not implemented 7 Click Apply to implement the change Now click back inside the Powerup chart window to make it the active window Stepping Through the Chart Let s slow down and step through the chart to see what s happening 1 Move the Start_Flag View Variable dialog box out of the way and click the Step Block button H The hatch marks move from Start to Start Charts We ve just moved stepped to the next block 2 Click the button again OptoControl executes the Start Charts block and steps to the next command block Since there are no more blocks in this chart we are actually exiting this chart and moving on to new instructions in another chart The Powerup chart has stopped and you can see the word Stopped at the bottom left of the chart In the View Variable dialog box the Start_Flag value reverts to zero because the Start Charts block s
280. f iZ eseo iz X y O Z F z s2J fyeerq Xx O T J iT eseo Xx OTC F Xx OTC F Aa IT eseo eseo go f eseo F yo utms tT esep 30 T S F youtms G 30N 88S ased G lt T i eTtum G lt F TtQun T T T G lt F TF3UN doot G lt F TFp3UN T T T fZ x F TF 9 TqQeLAW T Tt fFT ca a T fZ x T T leTqelAW Z x T TF eTQeLAN fZ x T Ft eTqQeLAW qeedez op od qeedez p S10N 88S doo Jeadau zleosed J 3ISvg duoso dO OptoControl User s Guide F 5 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE Variable Comparison Variable Name OptoControl Type BASIC Example C Example Pascal Example n integer 32 Dim n as Long long n n Integer d integer 64 Not available LONGLONG d d Int64 f float Dim f as Single float f f Single s string Dim as String char s 128 s ShortString pn pointer not available long pn pn Integer nt integer 32 table Dim nt 10 as Long long i 10 nt array 0 9 of Integer ft float 32 table Dim ft 10 as Single float f 10 ft array 0 9 of Single st string table Dim st 10 as String char s 10 128 st array 0 9 of ShortString pt pointer table not available void pt 10 pt array 0 9 of Integer Notes to Experienced Programmers Experienced programmers especially those who are new to OptoControl may be interested in the following notes Variable Database and Other Surprises OptoC
281. f the block to the right clicked at point A clicked again at point B and then clicked the right side of Block 1 New_Chart OF x While you re still drawing a line to delete an elbow you don t want click the right mouse button once to undo it If you created several elbows you can eliminate them in reverse order with repeated right mouse clicks If no more elbows remain and you right click again you delete the connection Once you have completed a connection however you cannot undo it this way Condition Blocks 1 To connect a condition block to the next block in a program sequence click the Connect tool NI Click the source block Select Connection Type m Connection Type False Connection Conce _ Indicate whether you are drawing the True connection or the False connection and then click OK Click the destination block you chose True or False OptoControl User s Guide 7 9 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS The connection is labeled T or F depending on its type 5 Draw another connection to the second destination block It is labeled the opposite exit type For example the following figure shows the True and False connections from the condition block Block 1 If the conditions in Block 1 are true Block 2 is executed next If the conditions in Block 1 are false Block 0 is executed next New_Chart olx 0 Block 0 Adding Text One of the best places
282. f widgets moving along a conveyor belt from manufacturing to shipping You could start the counter in the Powerup Chart like this Powerup olx poeta a T N a e LAAT ai ai at a E ea E a The counter is started in the Powerup Chart Start Counter pa e BeBe he E E OE E a e e a as On Point Widget_Counter of fone Je Se S ai Mo a bob e a 4 Start counter Previous Block Once the counter is started you can read its value at any time by using the command Get Counter for single inputs or Get Quadrature Counter for quadrature inputs If you want the counter to start over when you read its value for example to count the number of widgets in each 24 hour period use the command Get amp Clear Counter or Get amp Clear Quadrature Counter 3 14 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Using a Count Variable for Repetitive Actions A numeric variable for counting is useful when the same action needs to be repeated a specific number of times For example suppose your process includes filling a packing box with a dozen bags of cookies You can use a count variable to track how many bags are dropped into the box Here s part of a chart showing how you would use a count variable in this way Shipping_Area OL x B k gah ay age b i iy S Instructions Shipping_Area Set count to 1 x 1 Be ae Oe AE ie ee ner er REP Bag_Count Modity p e N l l l j Delete Te o A Next Block oe we
283. fList ElseStatement StatementListOrEmpty EndifStatement fStatement if NumericExp then ElseStatement else ElselfStatement elseif NumericExp then StatementListOrEmpty F 14 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE ElselfList FlselfStatement Fiselflist ElselfStatement EndifStatement endif CaseList CaseStatement CaseStatement DefaultStatement CaseList CaseStatement CaseList CaseStatement DefaultStatement DefaultStatement gt default StatementListOrEmpty break CaseStatement case NumericExp StatementListOrEmpty break SwitchStatement switch NumericExp CaseList endswitch ForStatement for NumericVariable NumericExp to NumericExp step NumericExp StatementListOrEmpty next WhileStatement while NumericExp StatementListOrEmpty wend RepeatStatement repeat StatementListOrEmpty until NumericExp OptoControl User s Guide F 15 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE F 16 OptoControl User s Guide OptoControl Index A AC47 port 4 8 action block definition 2 5 7 3 action command definition 2 7 adding analog point 5 16 command instruction 9 1 event reaction 5 32 external commands instructions 6 30 1 0 unit 5 2 PID loop 5 25 table variable 8 7 text to chart 7 10 variable 8 5 addressing SNAP 1 0 5 4 alarm enunciation 10 24 analog adding 1 0 point 5 16 biasing 10 24 changing 1 0 while s
284. finition only on the PC you are using 1 Choose Start Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilities Opto Term 2 Right click the name of the controller in the list CAUTION Make sure you are highlighting the right one You cannot undo a deletion 4 18 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS 3 From the pop up menu choose Delete The controller is no longer defined on the PC Using Redundant Communication Redundant communication allows you to configure a controller to talk to 1 0 through two ports so that if one is busy the other is used Communication over a twisted pair ARCNET link from the controller to the 1 0 unit When you add a controller to OptoControl you have the option to set up the controller s ports through the Controller Port Setup dialog box See instructions on page 4 15 Ports are set up in pairs for redundancy beginning on an even boundary for example 12 and 13 14 and 15 16 and 17 Communication is tried on the even port first If a timeout occurs for this port the controller then tries the secondary port and vice versa thereby giving you the redundant communication Inspecting Controllers and Errors Most of this chapter discusses how to configure controllers in Configure mode But you may also want to inspect or change controllers while you are running the strategy in Debug mode This section shows how to view controller information and the controller s error queue either from
285. for numeric values Operator and Meaning Example and _ Result is true if both values are true nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or Resultis true if at least one value is true nVarl nVar2 or nVar3 xor Result is true if only one value is true nVarl nVar2 xor nVar3 not _ invert the logical value nVarl not nVar2 Any number of logical operators can be Logical operators are left associative For example chained together these two lines are equivalent nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 and nVar4 nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or nVar4 nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or nVar4 nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or nVar4 11 20 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT as M The not operator precedes a value it only takes a The following two lines are equivalent value on its right hand side nVarl not nVarl and not nVar2 nVarl not nVar2 nVarl not nVarl and not nVar2 Logical operators can be combined with comparison operators to create complex logical expressions nVarl nVar2 lt 1 and nVar3 6 5 nVarl nVar2 lt 1 and sStringl abc nVarl nVar2 lt 1 and nVar4 xor nVar5 or not fFloatl fFloat2 nVarl not nVar2 lt 5 same as nVarl nVar2 gt 5 When you use a logical operator in an if statement it isn t necessary to put the result in a variable because the result is used consumed by the if if Motor_1 or Motor_2 then Motor_3 0 endif Using Bitwise Operators All OptoScript bitwise operators
286. for the 1 0 element you are changing analog point digital point PID loop or event reaction 7 When you have finished inspecting the 1 0 unit click Close Inspecting Digital I O Points You can inspect a digital point s data change its status or set its internal or external values in Debug mode To monitor the point in a watch window see page 5 50 To change the point follow these steps 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the 1 0 point on the Strategy Tree or double click the point in the View I O Unit dialog box The small dialog box that appears shows the IVAL and XVAL e The XVAL or external value is the real or hardware value as seen by the 1 0 unit This value is external to the controller e The VAL or internal value is a logical or software copy of the XVAL that is in the controller The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL only when a strategy in the controller reads or writes to an 1 0 point We S prinkler_Status View Digital Point sc iof x val a s OR 2 To change the value or to view more information click Expand OptoControl User s Guide 5 43 WORKING WITH 1 0 The title bar shows the name of the digital point and whether scanning is occurring W S prinkler_Status View Digital Point sc EEG Name Sprinkler_Status Type Input SNAP IDCSD 25 28 VDC Default Last Security fo Enable fres Eror
287. g we can see that cookie production has temporarily stopped OptoControl User s Guide 1 35 QUICK START n A 2 Click Expand to see the whole dialog box Then click Add Watch 2x Name Cookie_Counter r Select Portions To Watch lV value Select Al Clear r Select Watch Window es New Open Cancel Hep Since there is no watch window available to select we ll create one 3 Click New Look in ja MyCookies x 0ce Files of type OptoContral Watch Window Files wth 7 Cancel W 4 Make sure the My Cookies directory appears in the Look in field Type a name for the watch window in the File name field Then click Open The watch window name appears in the Add Watch dialog box and the new watch window appears behind it 5 In the Add Watch dialog box click OK Close the Cookie_Counter View Variable dialog box 1 36 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START The new watch window looks something like this OptoControl Cookie Watch GS File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help Watch window Docking icon 18 x DE fw x oF Cee ie e aeoea gh a n 224 Ole RQ AG lsd ee oxi E Cookies B E Controllers z Cookie Controlle Subroutines Include Ext Instruction Files a Charts amp Alarms amp Dough_Chip_Cc Dough_Vessel_f amp Interrupt amp Oven_Inspectio
288. g terminator on the ends of the communication cable Twisted pair cable not used Two or more I O units with the same address Improperly formatted message sent to I O unit Power up clear expected because the controller had powered up Expecting an A command I O unit or controller Power has been cycled on the I O unit Controller lost power since last communication This is not an error If sent by the I O unit it is notification that communication to the I O unit has been re established This may occur following an error 29 OptoControl User s Guide B 5 S C No Message 5 Data field error Generated by I O unit or controller Possible Causes A digital unit with the address and port of an analog I O unit Error in command syntax Communication watchdog error I O unit Communication to the I O unit port has not occurred within the timeout interval This is not an error It is notification that communication to the I O unit was interrupted The command that returned this code will not be executed Invalid limit error I O unit Sending a value greater than 65 535 to an analog channel Sending a Ramp Analog to Point command with a value of zero units per second Sending a Generate N Pulses command with an on or off time value that is too small Configuring a SNAP module as the wrong type Setting I O from MOMO masks with a point turned on in the On Mas
289. gh being somewhat viscous must be kept under low pressure to dispense properly To monitor the pressure we have included a pressure transmitter PT 100 in the vessel Our controller maintains the vessel pressure through a plant air valve SV 100A The vessel also includes a level switch LAL 100 to tell us when the dough level is low When it is the process is halted so that an operator can refill the vessel Chip Hopper The chip hopper supplies chocolate chips A chip dispenser valve SV 101 controls the number of chips dropped on each cookie Like the dough vessel this tank also includes a level switch LAL 101 to stop the system when the chip hopper needs refilling Oven After the dough and chips have been dropped onto the conveyor the conveyor sends the cookie into the oven and the oven bakes it A PID loop controls the oven temperature The loop consists of a temperature transmitter TT 102 a heater output TY 102 and a PID controller TIC 102 By default the system establishes the oven temperature setpoint at 425 F Inspection Station Our freshly baked cookies then move to the inspection station where someone inspects them If the cookie does not fall within normal tolerances for example it doesn t have enough chips or is shaped oddly the inspector closes a switch XS 103 signalling the bad cookie A valve SV 103 then opens to allow plant air to blow the reject cookie into a waste bin If the cookie p
290. gh block s Instructions dialog box move your cursor to the bottom right edge of the dialog box When your cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow you can resize this dialog box by clicking and dragging any edge 5 Close the Instructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough dialog box by clicking Close or by pressing ESC Before we leave the Dough_Chip_Control chart let s make a cosmetic change We noted earlier that we didn t have any continue blocks in this chart Let s add one to replace the long connection that loops from the Drop Chips block up to the Speed OK block 6 Select the connection line by clicking it at a bend or junction point and delete it by pressing DELETE Click the down arrow at the bottom right of the chart window once to scroll down a little 7 Now click the continue block tool button in the toolbar When you bring the mouse back into the chart area an oval outline appears representing the new continue block 8 Position the oval about half an inch below the Drop Chips block and click your mouse button once A continue block appears with the default name Block 17 The number on yours may be different If you move the mouse again a new oval outline follows Deactivate the continue block tool by clicking the right mouse button or by pressing ESC OptoControl User s Guide 1 9 QUICK START So Your screen should now look like this The Powerup chart starts thischart tt This chartrun
291. gh the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in B Any positive integer is valid the default of 1000 is a good choice D Select the port used by the communication card configured on the card E For an AC37 card select the baud rate configured on the card If you are not using an AC37 leave blank F Select the type of protocol to use when communicating with the controller Binary is recommended for Windows NT users ASCII is recommended for Windows 95 or Windows 98 users and for those connecting to a controller over a modem Make sure the same protocol is configured on the controller itself G Click Finish and skip to Finishing a Direct Connection on page 4 12 OptoControl User s Guide 4 7 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring a Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET Port If you chose Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET in the Port Selection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure Contemporary Controls PCI20 ARCNET Port Name PCI20 Fiber Retries a Timeout msec fioo Device Tppe PCI20 FOG STID3 Network Address m o OwP lt Back Cancel For important information on installing and troubleshooting a Contemporary Controls PCI20 adapter card with FactoryFloor see the online file FactoryFloor PCI ARCNET Addendum in the OptoControl Help menu also available as Opto 22 form 1243 on our Web site www opto22 com A Enter a de
292. gning a strategy 3 1 directory list of files in C 2 errors B 1 files list of C 1 installing Intro xxiil main window 2 9 mode 2 10 opening other applications 2 26 programming 3 1 system requirements Intro xxiil version error A 3 OptoDisplay 2 5 10 34 10 38 Optolntegration kit adding external instruc tions for 6 30 OptoScript block definition 7 3 OptoSniff utility A 13 OptoTerm utility downloading files 4 26 inspecting controllers 4 21 testing communication with controller A 5 OptoUtilities 4 21 4 26 A 5 A 13 A 15 OptoVersion utility A 15 OptoControl User s Guide Index 7 output point definition 2 3 disabling 10 4 P page setup printing graphics 6 21 parameters subroutine 12 1 12 4 passed in subroutine parameters 12 1 pasting block 7 13 command instruction 9 7 connection line 7 13 text block 7 13 permissions in Windows NT A 15 persistent data 8 4 PID commands instructions 10 42 PID loop 10 42 adding 5 25 changing 5 31 changing while strategy is running 5 46 configuration example 5 30 configuring 5 25 deleting 5 31 in separate module 5 20 viewing all in a strategy 6 24 6 25 PID module configuring 5 20 pointer adding 8 5 commands instructions 10 40 definition 2 7 8 3 10 40 programming example indexing 3 19 pointer table 10 42 adding 8 7 port AC47 4 8 ARCNET 4 6 4 11 changing information 10 35 COM port 4 9 configuring controller port
293. gured point 5 21 unit configuration example 5 4 SNAP PID V module configuring 5 20 software launching from OptoControl 2 26 sorting columns in a dialog box 2 20 splitting chart windows 2 15 starting strategy 6 10 status codes B 2 stepping into a subroutine 6 15 through a chart 6 13 stopping strategy 6 10 without using ioControl 6 10 strategy archiving to computer 6 5 to controller 4 22 6 5 closing 6 3 6 4 compiling 1 22 6 6 compiling without downloading 6 7 creating 6 1 definition 2 4 6 1 deleting controller 4 18 designing 3 1 3 8 designing for faster throughput 3 20 downloading 6 6 6 8 as i downloading additional files 4 24 downloading without using ioControl 6 8 files C 1 including subroutine 12 7 opening 6 2 opening a Cyrano strategy 6 2 replacing elements 6 29 restoring archive from controller 4 23 running 1 24 6 10 without using ioControl 6 10 saving 6 3 saving to flash EEPROM 6 4 searching 6 27 stopping 6 10 viewing all operands 6 25 viewing variables and 0 6 24 Strategy Tree definition 2 12 docking 2 14 icons 2 12 string adding control characters 10 16 building example of 10 18 commands 10 14 equivalents in Visual Basic and C 10 20 commands instructions 10 14 convert to string commands 10 21 data extraction example of 10 17 definition 2 6 examples 10 16 length and width 10 15 variable adding 8 5 variable definition of 8 3
294. gy You can associate several controllers with a strategy but only one at a time can receive the downloaded strategy The controller that receives the strategy is called the active controller To change the active controller follow these steps 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure or Online mode 2 On the Strategy Tree right click the name of the controller you want to set as the active controller If its name does not appear in the list follow the steps in Configuring Controllers on page 4 1 3 From the pop up menu choose Set Active The active controller moves to the top of the list in the Strategy Tree Removing a Controller s Association with a Strategy If you no longer want to use a controller with a strategy you can remove Its association with the strategy This action does not delete the controller s definition on your PC CAUTION Do not delete the controller from within the Select Controller dialog box Doing so will delete it from the PC as well as the strategy 1 Make sure the strategy is open in Configure mode or Online mode 2 On the Strategy Tree right click the name of the controller you want to remove From the pop up menu choose Delete The controller is no longer associated with your strategy Deleting a Controller from Your PC If you are sure that a controller will no longer be used with your PC you can delete it using the OptoTerm utility Deleting the controller removes its de
295. h Type fnput G4iAC5 S0 140VDCWAC CS Default Last Security fo Enable Fes Error 10 unit not configured State On Latch Off Latch Close Apply Add Watch Help NOTE Don t worry about the red I O unit not configured error in this dialog box The error appears because the strategy is configured for sample hardware that probably doesn t correspond to your actual I O units and modules OptoControl can t locate this hardware Thats okay for this example OptoControl User s Guide 1 39 QUICK START ae When an inspection finds a bad cookie the on latch attached to the 0 point Inspection_Pass_Fail_Switch is supposed to go on We re going to trip it manually 10 Click one of the arrows in the On Latch IVAL field to change it to On like this Inspection_Pass_Fail_Switch View Digitaa iol x Name Jinspection_Pass_Fail Switch Shrink Type ji nput G4AC5 90 140 VDCAVAC Default Last Security jo Enable Fes Error FEM a a E IMAL KVAL On latch On Close Apply Add Watch Help Close 11 Click Apply The On Latch IVAL field turns green after a second or two indicating the latch is on 12 Click Add Watch We ll add the variable to our watch window so we can see what happens 13 In the Add Watch dialog box leave all portions checked Click OK to add the variable to the Cookie Watch window Close the View Variable dialog box 14 In the Cookie Watch wi
296. h sometimes they appear as negative numbers For example if an incorrect serial port number is used the error queue shows error 30 bad port number If a block number is listed for the error look in that block in the strategy to find the OptoControl command that caused the error The easiest way to find a block is to open the chart then choose Center on Block from the View menu You can click the Block Id column to sort the blocks by number and locate the one with the problem See page B 5 for a numerical list of common queue errors and their possible causes See OptoControl Troubleshooting on page A 1 for additional help Status Codes Status Codes indicate the success or failure of an OptoControl command instruction and they are reported by the controller to a variable in your OptoControl strategy The status code is either zero indicating a successful command or a negative number indicating an error For example suppose you use the command Receive String via ARCNET to get the first string in the ARCNET receive buffer You create a variable named RECV_MSG to put the string in you also create a variable named RECV_STATUS to put the status of the command in In RECV_STATUS you receive either a zero to indicate a successful command or a negative number such as 42 to indicate an error in this example no carriage return found in the receive buffer within the allotted time B 2 OptoControl User s Guide a i Some commands
297. h the Controller You can test communication with the controller by using the OptoTerm utility 1 From the Start menu choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilitiesOptoTerm The OptoTerm window appears showing all controllers configured on your system FE OptoTerm ex File Tools Configure View Help Cookie Controller mistic1 SNAP_LCSX OptoRuntimePC Number of Controllers 4 2 If no controller is listed configure one by choosing Configure Controller and following directions on the screen Make sure the settings you select match the jumper settings on the controller 3 To verify that a controller in the list is communicating double click the controller s name The Comm Loop Time communication time in the Inspect Controller dialog box indicates how long it takes to gather the information in the dialog box and is a good relative indicator of communication time For direct ARCNET communication for example a typical time is 30 milliseconds For serial communication about 60 milliseconds is typical depending on the baud rate This dialog box also shows the status of the current strategy and any errors in communication with the controller For further explanation see Inspecting Controllers and Errors on page 4 19 4 Ifyou receive an error indicating a communication problem go on to the next section OptoControl User s Guide A 5 Resolving General Communication Problems Matching OptoContr
298. han one OptoControl User s Guide F 1 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE fiw ols iw ols fiva ols fols u eTqeTTeae JON f o ls u s19 9e e4O Bulls g qs F T 3S g as t 1 4s Adozqs s 4as F T 3S g las F T 3S oTTeu 1 4s f aOTT Yua 1 98 Adozqs wOTTSUy T 9S faOTTOYa T 3S fs 0 3S f s 0 4s Adozqs s 0 3S fs 0 3S juawubisse jqe Buys 7s S zs s Adozqs ZS S 7s 8S f OTT Y S t aOTT Yu s Adoz4s wOTT8Un S faOTT Uu S juawubisse Buus z z z A x u p19 f z x A x u b A x u 3 x A X u b ela O Z x F F Tela O Z x 3 F e 4 0 C FJ F Tela O Z x F F suoss dx H WNU fe T T 4 fe 1T T 3 T T 4 fe T T 4 z Tt tz Tt Z 7 3 z Tt tt o0 3 tT 013 T 0 3 T ol juauubisse jqe 9 wnu fe t fe su u fe su juawubisse ou wnu i JUS9WWOD dul x eTqeTTeae JON x JUBLUWO9 Y90 q Wi iW iW G9 STQeTTeae JON G9 J9 OeJeYo LOTTO wOTT8Un wOTT8Un wOTT8Un Buns LI ApE Z LI 4pEZ I 8SI 4pEZ I LI 4pE Z ouas 20l PEZ pe pee pez puepue s eoj DAVETT POTOAVEZTTXO IO TTIOAVEZTXO eTqetteae JON POTOAWEZTXO jewIdepexey pg 1969341 EZ POTETT I0 TIEZT eTqeTTeae ON POTEZ ewop p9 1969 u1 DAVETT DAVETTXO DAVETTH DAVEZTXO jewloapexay ze 126341 EZ
299. hapter About OptoControl ow 2 1 Windows and Dialog Boxes in OptoControl 2 13 General Control Concepts 2 3 Customizing OptoControl for Your Needs 2 21 OptoControl Terminology 000 2 4 Online PRU 2s ccsccsdcnsccn cece dencentnstacantensastacastanser 2 27 OptoControl Main Window 2 9 About OptoControl OptoControl is a self documenting programming language based on flowcharts You can use It to write control software for industrial automation from controlling a simple heating system to running a complex factory The software you write controls all the hardware that runs your heating system or factory OptoControl is one component of the FactoryFloor suite of Windows 32 bit software for industrial automation Other components include OptoDisplay the human machine interface HMI for monitoring the control system and OptoServer which provides networking and DDE OPC capability The diagram on the next page shows how OptoControl and the other FactoryFloor software components on your PC can work with the hardware in your control system The diagram shows examples of controllers input output 1 0 points and analog and digital inputs and outputs All these terms are defined in the following pages OptoControl User s Guide 2 1 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Control System Example Control Room FactoryFloor Software OptoControl Programming Debugging OptoDisplay Viewing Trending A
300. hart This chart runs continuously once the Elapsed time Elapsed time readings can help you determine how much time a chart or a single chart block takes to execute The readings have slightly different meanings depending on what you did to make them appear as described in the table below When you Elapsed time represents Run a chart and pause it Time since the chart started or was last paused Single step Time to execute the previous block Auto step Time to execute the most recently executed block Hit a breakpoint Time since the last pause or if the chart was not paused elapsed time since the chart started running 6 18 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Viewing and Printing You can view and print several helpful things in a strategy This section discusses how to View individual charts or subroutines View all charts in a strategy Print the graphics in a chart a subroutine or an entire strategy View and print all instructions in a chart subroutine or strategy View and print a database of some or all strategy elements such as I O units and variables View and print a cross reference of strategy elements View and print a bill of materials for the I O units and modules required for the strategy For information on viewing and changing I O units see Inspecting 1 0 in Debug Mode on page 5 41 For variables see Viewing Variables in Debug Mode on
301. hart button al 3 To step to the next command or the next line in OptoScript code click the Step Line button El or press F11 or select Debug Step Line The next line is executed and the chart pauses again Keep clicking the Step Line button to move from line to line As you step into each block it opens to show the instructions inside A red arrow indicates the next instruction to be executed Instructions Morning Turn on lights x gt Turn On Step Line Line_A_Lights Step Block Line_B_Lights Next Block Previous Block Turn On Close Help Commend Help You can use the Step Line and Step Block buttons in the dialog box to move to the next line or block OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES In an OptoScript block line stepping looks like this OptoScript Morning Check refrigeration 2 OptoScript Code while Temperature_Input gt 40 Refrigeration 80 while Temperature_Input gt 50 Alarm wend wend while Temperature_Input lt 30 Refrigeration Refrigeration 20 wend of Close Help Ein 14 Col 3 Notice that the Step Line and Step Block buttons also appear in the OptoScript block You can use them to move to the next line or block Auto Stepping A chart does not have to be paused before auto stepping can begin To begin auto stepping click the Auto Step button 5 press F8 or select Debug Auto Step Chart Step
302. hart within the same strategy These sections apply to commands in action condition and continue blocks For OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 11 25 Cutting or Copying a Command 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command you want to cut or copy 2 In the Instructions dialog box click any line of the command you want to cut or copy To cut or copy more than one command hold down the SHIFT key while you click all the commands to be cut or copied at once NOTE To cut and paste all commands in a block copy and paste the entire block and then change its name If necessary 3 Press CTRL X to cut the command s or CTRL C to copy them You can also click the right mouse button and choose Cut or Copy from the pop up menu The command is cut or copied to the Windows clipboard Pasting a Command Once you have cut or copied a command you can paste it into any block in the same strategy 1 Choose one of the following e To paste the command in the same block click where you want to insert the command e To paste the command at the end of the instruction block move the cursor just below the last instruction and click to highlight the empty space e To paste the command to another block click Close to exit the current Instructions dialog box and double click the block where you want to place the command Click where you want to inser
303. he Strategy Tree double click the pointer variable you want to view 8 14 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES CE ee The View Pointer dialog box appears showing the pointer s name type and item pointed to Pointer_A View Pointer scann Ei Eg Name Pointer_A Type integer 32 Variable Item Pointed To Time_of_D ay E Inspect Help 2 To view the status or value of the item pointed to click the Inspect button If you need help follow the steps in Viewing Numeric and String Variables on page 8 13 Viewing Numeric and String Tables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the table variable you want to view The View Table dialog box appears showing the table s name length maximum number of entries width for a string table initialization method and security level It also lists the index and value of each table entry The title bar includes the name of the variable and indicates whether scanning is occurring Here s an example for a string table w Days_Table View Table scanning Name Days_Table Length z Width fs Initialized on Strategy Run Security jo Table entries and their current values Resize the dialog box to see all entries at once v Apply Add watch Hee Scanning for an individual table element stops whenever you select an element in the table It resumes for that element
304. he chart at full speed after the breakpoint click the Pause Chart button Managing Multiple Breakpoints You can quickly set multiple breakpoints in several charts or you can see all the breakpoints you have set at once 1 Press CTRL B or select Debug Breakpoints The Breakpoints dialog box appears showing all the breakpoints set in the strategy Block ID Black Name Black Type Add Sprinkler Control 28 Between 6 amp 7 Condition ae Remove Clear All 2 To add new breakpoints click Add s Add Breakpoint 2 x Block 0 Action Start Chart Action 3 From the Chart drop down list select the chart in this strategy in which you want to place a breakpoint OptoControl User s Guide 6 17 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Every block in that chart appears in the Block list You can click the ID Name or Type column labels to sort the blocks numerically by ID or alphabetically by name or type 4 To add a breakpoint highlight a block and click OK The new breakpoint appears in the Breakpoints dialog box 5 To delete a breakpoint highlight it and click Remove To delete all breakpoints in the strategy at once click Clear All 6 When you have finished making changes click OK Interpreting Elapsed Times As you debug your strategy you may notice elapsed time readings appearing in a chart s status bar as shown below Dough_Chip_Control Lol x The Powerup chart starts gt this c
305. he log file choose File Edit Log File The file opens in a text editor Logging is turned off when you open the file 6 View or edit the file as needed and then close it You return to the OptoSniff window 7 To resume logging choose File Log to File To rename the log file or change its location choose File Select Log File Navigate to the location where you want to save the file and enter a name Click OK 9 When you have finished monitoring communication close the OptoSniff window A 14 OptoControl User s Guide a i Checking File Versions for FactoryFloor Sometimes problems may be caused by older or misplaced files Product Support may ask you to run OptoVersion to check the versions and paths of your Opto 22 dll and exe files Here s how 1 From the Start menu choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilitiesOptoVersion jE OptoVersion Utility Click Find to search for Opto 22 files on your hard drives Help Gave s Emai 2 In the OptoVersion window click Find The utility searches your hard drive and prints a list of Opto related files found 3 To see more information on any file double click its name To sort the list in a different order click any column heading 4 To e mail the information to Opto 22 Product Support click E mail The utility saves the list to a file named Version bd in the same directory that contains OptoVersion exe If you use Microsoft Outlook a
306. he table element nIndex nIndex 1 Increment the counter wend OptoControl User s Guide 11 23 USING OPTOSCRIPT rs While loops can be nested and can contain other kinds of program statements Each while needs a matching wena at the end For example nl 0 while nl lt 100 while nl gt 50 and nl lt 60 ntl nl nl 100 nl n1 1 wend ntl nl nl nl n1 1 wend Repeat Loops Repeat loops in contrast to while loops are used to execute a list of statements until a given condition is true Because the condition is tested at the end of each loop the content of the loop will always be executed at least once This example sets the first five elements of ntTable to 10 Compare this example to the example for while loops to see the difference nIndex 0 Initialize the counter repeat ntTable nIndex 10 lt J Set the table element nIndex nIndex 1 4 until nIndex gt 5 lt _ Increment the counter Execute loop until condition is true Repeat loops can be nested and can contain other kinds of program statements Each repeat statement needs a matching unt ii statement at the end For Loops For loops can be used to execute a list of statements a certain number of times The for line sets up a predefined initial value and a predefined final value for the counter that counts the repetitions The line also includes the ste
307. he week It then uses a pointer to perform a calculation using the correct variable switch GetDayOfWeek case 0 Sunday pnl n2 break case 6 Saturday pni n3 break default Monday Friday pni n4 break endswitch Use the pointer to set the chosen variable pni n EL 57 Working with Tables Following are some examples for using numeric string and pointer tables Numeric tables ntTable1 0 1 ntTable1 1 2 0 ntTable1 2 nVarl ntTable1 3 ntTable1 2 ntTable1 4 ntTablel ntTablel 0 ntTablel 5 nVarl ntTablel 2 3 1 nVarl ntTablel 0 nVarl ntTablel 0 ntTablel 1 ntTablel 2 String tables stStrT1 0 Hello stStrT1 1 world stStrT1 2 stStrT1 0 stStrT1 1 Chr sStringl stStrT1 2 11 18 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT Pointer tables Note that types are not checked when putting pointers into a pointer table However when a pointer is moved from a pointer table element into a pointer variable the types are checked at runtime by the controller and must match For example assume that the following elements have been placed in table ptPointT ptPointT 0 null ptPointT 1 amp nLED_A ptPointT 2 amp fTemp ptPointT 3 amp sStringl ptPointT 4 amp Powerup Based on this information the first two of the following statements are good The third
308. hiding 2 11 matching to screen resolution 2 23 moving 2 11 2 23 showing 2 11 totalizer analog 10 5 10 6 digital 10 2 trigonometry commands instructions 10 30 troubleshooting ARCNET communications A 10 communication in general A 6 Ethernet communications A 11 how to begin A 1 memory problems from Online mode changes 2 10 OptoSniff utility A 13 Product Support Intro xxii serial communications A 8 Windows NT permissions A 15 U up timers 10 13 V variable adding 8 5 changing 8 12 configuring 8 5 definition 2 6 8 1 deleting 8 12 in strategy design 3 5 literal constant 8 5 monitoring in watch window 5 50 naming 3 10 persisent data in 8 4 pointer definition 10 40 table 8 3 types of data 8 2 types in OptoControl 8 3 viewing all in a strategy 6 24 6 25 version checking with OptoVersion A 15 View toolbar 2 11 a Le viewing all operands 6 25 all variables and 1 0 6 24 another window or chart 2 14 chart 6 19 chart instructions 9 8 error queue 4 21 subroutine 6 19 12 10 two copies of a chart at once 2 15 viewing See also inspecting WwW watch window creating 5 50 docking 2 14 5 52 opening 5 52 Windows NT permissions A 15 X XVAL 10 4 event reaction 10 28 Z zooming in or out 2 17 z order changing 7 12 OptoControl User s Guide Index 11 Index 12 OptoControl User s Guide
309. his OptoScript block click OK to save your work and close the editor You return to the flowchart Troubleshooting Errors in OptoScript Unable To Find Errors If you test compile an OptoScript block and receive unable to find errors try the following suggestions For Commands Check the exact spelling of the command including upper and lower case OptoScript commands are similar to standard OptoControl commands but contain no spaces and some abbreviations Also check that the command is necessary in OptoScript Some common commands including comparison commands such as Less and mathematical commands such as Add are replaced with operators built into the OptoScript language Check Appendix E OptoScript Command Equivalents for equivalent OptoScript commands The easiest way to make sure the command you enter is valid is to enter it by clicking one of the Insert Command buttons in the OptoScript Editor and choosing the command from the Select Instruction dialog box For Variables or Other Configured Items Variables 1 0 units and points counters event reactions PID loops and other configured items in your strategy as well as charts have usually been created before you use them in OptoScript code Check their exact spelling including underscores and upper and lower case to make sure they are correct in the code The easiest way to make sure spelling is correct is to enter the variable or other item by click
310. hived to the computer and to the controller when it is downloaded Any archive already on the controller will be replaced by the new archive Restoring Archived Strategies from the Controller If original strategy files are lost or damaged you can use Optolerm to restore the strategy archive from the controller to a computer 1 Click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilities OptoTerm OptoControl User s Guide 4 23 4 24 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS The OptoTerm window appears EE OptoTerm ME E File Tools Configure View Help Cookie Controller mistic1 SNAP_LCSX OptoRuntimePC Number of Controllers 4 2 Right click the controller and choose Upload Strategy Archive from the pop up menu 3 In the Save OptoControl Strategy Archive As dialog box navigate to the folder where you want to save the archive file Keep the file name as it is so you can see the date and time it was originally downloaded to the controller Click Save A dialog box shows progress as the archive file is uploaded to the computer 4 Navigate to the zipped archive file Assuming you are using WinZip double click the file name Highlight all files and click Extract Extract them to the location you want 5 When all files are extracted double click the cdb file to open the strategy If necessary re link subroutines and other needed files Re linking may be necessary because the directory struc
311. hlight where you want the command to appear Click Add and repeat the steps in this section If you highlight a command that s already in the dialog box the new command will appear just before it TIP If you are adding commands to several blocks at once you can quickly move from block to block in the chart by clicking the Next Block or Previous Block buttons in the Instructions dialog box If you re working with a condition block clicking Next Block opens a dialog box so you can select which block to choose since condition blocks have two exits The same dialog box appears If you click Previous Block and the block you re working with has connections coming from more than one block 11 If you put more than one command in a condition block complete the Operator group as follows e f both commands must be true to exit the block true click AND e f only one of the commands must be true to exit the block true click OR 9 4 OptoControl User s Guide USING COMMANDS rs Here is an example of an Instructions dialog box for a condition block with two commands In this case the block will exit true if either of the commands is true Instructions Sprinkler_Control Sunday or Wednesday x Day_of_the_Week Add 3 Modify Day_of_the_Week ll 0 Next Block Eoee Either the first command OR the m Operator second command C AND can be true for this e OR condition block to exit true Close Help Command Help Cha
312. iability of the network While it may be possible to use other drive types such as floppy disks key chain USB drives and memory cards their use is not recommended They are better suited for transferring files rather than directly accessing them xxiv OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Quick Start Introduction In this chapter we ll start with a sample strategy a control application for a simple cookie factory You ll learn how to work with strategies open and manipulate flowcharts work with variables and I O points configure a controller compile and download a strategy run it in Debug mode make an online change and more The best way to use the tutorial is to sit down at your computer and follow it through All you need is OptoControl and access to an Opto 22 controller Even if you can t access a controller at the moment you can still do everything up to the point of downloading your strategy In This Chapter Opening the Strategy cceeeseeeee 1 1 Compiling the Strategy cece 1 22 Saving the Strategy 1 3 Running the Strategy 1 24 Examining the Strategy 112211155111 1 5 Making an Online Change ceeeee 1 30 Opening a GANT aeidccsecsstdvaiaintondedadnc 1 6 Compiling and Downloading the Change 1 33 Opening a BIOCK ccc eeceestesesteneees 1 8 Using a Watch Window ccceceneee 1 35 Adding a Command cccccceeseeees 1 12 Closing the Strategy and Exiting
313. iable as a numeric integer Here are some variables you may need For more information and step by step procedures to add variables see Chapter 8 You can change them or add other variables later if necessary Variable Needed Type Name in OptoControl Hour of the day Numeric 32 bit integer Time_of_Day Day of the week Numeric 32 bit integer Day_of_the_Week Humidity Numeric float Humidity Down timer Timer Timer Creating OptoControl Charts and Adding Instructions If you have already drawn the process in a flowchart this step will go faster OptoControl is based on flowcharts because they are a natural way to show a control process And the block names and instructions you add to charts just like the names of variables are in normal everyday language For more information and step by step procedures see Chapter 7 Working with Flowcharts and Chapter 9 Using Commands The difference between the flowchart you drew before and the chart you create in OptoControl is that the flowchart was designed for human beings but the OptoControl chart must be more detailed so the computer can follow it OptoControl User s Guide 3 5 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Because the chart is more detailed and because most control processes are far more complex than our sprinkler system you will usually create multiple charts for an OptoControl strategy Break the process down into logica
314. ialog box appears View Print Database x m Include IV Pointer Tables V String Variables IV Pointer Variables JV Numeric Tables IV 120 Units amp Points IV PID Loops IV Event Reactions IV String Tables I Descriptions Cancel Help 3 Make sure all element types you want to include are checked Click to uncheck any elements you do not want 4 To include descriptive comments associated with the elements click to put a check mark next to Descriptions 5 Click OK 6 24 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES OptoControl processes the database and puts the data in the Database window Save Search Print SimpleSprinkler Database Strategy Database STRATEGY SimpleSprinkler DATE 057 11 99 TIME 13 16 30 POINTER VARIABLES NAME Pointer A NAME Analog Unit TYPE G4 Analog Multifunction PORT ADDRESS l WATCHDOG ENABLE Enabled SECURITY REFERENCE COUNT 1 CHANNEL 2 NAME Hygrometer TYPE Input MODULE DEFAULT No UNITS mA ENABLE LOWER REAL READING 4 000 UPPER REAL READING Time_of_Day Local Disabled 0 G4aD3 4 20 mA Enabled 20 000 LOWER SCALED READING 0 000 UPPER SCALED READING 100 000 ZERO SCALE VALUE 0 000 FULL SCALE VALUE WATCHDOG Disabled SECURITY o REFERENCE COUNT 100 000 1 You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all the data For each element the name security level and reference c
315. ialog box on page 4 3 the Configure Ethernet Connection dialog box appears Configure Ethernet Connection Configure controller name and parameters Controller Name A A Settings IPAddress ooo __ B Socket po i C Retries p D Timeout msec 5o00 E ces 1 Complete the fields as described below A Enter a descriptive name for the controller Valid characters are letters numbers spaces and most other characters except colons and square brackets Spaces cannot be used as first or last characters Enter the IP address of the controller in decimal notation for example 192 9 200 24 Enter the controller s IP socket number The default of 2001 represents the socket of the host task on the controller this default normally should not be changed Retries indicate the number of times OptoControl will reattempt communications with the controller Since retries are automatically handled by the protocol TCP IP enter zero here Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in D Any positive integer is valid For Ethernet 3 5 seconds 3000 5000 milliseconds is a good starting point 2 Click Finish 3 In the Select Controller dialog box highlight the controller you want to associate with the strategy Click OK Continue with
316. ick Select Select Destination for Export File awo Sl el fee OptoControl Chart Export Files cxf 4 Navigate to where you want the exported chart file to be saved In the File name field enter a name for the exported chart Click Save You return to the Export Chart dialog box which now shows the path and file name in the To section 7 18 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS 5 Optional Enter a description for the new chart 6 Click OK The exported chart is saved You can import it into any OptoControl strategy See the next section for information on importing charts Importing a Chart 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode choose Chart mport The Automatic Chart Import dialog box appears Replace existing chart Io Name Name Select Description Description a a 2 Atthe top of the dialog box click Create new chart or Replace existing chart CAUTION If you choose Replace existing chart the old chart will be completely overwritten with the chart you are importing 3 Click Select Navigate to the exported chart Click OK 4 In the To section of the dialog box enter a name for the new chart If you wish enter a description If you are replacing an existing chart choose the chart to be replaced Click OK The chart is imported A Chart Import Report dialog box shows you how the tags in the chart match with those already in
317. ick it in the View I O Unit dialog box OptoControl User s Guide 5 47 WORKING WITH 1 0 The Event Reaction dialog box appears showing the configuration parameters for the event reaction The title bar shows the name of the event reaction and whether scanning iS occurring Control_Temp_Over_300_Degrees scanning Name Control_Temp_Over_300_Degrees A Unit nalog_I0_Unit Error Ne t aiCSSCOtsCSCSNCNC S Event Type fAnalogInput gt Value SS Compare Value 300 Reaction Type ctiwaePDLop IMAL VAL Event Occurring Event Occurred Scan Status Interrupt Event Analog Input gt Value IVAL VAL C S Oven_Temperature fo 447 1234 Reaction Activate PID Loo IVAL XVAL om Um Temperature_Contraller D Input Oven_Temperature 0 447 1234 Output fOven_Temperature_Control 0 0 L__ Setpoint From Host 450 jo Addwatch Hep Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost Asterisks in a field indicate an out of range value Dashes in an XVAL field indicate a communication error 2 Change the fields as necessary A Current status Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled To change status click one of the arrows then click Apply B Internal and external values for whether the event o
318. ile Instruction In the Subroutine The figure below shows external instruction files included in the subroutine AB PLCS MASTER EXAMPLE ON x E A 4B PLCS MASTER EXAMPLE Controllers z 4B Interface 096 Arcnet 5 Subroutines Included AB Configure Port 4 AB Typed Read AB Typed Write Passed Parameters Variables Ext Instruction Files Included AB xid EJ 2E Get Char From IntBuff ieee Te EJ 48 Get Comm Mode A AB Get Symbol Master EJ a8 Get Symbol Slave aaa es o Fa gt You can see the instructions within the XID file An A indicates an action command and a C indicates a condition command Because these external instruction files are located in the subroutine folder the instructions are available only for the flowchart in the subroutine not for other flowcharts in the strategy In the Strategy The following figure shows external instruction files included in the strategy Cookies olx E Cookies Controllers Subroutines Included SAk Et Instruction File s Included 2 Useremds xid fA Special Action Command gt Special Condition Command E Charts G Variables 1 0 Units Smee sees Again you can see the instructions within the XID file Since the instruction files in this case are located in the
319. in Operand C Instruction Missing Connections Empty Cond Blocks Close Type Name Help fal Valid Types 7 Alarms 7 2 Under Search Scope to search the entire strategy click Global To search one chart only click Local and choose the chart name from the drop down list If you are searching a subroutine the search is Local and the subroutine s name is shown 3 Under Search For choose one of the following e To search for a chart an 1 0 unit or point a PID loop an event reaction or a variable click Operand In the Type and Name fields choose the operand you want from the drop down list e To search for an instruction click Instruction Click Action or Condition and choose the instruction you want from the drop down list e To search for blocks that are not connected to other blocks click Missing Connections e To search for condition blocks that have no instructions click Empty Cond Blocks 4 Click Find The dialog box expands and the search results appear at the bottom Search Scope Find Global Chart Local Case_Statement z Stop Search For Print C Operand Instruction Missing Connections Empty Cond Blocks Action Condition Close Instruction Help Get Day of Week x Select Case_Statement Fan Control 5 GetDayOMWeek lp Sea rch Case_Statement Check Day 0 Get Day of Week results Sprinkler_Control Grass Trees Control 39 GetDay0fwWeek Sprinkler_Control Grass
320. in GO Instructions Shipping_Area Increase count by 1 x ee enone Increment Variable Add E EE e we e A Bag_Count ke pio aye o 8 S uan ten oF Modify ee Se f Delete aE ws ee Next Block Previous Block m oe amp aoa e oe iia we Is Bag_Count To 12 Modity Delete 100 eee Next Block Previous Block Operator AND Command Help Cc OR If you are an experienced programmer you ll notice that this example is a for loop You can use the following OptoScript code within a single OptoScript block to accomplish the same result for Bag_Count 1 to 12 step 1 Count 12 items dropped into box Bag_Dropper 1 Turn on bag dropper next See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for more information on using code to streamline control structures in your strategy OptoControl User s Guide 3 15 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Programming Case Statements A frequent need in programming is to create case statements also called switch statements if then else statements or nested if statements These statements create multiple decision points if the condition is A then X will happen if the condition is B then Y will happen and so on This example uses regular OptoContro commands see Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for another option that takes up less space in your flowchart For example suppose you have a conveyor with three speeds high 3 low
321. in the following ways String literals must be all on one line sGreeting Hello world String variables sOutgoing sIncoming When you use the Chr keyword to assign a character value to a string variable you can either quote a character or give its ASCII value For example the following two statements are equivalent sStringl Chr A sStringl Chr 65 Clear a string using empty quotation marks sStringl 11 16 OptoControl User s Guide A string can be thought of as a table of characters The number in square brackets is the character s index Note that the index in this case starts with the number 1 not with zero The following code would result in sGreeting equaling Hello sGreeting Hello sGreeting 6 sGreeting 7 sGreeting 6 A character element of a string variable may be treated like an Integer 32 value nNumber sString2 1 sString2 2 USING OPTOSCRIPT rs The operator is used to paste strings together There is no limit to the number of operators you can use on a line The operator must be used in an assignment statement sStringl Hello sString2 world sString3 After the three lines above the following two lines would produce the same result sString4 sStringl sString2 sString3 sString4 sStringl world sString3 Use the operator to append one string to another and change the value of one of them into th
322. ine you can preview the image to make sure It s what you want before you print It NOTE If you have trouble printing graphics set your printer for PostScript emulation OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Setting Up the Page Before printing graphics you should verify your page setup which determines how each graphic appears on a page 1 Select File Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box appears Flowchart Graphics Page Setup x Graphics Scaling Adjust to fh 00 normal size C Fitto fi page s wide by fi pages tall Page I V Print Header Cancel Help 2 In the Graphics Scaling area choose whether you want each flowchart to print at a fixed percentage of normal size or to span a specific number of pages e To print at a fixed percentage click the Adjust To option and specify any scaling from one percent to 1 000 percent You can type in a number or click the arrows to go up or down to the next increment of 25 percent Typically percentages between 50 percent and 200 percent work the best e To print to a specific number of pages click the Fit To option and select the number of pages wide and tall you would like each chart to print If you choose one for each dimension each chart prints to a single page For each dimension you can specify any integer between one and 255 but be careful Selecting values of five and five for example would cause each chart t
323. ing commands In OptoScript the code is all in one block switch GetDayOfWeek case 1 Monday ny w 5 N NNN nunn oorr endswitch KN D X am Using OptoScript for case statements saves space in the flowchart and lets you see all the possible cases in one dialog box OptoControl User s Guide 11 7 USING OPTOSCRIPT For Conditions Like loops and case statements conditions can be simpler when done in OptoScript code f then if then else and if then elseif statements can all be mixed and nested as needed Here s an example of a simple f then else statement as it could be done in standard OptoControl commands and in OptoScript rr In standard OptoControl commands even a simple pe Ne os if then else statement requires three blocks a In OptoScript a single block contains e the statement SEGRE E S OptoScrint Powerup Check Oven Temp Ei Ce su 5S Hale zE alia Aala eE OptoScript Code if Oven_Temperature gt 450 then Oven_Alarm 1 7 Set the oven alarm else Oven_Alarm 0 Clear the oven alarm endif P OptoScript is even more useful for more complex conditions such as the following i i l f l i f f l f OptoScript Temperature_Control Temperature Control Ea Ga alas allen oA E eale a 2 alts Alala EE OptoScript Code ____ if Temp_Probe gt 80 then T Fan_1 1 Turn on fan 1
324. ing the cdf file the batch file can also run or stop the strategy or even define the controller on the PC that will download the file OptoTerm must be installed on the PC where the batch file is used The following table lists actions you may want to take within OptoTerm To do this Use this Add a controller a or addce Download the specified file to the specified controller d or download Run the strategy in the specified controller r or run Stop the strategy in the specified controller s or stop Show help information for this function in Opto Term h or help Start OptoTerm normally lt no arguments gt Format for lines in the batch file is as follows io io io Term h Term control_engine_name d filename r Term a control_engine_name tcp IP address port retries timeout_ms This example shows lines included in a batch file that will define the controller download the cdf file to it and then run the strategy io io io Term Term MyCi Term MyCi my ry yCE tcp 10 20 30 40 22001 0 2000 d c My_Project MyStrategy MyC Running and Stopping Running a Strategy 1 With the strategy open choose Mode Debug E CDE 2 Click the Run Strategy button gt or press F5 or select Debug Run Stopping a Strategy To stop the strategy click the Stop Strategy button aj or press F3 or select Debug S
325. ing the Insert Variable button in the OptoScript Editor and choosing the item from the drop down lists If the item has not yet been configured or created use the normal OptoControl methods to do so For help see the chapters in this guide on working with 1 0 and using variables OptoControl User s Guide 11 29 USING OPTOSCRIPT rr Common Syntax Errors Missing Code Check for obvious errors first For example make sure nothing essential has been left out of or unnecessarily added to a statement Sample Statement Should Be Missing Code iTotal x t yt j iTotal x y zZz Last operator missing a variable iTotal x y z iTotal x y Z Semicolon missing sGreeting Hello sGreeting Hello First quotation mark missing on the string iTime Get Hours iTime GetHours Extra space in command name parentheses missing after the command x 1 x y x 1 x y Parentheses mismatched last half missing Check to make sure operators are used correctly You may want to review OptoScript Expressions and Operators on page 11 19 If you are using control structures such as loops or fstatements especially if they are nested make sure all required elements are present For example every i must have a then and an endif See OptoScript Control Structures on page 11 22 for more information Type Conflicts Type conflicts are caused when different
326. ings before printing click Close and see Setting Up the Page on page 6 21 Printing One Chart or Subroutine 1 To print one chart or subroutine open its window 2 From the Chart or Subroutine menu select Print Graphics 3 In the standard Windows Print dialog box do one of the following e To print to a printer select the printer page range and number of copies Click OK e To print toa file select Print to file and click OK In the dialog box enter the file name and location 6 22 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Your chart or subroutine is printed Printing All Charts in a Strategy CAUTION You can print all charts in a strategy but be sure that s what you want to do before you begin You cannot cancel once printing has started 1 To print all charts within a strategy open the strategy and check the page setup For help see Setting Up the Page on page 6 21 2 Select File Print All Graphics Printing begins immediately no Print dialog box appears Messages inform you of each chart s printing progress To skip printing a particular chart click Cancel when its message appears Viewing and Printing Instructions 1 To view all commands instructions in a chart or subroutine open the chart or subroutine window and select View Print Instructions from the Chart or Subroutine menu Choose whether to sort instructions by block name or block ID number 2 To view all instructi
327. ion PTBL_ pointer table G float integer or timer 8 10 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES CE ee Saving the Initialization File You must include a carriage return at the end of each line in the initialization file In addition the last line of the file must be blank If you add comments to the file they must be preceded by a backslash and a space When you have finished modifying the file save it as a text file to your strategy directory You can name the file anything you like You can also save it to any directory you like but it is good practice to save each initialization file to the directory of the strategy that references it Downloading the Initialization File To use the file you need to download it with your strategy 1 With the strategy open in Configure or Online mode click the Configure Controllers button E on the toolbar choose Configure Controllers or double click the controller name 2 Highlight a controller and click the Download Options button The Download Options dialog box appears The initialization file must be downloaded immediately after your strategy is downloaded Download Options x Before Run File After Run File Add Remove Cancel Help Download the initialization file after the strategy 3 Click the bottom Add button in the Download Options dialog box 4 Navigate to the initialization file you created Double click the file name The file app
328. ional literal words or symbols Current temperature 86 3 F Literal words Variable Literal words amp symbols value amp symbols Average price 4 86 You can create the message in a single block in your OptoControl chart like this 1 To enter the literal text use the command Move String Remember Instructions Message_Display Create Message x to include spaces where you want them to appear such as after the Move String From Current temperature equal sign To Current_Temp_Message Modify n Convert Float to String Delete 2 Add the variable value by converting Canwert Current_Temp it to a string and appending it to the Length 5 Hert Black string you just created Decimals 1 Put Result in Current_Temp_String Previous Block Append String to String Append Current_Temp_String To Current_Temp_Message Append String to String Append Tr To Current_Temp_Message 3 If needed append another literal string Alternatively you can create the message by placing the following OptoScript code within a single OptoScript block FloatToString Current_Temp 5 1 Current_Temp_String Current_Temp_Message Current temperature Current_Temp_String AEs OptoScript can be more efficient for string handling than standard OptoControl commands See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for more information OptoControl User s Guide 3 11 DESIGNING YOUR STRATE
329. ipt that does the same thing An OptoScript file may be smaller if you use fewer temporary variables Tables can consume a lot of controller memory and they are the same no matter whether you use OptoScript or not Performance of the strategy on hardware should be similar Changing Code to OptoScript If you have existing code you would like to change to OptoScript make sure you back up your strategy first don t delete existing code until you are sure the new code works Look for ways to combine or rewrite code to take advantage of OptoScript s strengths For example change mathematical expressions to OptoScript code to simplify them Look for areas in the flowchart that can be directly converted to basic OptoScript control structures loops if else statements and so on Be very careful to identify all entry and exit points to a group of blocks you re converting so you understand the program s flow Watch out for code that jumps into the middle of the section you re converting These jumps can easily happen in OptoControl flowcharts since the lines coming out of each block can go almost anywhere and Continue blocks can send logic to any other block However you cannot jump into the middle of an OptoScript block 11 10 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT Ue OptoScript Functions and Commands Since functions in OptoScript are provided by commands almost identical to the standard commands in OptoControl you have the same c
330. ircumstances Setting the scan rate to be longer than the dead time will result in a PID controller that is so sluggish that it cannot adequately respond to disturbances and setpoint changes will be extremely slow There are however exceptions to this rule If the output of the PID is implemented on equipment that cannot handle fast scan changes set the PID scan loop to as fast as the equipment can handle Most control valves which are very commonly controlled by PID loops can handle 0 1 OptoControl User s Guide 10 45 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS second scan rates just fine However there are definitely types of equipment that can t handle this One example would be big gates at big dams Moving one of these gates is a major event that takes a long time so one of the control goals is to minimize gate movement For the flow controllers on these gates it may be necessary to set the scan time several times longer than the dead time This allows reaching the setpoint with fewer moves of the gate The terms aggressive and conservative are extremely subjective and depend on the process Aggressive tuning can be thought of as tuning where the speed of reaching the setpoint is the primary concern and overshoot is tolerated to gain fast response Conservative tuning can be thought of as tuning required in a system where overshoot is not tolerated and speed of response is sacrificed to prevent overshoot The tuning sugges
331. is deleted You can also delete a PID loop in the Configure PID Loops dialog box by highlighting it and clicking Delete OptoControl User s Guide 5 31 WORKING WITH 1 0 Configuring Event Reactions Event reactions do exactly what their name suggests they make something happen in response to an event Their great advantage is that they simplify and speed the controller s job by offloading certain control functions from the controller to the 1 0 unit Examples of events are a timeout an input or output reaching a value or a special digital feature such as frequency or on time totalizer reaching a value Examples of reactions include starting an on or off pulse reading and holding a value or activating or deactivating a PID loop Event reactions can be configured on digital and analog multifunction 1 0 units only You can configure up to 256 event reactions on a single 1 0 unit For more information on using event reactions see Event Reaction Commands on page 10 23 1 To configure an event reaction make sure the strategy is open in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree double click the 1 0 Units folder not the individual unit s icon 2 In the Configure I O Units dialog box highlight the multifunction 1 0 unit and click the Event Reactions button The Configure Event Reactions dialog box appears showing all event reactions contained on the 1 0 unit in this example none Configure Event Reactions Iof x
332. its require you to pay special attention to addresses A SNAP brain packs a lot of power into a small package Each SNAP brain except Ethernet is really four logical brains in one two digital 16 channel multifunctional brains plus two analog 16 channel multifunctional brains Jumpers on the SNAP brain set only the base address which must be zero four or a multiple of four The ARCNET version cannot be zero only four or a multiple The base address is the first digital address digital channels 0 15 In the example above the base address is 0 The second digital address digital channels 16 31 is the base address plus one The first analog address analog channels 0 15 is the base address plus two And the second analog address analog channels 16 31 is the base address plus three 5 4 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 rs The following figure illustrates addressing for a SNAP brain except Ethernet WOLEAUNS ZZ LAYS vay Oe oo 4 KE Q OP Tea 22 snap eso ERAIN a DIGITAL ANALOG F meita aporess 7 4 gt Aa B3000 BASE 0 J 1 10 3 8 ti CIGITAL ANALOG b 6 14 13 o mmmn DIGITAL ANALOG ANALOG ADDRESS DEA l BASE 2 3210 H ee DIGITAL ADDRESS 7664 H Peran BASE 1 ERA 1 10 9 8 H CIGITAL ANALOG Ni 16 14 13 12 E DIGITAL ANALOG L ANALOG ONLY E o B L ANALOG ONLY E o B L ANALOG ONLY E ANALOG ADDRESS BASE 3 s
333. jVarldentifier NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp LogicalExp LogicalUnaryExp AdditiveExp MultiplicativeExp BitwiseExp Numidentifier Numericliteral FunctionCommand LogicalExp NumericExp and NumericExp NumericExp or NumericExp NumericExp xor NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp lt gt NumericExp NumericExp lt NumericExp NumericExp lt NumericExp NumericExp gt NumericExp NumericExp gt NumericExp gt Stridentifier Strldentifier PointerVariable null null PointerVariable null PointerTable NumericExp PointerTable NumericExp null AdditiveExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp MultiplicativeExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp NotNumExp ObjVarldentifier gt Strldentifier BitwiseExp gt bitnot NumericExp NumericExp bitand NumericExp F 12 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE NumericExp bitor NumericExp NumericExp bitxor NumericExp NumericExp lt lt NumericExp NumericExp gt gt NumericExp AssignmentStatement NumericVariable NumericExp Numericlable NumericExp NumericExp StringVariable NumericExp NumericExp PtrAssignmentStatement PointerVariable Pointableldentifier PointerVariable PointerTable
334. jumpers on your hardware If this port is the host port the port number set by the controller s HO and H1 jumpers make sure that the baud rate also matches the baud rate that you have configured for your PC s serial port 4 16 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS D Select the communication mode Binary the default or ASCII recommended for the host port or any port connected to a modem Select the communication mode for the host port and for ports connected to 1 0 Other serial devices anything other than 0 and the host port are not affected by communication mode E Ifyou are attaching a device that requires hardware flow control to the port check the CTS box to use the Clear To Send CTS signal to control data flow If the port is already connected to an I O unit this option is not available F Leave unchecked The host port is normally set by the controller s HO and H1 jumpers G For an AC47 ARCNET port only To enable redundant communication between the selected port and its paired port check this box Paired ports are two consecutive ports starting on an even boundary for example 12 and 13 14 and 15 16 and 17 OptoControl automatically configures the second port in a pair the same way you configure the first For more information on redundant communication see page 4 19 H For any port you configure except the host port check the Send to Controller box so the information will be sent to the controller
335. just that chart or subroutine To do so in Configure mode click the Compile Active View button on the toolbar or choose Compile Compile Chart The menu option shows the name of the chart or subroutine you are compiling As soon as you choose the menu option the chart or subroutine is saved and compiled You are alerted only if errors are found Compiling Changes Only To compile just the changes since the strategy was last compiled in Configure mode click the Compile Changes button on the toolbar or choose Compile Compile Changes The menu option shows the name of the strategy you are compiling OptoControl User s Guide 6 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES As soon as you choose the menu option the strategy and all modified charts and subroutines are saved and compiled You are alerted only if errors are found Compiling the Entire Strategy To compile the entire strategy including all charts and subroutines in Configure mode click the Compile All button on the toolbar or choose Compile Compile All The menu option shows the name of the strategy you are compiling As soon as you choose the menu option the entire strategy is saved and compiled The Compile Progress dialog box appears You are alerted if errors are found Downloading Only If your strategy has been compiled you can download it again quickly Downloading again is useful if you want to run your strategy from a clean slate by reinitializing any variable
336. k and off in the Off Mask Using a specialized I O command for counters TPO frequency input etc on a module that is not configured that way Invalid channel error I O unit No module installed An output module installed in a channel configured as an input Sending an input command to an analog channel with either no module installed or an output module installed Sending an output command to an analog channel with an input module installed Sending an analog single point I O unit command to an analog HRD I O unit or vice versa An event reaction referencing a digital output that was later changed to a digital input 10 Invalid event error I O unit An attempt to enable an event interrupt on a null entry in the event reaction table An illegal reaction command specified 11 Invalid delay error I O unit An attempt to start a square wave generate N pulses or set up a TPO with a value of less than 10 milliseconds or with more than eight output channels on the same digital I O unit 13 Warning Word is already defined although a re definition will be allowed Controller during a download Controller received a new word that already existed This is not an error It is notification that the word just defined has actually been redefined since a word by the original name already existed B 6 OptoControl User s Guide EE ee No Message Generated by Possible
337. k it s intended to do you add one or more commands A command for example might turn on a digital point move a value to a variable or check to see whether a chart is running OptoControl contains more than 460 commands you can use A command in OptoControl is often called an instruction You can add commands to action blocks condition blocks and OptoScript blocks Continue blocks just move flowchart logic to another block See page 9 8 for steps to configure a continue block To add commands to an action or condition block follow the steps below To add commands to an OptoScript block see OptoScript Functions and Commands on page 11 11 and Using the OptoScript Editor on page 11 25 1 With the strategy open in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block to which you want to add a command OptoControl User s Guide 9 1 USING COMMANDS The Instructions dialog box appears The highlighted area shows where the new command will be added Instructions New_Chart Block 1 Highlighted area Modi The Operator group appears in the dialog box only for condition blocks not for action blocks Bommandihiels 2 Click Add to open the Add Instruction dialog box Add Instruction All Valid Types All Valid Types 3 If you know the command you want enter its name in the Instruction field by typing it in or by choosing it from the drop down list Skip to
338. l C or BASIC It can be used within any OptoControl strategy or subroutine to replace or supplement standard OptoControl commands It does not add new functions but offers an alternative method within OptoControl s flowcharting environment to simplify some common programming tasks OptoControl User s Guide 11 1 USING OPTOSCRIPT OptoScript code cannot be mixed with commands in action or condition blocks it is used in its own hexagonal flowchart block The following figure shows an example of an OptoScript flowchart block and its contents Oven_Control So OptoScript block l i l l l l l OptoScript code a ai a en_Control Block 1 EEEN eje als lla OptoScript Code aoco W zl if Oven_Temperature gt 450 then Oven_Alarm 1 Set the oven alarm else Oven_Alarm 0 Clear the oven alarm endif OptoScript editor i When To Use OptoScript You ll want to use OptoScript for some common programming tasks that can be more difficult to do using standard OptoContro l commands than using a procedural language Extensive math calculations or complex loops for example can be done with standard commands but take up a lot of space on a flowchart When you use OptoScript however be aware that it is not self documenting Make sure you frequently use comments to explain what the code does so that when you come back to it a year later or when someone who is not as familiar with the code o
339. l chunks or modules and then create a chart for each module A modular design makes it easier to test and to update your strategy Even for a simple process like our sprinkler control there is no single correct way to solve the control problem and build the strategy Instead there are many possible ways The following chart shows one example _ Sprinkler_Control sprinklers at 6 00 a m every Wednesday and Sunday unless it is raining Sprinklers Stay on for 45 minutes ot Between amp Boe RoR Ro Me Bow ek Ga7vam Wait 60 sec Se BE Wek Oe we SGA OD ee ee 33 ee ee ee Sunday or a Wednesday gt Wait 24 hrs Read Hygrometer ROG ee eee a a ace a oe Humidity die we Wo ee ee ee A lt 100 T eee bor sfa S Be aoe Be S i Turn sprinklers off pp A E a a a all 4 ft Roa Powerup Kaa Snrinkler Cantal I Notice one of the differences between this chart and the human level chart on page 3 4 several delays have been added to the chart There is one before rechecking the hour of the day one before rechecking the day of the week one before rechecking whether the timer has expired and finally one before starting the flowchart over again This sprinkler system is not time critical If the sprinklers turn on at a little past 6 00 a m or the grass is watered an extra few seconds it doesn t matter Delays give the controller time to do OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YO
340. l equivalent of the mask you have set appears in the Must On Mask and Must Off Mask fields 3 In the Event and Reaction sections choose whether to display the mask in decimal hexadecimal or binary form The default is decimal 4 When the event reaction is configured click OK The new event reaction appears in the Configure Event Reaction dialog box OptoControl User s Guide 5 37 WORKING WITH I O Event Reaction Configuration Example Here s an example of an Add Event Reaction dialog box for an event reaction involving a counter Add Event Reaction Stop_Counter_at_200 fe Ld fe Configure Event Reactions Digital_IO_Unit ha 5 38 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 es Using Event Reaction Groups Since you can configure up to 256 event reactions on an I O unit it s useful to be able to divide them into groups of 16 By grouping related event reactions you can also take advantage of commands that start or stop scanning of all event reactions in a group Creating Groups 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the O Units folder until you see the E Rs folder for the 1 0 unit you want Double click the E Rs folder The Configure Event Reactions dialog box opens listing all configured event reactions 1 Configure Event Reactions 10 Unit Pigital_1O_Unit x Type G4 Digital Multifunction Not Used Group button
341. lan naming schemes to place similar items together in the way you expect to use them Names have a maximum length of 50 characters In chart names for example you might include a few letters indicating whether the chart monitors critical tasks is a master chart calling others or is periodically called e Mntr_Tank_Leak constantly running chart that monitors a critical situation e Mstr_Conveyor_Process master chart that calls others for a sub process e Call_Message_Display chart called by a master chart for a specific purpose Block names should tell what the block does so you can understand a chart without needing additional explanations Block names should describe the purpose of the instructions within them Use a question for the name of a condition block with a true exit reflecting the answer yes e Read Thermometer action block e Temperature Too High condition block e Turn On Pump 1 or Pump 1 On action block e Pump On condition block Variable names might include a way to distinguish variables used in a single chart or process from variables used by more than one chart or process If your strategy is large it s helpful to separate them Variables that are used only in a table could include the table name in their name for example Fail_Count_in_Config_Values Config_Values is the table name You might also find it useful to distinguish persistent from regular variables perhaps by putting a P in front
342. larming OptoServer Networking OPC Server SNAP LCM4 CONTROLLER PUMP ON or OFF Digital Output TANK LEVEL Analog Input m THERMOCOUPLE O Analog Input FURNACETEMP 0 FUEL PUMP Analog Output FURNACE l l l l gia Wi ee i i RS 485 ARCNET ETHERNET b l pe ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee u al SNAP I O ER SNAP 1 0 PHOTO EYE Digital Input PROPORTIONAL VALVE Analog Output CONVEYOR 2 2 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL aa M General Control Concepts Automation Automation is a way of adding intelligence to an industrial process When you automate a process you are less dependent on human action to carry out the process The process generally becomes faster more accurate and more reliable For example take a look at the tank level and pump combination in the diagram on the previous page Instead of having a person watch the water level in the tank and turn the pump on or off when the level gets too low or too high you can automate the process by installing a controller and 1 0 The controller and 1 0 respond in milliseconds and are on the job 24 hours a day Controllers Controllers are programmable electronic components that provide the intelligence required for automation Using OptoControl you create a set of instructions a software program that tells the controller how every aspect of a process should work Using Opto
343. le via ARCNET TransTableViaArcnet Start at Index Of F Table On Port Transmit Table via Ethernet TransTableViaEthernet Start at Index Of F Table Via Session On Port Transmit Table via Serial Port TransTableViaSerialPort Start at Index Of F Table On Port Transmit Receive Mistic I O TransReceMisticIoHexStringWithChecksum Hex F Hex String with Checksum String On Port Put Result in Transmit Receive Mistic I O TransReceMisticloHexStringWithCrc Hex F Hex String with CRC String On Port Put Result in Transmit Receive OPTOMUX TransReceOptomuxString String On Port F String Put Result in Transmit Receive String via TransReceStringViaArcnet String On Port F ARCNET Put Result in Transmit Receive String via TransReceStringViaEthernet String Via F Ethernet Session On Port Put Result in E 18 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee M Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name fa Transmit Receive String via TransReceStringViaSerialPort String On F Serial Port Port Put Result in Truncate Truncate Value F Turn Off TurnOff Output doOutput 0 P Turn Off RTS TurnOffRts On Port F Turn Off RTS After Next TurnOffRtsAfterNextChar P Character Turn On TurnOn Output doOutput 1 P Turn On RTS TurnOnRts On Port F Up
344. ler dictionary is full and no more words can be defined 54 Execute only error A command or word was encountered that cannot be used when compiling 55 Definition not finished 58 Out of memory 100 Invalid port error WinRT drivers might not have started 102 Port setup failed 103 Could not find other nodes in ARCNET 127 Win RT drivers could not be loaded 128 Could not write new entry to Registry 4104 RPC binding error NetBios might not be running 4105 RPC call error 4129 Forth dictionary is incomplete after flash download 4131 Invalid controller name Controller not configured name not in registry 4176 TCP IP Invalid Socket 4177 TCP IP Cannot connect error Controller is configured incorrectly TCP IP protocol is not configured Controller power is off See Resolving TCP IP Cannot Connect Errors 4177 on page A 11 B 4 OptoControl User s Guide rs il Possible Causes Configured incorrectly Configured incorrectly Strategy was created or saved in a newer version of OptoControl and the file format has changed To open the strategy you must upgrade to the newer version of OptoControl No Error Message 4178 Ethernet Send Error 4179 Ethernet Receive Error 4373 OptoCdb Object s in CDB file have version number greater than that which is recognized by this version of OptoCdb 13860 Scanner overrun Table took too long to sc
345. lick OK When the program reaches the continue block it returns to the Speed OK block We haven t changed the way the program works we ve just done the same thing in a different way Continue blocks are useful in a complex chart to avoid crossing connection lines OptoControl User s Guide 1 11 QUICK START Adding a Command Now we re going to add a command or instruction to a block in the Dough_Chip_Control chart We ll add the command so we can keep track of the number of cookies we produce 1 Double click the Drop Dough block Instructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough 5 x x Open the dough valve Ladd Turn On Dough_Dispense_Valve Modify Delete 2 0 Next Block Close the dough valve Previous Block Turn Off Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Delay Sec Dough_Dispense_Valve Close Help Command Help We ll add the new instruction command between the Turn On and Delay Sec commands 2 Click anywhere on Delay Sec to highlight this command This highlight indicates the position where the next command is added 3 Click Add to open the Add Instruction dialog box Add Instruction i x Instruction Type Name Of all Valid Types 7 Chart Status 7 Put Result in fall Valid Types 7 Chart Status 7 Cancel Help _Command Help If you knew the exact name of the command to enter you could type it over Absolute Value which is first in the alphabetical li
346. list shows all variables currently configured as integer 32 variables Add Instruction ma x Instruction Increment Variable x Select Comment Increment a counter of cookies produced Type integer 32 Variable v Chart Status tart_Flag Cancel Help Command Heb Cookie_Counter is not in the list because we never needed it before so we never created it We ll create it now using what we call on the fly configuration 11 Highlight Chart_Status and type the new variable name Cookie_Counter right over it As soon as you try to do something else such as click OK to close the dialog box the following message appears OptoControl xi The object you have specified does not exist Do you wish to add it now w cma 12 Click Yes 1 14 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START Add Variable E xj Description Type Integer 32 ba Initialization Initialize on strategy run Initial Value fo C Initialize on strategy download Cancel Hep Notice that the name Cookie_Counter and type Integer have already been filled in Add a description if you wish Leave the initial value at zero which is the default Then click OK to accept the data and close the dialog box In the Add Instruction dialog box click OK The new instruction appears in the Instructions window for Drop Dough Instructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough E xi Open the d
347. ller By including external instruction files in your strategy or subroutine and downloading an associated Forth file you can add commands not in the standard OptoControl kernel Opto 22 external instruction files are often used with Optolntegration Kits These kits such as the Allen Bradley DF1 Integration Kit provide OptoControl subroutines for easy communication with third party PLCs controllers and end devices External instruction files for OptoControl use the XID file extension To use these external instruction files you must include them in your strategy or subroutine The Forth source file required by the controller can have any extension but it usually ends with a 4TH or LIB extension This Forth file is a file that must be downloaded to the controller before the OptoControl Run file Including an External Instruction File You can include external commands in your OptoControl application in two ways e Include the external file with the subroutine so that the extended command set is available only to the subroutine Local XID files avoid cluttering the strategy s regular flowcharts with unnecessary instructions instructions that apply only to a subroutine e Include the extended command set with the strategy making the command set available for use throughout the strategy including all subroutines 6 30 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES rs Subroutine XID file Instruction XID f
348. ller The specified character could not be found in the Find found Character in String command 81 Substring not Controller The specified substring could not be found in the Find found Substring in String command 82 No ARCNET Controller No ARCNET card was available during an attempt to use card the Set ARCNET Mode Raw or Set ARCNET Mode Standard commands B 10 OptoControl User s Guide _ LLL___ APPENDIX C OptoControl Files Introduction This appendix lists all of the OptoControl file types and special files You can use this information as a reference to determine what types of files are present in your OptoControl project directory when you re looking through your OptoControl or project directory Files Related to a Strategy lt strategy gt cdb lt strategy gt cdb txt lt strategy gt crn lt strategy gt crn1 lt strategy gt crn2 lt strategy gt crn3 lt strategy gt inc lt strategy gt inf lt strategy gt cdb lt strategy gt Icdb lt strategy gt per lt strategy gt lt controller gt cdf lt chart name gt cht OptoControl strategy database Text file containing basic strategy information such as tagas and their data types Run file compiled file that is sent to the controller Intermediate run file component of the run file Intermediate run file component of the run file Intermediate run file component of the run file Initialization data for variables with Ini
349. ller configuration 4 17 debugger speed 6 11 digital I O while strategy is running 5 43 event reaction 5 40 event reaction while strategy is running 5 47 1 0 points 5 23 I O unit configuration 5 11 I O while strategy is running 5 41 PID loop 5 31 PID loop while strategy is running 5 46 port information 10 35 scale of a chart 2 17 text color or size 7 3 7 13 text in chart 7 11 variable 8 12 chart adding text to 7 10 auto stepping 6 15 breakpoints 6 16 calling a subroutine 12 8 changing background 7 3 changing scale 2 17 closing 7 15 commands 10 9 contents 7 3 copying 7 15 creating 7 1 definition 2 4 deleting 7 17 designing 3 5 exporting 7 18 finding a block 2 19 flow through logic 3 8 guidelines for design 3 9 importing 7 19 loop logic 3 8 master chart 3 9 3 25 monitoring in watch window 5 50 OptoControl User s Guide So naming 3 10 7 16 opening 7 15 printing commands instructions 6 23 printing graphics 6 20 replacing elements 6 29 saving 6 3 7 15 searching 6 27 status 2 4 6 19 stepping through 6 13 viewing 6 19 zooming in or out 2 17 chart element changing color or size 7 13 cutting copying and pasting 7 13 moving 7 12 selecting 7 11 closing chart 7 15 strategy 6 3 6 4 COM port 4 9 command adding 9 1 adding external instructions 6 30 arguments 3 7 changing 9 5 commenting out 9 6 cutting copying and pasting
350. lls other charts 10 usec Running Master Chart Time critical Running 500 usec calls other charts Chart 500 usec Time critical we Chart Running but contains a delay in the loop 500 usec or less Maximum time to make the rounds on this task queue 4 510 usec Host task gets 2 500 usec more than 55 of the total time 3 26 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Ensuring Data Freshness for OptoDisplay Remember to develop your OptoControl strategy in conjunction with your OptoDisplay project to help optimize performance To ensure maximum throughput the strategy should be coordinated with Refresh groups in OptoDisplay For example if OptoDisplay is using typical freshness values of one second then the strategy should read all of the 1 0 at least once every second One efficient way to do so is to use 1 0 Unit commands See the section below Optimizing Controller lt 1 0 Throughput Throughput between the controller and I O is also affected by strategy design You can take advantage of I O unit commands to communicate with several I O points at once and in some situations you can stop the host task or use more than one port to communicate with 0 Using I O Unit Commands I O unit commands speed up communications between the controller and 1 0 by using tables to read or write all channels on an O unit at once rather than reading or writing one channel at a time For example using the command
351. log box select a controller and click the Download Options button 6 32 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES The Download Options dialog box appears Download Options x Before Run File Remave After Run File Pot awe add fans Remove The file must be downloaded before your strategy is downloaded 3 Click the top Add button locate the correct file and double click it When the file name appears in the Before Run File box click OK Adding an External Instruction to a Block You use an external instruction just as you use any OptoControl command by adding it through the Add Instruction dialog box Added instructions appear in the list with the standard OptoControl instructions and are treated the same way When an external instruction has been added to the Instructions dialog box its name appears in purple rather than blue for standard commands or red for subroutines OptoControl User s Guide 6 33 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 6 34 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Working with Flowcharts Introduction This chapter shows you how to work with flowcharts the building blocks of your strategy When you create a new strategy two charts are created for you the Powerup Chart and the Interrupt Chart You must create all the other charts to do the work of the strategy In This Chapter Creating a New Chat 7 1 Copying Renaming and Deleting Charts 7 15 Working with Chart El
352. lt timeout is 0 5 seconds With a Watchdog the 1 0 unit monitors activity on the port If no communication is received for the specified interval the unit assumes a Watchdog state All selected outputs will then immediately go to a specified value as configured in the Watchdog field of the Add Analog Point or Add Digital Point dialog boxes See Configuring 1 0 Points on page 5 11 Select whether you want communication to the I O unit enabled or disabled on startup Enabled is the default OptoControl User s Guide 5 3 WORKING WITH 1 0 Disabling communication to an 1 0 unit is the same as disabling communication to all channels on the unit Note that even when communication is disabled the 1 0 unit remains fully operational which means that PID loops and event reactions are still running Leave at 0 Security levels are not used except with a G4LC32 controller which has front panel access Configuration Example SNAP I O Unit except Ethernet This section shows a configuration example for a non Ethernet SNAP 1 0 unit For a SNAP Ethernet based 0 unit example see page 5 7 Here is a sample Add 0 Unit dialog box for a SNAP digital 1 0 unit Name SNAP_Digital_Unit_4 Description Type B3000 Snap Digital B3000 B3000 HA x Port V Enable Security fo Address L Address fo a RENNA Watchdog No C Yes Cancel Help Notice the address in this dialog box SNAP I O un
353. lve the control problem Think about how you would do the job if you were doing it by hand Again work from the top down starting with big steps and then breaking those big steps into smaller steps Sprinkler Control System Every day at 6 00 a m 1 Check the day and the weather 2 If it s raining leave the 3 If it s the right day and it s dry sprinklers off turn them on 1 Check the day and the weather 2 If it s raining leave them off 3 If it s the right day and it s Read the day of the week If the hygrometer says 100 dry turn them on If it s Sunday or Wednesday read the check to make sure sprinklers If it s Sunday or Wednesday and hygrometer are off if the hygrometer says 99 or If they re on turn them off below turn sprinklers on Start the timer When they ve been on for 15 minutes turn them off If a human being were doing this job this level of instruction would probably be just fine With a computer however the instructions need more detail For example the first instruction Every day at 6 00 a m would have to be expanded more like this a Read the hour b If the hour equals six go on to the next step c If the hour does not equal six go back to step a Testing the Steps Now that you have your steps in place run through each sub process in your mind to see if anything is missing Is there an answer for every if Are all the possibilities take
354. m PID Loop F Get PID Mode GetPidMode From PID Loop F Get PID Output GetPidOutput From PID Loop F Get PID Output Rate of GetPidOutputRateOfChange From PID Loop F Change Get PID P Term GetPidPTerm From PID Loop F Get PID Scan Rate GetPidScanRate From PID Loop F Get PID Setpoint GetPidSetpoint From PID Loop F Get Port of I O Unit Causing Get Port OfloUnitCausingCurrentError F Current Error Get Priority GetPriority F Get Priority of Host Task GetPriorityOfHostTask On Port F Get Quadrature Counter GetQuadratureCounter From Point F Get RTU M4IO Temperature GetRtuM4IoTemperature F Get RTU M4IO Voltage GetRtuM4IoVoltage F Get Seconds Get Seconds F Get Seconds Since Midnight Get SecondsSinceMidnight F Get Simple 64 I O Unit as Get Simple64IoUnitAsBinaryValue I O Unit F Binary Value Get Simple 64 I O Unit GetSimple64IoUnitLatches From State P Latches On Latch Off Latch E 10 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ns i Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example g Command Name Get String Length GetStringLength Of String F Get Substring GetSubstring From String Start at Index P Num Characters Put Result in Get System Time GetSystemTime F Get Year GetYear F Greater Than or Equal to x gt nt 0 F Table Element
355. me the timer where it left off 10 12 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Up Timer Operation The Set Up Timer Target Value command sets the time for the Up Timer Target Time Reached condition It does not start the timer however and the timer does not stop when it reaches the target value Up timers automatically start as soon as you begin running the strategy You can restart one from zero by using the Start Timer command If you use the Move command to move a value to an up timer the value you moved becomes the target value and the timer immediately begins counting up from zero The timer does not start from the value you moved it always starts at zero The up timer does not stop when it reaches the target value To determine if the timer has reached its target value use the condition Up Timer Target Time Reached This condition tests the timer to see if it is greater than or equal to the target time The Stop Timer command forces the timer to stop and resets it to zero lf you want to halt the timer and have it maintain its value at the time it was stopped use the Pause Timer command instead After you use Pause Timer you can then move the timer s value at the time it was stopped to a variable You can also use the Continue Timer command to resume the timer where it left off A Note on Resolution The timing function internal to the controller maintains its accuracy regardless of the value of the timer Howe
356. menu 3 Using the OptoControl Command Reference or online command help convert each instruction to equivalent OptoScript code Some instructions will convert to OptoScript commands and some will use OptoScript s built in functions such as addition Keep comments 4 Once all instructions are converted check to see if they can be combined and shortened To convert several successive action blocks to a single OptoScript block follow the same steps but paste the instructions from all the action blocks into the one OptoScript block Combining several action condition and continue blocks into one OptoScript block is a more difficult conversion Review the examples earlier in this chapter that compare standard commands with OptoScript code and review the troubleshooting section Here are some additional tips e Break up the original code into small groups of blocks and covert these small pieces one at a time e Look for areas that can be directly converted to basic OptoScript control structures such as if then else statements for loops while loops and repeat loops e Be very careful with the program s flow Identify all entry and exit points to a group of code e Watch out for code that jumps into the middle of the section being converted Flowcharts make writing spaghetti code very easy To detangle code consider adding flags to control program flow Sometimes just introducing a simple test probably with an if stateme
357. meric String and Pointer Variables cccccccccescscssescsseetesestesesteseseeneseeneseane 8 5 Adding Numeric String and Pointer Tables ccscsecseseesestesesseeseeseeeeseeseeseeeseesseeseenees 8 7 Adding Table Variables ccc ees slic sek cc ecnenteows tions nade anda ad atataceatinidateecols 8 7 Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables during Strategy Download 8 9 Creating the Initialization File sciscccncsscesed taseascisstecasequcescsscsatsaetsaaseuenssencsdceasaaiaioas 8 9 Downloading the Initialization File cesissecsnsccnsesssesaxnanbedequtntiacacecrdaaxdenaeeaciacaderaulante 8 11 Changing and Deleting Variables c ccccccscecesccssscetesesesessseseeseseesescesescsescatenesceneaens 8 12 Changing a Configured Variable ic ca cs ccasrecrcean aiectae ea aciarisalvseienceecnnmedeas 8 12 Deleting a VAAN G ccserscpsteracrs sincinnscnscnndeaboatesesacatansdanauleanmecsnstestactanateatsseeitansitanactaanaie 8 12 Viewing Variables in Debug Mode ccccccsescssescssesestesestessecessecsseesessseessseetssseceseeeeees 8 12 Viewing Numeric and String Variables cccccceesceesteseseseeteseetsseseetestetesseteseeneees 8 13 Viewing Pointer Variables ete teinaca cas cases cheea Letecnsiasinsnactuihsstsaceiaes subaidocisbin thestacesdaelstiztss 8 14 Viewing Numeric and String Tables ccccsccsesescesessescscsseecessecsssseeseseesssersseeneees 8 15 Viewing Pointer PANES ccerscssessecstencncsaot andi
358. mmands Not Available for SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 Units 0 00 0 5 10 Changing Configured 0 Units xczcudssscucctosessats atsshscdaaechacdacdeid eleceaicnesthaeeceeabictesdaasasees 5 11 Deleting Configured 1 0 Units s ssssissiissssisssiisssiisssiisssiissniinnsiisssrinnnrinsnrinnnrrnnrrnns 5 11 C nfiguring I O POINTS i airinn iniaiaiai eataa aa ariran iaiia 5 11 Adding a SNAP Digital 0 POU sesiciecacaaiincciatial a oametadiiaireednwcuiarccaiient 5 11 Adding a Non SNAP Digital 1 0 Point ccsecececseseetesessestesestesesesesteseseseaeees 5 14 Adding an Analog 1 0 POint c ccccsssscsesessescsseseesesessesessssessestssestesesteseseeseseeeeaeeees 5 16 Configuring a SNAP PID V Module cccudsceiccecahas uieercnenethceddaddeaceceleadhecntndartacdacts 5 20 Configuration Example SNAP Ethernet 0 POInts 0 c cccccececeestetesteeseeneees 5 20 Moving a Configured 0 Pont ss sccceccscaicctutecsenstiaascdnoneuion Namwaaisudecacnasieaes 5 21 Moving a SNAP 0 PGMINE it csc cesestenstd cuter tts tts lnceat Seacunadiatis tiesatSadcceitelasiatineust bese 5 21 Moving a Non SNAP 1 0 POIIt c cicsscscisdcssccccssencececetsecascanaesacescncossasieracexcasareneee 5 22 Changing a Configured 1 0 5 01 0 Geeerneneeenrnes tenes tei enerneTentrrtr perrTTenrennE errrT earn Tren Siri 5 23 Deleting a Configured 1 0 Point occ cecccccccescesesessescesescsneseesescsneseesescsnescanescaneecans 5 24 Copying 0 Configurations asiscacacienieccscreeteaaieccusiedee
359. mment i a b determine i by adding a and b together i a b This whole line is commented out OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE Block comments are indicated by a slash and an asterisk followed by any sequence of characters and ending with an asterisk and a slash This type of comment may span multiple lines Block comments may not be nested Examples i a b determine i by adding a and b together i a b determine i by adding a and b together i a b determine i by adding a and b together OptoScript Grammar Syntax Reference Tokens are in regular type Keywords and operators are in bold type Syntax Rules are in talic type Program StatementList StatementList Statement StatementList Statement Statement AssignmentStatement gt StrAssignmentStatement PtrAssignmentStatement ProcedureCommand FunctionCommand ConditionStatement ForStatement WhileStatement RepeatStatement SwitchStatement ProcedureCommand CommandProcedureNoArgs CommandProcedure ArgumentList FunctionCommand CommandFunctionNoArgs CommandFunction ArgumentList ArgumentList NumericExp ArgumentList NumericExp OptoControl User s Guide F 11 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE gt Stridentifier ArgumentList Stridentifier ObjVarldentifier ArgumentList Ob
360. mmunication activity is detected on the bus for the amount of time specified in the Watchdog field of this point s 1 0 unit For no Watchdog click No Select whether you want communication to this 1 0 point enabled or disabled on startup Enabled is the default OptoControl User s Guide 5 19 WORKING WITH 1 0 J Leave at 0 Security levels are not used except with a G4LC32 controller which has front panel access 10 When you have completed the fields click OK The new point is added Configuring a SNAP PID V Module If you are using a SNAP PID module with a SNAP Ethernet brain configure the module within OptoControl as an analog input following these steps 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the 1 0 Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree 2 In the Configure O Units dialog box highlight the I O unit the PID module is on and click 1 0 Points 3 In the I O Points dialog box highlight the number of the module s position on the rack See the diagram on page 5 5 for help Click Add 4 In the Add Module dialog box choose Analog Input then choose SNAP PID V from the drop down list Click OK 5 In the Configure 0 Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the module to expand it Four points are shown They represent the following information about the PID loop Point 1 Setpoint Point 2 Process variable Point 3 Output 0 10 V Point 4 Output 4
361. mpiling and saving the subroutine You can also copy existing flowchart elements from another subroutine or chart and paste them into the new subroutine See Cutting Copying and Pasting Elements on page 7 13 Drawing the Flowchart 1 In the OptoControl main window with or without a strategy open choose Subroutine gt New The Create New Subroutine dialog box appears Create New Subroutine 24 x Look in a OptoControl Sl c cr ig Fiename Files of type OptoControl Subroutine Files csb 7 Cancel 2 Enter a subroutine name The subroutine name will become a command instruction in OptoControl It s a good idea to make it a descriptive name indicating the purpose of the subroutine for example Calculate Table Average 3 Navigate to the directory you want to store the subroutine in and click Open Unlike strategies multiple subroutines can be saved to the same directory OptoControl User s Guide USING SUBROUTINES A new subroutine window is created New_Subroutine ioj x 4 Add blocks and connections and name the blocks as you would in a chart as shown in the example below Variable_Increase_Notification OF x 5 Select Subroutine Save OptoControl User s Guide 12 3 USING SUBROUTINES Configuring Subroutine Parameters Before you can call a subroutine from a strategy you must configure the variables and other logical items that are
362. munication problems and other difficulties you may encounter Appendix B OptoControl Errors Types of errors where you ll see them and the causes of common errors Appendix C OptoControl Files A list of all OptoControl files located in the OptoControl directory and in any strategy directory Appendix D Sample Strategy An illustration and description of the sample Cookies strategy used in Chapter 1 Appendix E OptoScript Command Equivalents A table of all standard OptoControl commands showing their equivalents in OptoScript code Appendix F OptoScript Language Reference Details about the OptoScript code including comparisons to other languages lexical reference and notes to experienced programmers OptoControl Index Alphabetical list of key words and the pages they are located on A master FactoryFloor Glossary which defines terms used in the FactoryFloor suite of software is located at the back of the OptoServer User s Guide binder XX OptoControl User s Guide rs i Document Conventions The following conventions are used in this document Italic typeface indicates emphasis and is used for book titles Example See the OptoDisplay User s Guide for details Names of menus commands dialog boxes fields and buttons are capitalized as they appear in the product Example From the File menu select Print File names appear either in all capital letters or in mixed case depending on
363. must disable the input first You can disable an 1 0 point or unit in two ways The more common way is from within Debug mode by double clicking a point on the strategy tree and modifying the point s settings and values through the Inspection dialog box The second way is from within the strategy using commands such as Disable Communication to Digital Point Disable Communication to Analog Point or Disable Communication to 1 0 Unit See Simulation Commands on page 10 49 Additional Commands to Use with Digital Points Although not listed under Digital Point commands several other commands can be used for digital operations e Use Move to cause an output on one I O unit to assume the state of an input or output on another I O unit A digital input or output that is on returns a True 1 A True non zero sent to a digital output turns it on 10 4 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS e Use NOT to cause an output on one 1 0 unit to assume the opposite state of an input on another I O unit e Use Event Reaction commands page 10 23 to cause an output to track an input on the same digital multifunction O unit e Use Get Digital I O Unit as Binary Value to get the state of all 16 channels at once Then use Bit Test to determine the state of individual channels e Use Set Digital 1 0 Unit From Binary Value to control all 16 outputs at once Analog Point Commands The following commands are used with analog p
364. n 5 24 in strategy design 3 2 3 4 monitoring in watch window 5 50 moving configured point 5 21 naming points 3 10 point definition 2 3 reading writing to Ethernet brain memory map 10 36 viewing all in a strategy 6 24 6 25 0 unit adding 5 2 changing 5 11 changing while strategy is running 5 41 commands 3 27 10 7 10 36 configuring 5 1 definition 5 1 deleting 5 11 event reactions 10 27 exporting configuration 5 24 importing configuration 5 24 monitoring in watch window 5 50 Index 6 OptoControl User s Guide So storing event reactions 10 29 importing I O configuration 5 24 importing chart 7 19 initialization files downloading 4 24 initializing table variables 8 9 input point definition 2 3 disabling 10 4 input output See 0 inspecting controller 4 19 controller using OptoTerm 4 21 1 0 5 41 inspecting See also viewing installing OptoControl Intro xxili instruction See command integer converting to float 10 31 definition 2 6 10 31 in logic 10 33 variable definition 8 2 Interrupt chart 2 4 event reactions 10 29 example 3 12 in the task queue 3 23 uses 3 9 interrupt commands 10 34 ISA commands 10 8 port 4 7 IVAL 10 4 event reaction 10 28 L latch 10 2 commands instructions 10 3 launching See opening LEDs used in troubleshooting A 9 A 10 library files downloading 4 24 literal constant 8 5 load last mode at st
365. n F Error on I O Unit sErrorOnIounit F Error sErrorPresent F Ethernet Session Open sEnet SessionOpen Session F Event Occurred HasEventOccurred Event Reaction F Event Occurring sEventOccurring Event Reaction F Event Scanning Disabled sEvent ScanningDisabled Event Reaction F Event Scanning Enabled sEvent ScanningEnabled Event Reaction F Event Reaction sEventReact ionCommEnabled Event Reaction F Communication Enabled Event Reaction Group sEventReactionGroupEnabled E R Group F Communication Enabled Find Character in String FindCharacterInString Find Start at F Index Of String Find Substring in String FindSubstringInString Find Start at F Index Of String E 6 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS EE ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example g Command Name Float Valid IsFloatValid Float F Generate Checksum on GenerateChecksumOnString Start Value On F String String Generate Forward CCITT on GenerateForwardCcittOnString Start Value F String On String Generate Forward CRC 16 GenerateForwardCrcel16OnString Start Value F on String On String Generate N Pulses GenerateNPulses On Time Seconds Off P Time Seconds Number of Pulses On Point Generate Random Number GenerateRandomNumber F Generate Reverse CCITT on GenerateReverseCcittOnStri
366. n File Poo Add Remave After Run File Fs Add Remove oma tb 3 Click the Add button next to Before Run File or After Run File and locate the file to add 4 When all the files you want are listed click OK Remember that download options are specific to each controller These files are downloaded only when the strategy itself is downloaded to the selected controller OptoControl User s Guide 4 25 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Downloading Files Without Opening OptoControl Using the OptoTerm utility you can download OptoControl strategies library files or any other Forth language files directly to a controller without having to open each program If you are downloading an OptoControl strategy that requires other files be sure to download the files in the correct order for example library file then strategy file then initialization file 1 Click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilities Optolerm The OptoTerm window appears AE OptoTerm i x File Tools Configure View Help Cookie Controller mistic1 SNAP_LCSX OptoRuntimePC Number of Controllers 4 2 Right click the controller and choose Download Controller Forth File from the pop up menu 3 In the Download File dialog box click Browse 4 In the Open dialog box locate the file you want to download When the full path appears click OK If necessary to fin
367. n Windows 2000 If you are running Windows 95 or Windows 98 you will see fewer choices 9 Select the communication port type you are using For this example we re using COM Port a serial connection Configure COM Port A x Port Name Retries fi Timeout msec 2000 COM Port 7 Baud Rate ha Protocol Binary be Eec 10 Enter a descriptive name for this port Enter other communication data as required for your port type The data you enter must correspond with your actual communication configuration Consult your system administrator if you need help 11 Click Finish when done 1 20 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START The new port appears in the Configure Direct Connection dialog box Configure Direct Connection i x Configure controller name and parameters Controller Name Cookie Controller Address fi Potts 12 Make sure the new port is highlighted and click Finish The newly configured controller appears in the Select Controller dialog box If you are running Windows NT you may see a notification that you have made a System Setting Change Press OK and WinRT restarts If for some reason WinRT cannot start you will see a message stating that fact and you are given the option of rebooting your computer now or later You should reboot now and continue from this point 13 Click the new controller to select it as shown below Select Controller xj Co
368. n into account OptoControl User s Guide 3 3 3 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY It may help you to draw out your control process as a flowchart Often it is easier to see decision points and responses to decisions in a flowchart You re still working at the human level at this point just be aware that the computer may require more details Here is a possible flowchart for the simple sprinkler control problem Simple Sprinkler System Process Flowchart At 6 00 a m read the day of the week Is it Sunday or Wednesday Wait 24 hours Read the hygrometer Is humidity less than 100 Are sprinklers off Turn sprinklers on and set timer for 15 minutes rl Has timer expired w Yes Turn sprinklers off Turn sprinklers off Building the Strategy Once you have the control problem solved in detail you can begin building the strategy in OptoControl Now you ll add all the logical details the computer needs Configuring Hardware The first step in building your strategy is to configure your controller I O units and 1 0 points For more information and step by step procedures see Chapters 4 and 5 You can add more 0 units and points later if needed but it saves time to configure all the ones you know about now When you solved this control problem some of the inputs and outputs you defined were physical 1 0 such as the hygrometer
369. n the controller using jumpers a thumbwheel or a selection on the controller s front panel It is typically on COMO serial COM4 ARCNET or COMB Ethernet The default host task must be used to download a new kernel to the controller either in binary mode or in ASCII mode required for modems See the controller manual for details on how to change communication modes Note that ARCNET COM4 and Ethernet COM8 always operate in binary mode even if ASCII mode is selected Additional host tasks can be started or stopped at any time Typical uses for additional host tasks include e Remote debugging via modem e Remote OptoControl connections via modem e Supporting OptoControl in Debug mode on one port OptoDisplay on another e Supporting OptoControl in Debug mode locally on ARCNET and OptoControl in Debug mode remotely via modem Each additional host task you start takes up one task slot in the 32 task queue These tasks can be assigned to COMO through COMS serial COM4 ARCNET or COMB Ethernet and either binary or ASCII mode can be specified for COMO through COM3 Note that additional host tasks cannot be used to download new firmware to the controller 3 22 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Ethernet Handler Task If an M4SENET 100 adapter card is physically installed in the controller the task queue includes an Ethernet handler task no matter whether the adapter card is used for Ethernet host peer
370. nanmieadMeiaitaseeGicels 5 24 Creating the Configuration Export File sicccscsccciacteciestnscienscadsitadsucdans cnndendinedaaddaineccectic 5 24 Importing the Configuration File oo csceccscsscscesessesescesestescstesescesesceseaceseateseateseanesees 5 24 CATT IT AMG PV MOG cites e eo esl acl A ads 5 25 Adding a PID AG oat ccesecavacaceaccsthpscinasaasnasnaaptacccssacsanaigisesdbecpbloeustnesipansaltaceatheat 5 25 Setting PID Loop Control Options ccccccsceceseeteseetescetesesteseetesesteteseeteseeeees 5 29 PID Loop Configuration EAM i cetera noid inaines dace dlcadeacedatantaptendsans 5 30 Changing a PID Loop ac csencetserntescinesionstecnasadancaasasiaeteatuacdactactactstivakemaesaeatestusateiaanianseds 5 31 Deleting a PID LOO sccscstacsisstedeeteinnideiciiaetsaecebducca tide eR eee eet eads 5 31 Configuring EVENT RSAC HOMS sco c c secasicncicess2a2iciaadacasatnaaaeeatincaistiacapidaudeabaeanoncamamaneiaaliss 5 32 Adding a MOMO Event or Fea CHO Mic ccccsacaccstsascsgrstcatcinonsst ncansnnandcacoachseasiiabeatansatasc 5 36 Event Reaction Configuration Example cccccccceesesesetestetesteeseseseeteseeteseeeseees 5 38 Using Event Reaction Groups ice ceccercaedcsacssaneasiuth oagaststeiaeaarscssttonisnssmednssantaselenistiectiets 5 39 Creating GIGOUI DD Ss ictestietacrcceseiccsscvecsudessbachenutsxadtatnsuchiensbtavsecsecsionbentanichactdcasenttnaeaste 5 39 Deleting I i cast ce at aan erator e ennai i aiii 5 40 Changing Configured Event R actions
371. nd Character to String ccccccssscsssessssesesssscesescsseecssessssssteseseesaeeseseeen 10 19 Append String to SUING sce ctactnes ened aceleealces cletneyeeslonstiaahia fad dascesasorsdatnctacitte 10 19 Append Character to String cccccccsescssesssssestssestsseecsssscsssssssssnessstesseeneseeee 10 19 Comparison to Visual Basic and Co ccccscesestesestssestsseseeseseessseessseesescsteeeaensees 10 20 Convert to String COMMAS cee 0ssaidacrasessechadsersesncaninteniaadenewlentauieeeneusinetacsaeiabienias 10 21 ASCII LEN ak bale ecsb cece R ashe bene aS 10 22 Event Reaction Commands wicuicscteeccccadidwististineeausieietadaarcndsaiiseiveirameisdneemaaiondces 10 23 Understanding EVEnt R aCtioms ccc ccccccassncsacescstan css ceusdenses sereasaesacacensastecaianiathasaectant s 10 23 Why Use Event R actions scscsccascacdecssacchcasstsesvasstssiacassanchdatvestetsausebeasdstisicr tense 10 23 Typical Applications for Event Reactions cccccccsscccesscesseceseeteseseetesteeseeees 10 24 Configuring Events sca ctcd ca dantcekcehacncnetectacbendvein cox tessdedeniteast onesie seeps actdcatentesdenteedsedees 10 24 Configuring SCL NOINS snsiissininnaannnan a Aai 10 25 Simple Event Reaction Example aascesccctacszepaednsd axcstistassilesstastuctomnats onesie diveadtachaeddetantas 10 26 Enhancements se cnshasgecceciscccecncenti sid testicle ax esieestatl Asan sa baenigetectccnedeed 10 27 Changing Event Criteria on the Fly from the Controller cccc
372. nd RemoveCurrentError P Point to Next Error Reset Controller ResetController P Retrieve Strategy CRC RetrieveStrategyCrce F Round Round Value F Seed Random Number SeedRandomNumber P Set Analog Filter Weight SetAnalogFilterWeight To On Point P Set Analog Gain SetAnalogGain To On Point P Set Analog Offset SetAnalogOffset To On Point P Set Analog Totalizer Rate SetAnalogTotalizerRate To Seconds On P Point Set Analog TPO Period SetAnalogTpoPeriod To On Point P Set ARCNET Destination SetArcnetDestAddressOnPort To Address On P Address on Port Port Set ARCNET Host SetArcnetHostDestAddress To P Destination Address Set ARCNET Mode Raw SetArcnetModeRaw F Set ARCNET Mode Standard SetArcnetModeStandard F Set ARCNET Peer SetArcnetPeerDestAddress To P Destination Address Set Date SetDate To P Set Day SetDay To P Set Day of Week SetDayOfWeek To P Set Digital I O Unit from SetDigitalloUnitFromMomo Must On Mask P MOMO Masks Must Off Mask Digital I O Unit Set Digital 64 I O Unit from SetDigital64IoUnitFromMomo Must On Mask P MOMO Masks Must Off Mask Digital 64 I O Unit OptoControl User s Guide E 15 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS A Aan Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Set Down Timer Preset Value SetDownTimerP
373. nd will be retried However when debugging communication problems a non zero retry value may mask errors For this reason you may want to use a retry value of zero so that you can more easily find and resolve the problem OptoControl User s Guide A 7 rr Errors Specific to a Network Some errors occur only on a certain type of network e For serial networks see Resolving Serial Communication Problems below e For ARCNET networks see Resolving ARCNET Communication Problems on page A 10 e For Ethernet networks see Resolving Ethernet Communication Problems on page A 11 Resolving Serial Communication Problems Resolving Invalid Port Errors 100 If you are having trouble accessing a COM port you may see the error message Invalid Port Error WinRT drivers might not have started This message usually means that another software application is using the port You can use Microsoft s HyperTerminal in Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT to find out whether the port is accessible If it is not accessible you will receive an error message at some point in the following steps 1 From the Start menu choose Programs Accessories Hyperlerminal HyperTerminal or double click Hyperterm exe 2 If a dialog box asks you to set up a modem ignore it 3 In the Connection Description dialog box type a name for the connection for example Test and click OK 4 Inthe next dialog box choose your COM
374. ndow For information on the main window see page 2 9 For programming information see Chapter 3 Designing Your Strategy For steps to create charts see Chapter 7 Working with Flowcharts Opening a Strategy Only one strategy at a time can be open in OptoControl If you currently have a strategy open it must be closed before another is opened You are prompted to save changes before it closes Opening an Existing Strategy 1 To open an existing strategy select File Open Strategy or press CTRL 0 or click the Open Strategy button on the toolbar 2 In the Open Strategy dialog box navigate to the strategy you want to open and click Open The strategy opens in Configure mode with the windows in the same position they were when the strategy was closed Opening a Recently Used Strategy To open a strategy you have recently used choose Its name from the list at the bottom of the File menu The four most recently opened strategies are listed Loading a Strategy or Mode at Startup To have OptoContro automatically start up with the strategy that was open when you exited choose Configure OptoControl Options and click to put a check mark next to Load Last Strategy at Startup To have OptoControl open strategies in the same mode as when you exited OptoControl choose Configure OptoControl Options and click to put a check mark next to Load Last Mode at Startup Opening a Cyrano Strategy You can open an older Cyrano str
375. ndow click the plus sign next to 05 Inspection_Pass_Fail_ Switch Your screen may show only part of the words 15 Move your cursor over the right side of the Name column until the cursor changes shape Then click and drag the column to make it wider until you can see all the words EEI fesseeee On Lateh 4 7 A e i Off Latch 16 Click in the Oven_Inspection_Control chart to make it active and move the scroll bars until you can see the Blow Off block at the bottom 1 40 OptoControl User s Guide Your window now looks something like this QUICK START OptoControl Oven_Inspection_Control _ 5 x E File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools view Watch Window Help 8 x Ee e X th EeeaT himes eenaa aixi Numeric Variables e38 Chart_Status 248 Cookie_Counter 314 Dough_Pressure_Setpoint sty Setpoint_Minus_Deadband e38 Start_Flag String Variables E Pointer Variables Numeric Tables String Tables FPR ee Pee ee Poe ee eee Pointer Tables FUP Foo ce eee Per et Be eee younts MAIR ss cs ee Pot tll stg F Analog_IO_Unit EB Digital_1O_Unit ic Points B Dough_Pressure_Control I a R Dough_Dispense vave JH 2 2 2 2 ER Dough_Level_Switch B2 Chip_Dispense_Valve ER Chip_Level_Switch 4 Runni Step 0 B k 0 0 000 Sec Kh Inspection_Pass_Fail_Swi aba ide es lt is out of spec s oven temperate 200 deg
376. nes Incl Ext Instruction F B Charts amp Alarms coud Dough_Chip amp Dough_Vess Interrupt g Oven_Inspe g Powerup Variables E Numeric vari 840 Chart_5 842 Cookie_ bari Dough_l k Setpoint 840 Start_Fl E String variat Pointer varie E Numeric Tab String Tables Pointer Table IO Units g ond Analog_IOl h A Nieitel TA E E f fa fico gt Running Step On Break Off i2331 Sec g Dough_Chip_Control g OptoControl Ready Debug NUM Ui The hatch marks on the Start block indicate that this command block was about to be executed when we clicked Pause Apparently the program isn t getting past this block Notice that the False exit routes right back to the top of the Start block while the True exit moves on to Start Charts We can see that if the start flag had been true non zero the program would have gone right into the Start Charts block Since we didn t get that far the start flag must be zero And in fact it is We planned it that way because we wanted someone for example a factory operator to start the process intentionally We can simulate this ourselves in OptoControl by manually setting the flag to a non zero value 4 Double click the Start_Flag variable on the Strategy Tree A little box appears In this dialog box you can vi
377. nfigured Controllers a Add Modify Delete cmos 14 Click OK OptoControl User s Guide 1 21 QUICK START The new controller appears in the Configure Controllers dialog box Configure Controllers x Active Controller Cookie Controller Controllers Associated with Strategy Set Active Add Modify Delete Download Options Set Up Controller Ports OK Cancel Help Since you have only one configured controller at this point it is automatically set as the active controller If there were more than one controller you would have to select it and click Set Active to load it into the Active Controller field 15 Click OK to close the Configure Controllers dialog box On the Strategy Tree the new controller appears as the first entry in the Controllers folder Compiling the Strategy NOTE Before you compile the strategy make sure you have downloaded the latest firmware to your controller as described on page 4 26 The simplest way to compile a strategy is to enter Debug mode The strategy is saved and compiled before changing modes 1 Click the Debug Mode button on the toolbar or select Debug from the Mode menu 2 In the Save Strategy dialog box click Yes to save the strategy 3 If you see a Powerup Clear Expected message click OK 1 22 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START a i You may see a Download Warning message like this one Download Warning
378. ng Start Value F String On String Generate Reverse CRC 16 GenerateReverseCrcl6OnString Start Value F on String On String Generate Reverse CRC 16 GenerateReverseCrcl16OnTable32 Start Value F on Table 32 bit Table Starting Element Number of Elements Generating Interrupt IsGeneratingInterrupt I O Unit F Get amp Clear Analog Filtered Get ClearAnalogFilteredValue From F Value Get amp Clear Analog Maximum GetClearAnalogMaxValue From F Value Get amp Clear Analog Minimum GetClearAnalogMinValue From F Value Get amp Clear Analog Totalizer Get ClearAnalogTotalizerValue From F Value Get amp Clear Counter GetClearCounter From Point F Get amp Clear Digital I O Unit GetClearDigitalloUnitLatches From State P Latches On Latch Off Latch Clear Flag Get amp Clear Digital 64 I O GetClearDigital64IoUnitLatches From P Unit Latches State On Latch Off Latch Clear Flag Get amp Clear Event Latches GetClearEventLatches E R Group F Get amp Clear Off Latch GetClearOffLatch From Point F Get amp Clear On Latch GetClearOnLatch From Point F Get amp Clear Quadrature GetClearQuadratureCounter From Point F Counter Get amp Clear Simple 64 I O GetClearSimple64IloUnitLatches From State P Unit Latches On Latch Off Latch Clear Flag OptoControl User s Guide E 7 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example Command Name
379. ng for an analog digital 1 0 unit with a SNAP B3000 ENET brain Notice that digital modules can be placed in positions 0 7 only For ease of use both digital and analog modules start with the same point numbers If you are using analog modules with only two points the top two addresses for these analog modules will be empty DIGITAL I O ANALOG I O WOLEdYNS ZZ COLAO YS iot away fF 9 NG tial 4 o z JAI Q 59 68 57 56 z Al mmm es mee oo oem on DIGITAL E DIGITALIANALOG e r g pa oa a auos 4 e mmm cs 63 62 61 60 QO amp i ie T 5 8 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 rs SNAP ENET S64 1 0 Addressing The following figure illustrates point addressing for an analog digital SNAP Simple 1 0 unit with a SNAP ENET S64 brain For ease of use both digital and analog modules start with the same point numbers If you are using analog modules with only two points the top two addresses for these analog modules will be empty DIGITAL I O ANALOG I O TH SUPsd dAYNS war DEZ 1a 3210 ol 3210 Aq 7654 A T 765 4 in Aq E n 10 98 ie Aq 8 14 11 ma Fe 1B 14 13 12 S DIGITAL J 19 18 1716 m 19 18 1716 8 22 2120 B 2 2120 7 26 25 2 m 27 25 25 24 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 DIGITAL eee ANALOG POINTS 35 4 33 32 35 34 33 32 POINTS DIGITAL 39 38 37 36 moe 39 38 37 36
380. ng table named My_String_Table include the following text 0 y_String_Table S TABLE SIN String 0 1 y_String_Table S TABLE SIN String 1 2 y_String_Table STABLE SIN String 2 3 y_String_Table STABLE SIN String 3 4 y_String_Table S TABLE SIN String 4 Pointer Table Example Each index in a pointer table points to another item within the strategy for example an I O point a variable or a chart Setting initial values for pointer tables means designating the items the pointer table initially points to For example you would include the following text to have a pointer table named My_Ptr_Table initially point to Oven_Temperature a variable Alarm_Handler a chart Thermocouple an analog input Fuel_Pump an analog output and Fan_1 a digital output Oven_Temperature 0 PTBL_My_Ptr_Table TABLE amp Alarm_Handler 1 PTBL_My_Ptr_Table TABLE Thermocouple 2 PTBL_My_ Ptr_Table TABLE Fuel_Pump 3 PTBL_My_Ptr_Table TABLE Fan_l 4 PTBL_My_Ptr_Table TABLE Note that the initial characters in the previous lines are special characters that identify their object type Possible characters include the following H ETE 1g Object Type Character Object Type amp chart float table or integer table string I O point string table I O unit PID PTR_ pointer variable A event react
381. ng this 10 24 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS event you must configure the point to set a watchdog See page 5 11 for steps to configure 1 0 points The MOMO Must On Must Off Match event in the digital multifunction I O unit is used to define an event based on a specified input and output pattern MOMO Match compares the inputs and outputs on the I O unit to a pattern you establish When the current state of the 1 0 unit channels matches the pattern the event becomes true The MOMO Match event allows you to specify On Off or X doesn t matter for each input or output channel This event is useful for identifying emergency conditions or implementing basic combinational logic such as an AND gate For more information on MOMO event reactions see page 5 36 Configuring Reactions After an event has occurred a reaction is executed once The following reactions can be set up to occur in response to an event Digital Multifunction 1 0 Unit Reactions Analog 1 0 Unit Reactions None Enable Scan for Event Disable Scan for Event Disable Scan for All Events Set MOMO Outputs Start On Pulse Start Off Pulse Start Counter Stop Counter Clear Counter Timer Clear Quadrature Counter Read and Hold Counter Value Read and Hold Quadrature Value Read and Hold Totalize On Value Read and Hold Totalize Off Value Read and Hold On Pulse Value Read and Hold Off Pulse Value Read and Hold Period Value Read and Hold Frequ
382. ng would limit the output rate of change to 100 in 10 scan rate periods Output The output can be preset or changed at any time by an operator or by the program For example if you have determined that the output should start at 40 whenever the system is activated simply set the PID output or the analog channel output to this value under program control Manual Mode The factory default causes the setpoint to track the input when the PID is in manual mode which means that the setpoint will be altered when in manual mode If you don t want the setpoint to be altered when in manual mode disable the setpoint track output feature so that when the PID is in manual mode the setpoint will not be changed Input Filtering lf the input signal is noisy you may want to filter it To do so follow these steps 1 Use the command Set Analog Filter Weight specifying the appropriate analog input channel Use a filter weight value of less than 10 times the scan rate Otherwise the loop cannot be tuned 2 Configure the PID loop to use the average filtered value 3 You can store the configuration to EEPROM or Flash memory to save the filter weight and the input type current or average This can be helpful when reenabling an I O unit after a loss of communication Tuning Guidelines Setting the Scan Rate The scan rate should be set as fast as possible or as fast as the controlled equipment will allow unless there are rare and unusual c
383. nging or Deleting Commands Changing a Command 1 With the strategy open in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command you want to change NOTE To change commands in OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 11 25 2 In the Instructions dialog box double click any line of the command you want to change You can also click the command to highlight it and click Modify 3 In the Edit Instruction dialog box make the necessary changes For help see Adding Commands on page 9 1 4 Click OK to return to the Instructions dialog box where you can see the changed command Deleting a Command You can delete a command permanently or you can comment out a command so it is temporarily skipped usually for debugging purposes OptoControl User s Guide 9 5 USING COMMANDS Permanently Deleting a Command 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command you want to delete NOTE To delete commands in OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 11 25 2 In the Instructions dialog box click any line of the command you want to delete CAUTION Make sure you select the correct command You cannot undo a deletion 3 Click Delete or press DELETE on the keyboard Commenting Out a Command You can mark certain commands so that the strategy temporarily ignores them Comm
384. ngs to be excluded Separate multiple filters with a semicolon Note that only lines containing the filter strings will be affected if responses to excluded lines do not contain the strings they will still be logged OptoControl User s Guide A 13 3 To start monitoring or change the level of monitoring choose View Monitor Levels The Monitor Levels dialog box lists all the possible levels to monitor You can click Refresh to make sure the list is up to date _ Monitor Levels E x OptoCom hi level comm 1 user handle 00000004 OptoMwd low level 1 user handle 00000002 OptoMwd mid level 1 user handle 00000001 hoe Refresh 4 Highlight one or more of the monitor levels in the list and click Close You return to the OptoSniff window where the changes you made are reflected at once To stop monitoring click Pause To start monitoring again click Resume To erase all messages from the window click Clear By default communication messages in OptoSniff are automatically saved to a log file named OPTOSNIFLOG in your OptoControl directory You can toggle saving on and off by choosing File Log to File Also by default messages are temporarily stored in system cache memory before being saved to the log file If you are having trouble with system crashes and need to capture messages just before a crash however you can choose File Flush File Always to send messages directly to the log file 5 To view or edit t
385. nication Serial Commands The following commands refer to communication through a serial port Configure Port Set End of Message Terminator Configure Port Timeout Delay Get Active Interrupt Mask Characters Waiting at Serial Port Interrupt on Port0 Get Number of Characters Waiting on Interrupt on Port1 Serial or ARCNET Port Interrupt on Port2 Clear Receive Buffer Interrupt on Port3 Receive Character via Serial Port Interrupt on Port6 Receive N Characters via Serial Port CTS Off Receive String via Serial Port CTS On Receive Table via Serial Port Turn Off RTS Transmit Character via Serial Port Turn Off RTS After Next Character Transmit NewLine via Serial Port Turn On RTS Transmit String via Serial Port Transmit Table via Serial Port Transmit Receive String via Serial Port Serial ports can be configured using Configure Port commands or they can be configured in the Configure Controllers dialog box by clicking the Set Up Controller Ports button and completing the dialog box See page 4 15 for instructions OptoControl User s Guide 10 33 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Interrupt commands are used with event reactions See Event Reaction Commands on page 10 23 for more information NOTE The receive buffer on a serial port holds 256 characters and as many messages as can fit within the 256 character limitation Host Ports Any port that has a host task running and assigned to it is a host port Ports 0 4 and 8 are eligibl
386. ning The temperature is but not the actual temperature It checks the StringComplete variable sees that it is False and so does not proceed 5 Chart Build_String gets control again after a task switch and completes its work on MSG by adding the actual temperature It then sets an integer variable called StringComplete to True 6 Chart UseString now sees a non zero value in StringComplete and prints the completed string MSGS It then clears the flag by resetting StringComplete to False thus signaling the Build_String chart that it can begin building another string Adding Control Characters to a String You can input most control characters in a string by typing a backslash followed by the two character hex value of the character For example to add an ACK CTRL F character enter 06 as part of the string This technique works for all control characters except null 00 carriage return OD line feed OA backspace 08 and cTRL Z 1A To add these characters to a string you must use the Append Character command To input a single backslash in a string type in a double backslash Sample String Variable e Declared Name String_1 e Declared Width 22 e Maximum Possible Width 127 e Bytes of Memory Required Declared Width 4 22 4 26 lt Width is gt String_1 Length is 0 10 16 OptoControl User s Guide
387. nnnnnne 7 1 NITE ONG pioniera A AN A R 7 1 A Tiis CNaptE iaaiiai eaae itd dd EARR 7 1 Creating a New GIN Meeps does atta geist ts Ste coe cae het nelacdauss et abesk asaaoeuouenataeen aes ctavactaet sek reent 7 1 Working with Chart Elements cic csccsccscssecse lt sccscsacsscssanacsassteesasinesesnaccasssnaconssssneesaneacseasenoeas 7 3 What s Ina Chart hac tates ice ctleeacoe n AR 7 3 Using the Drawing Toolbar ccacadeatsessecastsesatecesnatd lt tneatcatinsenaetastactacgsennatitetawateadesessdsss 7 3 Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window 0 ccccceeeseseeteseetens 7 3 Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults ccccccccceeeseeeteeeens 7 5 Drawing RING casts ches cee heacnptechichicaadcncanudiabedbea tax dacadidcineddaadentancteions peng dshectosceasccsaee 7 6 Naming OG oc rcancace ccc secateetaca csbasascaacaasieccgesasiuncceanesteione to sikethoiecntaealastucinmigeecnians 7 7 Renaming Blocks ccatactncstescentcosrnceaciacsacnedheshadechactoahcabintanieda SuccknassastieXeenachacheanhanitacs 7 7 Connecting Te NG Galactica aca E ct clas EAEE 7 7 Action Blocks and OptoScript Blocks sccccnscnsedeesnecencassa cavatbasirnaiecsatsinadantuasxnistuence 7 7 Condition ETON srcctg icecetnacee Sea ncbd Sac atecapesecucaatsascataetnaradcisuatucracaeescsatsalouaseeseelindey 7 9 POULIN Melee da decease hectare aaa secant dae ctakbe tama eas da 7 10 Editing Ub sedate accent cxecat ctr cetdecheesceveun x cngad tarda caetuataed ete acteea
388. nt can help e Instead of converting just rewrite the section in OptoScript Rewriting requires a very good understanding of the original code which conversion may not require but rewriting can result in better more efficient code OptoControl User s Guide 11 31 USING OPTOSCRIPT 11 32 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Using Subroutines Introduction This chapter shows you how to create and use subroutines In This Chapter About Subroutines 12 4 Using SU OIE ssc ca ead cac cer ccdaacantacd conccncsae 12 7 Creating SUDrOUTINGS cc cece 12 2 Viewing and Printing Subroutines 12 10 About Subroutines A subroutine is a custom command that represents a series of commands Subroutines are useful anytime you have a group of commands that is repeated in a strategy or used in more than one strategy Subroutines are built using the same tools and logic used to create charts Once built you can call them at any time from any strategy Like charts subroutines start at one block and proceed sequentially through command blocks to the end They use variables inputs and outputs They can use OptoScript code Each subroutine is displayed in its own window and you can open and view several subroutine windows at the same time Unlike charts however subroutines are independent from a strategy You don t need to have a strategy open to create or work with a subroutine And if you do have a strategy open crea
389. nt P Clear Event Latch ClearEventLatch On Event Reaction P Clear I O Unit Interrupt ClearlIoUnitInterrupt On I O Unit P Clear Off Latch ClearOffLatch On Point P Clear On Latch ClearOnLatch On Point P Clear PC Byte Swap Mode ClearPcByteSwapMode P ISA only Clear Pointer pni null F Clear Pointer Table Element pt 0 null P Clear Quadrature Counter ClearQuadratureCounter On Point P Clear Receive Buffer ClearReceiveBuffer On Port F Close Ethernet Session CloseEthernetSession Session On Port F Comment Block block comment P Comment Single Line single line comment F Communication to All I O IsCommToAl1lIoPointsEnabled F Points Enabled Communication to All I O IsCommToAllIoUnitsEnabled F Units Enabled Complement x P Configure I O Unit ConfigureloUnit I O Unit P Configure Port ConfigurePort Configuration F OptoControl User s Guide E 3 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example g Command Name 3 Configure Port Timeout Delay ConfigurePortTimeoutDelay Delay Seconds P On Port Continue Calling Chart ContinueCallingChart F Continue Chart ContinueChart Chart F Continue Timer ContinueTimer Timer P Convert Float to String FloatToString Convert Length Decimals P Put Result in Convert Hex String to HexStringToNumber Con
390. nt click the Zoom field at the bottom right of the window and select 12 5 percent 25 percent 50 percent 100 percent the default 200 percent 400 percent or 800 percent NOTE Zooming always takes place with reference to the center point of the window Here is a window at 50 percent zoom Oven_Inspection_Control Jof x The same window at 200 percent zoom looks like this Oven_Inspection_Control Set oven temperat_ 450 degrees If inspection statio 200 7 2 18 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Ue Redrawing a Chart Window If you want to move quickly to a particular block you can redraw a chart or subroutine window with any block at its center 1 With a chart or subroutine open in the active window select View Center On Block The Center On Block dialog box appears listing all blocks in the chart Block Id Name Type 16 Blow Off Action 7 Oven On Action 5 Oven Stan Action 13 Reject Coo Condition 2 Speed OK Condition 0 Start Action j Cancel Help ema 2 Double click the block you want or click it once and click OK The chart is redrawn with the selected block in the center of the window Changing Column Width in a Dialog Box Many dialog boxes include several columns of information To see all the data in some columns you may need to make columns wider 1 To widen or narrow a column click the right edge of the column label and d
391. nt To Ea 170 Units 00 Dough_Pressure_Control_Valve 01 Dough_Disp HO Nat Heed zl omea tb 5 Inthe Points side of the Move Point To dialog box highlight the location you are moving the point to and then click OK The 1 0 point is moved Changing a Configured I O Point 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode expand the 1 0 Units folder on the Strategy Tree until you can see the I O point you want to change Double click the 1 0 point name 2 Inthe Edit Analog Point or Edit Digital Point dialog box make the necessary changes Click OK to save For help in making changes see the previous sections on configuring 1 0 points OptoControl User s Guide 5 23 WORKING WITH 1 0 Deleting a Configured 1 0 Point You cannot delete an 0 point that is referred to in the strategy CAUTION Be careful when deleting 0 points You cannot undo a deletion 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode expand the 1 0 Units folder on the Strategy Tree until you can see the 1 0 point you want to delete 2 Right click the 1 0 point s name and choose Delete from the pop up menu You can also delete an I O point from the Configure I O Points dialog box by highlighting its name and clicking Delete Copying I O Configurations If you have two strategies that use similar I O units and points you can export an 1 0 configuration from one strategy into a configuration file and then import it into the other strat
392. nt is followed by a fPressure 300 0 lt 4 semicolon nTotal ntTable 0 ntTable 1 ntTable 2 lt lt able elements are putin square brackets next to the table name while GetHours gt 8 and GetHours lt 17 lt Parentheses are used as separators for expressions and operators You can use an unlimited number of parentheses Fan_A 1 wend Send alarm if oven temperature too hot ine comments appear on a separate line or after a if Oven_Temperature gt 450 then ai statement They are preceded by Oven_Alarm 1 Set the oven alarm two slashes and a space Block comments not illustrated are preceded by and followed by else Oven_Alarm 0 Clear the oven alarm endif Parameters arguments for a 4 command are listed in order nCheck GenerateChecksumOnString 0 sMessage within parentheses following the nError_Block GetIdOfBlockCausingCurrentError j command Commands that have RemoveCurrentError no arguments must still include the parentheses sGreeting Hello world lt An individual character can be in single quotes or in double quotes depending on its type A string must be in double quotes nPos FindCharacterInString 0 sGreeting NOTE Each block has only one exit point It is not possible to use return to jump out of the current block More About Syntax with Commands As noted in the previ
393. nt reaction control features available on the 0 unit such as Change Analog gt Event Limit TIP You must use the command Enable Interrupt on Event if using interrupts followed by Enable Scanning for Event immediately after any change to event criteria Event Reaction Questions and Answers Where are event reactions defined In OptoControl How do event reactions get sent to the I 0 unit They are automatically sent to the controller by OptoControl in Debug mode during download After you select Run Strategy all event reactions are forwarded to their respective I O units during 1 0 unit initialization How fast do event reactions execute That depends on how many there are and how often the 0 unit is polled for data A typical response is 0 5 milliseconds The maximum possible delay would be 5 milliseconds if all 256 event reactions were in use Rapid polling of the 1 0 unit significantly increases these times OptoControl User s Guide 10 27 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Can an I O unit notify the controller when certain events occur Yes An event reaction can also trigger an interrupt wired to the controller Can each event reaction be configured to notify the controller of an event Yes Does the reaction keep occurring as long as the associated event is True No The reaction occurs once each time the specified event status changes from False to True Does the order of event reaction execution matter Only if subsequent ev
394. ntroller firmware to a new version for example from R2 2 to R3 0 the new firmware usually takes up more controller RAM than the previous one If you are already running low on memory there may be insufficient room in memory for your strategies after the upgrade To check controller memory use OptoTerm or OptoControl For help see Inspecting Controllers and Errors on page 4 19 Available memory is shown in the Inspect Controller dialog box If the controller needs more memory and it is upgradable you may need to increase RAM before upgrading firmware If the controller memory is fixed contact Opto 22 Product Support for suggestions CAUTION Before you open any existing strategy in a new OptoControl version make a backup copy of the strategy Having a backup copy keeps your options open in case there is insufficient memory in the controller Do You Use Online Mode If you frequently use Online mode to change your strategy you may find you are having memory problems When you change a chart in Online mode a new copy of that chart is downloaded to the controller but the old one is not deleted After you have made a few online changes these additional chart copies begin to take up memory To avoid memory problems stop the strategy after making several online changes Completely compile and download the strategy and old chart copies will be cleared from memory A 4 OptoControl User s Guide a i Checking Communication wit
395. o 22 Web site www opto22 com Using Ethernet Peer to Peer The OptoControl chart that controls peer to peer communication should open a session once and continue to receive or transmit on the open session number unless an error code is found in the status variable of commands such as Transmit Table via Ethernet Constantly opening and closing sessions for each transaction wastes time and is inefficient The peer to peer control chart should also monitor the status variable of commands such as Transmit Table via Ethernet or Receive Table via Ethernet and close sessions that have errors However the session should not be closed for timeout errors from Receive commands error numbers 40 and 42 because these errors simply mean that there was no data waiting in the receive buffer for the specified session The M4SENET 100 Ethernet adapter card for Opto 22 controllers supports only 32 open sessions at once If your OptoControl application opens sessions but does not close unused or bad sessions the maximum number of sessions may be used up making it impossible to communicate with the M4SENET 100 card If this happens you have to cycle power to the controller to communicate again with the card To save time before using a Receive command such as Receive String via Ethernet or Receive Table via Ethernet the chart that controls peer to peer communication should use the command Get Number of Characters Waiting on Ethernet Session If there
396. o not 1 With OptoControl open choose Tools Customize The Customize dialog box appears Menu Contents Cancel Help Menu Tent E Commend T E Remove Arguments N Wose Up Iritel Directory E TEU 2 Click Add 3 In the Menu Text field type the name of the application as you want it to appear in the Tools menu 4 In the Command field type the path for the application s executable file or click the browse button Bal and navigate to the file 2 26 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL rs 5 Optional In the Arguments field type any necessary command line parameters 6 Optional In the Initial Directory field type the directory the application should default to when it runs For example this is the directory the application would show when you open or save files 7 Repeat the steps to add other applications To change an application s position in the menu list highlight it and click the Move Up or Move Down keys 8 When you have finished adding applications click OK You return to the OptoContro main window and the applications you ve added now appear in the Tools menu Online Help To open online Help choose Help Help Topics or click the Help button in any dialog box Help buttons in dialog boxes are context sensitive and provide help specifically on that dialog box Buttons labeled Command Help give specific information on the command instruction you are currently
397. o print five pages wide and five pages long a total of 25 pages 3 Recommended To print a header on each page put a check mark in the Print Header box The header lists the strategy name chart name date and time of printing page number and column and row of the page with respect to the full chart printout 4 Click OK to save your settings Previewing a Flowchart Printout 1 To see how a chart or subroutine will print before actually printing it open the chart or subroutine window 2 From the Chart or Subroutine menu select Print Preview Graphics OptoControl User s Guide 6 21 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES The preview window appears showing the image as it will print The cursor becomes a magnifying glass Rg Powerup OF x Hew Pace Prev Pane iwc Page Zoom In Zoom Wut j Magnifying glass cursor 3 To zoom in at 200 percent click where you want to see more closely Click again to zoom in at 400 percent Click a third time to return to 100 percent view You can also use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons at the top of the window to zoom in or out with respect to the top left corner of the image 4 Ifthe image spans more than one page click the Next Page or Prev Page buttons to view the next or previous page To switch between a single page view and a double page view click the Two Page One Page button 5 To print click the Print button to open the standard Windows Print dialog box To change sett
398. o the position you want You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move a block in any direction Note that when you move a block any connections attached to it also move 3 To move a connection click it Then click and drag any handle in any direction You can also move an end point from one block to another as long as the result is a valid connection A disallowed move is ignored 4 To move several elements at once select them and then click and drag them If elements end up stacked on top of each other you may need to change their z order before you can move them See the following section Moving Elements in Front of or Behind Other Elements Changing Z Order If elements are stacked on top of each other you can select only the one in front To change their position z order follow these steps 1 Right click the element 2 From the pop up menu choose Z order From the submenu choose the action you want to take e Bring Forward moves the element one position closer to the front e Bring To Front moves it all the way to the front e Send Backward moves the element one position closer to the back e Send To Back moves it all the way to the back 7 12 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Cutting Copying and Pasting Elements You can cut copy and paste most chart and subroutine elements Cut or copied elements are placed on the Windows Clipboard and they can be pasted in the sam
399. oDisplay Users 3 20 Guide 0 Pointer Chart Mo eas s Initialize Pointer Table Get Pointer from Table l _ Move to Pointer Variable _ 4 Retrieve Value Pointed at Throughput can refer to communications between a PC and the controller or communications between the controller and 1 0 The following factors affect throughput for these two types of communication PC lt gt Controller Controller lt gt I O Control strategy design e Host task priority e Host task frequency e Design efficiencies Control strategy design Using I O unit commands Stopping the host task seldom used e Using multiple ports to communicate with I O Hardware issues e Communication link between computer and controller ARCNET Ethernet serial e Controller CPU speed and data bus e Math coprocessor Hardware issues Controller CPU speed and data bus Connection serial twisted pair ARCNET Ethernet Math coprocessor OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY In both types of communication throughput is affected by both hardware and control strategy design The following sections provide some guidance on hardware issues and discuss how to design your control strategy to maximize throughput Hardware Issues The type of PC to controller communication link and the choice of controller affect throughput on both sides of the controller Computer to Controller Communication Link
400. oecd eager caleabantwnccces 5 53 Chapter 6 Working with Strategies cecessseeeseeseseeeneeseeeeeenenees 6 1 MRO UCU ects enc ata nate etal ea Sune esi anoeereas teen atk dado ead Pace eins eae 6 1 In This Chapter et ccscccetcecsseac8 ca ca csoedicaaqsecectucestantandadeestuasancsnnce eu bags iesantessatassigaineass 6 1 Creating and IVE UNG cs csecct c0scascocaniaceaadiacasccascenedsedabusaiascnoyasaiasbess manuauuiptiniapiaajmmelucmsasy 6 1 Creating a New SUF QUE Y cscs ccsateatsdcsechcnsacdacixedcasssscnssedsaccarsiladastaantiebestvehestsasadecesdsasosiene 6 1 POU IFN stat eae ee ans seatiatanseetadevsiectedevlatan oan nanionedaeucisadsadeuctanteen 6 2 Opening an Existing SUPA Y cacescpinsctaccnsesazsncanatbantindiacrnedactasiantacestatesdnsdvatsabsceeiends 6 2 Opening a Recently Used Strategy cccceccescscssescssescssesescesestessstesesteseecaeseanees 6 2 Loading a Strategy or Mode at Startup scisscacescrsesscocensnistioiabinciucivessancseseatsacitelaciss 6 2 Opening a Cyrano Strategy c cccccccscsccsessesescssescssesessesessscscessscsseacsnsseasataeseecees 6 2 Spe AME NCD SILO PIONO 6 3 Saving the Strategy and All Charts coccescescesdensssacencsnens xsscomranncesnorsavente checnsnsencseatexcineiceses 6 3 Saving the Strategy and Some Charts cccccesssescsescsesesseseseesestesestessecaseseaseseanens 6 3 Saving the Strategy to a NEW Name ou cece cecscsseseesescsseseassscsseecasescaseacaseseaseacanens 6 4 Saving Before D
401. of all persistent variable names In I O point names you may want to indicate the point s function the state of the device when the point is active its location or a schematic reference You can abbreviate names of familiar devices and write out less familiar names Include the information you need in the order in which it will be most useful to you e Heater_Switch You have only one heater e Htr6_Switch_SW23B You have many heaters and the schematic reference is needed e Cnvyr_Speed_Encoder_BldgA You want all conveyors to appear together e BldgA_Cnvyr_Speed_Encoder You want all points in Building A to appear together Instruction Examples This section includes examples of common instructions you may want to use See Chapter 10 Programming with Commands for additional information on programming with OptoControl If you need to use math calculations or complex loops and conditions in your strategy also see Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for examples of OptoScript code a procedural language within OptoControl that can make programming easier especially if you are an experienced programmer 3 10 OptoControl User s Guide DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY EE l Creating Messages to Display On Screen You may need to create messages to display on screen for example to give data to operators Typically these messages consist of some specific literal words and symbols followed by a variable value and maybe some addit
402. og box appears Configure 170 Units SNAP Analog Unit 2 Disabled 0 SNAP_Digital_Unit_4 B3000 Snap Digital Remote 0 2 Highlight the 1 0 unit the points are on and click 1 0 Points The Configure 1 0 Points dialog box appears lt Configure 1 0 Points SNAP_Digtal Unt A Type B3000 Snap Digtal 83000 B3000HA Moduer ord por Te Festaes ions Rcitat Demon A rf if 4 01 Not Used 02 Not Used Amosa TCE CUE T Move TG NOTE The example above shows a non Ethernet SNAP I O unit Ethernet points are configured in the same way however the dialog box shows both digital and analog points for the whole rack at once Since digital and analog points are on one unit you can configure them at the same time 3 Highlight the number that represents the module s position on the rack See the diagram on page 5 5 Click Add 4 In the Add Module dialog box choose the module type and then the exact module from the lists Click OK 5 12 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 EE Ee 5 In the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it Notice that the module icon is color coded to reflect the type of module being configured white for digital DC input red for digital DC output yellow for digital AC input and black for digital AC output See the figure on the following page Configure 1 0 Points Module icon Expand or collapse points SNAP
403. oints Offset and Gain Minimum Maximum Values Set Analog Offset Get Analog Minimum Value Calculate amp Set Analog Offset Get amp Clear Analog Minimum Value Set Analog Gain Get Analog Maximum Value Calculate amp Set Analog Gain Get amp Clear Analog Maximum Value Totalizers Filters Set Analog Totalizer Rate Set Analog Filter Weight Get Analog Totalizer Value Get Analog Filtered Value Get amp Clear Analog Totalizer Value Get amp Clear Analog Filtered Value Others Clamping Get Analog Square Root Value Get Analog Upper Clamp Get Analog Square Root Filtered Value Get Analog Lower Clamp Ramp Analog Output Set Analog TPO Period Not available on SNAP Ethernet based I O units Available only on SNAP analog output modules Minimum Maximum Values The Opto 22 brain automatically keeps track of minimum and maximum values for analog input points updating them every 100 milliseconds Min max values are often used to monitor pressure or temperature To read the minimum or maximum value and leave it as is use Get Analog Minimum Value or Get Analog Maximum Value To read the minimum or maximum value and clear it for example to record the minimum pressure in each 24 hour period use Get amp Clear Analog Minimum Value or Get amp Clear Analog Maximum Value OptoControl User s Guide 10 5 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Offset and Gain Commands Offset and gain commands are used for calibration By setting offset
404. ol Configuration to the Real World Most communication errors occur because the controller s configuration in OptoControl does not match the controller s actual jumpers Check the controller s jumpered address baud rate communication mode binary or ASCII and host port against its configuration in OptoControl For help in verifying or changing jumpers see the controller s installation or user s guide See Chapter 4 Working with Controllers for help configuring controllers in OptoControl If you need to remove or install jumpers turn off power to the controller make the jumper changes and then turn the power back on Similarly I O unit and point configuration in OptoControl must match actual I O units and points with which the controller is communicating See brain and 1 0 module data sheets for specifications and information and see Chapter 5 Working with 0 for help configuring 1 0 in OptoControl Resolving Timeout Errors 29 or 29 Timeout errors are probably the most common communication problem with controllers They indicate that the controller could not respond within the specified time interval See the previous section Matching OptoContro l Configuration to the Real World to make sure hardware and software settings match Also make sure the controller does not have an Auto jumper installed To remove or install jumpers turn off power to the controller make the jumper changes and then turn the power back
405. ol User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 rs C Current internal and external values of the gain integral and derivative terms used in the PID loop calculation You can change the gain term to any value except zero in the range 32768 to 32767 You can change the integral and derivative terms to any value in the range zero to 32767 If you change them click Apply D Current internal and external values of the scan rate and maximum change rates You can change the scan rate to any value in the range 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds You can change the maximum change rate to a value between one percent and 100 percent of the output range defined by the output s zero scale and full scale values If you change them click Apply Asterisks in an IVAL field indicate that a valid scan rate or maximum change rate hasn t been read yet usually before the strategy is run E PID execution mode A green background means Automatic a yellow background means Manual Click an arrow to change the mode then click Apply 3 To add the PID loop to a watch window click Add Watch and see page 5 50 Inspecting Event Reactions You can review an event reaction s current state modify its status or set its internal or external values in Debug mode To monitor the event reaction in a watch window see page 5 50 To change the event reaction follow these steps 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the event reaction on the Strategy Tree or double cl
406. olumn should stay constant or fluctuate slightly but it should never grow over time OptoControl User s Guide 10 39 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS You can prevent a problem by transmitting the information less frequently or by giving the chart that is receiving the information a higher priority If the same chart is transmitting and receiving you can alter the chart so that it receives more often than it transmits Pointer Commands The following commands are used with pointers Move to Pointer Clear Pointer Move to Pointer Table Clear Pointer Table Element Move from Pointer Table Element Pointer Equal to NULL Pointer Table Element Equal to NULL Understanding Pointers Like integer and float variables a pointer variable stores a specific number However the number is not data it is the memory location address of data The pointer points to data rather than containing the data A pointer in OptoControl can point to many different types of objects e Another variable e A digital point or object e An analog point or object e An 0 unit e Achart Pointers cannot point to other pointers however If you try to move a pointer to a pointer OptoControl just duplicates the existing pointer 10 40 OptoControl User s Guide The following table lists the objects that pointers can point to Digital Objects Analog Objects PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 1 0 Units Variables Other Simple Digital Input
407. om es amp Interrupt a kar hiann deanta rm o aoa amp 5 oven_Inspe _ Program has been started NM le Pe powera S fo TY Variables ble A a ge Boke Be Wee 2a a B E Numeric Vari e an ane e38 Chart_S 8x2 Cookie_ fe Dough_I te ae ape a ee A as 2 fs Setpoint See ee ee er a w aa a E rn LA ia 40 Start_Fl bie a aa oie ee E sss co a 2 Uy ob E Stringvariat IP oa a Pointer Variz Numeric Tab Strategy status SS a Soe eee ere es S YO uns a Step Off Break Off Mode El Ped Analog_ IOa oe Running the Strategy In Debug mode we re going to run our strategy and examine it We ll see how the strategy run affects variables how the command blocks are executed and so on The first chart to run in any strategy is the Powerup chart so we ll look at it first 1 Double click the Powerup chart on the Strategy Tree When it opens notice that it says Stopped at the bottom left 2 Click the Run button E At the bottom of the chart window the word Stopped changes to Running Let s try pausing the program to see where we are 1 24 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START 3 Click the Pause button M OptoControl Powerup E 10 x File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help l x DSH tex e CSR RmG eooe AEA S spea ln 2 2s ls or B QQ A od dh oxi Cookies Controllers H Cookie Conti Subrouti
408. ommand that appear in a variable within your OptoControl strategy Status codes may indicate problems with a command or communication to 1 0 or they may indicate a problem in the strategy logic See List of Common Status Codes on page B 9 for more information Again look at the possible causes for help in fixing problems 5 If You are Using Ethernet Check the User s Guide If you are using Ethernet check the Troubleshooting appendix in Opto 22 form 1460 the SNAP Ethernet Based I O Units Users Guide for additional suggestions 6 Call Product Support If you cannot find the help you need in this book or the OptoContro Command Reference call Opto 22 Product Support See Product Support on page xxii for contact information A 2 OptoControl User s Guide a i Strategy Problems If You Cannot Delete an Item Sometimes when you try to delete an item in a strategy a variable a chart an O unit or point you receive a message saying You cannot delete an item with a reference count greater than zero This message means you cannot delete the item because other elements in the strategy use it You can use Find to locate all references to the item you want to delete For help in using Find see Searching on page 6 27 Sometimes the reference counts can become incorrect due to cutting and pasting variables or importing charts into a strategy If a reference count appears to be incorrect you can rebuild the stra
409. ommunication Network Commands The following commands refer to communication on an ARCNET or Ethernet network ARCNET Receive String via ARCNET Transmit String via ARCNET Transmit Receive String via ARCNET Receive Table via ARCNET Transmit Table via ARCNET Receive N Characters via ARCNET Get ARCNET Destination Address on Port Set ARCNET Destination Address on Port Get ARCNET Host Destination Address Set ARCNET Host Destination Address Get ARCNET Peer Destination Address Set ARCNET Peer Destination Address Set ARCNET Mode Raw Set ARCNET Mode Standard ARCNET Connected ARCNET Message Address Equal to ARCNET Node Present Ethernet Ethernet Session Open Open Ethernet Session Close Ethernet Session Accept Session on TCP Port Get Ethernet Session Name Get Number of Characters Waiting on Ethernet Session Receive N Characters via Ethernet Receive String via Ethernet Transmit String via Ethernet Transmit Receive String via Ethernet Receive Table via Ethernet Transmit Table via Ethernet ARCNET and Ethernet ports can be in binary mode only For more information on using ARCNET see the Application Notes on the Opto 22 Web site www opto22 com Controller Port Assignments Ports 0 3 COM 0 3 Serial Depending on the controller type these ports are usually configurable as RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 2 wire and 4 wire These ports are also referred to as Remote 0 through Remote 3 Port 4 ARCNET when used as
410. ommunication to All EnableCommunicationToAlllIoUnits P 1 0 Units Enable Communication to EnableCommunicationToAnalogPoint Point P Analog Point Enable Communication to EnableCommunicationToDigitalPoint Point P Digital Point OptoControl User s Guide E 5 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS Ee a Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Enable Communication to EnableCommunicationToEventReaction Event P Event Reaction Reaction Enable Communication to O EnableCommunicationToIoUnit I O Unit P Unit Enable Communication to EnableCommunicationToPidLoop PID Loop P PID Loop Enable Event Reaction EnableEventReactionGroup E R Group P Group Enable I O Unit Causing EnableIoUnitCausingCurrentError P Current Error Enable Interrupt on Event EnableInterruptOnEvent Event Reaction P Enable PID Output EnablePidOutput Of PID Loop P Enable PID Output Tracking EnablePidOutputTrackingInManualMode On PID P in Manual Mode Loop Enable PID Setpoint Tracking EnablePidSetpointTrackingInManualMode On P in Manual Mode PID Loop Enable Scanning for All EnableScanningForAllEvents On I O Unit P Events Enable Scanning for Event EnableScanningForEvent Event Reaction P Enable Scanning of EnableScanningOfEventReactionGroup E R P Event Reaction Group Group Equal to Table Element n nt 0 F Equal ga
411. omplete range of functions There are no additional functions for OptoScript code and you cannot make your own functions Standard and OptoScript Commands In many cases you can easily recognize OptoScript commands because they are almost the same as standard OptoControl commands All spaces are removed from the OptoScript commands however and in some cases words in the command are abbreviated or left out Commands are case sensitive Here are some examples of the same commands in OptoControl and in OptoScript Start Chart StartChart Get Counter GetCounter Set Down Timer Preset Value SetDownTimerPreset Delay mSec DelayMsec Convert Float to String FloatToString Get Number of Characters Waiting on GetNumCharsWaitingOnEnetSession Ethernet Session Some commands are built into OptoScript functionality Some of these have OptoScript commands and some do not you can use either the built in functionality or the OptoScript command if it exists Here are some examples OptoControl Command OptoScript Command Built In Equivalent Example Move item1 value Add 1 2 Less lt value1 lt value2 Turn On TurnOn non zero digital3 1 Turn Off TurnOff 0 digital3 0 Comment Single Line comment Set Nth Character SetNthCharacter 1 5 c See Appendix E for a table of all OptoControl commands and their OptoScript equivalents In addition OptoScript equivalents fo
412. on about your system to the Product Support engineer e Software and version being used e Controller firmware version e PC configuration type of processor speed memory and operating system e A complete description of your hardware and operating systems including jumper configuration accessories installed such as expansion daughter cards type of power supply types of I O units installed third party devices installed e g barcode readers e Specific error messages seen xxii OptoControl User s Guide rs Installing OptoControl OptoControl installation is easy and quick Insert the FactoryFloor CD in your CD ROM drive and the installation wizard should appear If the wizard does not appear start Windows Explorer and navigate to your CD ROM drive Double click Setup exe to begin installation If you have trouble installing OptoControl or need 3 5 inch disks rather than a CD contact Opto 22 Product Support at 800 835 6786 or 951 695 3080 System Requirements Installation Requirements Here s what you need to install and run OptoControl e A computer with at least the minimum processor required for your version of Microsoft Windows 1 GHz Pentium class or better recommended Additional computer requirements include Ethernet capability if using an M4 series controller with M4SENET 100 Ethernet adapter card AnRS 232 serial port and serial cable for downloading firmware updates
413. on in the I O unit 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the 1 0 Units folder until you see the E Rs folder for the 1 0 unit you want Double click the E Rs folder The Configure Event Reactions dialog box opens listing all configured event reactions Configure Event Reactions Digital_I0_Unit Up and Habel down arrows 5 40 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 a il Event reactions are scanned by the 1 0 unit in the order that they appear in this list 2 To move an event reaction to a different position on the I O unit use the up and down arrows in the dialog box 3 To change an event reaction s configuration double click its name to open the Edit Event Reaction dialog box Change the fields as necessary For help in completing the fields see Configuring Event Reactions on page 5 32 Deleting Event Reactions You can delete only event reactions with a reference count of zero Be careful when you delete you cannot undo a deletion 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the 1 0 units folder until you see the event reaction you want to delete 2 Right click the name of the event reaction and choose Delete from the pop up menu The event reaction is deleted You can also delete an event reaction in the Configure Event Reactions dialog box by highlighting it and clicking Delete Inspecting 1 0 in Debug
414. on l xj Groups Instructions Analog Point Chart Communication 1 0 Communication Network Communication Serial Clamp Float Table Element Py Clamp Float Variable Clamp Integer 32 Table Element Clamp Integer 32 Variable Complement Cosine Decrement Variable Divide Generate Random Number Hyperbolic Cosine Hyperbolic Sine Hyperbolic Tangent Controller Digital Point Event Reaction 140 Unit Logical Miscellaneous PID Pointers Maximum Simulation Minimum String Modulo Subroutines x Multiply Cancel Help Command Heb Notice that if you need information about any command you can click the Command Help button OptoControl User s Guide 1 13 QUICK START oo 6 Click OK and this command is entered in the Add Instruction dialog box The cursor is automatically moved to the next field which is Comment Comments are optional they can help someone else understand the purpose of the instruction 7 Inthe Comment field type Increment a counter of cookies produced 8 Next click the arrow in the Type field the one that currently reads All Valid Types This list shows what those valid types are a float variable and an integer 32 variable 9 Counters are integers so select Integer 32 Variable Now we re going to select the integer 32 variable to increment which is a variable called Cookie_Counter 10 Click the arrow in the Name field which currently reads Chart_Status The drop down
415. one Ethernet card check your route table to make sure packets are routed to the correct adapter card If all else fails connect the PC and the controller using an Ethernet crossover cable and retest the connection If you still cannot ping the controller contact Product Support See page xxii A 12 OptoControl User s Guide as i Other Troubleshooting Tools Checking Detailed Communication Information Using OptoSniff For detailed information about each communication transaction use the OptoSniff utility 1 In the Start menu choose Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilitiesOptoSniff You can also start OptoSniff from OptoTerm by choosing Tools Start Sniff or from OptoControl in Debug mode by choosing Debug Sniff Communication The OptoSniff window appears a ortos iojxi File View Help In most cases the main window is blank indicating that no messages are being monitored between the PC and the active controller In some cases for example when OptoControl launches OptoSniff messages should appear immediately By default OptoSniff always appears on top of other running programs To change its position choose View gt Always on Top 2 To filter messages choose View Filters x Enter strings to filter out content sent to the logger Multiple strings must be separated by the character Include Exclude Cancel Help You can specify message strings to be included and or stri
416. one is bad and will cause a controller error because the element at ptPointT 3 is a string and therefore does not match the variable pntl which is defined as an integer 32 pnl ptPointT 1 pfl ptPointT 2 pnl ptPointT 3 OptoScript Expressions and Operators OptoScript includes mathematical expressions as well as comparison logical and bitwise operators Because expressions and operators are built into the OptoScript language several standard OptoControl commands such as Multiply Bit Shift and Greater Than or Equal are not used Using Mathematical Expressions Addition Subtraction nCount nLast_Count 2 nNumber_A nNumber_B 250 fPressure 1 5 fReading fRange fMax_Temp fMin_Temp nTotal nMonday nTuesday 10 Multiplication Division nQuantity nBoxes 12 nBoxes nCount 6 nHours nSeconds 60 60 fConversion fLimit 2 0 fMax_Speed fSpeed 16 52 Modulo division If any argument is a float it is Mixture of operators rounded to an integer before the division occurs nAvg nHrs_A nHrs_B 2 nVarl nVar2 2 nVarl fFloat2 nVar3 4 nVarl 2 nVar2 fFloatl fFloat2 2 5 Use parentheses to clarify groupings and meaning You can use an unlimited number of parentheses nVarl nVar2 fFloat2 2 0 nVarl nVar2 2 nVar3 fFloatl fFloat2 2 3 OptoControl User s Guide 11 19 USING OPTOSCRIPT The and operators have greater p
417. onnect to a controller via Ethernet C Server Connect to a controller located on another computer via an Opto 22 server on that computer lt Back Cancel 5 In the Select Connection Type dialog box choose the type of connection to the controller ef the controller you want to configure is connected directly to your computer for example via serial ARCNET or modem select Direct and continue with Configuring a Direct Connection on page 4 4 e f the controller is accessible over an Ethernet connection via TCP IP select Ethernet Skip to Configuring an Ethernet Connection on page 4 13 e f the controller is attached to a computer running OptoServer on a network that you are connected to select Server Skip to Configuring a Server Connection on page 4 14 OptoControl User s Guide 4 3 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring a Direct Connection If you chose Direct in the Select Connection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure Direct Connection Configure controller name and parameters Controller Name A Address B Ports C Add ia Dee A Enter a descriptive name for the controller Valid characters are letters numbers spaces and most other characters except colons and square brackets Spaces cannot be used as first or last characters B Enter the numerical address of the controller 1 to 255 or 1 to 200 for a G4LC32SX If your controller has
418. ons in an entire strategy select FileView Print All Chart Instructions OptoControl processes the information and displays it in the Instructions window Save Search Print E Sprinkler_Control Instructions olx alala Chart Block Instructions SNAP_Sprinkler_Control Sprinkler_Control 02 04 99 TIME 12 25 59 ACTIONS Action Block Block 0 Id 0 Exit to Between 6 6 7 a m Id 28 Get Day Put in Day_of_the Week Get Hours Put in Time_of Day Action Block Read Hygrometer Id 1 Exit to Humidity lt 100 Id 8 Move From Hygrom To Humidity Action Block Turn sprinklers off Id 3 OptoControl User s Guide 6 23 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all the data Blocks and their instructions are listed in alphabetical or ID number order by type of block action blocks first then OptoScript blocks then condition blocks and finally continue blocks 3 To print the data click the print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the save button To search the data click the search button When finished close the window Viewing and Printing Strategy Elements 1 To view a summary of 0 elements and variables configured in a strategy select File View Print Database 2 To view the same summary for a subroutine open the subroutine window and select Subroutine View Print Database The View Print Database d
419. ontrol maintains a database of all declared variables a notable difference from common procedural languages Variables are not declared in the programming code but in the OptoControl tag database This is a basic concept of OptoControl and how it ties into other FactoryFloor applications but may seem odd to experienced programmers using OptoControl for the first time Also all variables and objects are global Local variables do not exist in OptoControl in the way they do in most procedural languages Subroutines in OptoControl contain local variables but those local variables apply throughout that subroutine Most languages allow you to return from a function before it ends but OptoScript does not The same effect can be achieved in other ways however such as introducing tests into the code Some people argue that this limitation produces better programming because each function has only one exit point OptoControl s Target Audience Because OptoControl was conceived as a simple programming tool for non programmers it is designed to be relatively foolproof Even though OptoScript provides advanced functionality this philosophy has influenced the design of OptoScript OptoScript only exists inside OptoScript blocks which can only exist inside a flowchart Flowcharts are still the basis of OptoControl F 6 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE Even an experienced programmer may want to think twice before using
420. operate on integer values OptoScript supports the following bitwise operators bitand bitwise and bitor bitwise or bitxor bitwise xor bitnot bitwise not lt lt left shift gt gt right shift Use the bitwise and operator to and together the Hex literals can be convenient two values bit by bit nl n2 bitand 0x0002 nl n2 bitand 2 nl n2 bitand n3 Use the bitwise or operator to or together the two Use the bitwise xor operator to xor together the two values bit by bit values bit by bit nl n2 bitor 2 nl n2 bitxor 2 nl n2 bitor 0x0002 nl n2 bitxor 0x0002 nl n2 bitor n3 nl n2 bitxor n3 The eft shift operator shifts the left value s bits to the left by the right value nl n2 lt lt 2 left shift n2 s value by 2 nl n2 lt lt n3 left shift n2 s value by n3 The right shift operator shifts the left value s bits to the right by the right value nl n2 gt gt 2 right shift n2 s value by 2 nl n2 gt gt n3 right shift n2 s value by n3 Precedence For a list of operators from highest to lowest precedence see Operators on page F 9 OptoControl User s Guide 11 21 USING OPTOSCRIPT rr OptoScript Control Structures OptoScript provides the following structures to control the flow of logic in the code e fstatements e Switch or case statements e While loops e For loops e Repeat loops If Statements fstatements offer branching in logic if statement A
421. or I 0 Interrupt Chart As explained briefly in Chapter 2 the Interrupt Chart is automatically created by OptoControl and cannot be deleted It processes interrupts generated by event reactions on 1 0 units with interrupt wiring connected to the controller The Interrupt Chart floats in the task queue It runs automatically when an interrupt is generated then returns to a suspended state It does not use much CPU time while suspended but it does take up one of the tasks in the 32 task queue If you are not using serial I O units with interrupts you can remove the Interrupt Chart from the task queue by using the Stop Chart command Optimizing PC Controller Throughput The following diagram shows a sample task queue with 10 tasks showing the progression of tasks and how much time each is taking For this sample it takes 3 530 usec to run through the OptoControl User s Guide 3 23 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY task queue so communication to the PC through the host task will occur every 3 530 uSec or once every 0 00353 seconds Sample Task Queue Before Optimizing Running 500 psec Host task Interrupt chart floats in the queue a Suspended ile Interrupt Chart i Running Suspended Running I Chart B Running 500 usec Chart E a 500 usec Suspended Chart E Chart C a 10 usec usec TS Chart D Pe Maximum time to make the rounds
422. or double click the point in the View I O Unit dialog box The small dialog box that appears shows the IVAL and XVAL as well as the units e The XVAL or external value is the real or hardware value as seen by the 1 0 unit This value is external to the controller 5 44 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH 1 0 a i e The VAL or internal value is a logical or software copy of the XVAL that is in the controller The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL only when a strategy in the controller reads or writes to an 1 0 point Hygrometer View Analog Point scanning VAL fo XVAL 74 96194 Units Humidity per Expand 2 To change the value or to view more information click Expand The title bar shows the name of the analog point and whether scanning is occurring C Hygrometer View Analog Point scanning Name Hygrometer E i Type finput SNAP AIV 10 10 VDC Scaleable Default No Security fo Zero Scale 0 Full Scale fi 00 Units Humidity per A Enable fres Error None B WAL fo KVAL frs 95995 Units Humidity per Close Apply Addwatch Help Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost Asterisks in a field indicate an out of range value Dashes in an XVAL field indicat
423. or the default host port selection depends on which controller you are using Current methods are via jumper settings for most controllers front panel for the G4LC32 controller and EEPROM for the older G4LC32SX with uvEPROM firmware See your controller s installation or user s guide for details on how to select the communication mode For additional host ports use the command Start Host Task ASCII in the Powerup chart Modes for Serial Ports Serial ports can be in one of three modes 10 34 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS e Opto 22 controller binary mode The default mode for talking to remote 1 0 units and for the host port e Opto 22 controller ASCII mode This mode is used for talking via modem on a host port or to 1 0 It can also be used without a modem e Standard mode The default mode for all serial ports that are not talking to remote 1 0 units and are not configured as a host port Default is a 10 bit frame 1 start 8 data 1 stop no parity These parameters can be changed using the Configure Port command Flow Control on Serial Ports Data flow on serial ports is controlled by hardware handshaking The RTS Request To Send output is on when characters are being sent The CTS Clear To Send input is on by default on most controllers The exception is port 0 on the M4RTU M4RTU DAS and M410 If you are communicating to devices not using hardware flow control disable CTS using the Configure
424. ory usage is three times greater e No string conversion functions are available for numeric tables An intermediate temporary string would be required to use string commands for these tables Strings and Multitasking Although string commands are completed before the current task loses its time slice It is important to note that a string that is constructed in more than one step may require more than one time slice to complete For example if a string is being constructed in two steps such as Move String Hello and Append String to String World after the first step a task switch could occur and another chart looking at the resulting string might see Hello rather than Hello World If another chart is relying on a completed string use an integer as a flag to indicate whether the string is completely built This idea is illustrated in the following example 1 A variable called StringComplete is initially set as False 0 OptoControl User s Guide 10 15 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 2 The variable string MSG is empty and is about to be built by the chart Build_ String MSG is intended to be printed by the chart UseString In this example Build_String builds The temperature is 56 77 3 Chart Build_String uses Move String to put The temperature is into MSG 4 A task switch now occurs and the chart UseString gets control If this chart looks at MSG it sees a partially constructed string contai
425. ot only simpler to create but also easier to understand once created OptoControl User s Guide 11 3 USING OPTOSCRIPT For String Handling If your strategy transmits and receives serial data you will want to try using OptoScript code In standard OptoControl forming and parsing decoding serial data can take several blocks In OptoScript string handling can be easier The following figure shows a flowchart designed to send the string request What type of plane and parse the response F14 into a classification F and a model number 14 Compare these blocks and instructions with the ones on the following page done in OptoScript String_Handler Move String From To plane sVehicle Move String From What type of To Request Instructions String_Handler Build new request Eg Append String to String Append sVehicle To Request Append String to String Append is in stall To Request Convert Humber to String Convert Put Result in Append String to String Append To Append String to String Append To Get Substring From String Response Start at Index 1 Hum Characters 1 Put Result in Classification Get Substring Building a string using standard OptoControl can require several commands From String Start at Index Hum Characters Put Result in Response Convert String to Integer 32 Convert Put Result in Model
426. ou can minimize or maximize it by clicking buttons at the right of the title bar or you can reshape it by dragging any edge in any direction However the Strategy Tree window is unique in that it must remain open since closing it is equivalent to closing the strategy The Strategy Tree works like Windows Explorer you can expand and collapse folders to show or hide what is in them A quick look at the tree reveals that our strategy includes six flowcharts in the Charts folder four Numeric Variables and two I O Units one analog and one digital The Strategy Tree not only shows you all components of the strategy but also provides shortcuts to many common OptoControl activities for example opening flowcharts Docking the Strategy Tree Since the Strategy Tree is so useful you ll probably want to keep it open while you create and debug your strategy To keep the Strategy Tree window always visible you can dock it ina separate frame 1 Click the docking button J in the upper right corner of the Strategy Tree window OptoControl User s Guide 1 5 QUICK START rr The Strategy Tree moves into its own frame at the left side of the main window OptoControl _ O x File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools view Window Help Dee s Bex AR SOSH kK mGee ALAR w CH e gt 244 Oo her B amp S ot h Docked Strategy Tree E Subroutines Inch Ext Instruction F amp G Charts amp Alarms amp
427. ough valve Turn On Modify Dough_Dispense_Valve Increment a counter of cookies produced Delete Increment Variable Cookie_Counter Next Block Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Delay Sec Previous Block LE FEE 2 0 Alaan thea dai cities zi Close Help Command Help But maybe it makes more sense to start the counter at the beginning of the process rather than in the middle after some dough has already been dropped With the Increment Variable command highlighted press the right mouse button and select Cut from the pop up menu You can also use CTRL X to cut Cutting puts the instruction in the Windows Clipboard Now click Turn On to highlight it Click the right mouse button and select Paste from the pop up menu OptoControl User s Guide 1 15 QUICK START D You can also use CTRL V to paste The Increment Variable command is pasted above the highlighted instruction like this Instructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough Increment a counter of roduced Add Increment Variable Cookie_Counter Modify Open the dough valve Delete Turn On Dough_Dispense_Valve Next Block Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Previous Block Delay Sec 2 0 lanan tan alms iala iah an xl Close Help Command Help 17 Click Close to return to the chart You ve just added a cookie counter On the Strategy Tree open the Numeric Variables folder in the Variable
428. ould create a loop that checks the level of liquid in a tank and pulses ona drain if the level is too high The advantages of using a pulse command are that the point does not have to be turned off and if communication is lost to the point it does not remain on IVAL and XVAL All 1 0 points have two associated values XVAL and IVAL If you are using OptoControl in Debug mode to manipulate 1 0 values or to disable an I O point or 1 0 unit you need to understand these values XVAL The external value or XVAL is the real or hardware value as seen by the 1 0 unit This value is external to the controller IVAL The internal value or IVAL is a logical or software copy of the XVAL that is in the controller The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL only when a Strategy in the controller reads or writes to an I O point Do not be concerned if the IVAL does not match the XVAL A mismatch just means that the program is not reading from or writing to the 1 0 point in question at the moment Simulation and Test The Real Use for XVAL and IVAL To test output performance you may want to force an XVAL for a specific output to a particular value If the program is actively writing to the output you need to disable the output to do so If the program is stopped there is no need to disable it To test program logic you may want to force an IVAL for a specific input to a particular value To do so you
429. ount that is how many times the element is used in strategy commands are shown plus other information depending on the element type The figure above shows pointer variables and O units 6 To print the data click the print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the save button To search the data click the search button When finished close the window Viewing and Printing a Cross Reference You can view and print a report of every operand in your strategy or subroutine charts 1 0 units analog points digital points PID loops event reactions numeric variables string variables pointer variables numeric tables string tables and pointer tables The operands are cross referenced to the charts blocks and instructions in which they are used 1 To produce a cross reference for a strategy open it and select File View Print Cross Reference 2 To view a similar report for a subroutine open the subroutine window and select Subroutine View Print Cross Reference OptoControl User s Guide 6 25 6 26 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES OptoControl processes the data and puts it in the Cross Reference window Save Search Print B Unil 3 hlonitoring Cross Reference TITLE Strategy Cross References STRATEGY Unit 3 Monitoring DATE 04 17 01 TIME 14 47 20 Interrupt Not referenced Morning Chart Referenced Block Referenced Instruction Powerup Start Charts Powerup Not referenc
430. ous sample arguments for a command are listed in the parentheses following the command Arguments are listed in order beginning with argument 1 To find out the arguments for any command see the OptoContro Command Reference or online command help SetDownTimerPresetValue 60 0 Minute_Timer command argument 1 argument 2 EnablelOUnitCausingCurrentError command no arguments OptoControl User s Guide 11 13 USING OPTOSCRIPT Commands in OptoScript can be broken into two categories procedure commands and function commands Procedure commands accomplish an action and return no value Here are some examples RemoveCurrentError j ClampInt32TableElement 10 0 5 x1 Function commands return a value from their action so the value can be placed somewhere In the following examples the value is placed in the variable at the beginning of the statement nMonth GetMonth fSquare_Root SquareRoot 99 nPosition FindCharacterInString S 0 sName When you compare these examples to the identical commands in standard OptoControl code you ll notice that the returned value for the standard OptoControl command is an argument In OptoScript the returned value is not an argument thus reducing the number of arguments by one In the first example the standard command Get Month has one argument which is where the result is placed The OptoScript command equivalent GetMonth has no arguments and places the
431. p and Interrupt charts However you cannot delete a chart if it is called or used by another chart in your strategy 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Inthe Strategy Tree right click the name of the chart you want to delete and choose Delete from the pop up menu Or if the chart is the active window choose Chart Delete 3 At the confirmation message make sure you are deleting the correct chart CAUTION You cannot undo a deletion 4 Click Yes to delete the chart The chart window disappears if it was open the chart is removed from the Strategy Tree and the strategy is saved Printing Charts You can print any flowchart To print a chart as it appears on the screen see Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics on page 6 20 To print commands instructions for the chart see Viewing and Printing Instructions on page 6 23 OptoControl User s Guide 7 17 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Exporting and Importing Charts To copy a chart to another strategy you must export it as an OptoControl chart export file cxf file and then import it into the strategy where you want it Exporting a Chart 1 With the strategy open and in Configure or Online mode choose Chart Export The Export Chart dialog box appears Export Chart Sprinkler_Control 2 In the From section of the dialog box select the chart to be exported from the Name drop down list 3 In the To section of the dialog box cl
432. page 8 12 Viewing an Individual Chart or Subroutine To view an individual chart or subroutine double click its name on the Strategy Tree or choose Chart Open The chart or subroutine window opens You can open as many of these windows as you need The names of open windows appear on tabs at the bottom of the OptoControl main window Click a tab to bring its window into view Viewing All Charts in a Strategy You can see the status of all charts at once and change a chart s status without having to open it 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the Charts folder The View Chart Status dialog box appears showing every chart in the strategy View Chart Status Of x Mode Breakpoint Status Paused At Interrupt Suspended Step Off Break Off Block Id 0 Powerup Stopped Step Off Break Off Sprinkler_Control Running Step Off Break Off 2 To change the status of a chart double click the chart name OptoControl User s Guide 6 19 6 20 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES The View Chart dialog box appears showing the chart name chart status run mode and breakpoint status If the chart is paused mode is Step On the block at which it is paused is shown in the Paused At field In the figure below the chart is not paused Kt Sprinkler_Control View Chart scanning Status Running z Mode Step Off Breakpoints Break Off Paused t 2p Addwatch Help
433. parisons and logical operators cannot be used in cases nor can strings If a case involves a float the float is converted to an integer before use Notice that only one case can be tested at a time Here s an example of a switch statement switch nNumber lt The value of the expression in parentheses nNumber is compared to each case 1 2 of the cases If the case matches the value of nNumber the action is taken fl T0 M Make sure you use a colon after each case break e cage Ds If a case matches the value of nNumber the break statement after the f 15 action immediately exits the switch Notice that a semicolon is not used break after break case n2 2 lt Youcanuse a mathematical expression as a case fl 20 break default lt ___ _ If no case matches the default action is taken Using a default is fl 0 optional if you use it it must be at the end of the list f2 1 break endswitch lt W A switch statement must be followed by endswitch While Loops The while loop is used to execute a list of statements while a given condition is true The condition is tested at the beginning of each loop For example this loop sets the first five elements elements 0 through 4 of a table ntTable to a value of 10 nIndex 0 lt Initialize the counter while nIndex lt 5 lt Execute loop if condition is true ntTable nIndex 10 lt Set t
434. peat an operation while a condition remains true are easier to create and take up less space in a flowchart when done in OptoScript While loops repeat loops and for loops are all available e While loops repeat a process while a test is true the test comes at the beginning of the process e Repeat loops repeat a process until a test is false the test comes at the end of the process This kind of loop is guaranteed to execute at least once e For loops repeat a process for a specified number of times Below is an example of a while loop as it would appear in standard flowchart commands contrasted with the way it could be handled in an OptoScript block WHILELGOP gt gt gt testforthe hou gt gt in standard UptoControl commands the loop takes several blocks each containing one or more instructions In OptoScript the loop is in a single block that contains one condensed instruction E altl Aala rao cory Z a te e_O Sr while GetHours gt 8 and GetHours lt 17 do something Be ee e a wend v 4 gt 11 6 OptoControl User s Guide For Case Statements USING OPTOSCRIPT Case or switch statements create multiple decision points They can also be easier to do using OptoScript Here is an example of a case statement In standard OptoControl commands the case statement requires several sets of condition and action blocks each contain
435. place letters indicating variable type at the beginning of the name For example sMonth would indicate a 11 14 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT aoa Ma string nMonth would indicate an integer The following table shows suggested notation for use in OptoControl Variable type Letter Variable type Letter Using Numeric Literals integer 32 variable n analog I O unit aio integer 32 variable used as Boolean b digital I O unit dio integer 32 table nt mixed I O unit mio integer 64 variable nn analog input point ai integer 64 table nnt analog output point ao float variable f digital input point di float table ft digital output point do down timer dt PID loop pid up timer ut digital event reaction der string variable s analog event reaction aer string table st event reaction group erg pointer variable p chart cht pointer table pt Here are examples of how to use numeric literals in OptoScript Formats are automatically converted if they don t match the variable type For example if a value of 300 2 were assigned to an integer 32 the value would be converted to 300 Decimal Integer 32 Literals assigned to variables Decimal Integer 64 Literals assigned to variables nVariablel 0 Integer 64s have an i64 at the end nVariable2 10 dVariablel 0164 nVariable3 123 dVariable2 10164 dVariable3 123164 Hexadecimal Integer 32 Literals assigned to variables Hex
436. ple amp Command Name IVAL Set Off Latch valSetOffLatch To On Point P IVAL Set Off Pulse valSetOffPulse To On Point P IVAL Set Off Totalizer valSetOffTotalizer To On Point P IVAL Set On Latch valSetOnLatch To On Point P IVAL Set On Pulse valSetOnPulse To On Point P IVAL Set On Totalizer valSetOnTotalizer To On Point P IVAL Set Period valSetPeriod To On Point P IVAL Set PID Control Word valSetPidControlWord On Mask Off Mask P For PID Loop IVAL Set PID Process Term valSetPidProcessTerm To On PID Loop P IVAL Set Quadrature Counter valSetQuadratureCounter To On Point P IVAL Set TPO Percent valSetTpoPercent To On Point P IVAL Set TPO Period valSetTpoPeriod To On Point P IVAL Turn Off valTurnOff Point P IVAL Turn On valTurnOn Point P Less Than or Equal to Table x lt nt 0 F Element Less Than or Equal x lt y F Less Than Table Element x lt nt 0 F Less x lt y F Low RAM Backup Battery IsRamBackupBatteryLow F Make Integer 64 MakeInt64 High Integer Low Integer F Maximum Max Compare With F Minimum Min Compare With F Modulo x sy F Move x y P Move 32 Bits Move32Bits From To P Move Analog I O Unit to MoveAnalogloUnitToTable I O Unit To P Table Index Of Table Move Digital I O Unit to Table MoveDigitalIoUnitToTable I O Unit P Move Digital I O Unit to Table Element E 12 Starting Index Of Table No exact equivalent See the OptoControl Command Reference for an alternativ
437. plete its job all remaining time including any portion of a time slice is given up OptoControl User s Guide 10 9 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS The following conditions cause a chart to use less than a full time slice e The chart or subroutine stops e The chart or subroutine is suspended e A Delay command is used Using the command Delay mSec with a value of 1 millisecond is a handy way to give up the time slice while waiting in a loop for a condition to become True For more information see Increasing Efficiencies in Your Strategy on page 3 25 When does the requested change to a chart or task status take effect Not immediately In any multitasking system timing and synchronization issues are always a concern The time required for a particular request to be implemented depends on the number of tasks currently running the priority of each and the specified chart s location in the 32 task queue In other words it s hard to say However the worst case delay can be calculated For example if four charts and one host task are running each with a priority of 2 two time slices each the worst case delay would be 5 x 2 x 500 microseconds 5 milliseconds Time Date Commands The following commands refer to time dates and days Dates and Days Time Get Year Get Hours Set Year Set Hours Get Month Get Minutes Set Month Set Minutes Get Day Get Seconds Set Day Get Seconds Since Midnight Get Day of Week Set Secon
438. plications for Event Reactions e Motor starting logic e Drum sequencers e Alarms e Analog biasing e Power up sequencing e Monitoring emergency stop buttons notifying the controller when pressed e Monitoring analog inputs notifying the controller if inputs fall outside acceptable limits e Auto seeking of backup communication paths Configuring Events You can configure the following events in OptoControl Digital Multifunction 1 0 Unit Events Analog 1 0 Unit Events Communications Watchdog Timeout Communications Watchdog Timeout Counter gt Value Analog Input gt Value Counter lt Value Analog Input lt Value Quadrature gt Value Analog Output gt Value Quadrature lt Value Analog Output lt Value Frequency gt Value Frequency lt Value Totalize On gt Value Totalize Off gt Value On Pulse gt Value Off Pulse gt Value Period gt Value MOMO Match In these events Value refers to a number you supply Analog inputs and outputs can compare the current reading as well as the average peak lowest or totalized readings against this value Both digital and analog 1 0 units have a watchdog timeout event When a watchdog timeout value is set if communication is lost for a time greater than the value a corresponding reaction is executed Watchdog timeouts can be useful in situations requiring an orderly shutdown of equipment if communication between the controller and the 1 0 unit is lost Before usi
439. printf str x iNum Convert Number to String S CStr 1 sprintf str d iNum sprintf str f fNum Convert String to Float Convert String to Integer 32 Get Nth Character Get String Length F CSng S 1 Clnt S MyByte ASC MID Str n 1 MyLENGTH LEN Str sscanf str f amp fNum fNum atof str sscanf str d amp iNum iNum atoi str MyByte str n iLEN strlen str Get Substring SubStr MID Str i n strncpy subStr amp str i subStr n 0 Move String STR Hello strcpy strDest Hello Test Equal Strings Equal STR Hello i stremp str1 Hello String Equal if STR Hi then if stremp str1 Hi String Equal to String Table Element if STR n Hi then if stremp str1 n Hi 10 20 OptoControl User s Guide Convert to String Commands PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS CE ee The five convert to string commands are typically used when printing a number to a port The ASCII table on the following page shows how various parameters affect the string as it is converted Note the following e Some commands add leading spaces to achieve the specified length These spaces are indicated with underscores _ e Floats if used are automatically rounded to integers before conversion except when using the command Con
440. ps by which the counter gets from its initial value to its final value step 1 counts by ones step 2 counts by twos and so on The step is required The counter can be any numeric variable or 1 0 point but its value will always be a whole number The initial value final value and step can be any numeric expression they are converted to integer 32s CAUTION A step value of zero creates an infinite loop A float step value between 0 5 and 0 5 also creates an infinite loop since it is rounded to zero when converted to an integer 32 11 24 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT Ue This example results in nVariable equaling 6 nVariable 1 aos for nCounter 0 to step L 4 The counter starts at zero and its final value is 4 i It will count up one step at a time nVariable nVariable 1 next lt The for loop must end with next The for loop counter can be used in the loop Other step amounts can be used including negative This example sets the first five elements of steps Do not use a zero step which creates an table ntTable to 10 infinite loop This example sets elements 0 2 and 4 for nIndex 0 to 4 step 1 of ntTable to 20 ntTable nIndex 10 for nIndex 0 to 4 step 2 next ntTable nIndex 20 next Predefined values can be a numeric expression but they are evaluated only at the beginning of the loop For instance the following example will loop 0 to 15 because the upper limit of n
441. r the more memory required to store the string For pointer variables only From the Pointer to Type drop down list select the type the pointer points to Note that void pointers are not allowed a pointer must point to a specific type Also note that you cannot point a pointer to another pointer OptoControl has only one level of indirection for pointers If you try to point to a pointer OptoContro assigns to the new pointer the address of the object being pointed to E For all variables except up timers and down timers To set the variable to the initial value F each time the strategy is run click Initialize on Strategy Run To set the variable to the initial value only when a strategy is downloaded click Initialize on Strategy Download F For all variables except pointers up timers and down timers Enter the value to which the variable is to be set initially If you leave this field blank the initial value is set to zero 8 6 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES as For pointer variables only When you have selected the Pointer to Type the drop down list in this field shows all the valid objects for that type that are currently defined in your strategy Choose one or leave the initial value as NULL A NULL value means that the pointer is created but does not initially point to anything 6 Click OK The Add Variable dialog box closes and the new variable appears in the Configure Variables dialog box Adding Num
442. r Errors 2 The Error Queue usually shows only the first 10 errors To see all of them click All 3 To delete the top error on the list click Pop First Error 4 To delete all errors click Clear Errors 5 Close the dialog box to return to the Inspect Controller dialog box Any changes you have made to the error queue are reflected there Inspecting Controllers from the OptoTerm Utility You can also inspect controllers from the OptoTerm utility 1 Click the Windows Start menu and select Programs Opto 22 FactoryFloor 4 0 OptoUtilitiesOptolerm OptoControl User s Guide 4 21 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS The OptoTerm window appears EE OptoTerm ME E File Tools Configure View Help Cookie Controller mistic1 SNAP_LCSX OptoRuntimePC Number of Controllers 4 2 Double click the controller you want to see or right click it and choose Status from the pop up menu The Inspect Controller dialog box appears The dialog box is explained on page 4 19 Downloading Files to the Controller Archiving Strategies Archiving strategies on the controller provides a backup in case original strategy files on the computer are lost Archive files are date and time stamped and zipped for compact storage The archive file name on the controller is in one of the following formats Path Filename Download D02282000 11 14351 zip Path Filename Online D02282000 1114351 zip The date stamp D is in the format mm dd yyyy In
443. r each command are shown in the OptoControl Command Reference and in the online command help OptoControl User s Guide 11 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT oe Using 1 0 in OptoScript One advantage of OptoScript is that any I O point can be used directly wherever a numeric variable can be used rather than requiring a variable Digital points behave like integer variables that have only two possible states zero off or non zero on Analog points behave like float variables For example you can turn a digital point off by simply assigning it a value of zero Light_Switch 0 You can turn a digital point on by assigning it any value other than zero Light_Switch 1 Light_Switch 1 Light_Switch 486 You can use I O points directly in mathematical expressions fLimit Pressure_Input 50 Or use them directly in control structures for example to turn off the light if the door is closed if not Door then Light_Switch 0 endif You can set an output based on the value of an input or a variable LEDO1 Switch_A Proportional_Valve fPressure_Control You can use a point directly with a command fRange GetAnalogMaxValue Temp_Input GetAnalogMinValue Temp_Input TurnOn Fan_A TsOn Fan_A j 11 12 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT rs OptoScript Syntax Here is a sample section of OptoScript code to illustrate syntax Indentation is not required but is used for clarity Each stateme
444. r of connection lines click a Connection line at the far right Choose the new color from the Color dialog box C Define width height and font of text blocks that appear as comments in a chart or subroutine Default width is 192 default height is 128 the minimum for both is 16 The default font is black 10 point Arial bold D To expand the scope of the changes you ve made click these boxes Click OptoControl to apply the changes to all new strategies in OptoControl Click Strategy to apply the changes to all new charts and subroutines in the current strategy Click All Charts to apply the changes to all new charts in the current strategy Click All Subs to apply the changes to all new subroutines in the current strategy and all open subroutines Depending on which dialog box you are in and what is currently open one or more of these options may be grayed out For example if you are in the Configure OptoControl Default Properties dialog box it is assumed that the changes are to be applied throughout OptoControl and that option is therefore grayed out E To reset all parameters and options to their factory default settings click Reset All 3 When you have made all the changes click OK Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults Once you have changed the defaults for the way elements appear in a chart you can update existing blocks connections and text to match 1 Right click on an empty space in the chart whose elements you
445. r the strategy must change it it can be easily interpreted This section shows examples of using OptoScript e for math expressions e for string handling e for complex loops 11 2 OptoControl User s Guide USING OPTOSCRIPT a il e for case statements e for conditions e for combining math expressions loops and conditions For Math Expressions OptoScript is especially useful for mathematical computations Math expressions are simpler and easier and many of them are built right into the language instead of requiring commands such as Add or Multiply OptoScript has no limitations on the number of parentheses you can use in math expressions Here s an example of a mathematical expression in OptoScript integerl integer2 2 floatl float2 2 3 To accomplish the same computation using standard OptoControl commands you would need to create at least two intermediate variables and use five instructions as shown below Instructions Math_Expressions Block 16 x Add integer2 Plus 2 Modify Put Result in tempintegerA Delete Subtract float2 Minus 2 Put Result in tempfloatA Next Block Hae Previous Block Divide float1 By tempfloatA Put Result in tempfloatA Subtract tempfloatA Minus 3 0 Put Result in tempfloatA Multiply tempfloatA Times tempintegerA Put Result in integer1 Close Help Command Help As you can see the OptoScript version of this math expression is n
446. rag it horizontally Click and drag Analog IO Unit G4 Analog Multifunction Loca Digital_10_Unit G4 Digital Multifunction Local Disabled 16 Modify Delete 1 0 Points PID Loops Event Reactions 2 To resize a column to the exact width of its longest entry double click the line that separates the column from the one on its right OptoControl User s Guide 2 19 2 20 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Sorting Data in a Dialog Box In some dialog boxes with columns of data you can sort the information in the way you want to see it The Center On Block dialog box provides an example The blocks in this dialog box normally appear in alphabetical order by the block name BlockId Name Type 15 Blow Off Action 7 Oven On Action 5 Oven Stan Action 13 Reject Coo Condition 2 Speed OK Condition 0 Start Action Cancel Hep 1 To sort by block number instead click the Block Id column label Blockid Name Tye 0 Start Action 2 Speed OK Condition 5 Oven Stan Action 7 Oven On Action 1 Reject Coo Condition 1 3 5 Blow Off Action Cancel Hep 2 To sort in the opposite order descending numbers instead of ascending numbers click the Block Id column label again Some dialog boxes don t allow custom sorting If you click a column label in these dialog boxes nothing happens OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL CE Le
447. ramming Languages c cccccceeeceeeeeeeees F 1 Function COMparison sacs cesttecescccecsis standin uadesteatincnsthaursictadeaesaaionetnensacieeistaaaeaes F 2 Variable COMparison ale cactisce pcan strstr asanitice eda access behaedcentnd vakeataaialcaignncend et We Nciees F 6 Notes to Experienced PHO CAMUNENS exccsisdesaccosedacdexcateterseonedeschaichecuesstainmsnsitencashanmecdisoiain F 6 Variable Database and Other SurpriS S c ccccccsesceseseetesseseseeeseeseseesescseseseensaneneass F 6 OptoControl s Target AUGION CE cecccccccceseeeseeseseesesesnsscsnssesnsscsnssesnsssseeseaeseseensseees F 6 language IN 22s cue cttswpesacvatscetctes uatintucbri nitrates an antealacactn cient aetaadauinciat F 7 OptoScript Lexical Reference c csescescscssesescesescessscesesseseesssavsseasaseacssssesssseaseseaseseeceseesess F 8 Token Syntax Legend cnn cece cestode iar exctewhanoecc cde came iaaonavaneeneeeedenicnas F 8 Literals and Names nts excess ceacinsensteneleenatenesactansetcninadsansptuavengetaes nets acts tdcasnancicmateneitienesal F 8 Keywords Reserved Words ccccscsessssessesessssessesseseeessssesstetsessesssetsessesessesesteeseetens F 9 PO ON ptt Seatac actin a e a anata sme F 9 CMMI SI acted stata healt hast eto ane kernels Mace sendecsecans fe xo aotansee tata eta F 10 OptoScript Grammar Syntax Reference scsi sasccccsciadssceceadeesseseectccinsssesaaseensetvenvatersencescaeees F 11 OptoControl Index sisccissscscisisscccccias
448. recedence than and See page F 9 for the order of precedence In the following lines line 1 is equivalent to line 3 not to 2 ni n2 n3 n4 nl n2 n3 n4 nl n2 n3 n4 Using Comparison Operators All OptoScript comparison operators return an Integer 32 value of zero false or of non zero true OptoScript supports the following comparison operators for comparing two numeric values Operator and Meaning Example equal nVarl nVar2 fFloat3 lt gt not equal nVarl nVar2 lt gt fFloat3 lt less than nVarl nVar2 lt fFloat3 lt less than or equal nVarl nVar2 lt fFloat3 gt greater than nVarl nVar2 gt fFloat3 gt greater than or equal nVarl nVar2 gt fFloat3 More complex examples nVar2 2 fFloat3 9 5 nVar2 2 lt fFloat3 9 5 nVarl nVarl You can also use a comparison operator to test whether two strings are equal For example nVarl sStringl sString2 nVarl sStringl abc nVarl sStringl stStrT1 0 nVarl stStrT1 0 stStrT1 1 When you use a comparison operator in an if statement it isn t necessary to put the result in a variable because the result is used consumed by the if if fI1CTD_Input lt Avg_Temp then Fan_A 0 endif Using Logical Operators All OptoScript logical operators return an Integer 32 value of zero false or of non zero true OptoScript supports the following logical operators
449. rees NF mainet tihan o Dough Chip_Control S Oven_Inspection_Control Cookie Watch On Latch off Latch BEE BLS XI ontrol 41 examplestmyCookies Cookies error oc a a 7 17 Click the Step Chart button as many times as it takes to get the hatch marks to the Blow Off block Now watch the Cookie_Counter IVAL value in the watch window as you click the button again OptoControl User s Guide 1 41 QUICK START A bad cookie was found so the counter was decreased by one At the same time the on latch was reset to Off as you can also see in the watch window OptoControl Oven_Inspection_Control Mei x ee File Edit Controller Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help l x Dao d sex A S6SCe ReG Oe AERA me Sis Meat u 2 amp HM te a B amp A oh dh nal axi S Numeric Variables Sa chart_status WI gt XB ee ee Pe ee ge a a Mas Cookie Counter Pt Ams _ Ti STs eens 32 E a A 1 Dough_Pressure Setpoint J f 0000n 0 ee Is a ae 34 Setpoint_Minus_Deadband f 0000000 RY gt pene emperaty ne cs gt ac ee egrees String Variables WR o Set oven temperature to Pointer Variables tT Pl Numeric Tables iM SR a L a Stringtables O MIM 2 ee ee Pee ee Pee a a ee ee Pointer Tables JIE Foor ccc te Pee Be ee 10 Units ete ee
450. reset Target Value Down P Timer Set End of Message SetEndOfMessageTerminator To Character P Terminator Set Hours SetHours To P Set I O Unit Configured Flag SetIoUnitConfiguredFlag For I O Unit P Set Minutes SetMinutes To P Set Mixed I O Unit from SetMixedIoUnitFromMomo Must On Mask P MOMO Masks Must Off Mask Mixed I O Unit Set Month SetMonth To P Set Nth Character SetNthCharacter To In String At Index s n x F Set Number of Retries to all SetNumberOfRetriesToAllIoUnits To P I O Units Set PC Byte Swap Mode ISA SetPcByteSwapMode P only Set PID Control Word SetPidControlWord On Mask Off Mask For P PID Loop Set PID D Term SetPidDTerm To On PID Loop P Set PID Term SetPidITerm To On PID Loop P Set PID Input SetPidInput To On PID Loop P Set PID Mode to Auto SetPidModeToAuto On PID Loop P Set PID Mode to Manual SetPidModeToManual On PID Loop P Set PID Output Rate of SetPidOutputRateOfChange To On PID Loop P Change Set PID P Term SetPidPTerm To On PID Loop P Set PID Scan Rate SetPidScanRate To On PID Loop P Set PID Setpoint SetPidSetpoint To On PID Loop P Set Priority SetPriority To P Set Priority of Host Task SetPriorityOfHostTask To On Port P Set Seconds SetSeconds To P Set Simple 64 I O Unit from SetSimple64IoUnitFromMomo Must On Mask P MOMO Masks Must Off Mask Simple 64 I O Unit Set Time Set Time To P Set TPO Percent SetTpoPercent To Percent On Point P Set TPO Period SetTpoPeriod
451. result in the variable In most cases you will use the value a function command returns by placing it in a variable but occasionally you may not need to use the result For example the command StartChart returns a status If you do not need to track the status you can ignore it by not placing the result anywhere as shown below StartChart Fan_Control OptoScript Data Types and Variables Unlike most procedural languages OptoControl maintains a database of all declared variables which is shared with OptoDisplay and other software in the FactoryFloor suite Variables are not declared in OptoScript code but are created declared within OptoControl as they have always been See Chapter 8 Using Variables Variables are not declared in OptoScript because local variables are not allowed All variables are global for the strategy or global within a subroutine If you use a variable in OptoScript code that does not currently exist in the strategy you ll receive an error message when you test compile the code and can add the variable then Variable Name Conventions With OptoScript and in OptoControl generally it s a good idea to get into the habit of indicating the variable type in each variable s name Some variable types may be obvious in the name itself but others are not For example a variable named Month might be either a string or an integer An easy way to avoid this confusion is to use Hungarian notation that is to
452. ructions Variables sjaje 0 Subroutines Compile Toolbar Active View Changes Mode Toolbar Configure Online EJ Debug Toolbar Pause Chart Step Block New Watch Window Run Strategy Breakpoint Sniff Communications gt alla aoe D amp Stop Strategy Step Line Auto Step Inspect Controller Open Watch Window View Toolbar Zoom in Hex Integer Display Zoom Out Hex String Display ajaj sel Binary Integer Display Moving Toolbars You can move toolbars to the place where they are most convenient for you To move a toolbar click and drag it with the mouse to the location where you want it to be Hiding and Showing Toolbars To hide or show a toolbar choose View Toolbars In the dialog box click to put a check mark in the box next to the toolbar you want to show To hide a toolbar click the box to remove the check mark OptoControl User s Guide 2 11 2 12 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL SimpleS prinkler Of _ oy x 3 Controllers H SNAP_LCSX Subroutines Included Ext Instruction Files Includec 4 Charts ee Interrupt Find Message_Display aa Powerup amp Sprinkler_Control Variables Numeric Variables 5 String Variables 4 Pointer Variables 5 Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer T ables G 1 0 Units El D 0 D a m 0 E RY Analog_Unit Din Digital_Unit Button Description Strategy Tree The Strategy Tree shown a
453. ry strategy should have a way to handle errors You can easily build a simple error handling chart like the one shown below which automatically checks errors and takes action based on the type of error This chart for example checks for I O unit errors Suppose a remote 1 0 unit loses power for a few seconds and then the power comes back on When the power is lost communication to the unit is disabled To enable it again you could stop the strategy and restart it or you could enable the unit in the debugger With this error handling chart however you can automatically enable the 1 0 unit and restore communication while the strategy is running The chart checks the top error in the error queue If it is an I O unit error communication to the unit is enabled If it is not an I O unit error another action happens another chart in the strategy is stopped Two delays are built in the first one to release the time slice if an error is not found and the second one to allow the controller time to restore communication with the 1 0 unit Simple_10_Unit_Error_Handler_Chart The chart first checks to see if there s an error If not a slight delay gives the controller time to do other tasks See Increasing Efficiencies in Your Strategy on page 3 25 for more information on using a delay in this way Instructions Simple_10_Unit_Error_Handler_Chart 1 0 E3 elay 100 msec Error on I O Unit Add x E e erorian o Moy unit error th
454. s Eddan Stop C Not Used Modify 002 Not Used 003 Not Used Delete 004 Not Used v 005 Not Used Not Used Name Groups w Delete Group 2 To create a group click the Name Groups button Name E R Groups Ea Group Name l Physical E Rs E Rs 016 to 031 E Rs 032 to 047 E Rs 048 to 063 E Rs 064 to 079 E Rs 080 to 095 E Rs 096 to 111 3 Highlight a physical group of E Rs Click in the Group Name field and type a name Group names must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores OptoControl User s Guide 5 39 WORKING WITH I O 4 When you have finished naming groups click Close The names appear in the Group column of the Configure Event Reactions dialog box Configure Event Reactions Digital_IO_Unit 000 Group _1 E Counter Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Deleting Groups When you delete a group you re deleting only the group name not the event reactions that were assigned to the group To delete a group name in the Configure Event Reactions dialog box select any event reaction in the group and click the Delete Group button The group name is removed from all 16 event reactions in the group and the selected event reaction appears at the top of the list box Changing Configured Event Reactions You can change an event reaction s configuration and its positi
455. s 123ABC 7890 wee no Single Character Good examples A Bad examples eae Int64Literal 0 xX lhex digit1 i64 Hexadecimal Integer 64 Good examples 0x12ABi64 OX12aBi64 0x0i64 Bad examples x123ABCi64 0123ABCi64 0 digiti non zero digit0 i64 Decimal Integer 64 Good examples 0164 7890164 Bad examples 123ABCi64 123164 FloatLiteral digitO digit1 Ee 1 Jopt digit1 opt Float Literal Good examples 1 0 2 3 1 2e6 1 2e 6 1 2e6 Bad examples 1 1 e7 le7 StringLiteral no 0 String Literal Confined to single line Good examples abc def Bad examples abc def F 8 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE a M Token Name Token Syntax Comments NumericVariable letter 1 letter A letter followed by mix of letters digits StringVariable digit _ 10 and underscores The name must be PidVariable found in the OptoControl database ErVariable ErGroupVariable Good examples MyInt MyInt2 ChartVariable My_Int_3 DigloUnitVariable Bad examples _MyInt OMyInt AnaloUnitVariable MixedloUnitVariable PointerVariable NumericTable StringTable PointerTable CommandProcedure letter 1 letter A letter followed by mix of letters digits CommandProcedureNoArgs digit _ 0 and underscores The name must be a CommandFunction built in command subroutine or CommandFunctionNoArgs external command Good e
456. s 4 15 controller port assignments 10 37 invalid port error A 8 ISA 4 7 modem 4 10 selecting 4 5 serial flow control 10 35 Index 8 OptoControl User s Guide S C setup failed error A 10 transmit and receive buffers 10 38 using redundant communication 4 19 Powerup chart 2 4 additional host ports 10 34 uses 3 9 powerup sequencing 10 24 printing chart commands instructions 6 23 chart graphics 6 20 chart instructions 9 8 page setup 6 21 subroutine graphics 6 20 problems See also troubleshooting Product Support Intro xxii programming examples 3 10 in OptoControl 3 1 pulse 10 2 commands instructions 10 3 Q queue errors B 2 R redundant communication 4 19 remote controller commands for 10 8 repetitive actions programming example 3 15 replacing 6 29 rounding 10 31 running strategy 1 24 6 10 running a strategy without using ioControl 6 10 S sample See example saving chart 6 3 7 15 strategy 6 3 subroutine 12 7 scanning event reactions in a group 5 39 searching 6 27 selecting block or text block 7 11 connection line 7 11 port 4 5 send error A 10 serial communication commands instructions 10 33 ports 10 34 troubleshooting communications A 8 setting hex display mode 2 21 showing toolbars 2 11 simulation commands 10 49 sizing columns in a dialog box 2 19 SNAP I 0 adding analog point 5 16 adding digital point 5 11 addressing 5 4 moving confi
457. s Disable Communication to PID Loop Disable Communication to Event Reaction Disable Event Reaction Group Enable Communication to O Unit Enable Communication to All 1 0 Units Enable Communication to Digital Point Enable Communication to Analog Point Enable Communication to All 1 0 Points Enable Communication to PID Loop Enable Communication to Event Reaction Enable Event Reaction Group Communication to All 1 0 Points Enabled Communication to All 1 0 Units Enabled I O Point Communication Enabled I O Unit Communication Enabled PID Loop Communication Enabled Event Reaction Communication Enabled Event Reaction Group Communication Enabled IVAL Set Analog Point IVAL Set Analog from Table IVAL Set Counter IVAL Set Quadrature Counter IVAL Set Digital Binary IVAL Set Frequency IVAL Set Off Latch IVAL Set On Latch IVAL Set Off Pulse IVAL Set On Pulse IVAL Set Off Totalizer IVAL Set On Totalizer IVAL Set Period IVAL Set PID Control Word IVAL Set PID Process Term IVAL Set TPO Percent IVAL Set TPO Period IVAL Turn Off IVAL Turn On The Disable commands disconnect the strategy from the real world device so that it can be tested without affecting field devices While the real world devices are disabled or if they don t exist the IVAL commands can be used for testing and simulation For details on individual commands see the OptoControl Command Reference or online Help OptoControl User s Guide 10 49 PROGRAMMIN
458. s Each chart should communicate with 1 0 on one port only For example if 1 0 is connected to Remote1 COM1 and Remote2 COM2 it is best to communicate to the O on Remote from Chart1 and the 1 0 on Remote2 from Chart2 Make sure Charts 1 and 2 are not being sequenced by the same master chart OptoControl User s Guide 3 27 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Handling I O Errors Efficiently If the controller encounters an error when communicating to 1 0 it disables communication to the 1 0 unit Disabling communication ensures that controller performance is maintained If an O timeout error occurred and communication with the 1 0 unit was not disabled throughput to the remaining 0 units would drop significantly while the controller tried to communicate If you use an I O error handling chart make sure there is a reasonable delay after each attempt to re enable communication to the 1 0 unit In addition for debugging purposes it is helpful if the error handling chart logs the error Investigate and correct the root cause of any I O unit communication error to maintain throughput 3 28 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 4 Working with Controllers Introduction This chapter shows you how to configure and work with controllers In This Chapter Configuring Controllers oo 4 1 Inspecting Controllers and Errors 4 19 Setting Up Controller Ports 0 0 0 0 4 15 Downloading Files to the Controller
459. s gt gt gt gt gt gt continuously once the gt 9 Connect the Drop Chips block to this new block by clicking the connection tool p in the toolbar Click once in the block the connection is coming from Drop Chips If you move your cursor around the screen you see a connection following your movements If you move the cursor to the top of Block 17 the connection becomes a short line from the bottom center of Drop Chips to the top center of Block 17 10 Click inside the upper part of Block 17 to complete the connection Click the right mouse button or press ESC to release the tool returning your cursor to an arrow Let s name Block 17 something more descriptive 11 Right click Block 17 and select Name from its pop up menu The Name Block dialog box appears x Cancel ha Help 12 Type Back to Speed ox right over the selected text then click OK 1 10 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START Ue The chart now looks like this The Powerup chart starts tthis chart gt 0o This chartruns gt gt gt gt gt gt continuously once the gt Now let s give the continue block its instructions 13 Double click the continue block to see a list of all the blocks in the chart xi Blockld Name Type ri Drop Chips Action 5 Drop Dough Action 2 Speed OK Condition 0 Start Conveyor Action 14 Select the Speed OK block by clicking it once and then c
460. s 10 44 Configuration Tips sc ehscactccs ts scccascessaete ceeds eseGats i oepcancsasetek nase aseucdacaeeeeenda euneaeiaaes 10 44 TURNING esos ceses cas deehsccuateschatensissiesiceedoscorsteeeastaniselselalinctaxsadis Sie useueltacsesaselzecs 10 45 Setting the Scan Rate soa cata secateasinnesetcea ct naeetes ivaestaten tach ptiaaraaendendanecbuceness 10 45 Determining the Loop Dead Time c ccceccsceccceseeceseseetestetesteteseeteseetesesteeseees 10 46 TUMA eenen e aces fn cs estos eee cee areca nea e date ok oes apheeeniaek uaeseece aces 10 46 Solving Tuning Problems Suc accoenaczetn tacked aca dees tduteetdeas ions Caah tc dane ueaccdec heads 10 46 Starting the Tuning Process for a New PID LOOP ccccesceecceeetetesteteseeees 10 47 Derivative ssc es cace scx scensesunsiec ie nbactcehctio nus rontapddetne ano aaaeamchiahiecmcaaaeaeactalaseeiaels 10 47 Tuning Graphs eck ses eect cts nannat iesin ee Ravsactactacecaunae E aE Ei 10 48 Simulation Commands occ aces cas nsionciens wtaslchacelnedahaecabaseetioteatsveniautauiaudiptatins ea cautaciasSestachachadds 10 49 Chapter 11 Using OptoScript ssiccstissicctisssisnsssuesivansdssssdaadsrssensesetaiveinntena 11 1 MSE erp te ec ale dbo AEREE AEN AARETE 11 1 In This Chapter tees eae tere weeetaec oy tas tccccoec ances bat aclaeneeeaeeaet candaeaaeaneect rates 11 1 PAIN DUC GI cyt eeaal classic Sex esd de dense T asta eels ER 11 1 When To ISH CRN sented ceslaececc ccd ndoa aca ecaadeaerdavtena dest vs
461. s a state you define that the I 0 unit can recognize The defined state can be a combination of values inputs and outputs Each time the event becomes true its corresponding reaction is executed once On a digital multifunction 1 0 unit for example any pattern of input and output states on and off can constitute an event On an analog I O unit an event could occur when an input channel attains a reading greater than a selected value Examples of reactions include turning on or off a set of outputs ramping an analog output or enabling or disabling other event reactions Event reactions are stored in each I O unit As soon as power is applied to the I O unit all event reactions for which scanning is enabled are scanned continuously in the same order in which they were configured in OptoControl Since each 0 unit can be configured with up to 256 event reactions complex tasks and sequences can be performed on an 1 0 unit For step by step instructions on configuring event reactions see page 5 32 Why Use Event Reactions e To reduce communication overhead between the I O unit and the controller OptoControl User s Guide 10 23 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS e To distribute control logic sequences to the 1 0 unit rather than concentrating them in the controller e To handle high speed logic functions more efficiently by distributing them to an I O unit e To increase the execution speed of a strategy in the controller Typical Ap
462. s an OptoScript block see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 11 25 for how to enter a command instruction For action or condition blocks continue with step 3 3 In the Instructions dialog box click where you want the instruction to be placed and then click Add 12 8 OptoControl User s Guide USING SUBROUTINES Ue The Add Instruction dialog box appears Add Instruction avait Toes 4 In the highlighted Instruction field enter the subroutine name or choose it using the drop down list or the Select button The subroutine command appears in the dialog box just as any command would and the prompts you entered when you configured the parameters appear also Add Instruction ariable_Increase_Notification All Valid Types me AV Vaid Types orans All Valid Types Chip_Level_Switch 5 Choose the Type and Name for each prompt from the drop down lists You can configure variables on the fly as you would with any command Remember that the Type was chosen when the parameters for the command were configured so your Type choices may be limited 6 When the Add Instruction dialog box is completed click OK 7 Click Close to close the Instructions dialog box and return to the chart The chart is now set up to call the subroutine OptoControl User s Guide 12 9 USING SUBROUTINES Viewing and Printing Subroutines Viewing Subroutines Since subroutines appear on the Strategy Tree
463. s before you click Apply any changes you made are lost 2 To save the current configuration of the 1 0 unit to its on board EEPROM click the SET button This option can be useful for reactivating event reactions and PID loops if power to the 1 0 unit is lost and then regained and communications with the controller are lost The following parameters are saved Analog Digital 1 0 module configuration I O module configuration Initial output settings Comm link watchdog time Comm link watchdog time The first 32 event reactions Temperature conversion type Input offset and gain settings PID loop parameters The first 16 event reactions 3 To reset saved parameters to their powerup default values click the Clear button 4 To change the 0 unit s current status click an arrow in the Enable field Then click Apply 5 42 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O a i Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled If you change it the background turns magenta until you click Apply 5 To display other I O elements click the type of 1 0 elements in the Show area Grayed out elements are not supported on the unit 6 To view an individual 0 point PID loop or event reaction highlight its name in the list e To add an 0 element to a watch window click Add Watch See page 5 50 e To open an inspection window to change an 1 0 element click View Then see the section on the following pages
464. s folder The new numeric variable is there 18 Save the changes you ve made by clicking the Save Strategy button jon the toolbar Click OK to save Now we re ready to download the strategy to a controller But first we have to tell OptoControl that we have a controller Configuring a Controller Up to this point we ve been able to play around in OptoControl without hardware Now it s time to configure a controller 1 Double click the Controllers folder on the Strategy Tree or click the Configure Controller button E on the toolbar 1 16 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START The Configure Controllers dialog box appears Configure Controllers Since we haven t configured a controller yet there are no controllers in the list 2 Click Add Select Controller xi PK Cancel _ 3 Click Add again to add a controller OptoControl User s Guide 1 17 QUICK START So The Select Connection Type dialog box appears Select Connection Type E xj Select type of connection to controllers C Direct Select a non network connection for fastest communication using ARCNET or serial C Etheret Connect to a controller via Ethernet C Server Connect to a controller located on another computer via an Opto 22 server on that computer lt Back Cancel 4 From this dialog box make choices and enter data based on your controller e f the controller is connected directly to
465. s that are set only on a strategy download To download a strategy that has already been compiled you must be in Debug mode Choose Controller Download Strategy The Download Progress dialog box appears and your strategy is downloaded Downloading Without Using OptoControl If you are creating strategies for users who do not have OptoControl on their systems for example if you are an integrator or OEM you can make a controller download file that can be downloaded to a controller using just OptoTerm or a DOS batch file This one download file is built for a specific controller but can also be downloaded to other similar controllers It contains everything OptoContro would download including per inc and crn files controller specific files and initialization information In most cases you will want the downloaded strategy to be saved to flash memory and to start automatically autorun when power is cycled to the controller Before you create the download file follow the steps in Saving a Strategy to Flash on page 6 4 This information will become part of the download file To autorun the strategy follow instructions in the controller s installation guide for setting the autorun jumper Creating the Controller Download cdf File With the strategy open in OptoControl in Configure mode right click the name of the controller in the Strategy Tree and choose Compile Controller Download File from the pop up menu You can al
466. s to use Delay mSec or Delay Sec To allow time for the state of an input to change before it is checked again For example a delay could give an operator time to release a button before the state of the button is rechecked or allow time for an alarm state to change before rechecking To let a chart give up the remainder of its time slice when its logic does not need to run constantly For more information on using delays in this way see Increasing Efficiencies in Your Strategy on page 3 25 Comment Commands Comment Single Line and Comment Block commands are used in two entirely different ways Comment Single Line enters a comment to help explain a block or an instruction within a block Usually block names and comments within instructions are sufficient but you can use Comment Single Line if you need more room for explanations Comment Block comments out instructions In other words it tells the strategy to temporarily ignore certain instructions within a block It can be useful in debugging or for saving work when a strategy is temporarily changed To use it place one Comment Block command at the beginning of the area you want to ignore and place another Comment Block command at the end of the area If you do not OptoControl User s Guide 10 11 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS place the second Comment Block command all the remaining instructions in that block are ignored Areas that are commented out app
467. s to a string variable you can use any command for the pointer that you would normally use for a string variable such as Append String to String or Convert String to Float OptoControl User s Guide 10 41 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Pointer Tables A pointer table contains a list of objects of different types that can be pointed to For example the object at index 0 could be a chart the object at index 1 a smart digital unit and the object at index 2 a string variable An example of using a pointer table for indexing is shown on page 3 19 When you create a pointer table no initial values are set You can use the Move to Pointer Table command to set individual values in the table To set all initial values at once you can create an initialization file and download it with your strategy For more information see Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables during Strategy Download on page 8 9 A pointer table element cannot be directly referenced It must be copied to a pointer variable first using the command Move From Pointer Table Element Once it is in the pointer variable you can reference it as you would any object of that type For example if index 3 in a pointer table points to a counter input use Move From Pointer Table Element to put the counter input address in a pointer variable Then you can use any command for the pointer variable that you would normally use with a counter input such as Start Counter or Cle
468. s your e mail program a new message automatically appears addressed to Product Support with the version file attached 5 If you use Microsoft Outlook add comments to the new message and click Send 6 If you use another e mail program attach the Version bd file to an e mail message and address the message to support opto22 com along with an explanation of the problem you re experiencing Problems with Permissions in Windows NT When you set up controllers on a computer running the Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 2000 operating systems typically you are using the computer with top level administrator privileges If someone later uses this same computer to run a FactoryFloor application but logs in to the computer with lower level non administrator privileges the FactoryFloor application may not recognize controllers that have been previously configured OptoControl User s Guide A 15 If this problem occurs you can modify the Windows permissions to let specific users access previously configured controllers without having administrator access This is done using the Registry Editor utility WARNING Use the Windows Registry Editor carefully It is strongly recommended that you make a backup copy of your Windows Registry before continuing with this procedure Without a backup copy if you delete the wrong properties and cannot return the Registry to its original state application and system files can become unusable and will have
469. saceecsenidestzcniiectscsateacacteeticeatians enuciededecsesiseeue 1 1 itrodUCtiON eck E ce acl acide can eee 1 1 In This Chapter ec arte dee cat cee etl tan tas erence asta oclacsacheoare pheentanee eel ame amet 1 1 Opening the Strategy ches cet eto denice cctxetecetbs ee dacdsieddbusaneatinedacmeanaadh lt steshion sicecieliwtsianetaataee 1 1 Saving the Strategy iernare aa ENA AR 1 3 Examining the Strategy catches asst Sa cesieatctacintantiedtcs ep naicernesslnouaswnloc tatasedoaiestidegt ons 1 5 The Strategy Tree acs scesceczactacaxtantsctsctadencueechachecsschacucgadeasedsadentesheseeasdslacrnasbactestetbensess 1 5 Docking the Strategy Tz skackstttic1esnesfedzadian saasaidoacadquiaed cnuladinbdeinaueuedluaaanass 1 5 Opening IVAN see ceca ecg sacs s2cisecessceestaccaeucheacenoucsubs ie cute scea eeoednceanstaienenanaiaestnmamunanes 1 6 USAIN GY srs nessa fadlstoaesmetianisdcanansdbashvatunacttes aetaxn eed edSes cnstnscatsenseiadiatbstiand 1 8 Adding a Command otc ccd ct dee cue aver eeectin cin nnd tbethasbebsctasaicpadtsshdindendentictetiottatastss 1 12 Configuring a Controller a ica wpacriecadcas ice cei lai daca ee ava eapaetlsnecensanicenl ace 1 16 Compiling the SW AN IY ato wn ttancascetes doe seeansenousce ite dadintin hac aynon oni inletomnalamedanstts 1 22 Running the RN gated od alecee dr ssec tien cStactaptedh atte te nasal on codnslonace erecta eeriaetaaactaniaanseds 1 24 Stepping Through the Chart caiizaczctacdercossnncsecteanectedsssatsassconn
470. sancassadenssnisearessacteaccreasnennssaanseasanenns Index 1 xviii OptoControl User s Guide OPTO 22 Welcome to OptoControl Welcome to OptoControl Opto 22 s visual control language for Microsoft Windows systems and a part of the Opto 22 FactoryFloor suite of software OptoControl makes it easy to write control applications with little or no programming experience If you know how to design a control application and can draw some flowcharts to describe it you already know the basics of OptoControl At the same time OptoControl provides a complete and powerful set of commands as well as OptoScript code for all your industrial control needs About This Guide This user s guide not only teaches you how to use OptoControl but also provides programming instruction and tips The separate OptoControl Command Reference describes in detail all OptoControl programming commands or instructions This guide assumes that you are already familiar with Microsoft Windows on your personal computer including how to use a mouse standard commands and menu items to open save and close files If you are not familiar with Windows or your PC refer to the documentation from Microsoft and your computer manufacturer Here s what is in this user s guide Chapter 1 Quick Start A short tutorial designed to get you using OptoControl as quickly as possible The tutorial leads you through a sample strategy that you can manipulate download
471. sary which defines terms for all FactoryFloor products Online versions Adobe Acrobat format of these and other FactoryFloor documents are available from the Help menu in your FactoryFloor application To view a document select Help Manuals and then choose a document from the submenu OptoControl Command Reference contains detailed information about each command instruction available in OptoControl OptoControl User s Guide xxi So e wo quick reference cards OptoControl Commands and Beginner s Guide to OptoControl Commands are located in the front pocket of the OptoControl Command Reference e FactoryFloor resources are also available on the Opto 22 Web site at factoryfloor opto22 com You can conveniently access this and other sections of the Opto 22 Web site using the Help menu in your FactoryFloor application Select Help Opto 22 on the Web and then select an online resource from the submenu Product Support If you have any questions about FactoryFloor you can call fax or e mail Opto 22 Product Support Phone 800 TEK OPTO 835 6786 951 695 3080 NOTE Email messages Hours are Monday through Friday and phone calls to 7 a m to 5 p m Pacific Time Opto 22 Product Support are grouped together and Fax 951 695 3017 answered in the order Email support opto22 com ses Be nee ane priority Opto 22 Web site support opto22 com When calling for technical support be prepared to provide the following informati
472. scriptive name for the port All characters are valid B Enter the number of times you want OptoControl to reattempt communications Any integer from zero to 255 is valid the default 1 is a good choice It indicates a total of two attempts at communication C Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in B Any positive integer is valid the default of 1000 is a good choice D Select the device type from the drop down list If the PC has only one PCI ARCNET card its ID number is 1 If the PC has multiple PCI ARCNET cards use the PCI20 Locator utility to determine the ID number See the online file FactoryFloor PCI ARCNET Addendum for instructions E Enter the network address node for the card The address must be unique on the network Do not use address 0 which is a reserved ARCNET address F Click Finish and skip to Finishing a Direct Connection on page 4 12 4 8 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring a COM Port If you chose COM Port in the Port Selection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure COM Port Port Name PC COM Por 1 A Retries 7 Timeout msec 2000 o COM Pott ho D Baud Rate fze400 E Protocol A Enter a descriptive name for the port All characters ar
473. scroll around within each view to compare parts or to copy and paste elements Splitting is especially useful for large charts OptoControl User s Guide 2 15 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Split bars appear at the top of the right scroll bar and at the left of the bottom scroll bar Oven_Inspection_Control OY x z Split bar is out of spec set oven temperature to 200 degrees Split bar fiooz x 1 To divide a window into two vertical views double click the split bar at the left of the bottom scroll bar or click and drag the split bar to the right The window is split into two vertical views of the same chart or subroutine Oven_Inspection_Control Joj x Split bar 2 To scroll in any view click in the view to make it active then use the scroll bars as usual You can also zoom in the active view See page 2 17 for more information on zooming 2 16 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL 3 To return the window to full view double click the split bar again or click and drag it back to the left of the scroll bar 4 To divide a window into two horizontal views double click the split bar at the top of the right scroll bar or click and drag the split bar down The window is split into two horizontal views of the same chart or subroutine JO x Oven_Inspection_Control esa eka a Spee is out of spec set oven Bosh Er ia aE ean Gs an rai Ds temperature to 200 Me hPa w
474. scwsenasnacwstaatsaeieeecaed esa ohcansnsneitidettssnctautscts chs gizeednsdmstestsaihett 2 14 Splitting a Chart VV IW nirastancseccescanpabeniaraossesdericeancesseene i tacatucgnesebreeioetaceatecs 2 15 Zooming in a Chart or Subroutine Window c ccceccseseecesceeeseeteseeceseetesssteteseeteseees 2 17 Redrawing a Chart WindoW acco nic ctuactasieceancerces vaxcaesacased oataedableedidcnacedectcatdatdandecdandanavedest 2 19 Changing Column Width in a Dialog BOX stccsciececisitstscshapcisecsunsindenstlenpinanenopadenacss 2 19 Sorting Data in a Dialog IK cots axincis one ses coats sta ered ctasiac tour tversessbokencatiatincivascdsaiacteelaeiate 2 20 Customizing OptoControl for Your Needs ceccseeceeseeseeseeeseeseeseeseeeeseeseseseeseeeseteaneens 2 21 Setting Decimal Binary or Hex Display MOd c ccecccecesestesestesestesestetesteteseees 2 21 Setting Hex String VIGW lt cccndcsssensatancedslecnassctaxses osclacisratsaseccndacearsdutiadtansteandatdctstaxds 2 22 iv OptoControl User s Guide EE ee Customizing Toolbars acces acsnupceariencaacetdatssdtetanctiacedtatsaniasaseaasnaertenehessecuebdctncasopar beaten 2 22 Choosing Toolbars for Your Screen Resolution ccccccccccesesteseetesesteseseeseseens 2 23 Moving WONG occas carta dcezasecrentiarutacbr een tvecteaseanacannsceedetleonnatane itesanciwaceuestatavess 2 23 Moving and Deleting Buttons ccccceseesesseseesescesescsseseeseseeseseessscsneseeneseane 2 2
475. se Minimal Debug or Full Debug Changing Debugger Speed Before you enter Debug mode you may want to consider changing debugger speed Depending on the number of charts and windows open in OptoControl and depending on other processing your computer is doing at the same time you may find that running the debugger affects the computer s or the controller s performance of other tasks If necessary you can slow down the debugger by increasing the time delay between debugging calls to the controller therefore leaving more processing time for other tasks To change debugger speed follow these steps 1 With the strategy in Configure mode choose Configure OptoControl Options OptoControl User s Guide 6 11 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 2 In the OptoControl Options dialog box click the Debugger tab OptoControl Options x Workspace Debugger Debugger Performance P ee eee L I Set Hex Display Mode Cancel Help 3 Click and drag the slider to the speed you want The default speed is shown in the figure above Since performance varies depending on your hardware and software you may need to experiment to find the most efficient speed Pausing a Chart You can temporarily stop any running chart by pausing it When you pause a chart it finishes the instruction it was executing then stops at the next block To pause the chart in the active window click the Pause Chart button n Or press F7 or select Debug
476. sets A 2 Strategy Problems i a cacsnndeccatnatp ncaa absctscaanasinscnsdusub caatenosnaneasbeat oak adswetectantechiatinse sees cmnsebicesine A 3 lf You Cannot Delete an MOM cacciccccsscssiscesstscesccsseasseseasesdetacactactasssusdecseassuseescssetasacsucasans A 3 If the Strategy Is from a Different OptoControl Version ccccccsesteesteeeteeteeseeee A 3 If You Have Memory Problems c cccccsccesccceseeseseecesestesestesestesssessseeseeteseetesesneseeee A 4 Are You Upgrading Controller Firmware c cccccccccscseseesesceseseeseseeseseeseseeneseane A 4 Do You Use Online Mode uu cecseeccsesessesesceseetesescessseessseessseeteseeteseecesesneseseess A 4 Checking Communication with the Controller ccccccscescsssseeesseeteseetsseetesesnesesnesesneees A 5 Resolving General Communication Problems cccccecescesssceesteesesteseeteseeteseeteesnesesneees A 6 Matching OptoControl Configuration to the Real World c cccscceseeeeeeteseeen A 6 Resolving Timeout Errors 29 or 29 0 cccsccscscesescesessssesesessssessssessssesesetsesstsestseeeseeeens A 6 Resolving Old Response to New Command Errors 124 A 7 Changing the Retry Value to Zero oo cscccssescscesestesescsssecssssesssseesseessseeeseesesssneseseeees A 7 Errors Specific to a Network ccr tcc ecas edar ina deat ice ctylactarntlcdin dealer eehartonsonldaaceieldeas A 8 Resolving Serial Communication Problems cs ccscecseeesseeeeeeesteeeeeeeeet
477. side of the box to see all the information The path filename and reference count how many times the strategy refers to the subroutine are shown for each subroutine Printing Subroutines For steps to print a subroutine s graphics see Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics on page 6 20 To view and print instructions in the subroutine s blocks see Viewing and Printing Instructions on page 6 23 12 10 OptoControl User s Guide APPENDIX A OptoControl Troubleshooting This appendix provides general tips for resolving problems you may encounter while running OptoControl or communicating with your hardware If you are having trouble with permissions in Windows NT see page A 15 For information about types of errors and lists of error codes see Appendix B OptoControl Errors How to Begin Troubleshooting You ve built your strategy but now you get errors when you try to download it or it won t run properly How do you begin to figure out what s wrong The problem may be in communication with the controller in communication between the controller and 1 0 in a command or in the strategy logic Following are some steps to help you discover the cause 1 Read Any Error Message Box If an error message box appears on the computer running OptoControl it s probably an OptoControl Error Here s an example of an OptoControl error message OptoControl A N Timeout No response Possible cause bad cable bad ad
478. slice it starts where it left off in the middle of Chart D in this example Increasing Efficiencies in Your Strategy A third way to optimize PC to Controller throughput is to increase efficiency in condition block loops If the condition block continually loops waiting for the condition to be true the entire time slice for the chart is used up However you can build in a slight delay by using the command Delay mSec with a value of one This command causes the chart to wait one millisecond before checking the condition again and the rest of the chart s time slice is given up while it waits OptoControl User s Guide 3 25 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY The following graphic shows two conditional loops In the one on the left the entire time slice Is used up waiting for the condition to become true In the example on the right however the delay allows the controller to run other tasks while waiting for the condition to become true Condition_Delay frooz 7 Assuming we have used all three of these methods for optimizing throughput the task queue now looks quite different from the one on page 3 24 The host task gets a much higher proportion of the time Sample Task Queue After Optimizing Running 2500 usec Host Task Priority 5 Interrupt chart floats in the queue Running Master Chart Interrupt Chart Suspended 500 usec ca
479. so choose Compile Compile Controller Download File The file is created in the same folder as the strategy with a cdf extension and a filename consisting of the strategy s name and the controller s name for example MyStrategy MyController cdf 6 8 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Once the controller download file is created it can be downloaded using either OptoTerm or a DOS batch file you create Downloading the cdf File using OptoTerm 1 Click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs Opto22 FactoryFloor OptoUtilities OptoTerm iix File Tools Configure View Help Controllers Cookie Controller SNAP LCM4 SNAP LCSX Number of Controllers 3 2 Right click the name of the controller you want to download the file to 3 In the pop up menu choose Download In the submenu choose Controller Download File I x File to Download FO Browse Cancel 4 Enter the path and filename of the cdf file or click the Browse button and navigate to it When the filename appears in the File to Download field click OK The file is downloaded to the controller and a dialog box shows its progress OptoControl User s Guide 6 9 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Downloading the cdf File Using a DOS Batch File If you do not want your end user to have to use OptoTerm you can create a DOS batch file to launch OptoTerm in the background and download the cdf file In addition to download
480. st of commands As you typed the first command that matched the pattern you entered would be filled in automatically For example if you really wanted to enter Absolute Value you would start typing abs 1 12 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START Ue Another way to add a command is to click the down arrow just to the left of the Select button You could scroll through the resulting list of commands to find the right one The third way to enter a command is the one we ll use here 4 Click Select x Groups Instructions Analog Point Chart Add Communication 1 0 Arecosine Communication Network Arcsine Communication Serial Arctangent Controller Clamp Float Table Element Digital Point Clamp Float Variable Event Reaction Clamp Integer 32 Table Element 170 Unit Clamp Integer 32 Variable Logical Complement Cosine Miscellaneous Decrement Variable PID Divide Pointers Generate Random Number Simulation Hyperbolic Cosine String Hyperbolic Sine Subroutines x Hyperbolic Tangent x Cancel Help Command Heb All OptoControl command groups are listed on the left and commands in the highlighted group are listed on the right The command we want has something to do with increasing a counter Counting sounds like math so let s try the Mathematical group 5 Click Mathematical on the left to highlight it then scroll down the list on the right until you find the command Increment Variable Click it once Select Instructi
481. state for the point when the strategy is run click Yes and choose the state Off or On To leave the point in the state it was before click No G Manual output modules on digital multifunction 1 0 units only To set a Watchdog click Yes and choose On or Off from the drop down list H Select whether you want communication to this I O point enabled or disabled Enabled is the default Leave at 0 Security levels are not used except with a G4LC32 controller which has front panel access 5 When you have completed the fields click OK The new point is added Adding an Analog I O Point Some dialog boxes differ for configuring SNAP and non SNAP 1 0 points Follow steps carefully 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the 1 0 Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree The Configure 1 0 Units dialog box appears Configure 1 0 Units x Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc SNAP Analog Unit B3000 Snap Analog Remotel 2 Disabled D SNAP_Digital_Unit_A B3000 Snap Digital Remote 0 Disabled 0 Modify 1 0 Points PID Loops Event Reactions 2 2 Highlight the I O unit the points are on and click 1 0 Points The Configure 1 0 Points dialog box appears 3 If you are using a non SNAP 1 0 unit double click the channel you want to use In the Add Module dialog box choose the module type and then the exact module from the lists Click OK Skip to
482. step 8 5 16 OptoControl User s Guide Module icon Expand or collapse points on the module by clicking the or sign in the box Points 7 WORKING WITH I O 4 lf you are using a SNAP 1 0 unit notice the small module icons in the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box In this example a digital unit has already been configured and takes up the first two module positions Configure 170 Points Type e3000 Snap Analog B3000 B3000 HA Used by Snap digital 01 Used by Snap digital 02 Not Used 03 Not Used 04 Not Used 05 Not Used 06 Not Used 07 Not Used Bm Ea Bele Modify Delete Move Tic NOTE This example shows a non Ethernet SNAP I O unit On an Ethernet unit both digital and analog points are on the same unit so you can configure them at the same time The following steps apply to analog points for both Ethernet and non Ethernet SNAP 1 0 units 5 Double click the number of the analog module s position on the rack See the diagram on page 5 5 for help 6 In the Add Module dialog box choose the module type and then the exact module from the lists Click OK 7 In the Configure I O Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it Notice that the module icon is color coded to reflect the type of module being configured blue for analog input green for analog output Configure 170 Points Joxi 120 Unit
483. strategies you must include the subroutine in the strategy before you can use it 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode double click the Subroutines Included folder on the Strategy Tree or click the Include Subroutines button on the toolbar or select Configure Subroutine Included The Subroutine Files dialog box appears listing all subroutines currently included in the strategy The example below shows no subroutines currently included x Name Ref Count Add Remove Cancel Help OptoControl User s Guide 12 7 USING SUBROUTINES 2 Click Add Look in My Strategies ex EE ww Files of type OptoControl Subroutine Files csb Cancel Z 3 Navigate to the directory containing the subroutine you want to add and double click the subroutine Subroutine Files Cookies x Name Ref Count Add C Program Files Opto22 0 ptoControl 41 Examples My Strategies Subroutines ariabl Remove 4 When the full path to the subroutine appears in the Subroutine Files dialog box click OK The new subroutine appears in the Strategy Tree in the Subroutines Included folder Adding a Subroutine Instruction You use a subroutine just like an OptoControl command by adding the subroutine instruction to a block in the chart 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode open the chart that will use the subroutine 2 Double click the block that will call the subroutine If it i
484. strategy after making a program change Pointer variables pointer tables and timers are not allowed to be persistent but all other variables and tables can be Persistent variables cannot be configured on the fly In the Strategy Tree the names of persistent variables are shown in green 8 4 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES as if Literals A literal is used like a variable but it is constant data that never changes A literal has no variable name only a fixed value which may be a floating point number an integer or a string Adding Numeric String and Pointer Variables 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode click the Configure Variables button 4 on the toolbar or choose Configure Variables The Configure Variables dialog box opens Configure Yariables Ea Scope Global Type WTEICREIE Ses Y Type Initial Value Ref Count Description Day_of_the_W Integer 32 0 3 Humidity Float 0 2 Modify Status_Trashcan Integer 32 0 1 Time_of_Day Integer 32 0 3 Delete Timer Down Timer 2 Close Help This dialog box lists all the variables in the strategy that are of the type shown in the Type field 2 In the Type drop down list choose the type of variable you want to configure 3 To have data in the variable be persistent select Persistent in the Scope drop down list You must choose Persistent as the scope before creating the variable existing variables cannot be changed to be
485. strategy folder the instructions are available for all flowcharts in the strategy How to Include the File Whether you include the XID file with the subroutine or with the strategy the procedure is the same Each strategy and each subroutine automatically includes an Ext Instructions Files Included folder Follow these steps to include the file OptoControl User s Guide 6 31 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 1 Open the subroutine or the strategy Click the External Instructions button on the toolbar or choose Configure External Instruction Includes The External Instruction Files dialog box appears External Instruction Files Cookies x Name Ref Count Add Cancel Help 2 To add an XID file click Add Navigate to the directory containing the external instruction file you wish to add and double click the file When the path and file name appear in the External Instruction Files dialog box click OK Downloading the Associated Forth File Remember that if you include an external instruction file you must make sure the file containing the Forth word s implementation is downloaded to the controller Do so by including it in the list of files to be downloaded before the strategy run file Keep in mind that download options are specific to each controller 1 In Configure or Online mode click the Configure Controllers button E on the toolbar or choose Configure gt Controllers 2 In the Configure Controllers dia
486. strings but only to a certain point For example in an assignment statement strings can be added together like this strDate strMonth strDay strYear It would certainly be nice to use the same kind of string addition in a procedure call TransmitStringViaSerialPort strMonth strDay strYear nPort However due to the current abilities of the kernel this type of string addition inside a function call is not possible OptoControl User s Guide F 7 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE a OptoScript Lexical Reference Token Syntax Legend Tokens are the smallest unit that the OptoScript compiler processes bold character parenthesis brackets opt subscript no subscript 0 subscript 1 subscript 1 subscript specific character ka letter any character content is treated as a unit any character a through z set of possible items upper or lower case item is optional digit one of 0123456789 item is not allowed non zero digit one of 123456789 0 or more items may be chosen hex digit one of 0123456789AB one item must be chosen one or more items must be chosen Literals and Names Token Name Int32Literal Token Syntax 0 xX lhex digit1 CDEFabcdef Comments Hexadecimal Integer 32 bit Good examples 0x12AB OX12aB 0x0 Bad examples x123ABC 0123ABC 0 non zero digitl digitO Decimal Integer 32 bit Good examples 0 123 Bad example
487. t 32 768 P If Host is selected at M Specify the highest possible setpoint value Default 32 767 Q Specify the gain term P to be used in the PID calculation This value can range between 32 768 and 32 767 but must not be zero The default is one R Specify the integral term I to be used in the PID calculation This value can range between zero and 32 767 The default is zero Note The product of the scan rate and the integral term must be less than or equal to 3 932 100 S Specify the derivative term D to be used in the PID calculation This value can range between zero and 32 767 The default is zero T Select whether you want communication to this PID loop enabled or disabled U Leave at 0 Security levels are not used except with a G4LC32 controller which has front panel access OptoControl User s Guide 5 27 5 28 WORKING WITH 1 0 7 lf you chose Host as the Input source and 1 0 Point as the Setpoint source complete the following fields Add PID Loop x Name Description Mode Auto x Options Scan Rate fo 1 sec Input Host x Initial Value 0 A B _ _ Low Scale 32768 High Scale 32767 C Output Fluid_Output Max Chg Rate a000 Lower Clamp f 2000 Upper Clamp 2000 F luid_Output zj D Setpoint Gain fi Integral fo Derivative jo IV Enable Security jo Cancel Help A If Host is selected as Input source Spe
488. t 5 1 PID loops 5 25 server connection to controller 4 14 subroutine parameters 12 4 rs i table variables 8 7 variables 8 5 connection line changing color or size 7 3 7 13 definition 7 3 deleting 7 13 drawing 7 7 moving 7 12 selecting 7 11 constant See literal continue block command instruction 9 8 configuring 9 8 definition 2 5 7 3 control characters adding to string 10 16 control concepts 2 3 control engine configuring in iolerminal 6 10 download file creating 6 8 control system example 2 2 controller active controller 4 18 archiving strategies 4 22 changing configuration 4 17 changing the active controller 4 18 commands instructions 10 8 configuring 4 1 configuring ports 4 15 definition 2 3 deleting from strategy 4 18 downloading additional strategy files 4 24 downloading firmware 4 26 inspecting 4 19 port assignments 10 37 remote commands 10 8 restoring archived strategies 4 23 testing communication A 5 timeout error A 6 troubleshooting communication A 6 converting Boolean true to standard true 10 33 copying block 7 13 chart 7 15 command instruction 9 7 connection line 7 13 OptoControl User s Guide Index 3 I O configuration 5 24 text block 7 13 count variable programming example 3 15 counter 10 2 commands instructions 10 2 programming example 3 14 CRC commands 10 8 creating flowchart 7 1 strategy 6 1 subroutine 12 2 toolbar 2 25 w
489. t Used 04 Pump_1_Switch 05 Pump_2_Switch 5 In the Points area of the Move Point To dialog box highlight the location you are moving the point to Then click OK You return to the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box and the point has been moved Moving a Non SNAP I O Point Use these steps to move any point other than a SNAP point For SNAP points see page 5 21 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode double click the 1 0 Units folder on the Strategy Tree 2 In the Configure I O Unit dialog box highlight the unit the point is on and click 1 0 Points 5 22 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O The Configure 0 Points dialog box opens Up and down arrow keys Configure 1 0 Points OF x 10 Unit Digital 10_Unit 7 Type a4 Digital Multifunction Name Features Type Enable Add 01 Dough_Dispense_Valve Digital Output None Enabled 02 Dough_Level_Switch Digital Input None Enabed_ Modify 03 Chip_Dispense_Valve Digital Output None Enable 04 Chip_Level_Switch Digital Input None Delete Inspection_Pas s Fail Switch Digittal Input Reject_Valve Digital Output None Enabled 5 F STAP Diaitsl lamuk ane Enable Moye To 3 Highlight the point you want to move To move it to the next empty channel on the same unit use the up or down arrow keys 4 To move the 0 point to a channel on a different 1 0 unit highlight it and click Move To Move Poi
490. t left opens when you open a strategy and closing it is equivalent to closing the strategy The Strategy Tree shows you all the elements of your strategy controllers subroutines external instruction files flowcharts variables and 1 0 units and points Variables shown in green are persistent The Strategy Tree works just like Windows Explorer you can expand or collapse folders to view or hide what is in them You can easily see what is in your strategy open elements to change them by double clicking them or open a pop up menu by right clicking on an element Each element in the strategy is represented by a button shown just to the left of its name The table below shows the buttons and what they represent Button Description H Controller E Integer 32 Table a Subroutine Integer 64 Table External Action String Table External Condition Chart Pointer Table Analog I O Unit Integer 32 Variable Digital I O Unit Integer 64 Variable Float Variable Mixed I O Unit ae Analog Input Point iil Down Timer Variable It Digital Input Point iit Up Timer Variable Jun Ord Analog Output Point String Variable Digital Output Point OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL rs Button Description Button Description 4h Float Table El Event Reaction F Pointer Variable me PID Loop Windows and Dialog Boxes in OptoControl Windows and dialog
491. t on Download option component of the run file Strategy configuration information Temporary OptoControl strategy database file OptoControl strategy database lock file Persistent variable definitions Controller download file for special circumstances See Downloading Without Using OptoControl on page 8 Chart OptoControl User s Guide C 1 lt chart name gt ccd Compiled chart code component of the run file lt chart name gt con Online compiled chart code lt filename gt wth Watch window file you name the file lt filename gt otg Exported 0 configuration file you name the file lt strategy date time gt zip Strategy archive file automatically named see Archiving Strategies on page 6 5 for file name formats Files Associated with a Subroutine lt subroutine name gt csb Subroutine lt subroutine name gt ini Subroutine configuration information lt subroutine name gt scd Compiled subroutine component of the run file lt subroutine name gt csb Subroutine lock file Files in the OptoControl Directory lt XXxx gt def Object definition files instructions 1 0 points 1 0 units and event reactions G4LC32 trm File containing Forth code required to use the G4LC32 controller s front display Init txt Sample for user defined table initialization OptoCtrl exe OptoControl executable file OptoCtrl GID ail help support file created when you launch the help ile OptoCtrl hlp OptoControl help file
492. t the command 2 Press CTRL V The command is pasted OptoControl User s Guide 9 7 USING COMMANDS Configuring a Continue Block Continue blocks do only one thing jump to another block Thus the only information you need to provide in a continue block is the name of the block to jump to 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the continue block you want to configure You can also click the block click the right mouse button and choose Detail from the pop up menu The Select Continue Block Destination dialog box appears listing all blocks in the chart Blockld Name Tye 28 Between 6 7 a Condition 0 Block 0 Action 8 Humidity lt 100 Condition 1 Read Hygrometer Action g Sprinklers Off Condition 42 Sunday Condition 10 Timer expired Condition 3 Turn sprinklers off Action 2 Turn sprinklers Action 5 Wait 5 sec Action 6 Wait 60 sec Action 7 Wednesday Condition Cancel Hep 2 Click the destination block and click OK Viewing and Printing Chart Instructions To view or print commands in a chart see Viewing and Printing Instructions on page 6 23 Any commands that are commented out using the Comment Block instruction will appear in gray 9 8 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Programming with Commands Introduction Commands or instructions in OptoControl are roughly grouped by function This chapter tells you what you
493. t the new event reaction p 5 Add a second event reaction to the same 1 0 unit and configure it in the Add Event Reaction dialog box as follows a Enter Stop_Motor as the name of the event reaction 10 26 OptoControl User s Guide PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS b Tab down to the Event Type field leaving intervening fields at their defaults c Under Event Type select MOMO Match d When the Configure Mask button becomes available click it to open the Configure MOMO dialog box e Set the MOMO for Stop_Motor to On and press ENTER f Tab down to the Reaction Type field and select Set MOMO Outputs g Click the Configure Mask button for the reaction to open the Configure MOMO dialog box again h Set the MOMO for the Motor_Run output to Off and press ENTER i Click OK or press ENTER in the Add Event Reaction dialog box 6 Use OptoControl in Debug mode to download and run this strategy to activate these event reactions Enhancements You can enhance the event reactions in the previous example by e Requiring the opposite input to be off e Requiring the Motor_Run output to be in the opposite state Changing Event Criteria on the Fly from the Controller You can use the command Transmit Receive Mistic 1 0 Hex String with CRC to send special commands to 1 0 units See command details in the Mistic Analog and Digital Command Reference Opto 22 form number 270 This command allows you to take advantage of the additional eve
494. t to detect an ARCNET card and install a network communication driver on the card This driver conflicts with the Opto 22 drivers If the ARCNET card is auto detected and a driver is installed the ARCNET card must be deleted from the Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT network setup The Opto 22 drivers require exclusive access to the ARCNET card Resolving Send Errors 33 A send error indicates that a controller is not able to receive a command from the PC It can be caused by an unplugged communication cable a controller that s been turned off a controller address mismatch a wrong host port selection or a host port not enabled and so on A send error is a common error for ARCNET it can also happen when you are using a modem ARCNET checks for the communication destination before sending a message If it can t find the destination it doesn t send the message and you get a send error Resolving Port Setup Failed Errors 102 To resolve Port setup failed errors either reboot your machine or change your card configuration to use a different port or memory address Under Windows NT you need to reboot whenever you change port configurations A message box will appear as a reminder to reboot after changing the port setting ARCNET cards won t work at some addresses due to conflicts with hardware or with other drivers Try changing the jumper configuration on your ARCNET card to use a different port address A utility c
495. table element should be set initially If you leave this field blank the initial values are set to zero To set individual initial values for each table element see Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables during Strategy Download on page 8 9 8 8 OptoControl User s Guide USING VARIABLES as i 6 Click OK The Add Variable dialog box closes and the new table variable appears in the Configure Variables dialog box Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables during Strategy Download In the Add Variables dialog box you can set all table elements to one initial value If you want to set each individual table element to its own value however you need to create an initialization file and download it with your strategy In addition to setting initial values for table elements sometimes It is easier to initialize all variables during strategy download using an initialization file Creating the Initialization File A sample initialization file INIT TXT is provided in the OptoControl directory Default location is C Opto22 FactoryFloor OptoCtr Examples InitVariables You can open this file with a text editor to see the proper syntax for each initialization entry and modify it as necessary for your strategy Following are some examples of the text you might use NOTE Variable names are case sensitive and can include both upper and lower case letters Variables Example To set initial values of 123 for the variable I
496. ted that is it has no filtering If the input signal is noisy and the derivative value is greater than zero the input value must be filtered See Input Filtering on page 10 45 for details If the slope of the input signal has remained unchanged for the last two scans the derivative has no effect Judging by the change in direction of the input the derivative contributes an appropriate value to the output that is consistent with where the input will be at the next scan if it continues at its current rate of change The derivative is very useful in loops with a long dead time and long time constants To disable it set it to zero Integral Derivative Interaction Integral and derivative can try to move the output in opposite directions When this is the case the derivative should be large enough to overcome the integral Since the derivative is looking ahead based on the change in slope it has a bigger picture than the integral does This interaction can be observed when the input is below the setpoint and is rising fast The integral tries to increase the output which only makes things worse while the derivative tries to decrease the output The derivative does this because at the current rate of change of the input there will be an input overshoot if the output is increased Therefore the derivative needs to be large enough to counteract the integral when necessary Configuration Tips Gain A gain value other than zero
497. tegy database by following these steps 1 Click in the Strategy Tree to make it the active window 2 Press CTRL R 3 Choose Compile Compile All 4 Choose File Save All The strategy database is rebuilt and the reference counts should be correct If the Strategy Is from a Different OptoControl Version Strategies created or opened in a newer version of OptoControl are different from strategies created in an older version That means that if you open a strategy in OptoControl 3 0 for example you cannot go back later and open it in OptoControl 2 2 The file format will have been changed CAUTION Before you open any existing strategy in a new OptoControl version make a backup copy of the strategy in case you need to go back to it for any reason When you open a strategy created in an older version of OptoControl you receive a File Format Change warning message If you click Yes in the message box and open the strategy its format is permanently upgraded to the newer version If you try to open a strategy created in a newer version of OptoControl you receive an error message that says OptoCdb Object s in CDB file have version number greater than that which is recognized by this version of OptoCdb To open a strategy with a newer file format you must upgrade to the newer version of OptoControl OptoControl User s Guide A 3 If You Have Memory Problems Are You Upgrading Controller Firmware If you are upgrading co
498. tempts at communication C Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many times as specified in B Any positive integer is valid For ARCNET 1 2 seconds 1 000 2 000 milliseconds is a good starting point D Select the I O port address of your PC s ARCNET card configured on the ARCNET card Select the memory address of your PC s ARCNET card configured on the ARCNET card F Click Finish and skip to Finishing a Direct Connection on page 4 12 m 4 6 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring an AC37 G4LC32ISA or G4LC32ISA LT Port If you chose AC37 G4LC32ISA or G4LC32ISA LT Port in the Port Selection dialog box the following dialog box appears Configure AC37 AC39 1SA Port Port Name AC37 Poof A Retries _ Timeout msec fioo i 1 0 Port oza D Baud Rate 115200 E Protocol Binary F G A Enter a descriptive name for the port All characters are valid B Enter the number of times you want OptoControl to reattempt communications Any integer from zero to 255 is valid the default 1 is a good choice It indicates a total of two attempts at communication C Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time OptoControl tries to establish communication throu
499. testusPoeetioee 7 11 Selecting NS IIMs o aissaacdscecdiastctycedadess scdsetdaiscatantaciatactacheanuacunmicansseateutagiiacanamaatias 7 11 Moving EleMENS enamni a a E a EE 7 12 Moving Elements in Front of or Behind Other Elements Changing Z Order 7 12 Cutting Copying and Pasting Elements no ccncisacencorcencas cedszenecssonesnaciecannalandceduadeatietoes 7 13 Deleting Elements cstbsctucdslasthashdeasaenhcasechactstacescdacnasadaskentaatanthotaatssdesdsseesadsiechaoceseas e 7 13 Changing Element Color and Size taatusscnssnssh ied atten atv nailer wcnianna tel dasleicloleatlanads 7 13 Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks ccccscccsccccssecsecscsscccsecsccscecsesnesscearscsconeansesnceaces 7 14 Changing Block AG ONIONS races aks deh ded caseeiecadodasd ne acanctueteioccacs ake Mesa ereeaise mans 7 14 chanoin Text masmas detad cscs ctun tance E acs secebaawta leat densa ceesenhisctaiteet 7 14 Changing an Element Back to the Defaults 0 cccccescecesseteseeteseetesestesesereaee 7 14 Opening Saving and Closing Charts chess 85a abide ne eaaeatis on nadied des linseed Suelaadod 7 15 Op ning GMant nenem srecen mastitisa eia na ERE EEEa a REEE E Eria 7 15 Saving a Chart wccdcccctsa ct tcac cece gucaanseecadeb tse cicansatendecapsataaieeaceace muhactonsaesibranaabaciseeSestonts 7 15 Closinga Hel e romain ee amen Re stereer er eee ema ene POUT ree ee eR eRe STR n TN irr mtr me 7 15 Copying Renaming and Deleting Charts sscscccsusscccssasestiesad
500. the Configure I O Units dialog box click the PID Loops button The Configure PID Loops dialog box appears listing all PID loops on the 1 0 unit 3 ix Configure PID Loops 140 Unit Type B3000 SNAP Analog B3000 Name Input Output Mode Descii Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not OptoControl User s Guide 5 25 5 26 WORKING WITH 1 0 4 Ifthe correct I O unit does not appear in the I O Unit field choose it from the drop down menu Only analog multifunction units are listed since they are the only units that support PIDs 5 Double click an unused line or highlight it and click the Add button The Add PID Loop dialog box opens x A Name i B Description FC C Mode auo Options Scan Rate for sec E D F Input fizo Poit x Fluid Output G H FF Square Root J Average Output Fluid _Output x Max Chg Rate 4000 m J K Lower Clamp 1 2000 Upper Clamp 2000 E L M Setpoint Host x Initial Value fo N O Lower Clamp 32768 Upper Clamp 32767 N P Q Gain fi Integral fo Derivative fo a S R T WV Enable Security p U Cancel Help 6 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a name for the PID The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores
501. the PID loop and whether scanning is occurring Temperature_Controller Yiew PID Loop scanning Name Temperature_Controller Input Oven_Temperatue Output Oven Temperature Control Setpoint Host CSU Security A Enable Fe Error Nosme o BE VAL VAL Lower Clamp Upper Clamp Input fo B Output fo 84 375 Cae fico t S Setpoint Bo o a ro M Gain fi a CH Integral o 09997559 pooo Derivative fo 0 E Scan Rate sec ae o nz 2 MaxChgRate 100 100 1 000 to 100 000 E Mode p Automatic Add Watch Help Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost Asterisks in a field indicate an out of range value Dashes in an XVAL field indicate a communication error 2 Change the fields as necessary A Current status Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled To change status click one of the arrows then click Apply B Current internal and external values of the input output and setpoint used in the PID loop calculation Change each to any valid value If lower and upper clamps appear to the right of the value these clamps define the range of valid values Otherwise the valid range is defined by the I O point itself If you change them click Apply 5 46 OptoContr
502. the file name itself Example Open the file TEST1 txt Key names appear in small capital letters Example Press SHIFT Key press combinations are indicated by plus signs between two or more key names For example SHIFT F1 is the result of holding down the shift key then pressing and releasing the F1 key Similarly CTRL ALT DELETE is the result of pressing and holding the CTRL and ALT keys then pressing and releasing the DELETE key Click means press and release the left mouse button on the referenced item Right click means press and release the right mouse button on the item Menu commands are referred to with the Menu Command convention For example File gt Open Project means to select the Open Project command from the File menu Numbered lists indicate procedures to be followed sequentially Bulleted lists such as this one provide general information Other FactoryFloor Resources Documents and Online Help To help you understand and use the FactoryFloor suite of products the following resources are provided Online Help is available in OptoControl OptoDisplay OptoServer and most of the OptoUtilities To open online Help choose HelpContents and Index in any screen OptoControl User s Guide OptoDisplay User s Guide and OptoServer User s Guide give step by step instructions for using each of these products The OptoServer User s Guide binder also contains a master FactoryFloor Glos
503. the section Associating the Controller with Your Strategy on page 4 15 OptoControl User s Guide 4 13 WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Configuring a Server Connection If you chose Server in the Select Connection dialog box on page 4 3 the Configure Server Connection dialog box appears Configure Server Connection Select a computer and then a controller Computer sist A Server Status sa B Controller C Refresh 0 controller s found on the computer selected above coos 1 Complete the fields as follows A Enter the name of the computer on which OptoServer is running You can type in the name directly if you know it or click Browse and select the computer through the network browser B If OptoServer s OptoCds program is not running on the computer you specify a message appears in the Server Status field Select another computer or start OptoCds on the specified computer and then click Refresh to retry the connection C Once OptoCds is found running on the specified computer a list of controllers connected to the computer appears below the Controller field Click the one you want D Click Refresh anytime to verify or retry a connection to a computer or a controller 2 When a Connected to computer message appears in the Server Status field click Finish 3 In the Select Controller dialog box highlight the controller you want to associate with the strategy Click OK Continue with th
504. the strategy Any tags from the chart that do not already exist in the strategy are created and added except tags that appear only within an OptoScript block The Chart Import Report dialog box lists any variables I O points and other tags that appear only within an OptoScript block so you can add them by hand OptoControl User s Guide 7 19 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS 7 20 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 8 Using Variables Introduction This chapter discusses the six types of variables used in OptoControl numeric string pointer numeric table pointer table and string table variables In This Chapter About WSN OS casi asssecaicstseatancaccdacscasantsiseccies 8 1 Changing and Deleting Variables 8 12 Variables in OptoControl ccccccecseeeeteeeees 8 3 Viewing Variables in Debug Mode 8 12 Adding Numeric String and Pointer Variables 8 5 Adding Numeric String and Pointer Tables 8 7 About Variables As Chapter 2 mentions variables store pieces of information in a strategy You create a variable for each piece of information in your control process that must be acted upon These pieces of information might include the name of a chart the on or off state of a switch or a table that holds a series of numbers Each variable has a name and a value The variable s name identifies it in plain English so you know what it is The variable s value is the current information it represents As a strategy
505. ting a subroutine has no effect on the open strategy unless you specifically link them together A second important difference between subroutines and charts is that subroutines offer two ways to work with variables and other logical elements they can be passed in or they can be local to the subroutine e Passed in items are referenced when the subroutine is executed and they are permanently affected by the subroutine For example you could create a subroutine to add 3 0 to a passed in float variable When the subroutine ended the float variable would contain a new value Passed in items are called subroutine parameters and you can use up to eight of them in a subroutine OptoControl User s Guide 12 1 USING SUBROUTINES e Local items are created when a subroutine begins and they are destroyed when it ends For example a subroutine could take a passed in item copy it to a local variable and add 3 0 to that local variable for use within the subroutine The local variable would be created when the subroutine is called and it would disappear when the subroutine ends Subroutines for some special purposes may require commands instructions that are not standard in OptoControl For information on adding external commands see Expanding the Command Set on page 6 30 Creating Subroutines 12 2 This section shows how to create a subroutine by drawing the flowchart configuring subroutine parameters adding commands and then co
506. tions given here are to achieve the fastest response with no overshoot This would be on the aggressive side of conservative tuning Tuning rules found in control textbooks such as Ziegler Nichols typically advocate quarter amplitude decay which means an overshoot that results in an undershoot that is 1 4 the amplitude of the overshoot and then an overshoot that is 1 4 the amplitude of the undershoot etc until it stabilizes on the setpoint This kind of tuning could be considered very aggressive Determining the Loop Dead Time To determine the dead time put the PID output in manual mode then set the output somewhere around midrange After the loop has achieved a steady state change the output by at least 10 of its span Measure the time in seconds that it takes the input to start responding to the change This is the dead time Tuning The tuning guidelines below are followed by a series of graphs showing the effects of implementing various multiples of the optimal gain and integral The optimal gain and integral are multiplied by 2 too high and 0 5 too low and every combination of these tuning parameters is shown on the graphs Comparing actual PID loop performance with these graphs can usually identify what adjustments are necessary to improve the tuning of the actual PID loop It is important to use a graphical tool like OptoDisplay to assist in the tuning process These graphs and guidelines ar
507. to Table Element n lt gt nt 0 F Not Equal x lt gt y F NOT not x F Off IsOff Point di 0 F Off Latch Set IsOffLatchSet On Point F On IsOn Point di 1 F On Latch Set IsOnLatchSet On Point F OptoControl User s Guide E 13 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Open Ethernet Session OpenEthernetSession Session Name On Port F OR x Or y F OR See OR F Pause Timer PauseTimer Timer P PID Loop Communication IsPidLoopCommEnabled PID Loop F Enabled Pointer Equal to Null pn null F Pointer Table Element Equal pt 0 null F to Null Raise e to Power RaiseEToPower Exponent F Raise to Power Power Raise To the F Ramp Analog Output RampAnalogOutput Ramp Endpoint Units Sec P Point to Ramp Read Byte from PC Memory ReadByteFromPcMemory From Address F ISA only Read Byte from PC Port ISA ReadByteFromPcPort From Address F only Read Event Reaction Hold ReadEventReactionHoldBuffer Event F Buffer Reaction Read Numeric Table from I O ReadNumTableFromIoMemMap Length Start F Memory Map Index I O Unit Mem address To Read Numeric Variable from ReadNumVarFromloMemMap I O Unit Mem F 1 0 Memory Map address To Read String Table from I O ReadStrTableFromIoMemMap Length Start F Memory Map Index I O Unit Mem address To
508. to be reinstalled 1 From the Windows Start menu select Run The Run dialog box appears 2 Enter the following command in the Open field and press ENTER regedt32 The Registry Editor main window appears with several open windows inside it 3 Select the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE window to make it active A Double click the Software folder in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE window Select the Opto22 folder o oOo Select Security Permissions The Registry Key Permissions dialog box opens Make sure that Opto22 appears next to Registry Key at the top of the window 7 Click Add 8 In the Add Users and Groups dialog box select the name of the appropriate group or domain from the List Names From drop down list 9 In the Names list select the name of the user or group that will get controller access and then click Add 10 If it is not already selected choose Full Control from the Type of Access drop down menu 11 Click OK 12 In the Registry Key Permissions dialog box select the Replace Permission on Existing Subkeys checkbox and click OK 13 Select Registry Exit to close the Registry Editor 14 Restart the computer The user or group you added can now use controllers without having administrator access A 16 OptoControl User s Guide APPENDIX B OptoControl Errors Types of Errors This appendix discusses errors you may see in OptoControl You may see three types of errors e Opto
509. to scan for Complete additional fields that appear as described in the tables on the following page OptoControl User s Guide 5 33 WORKING WITH 1 0 For digital 1 0 units For this type of event Enter this information Watchdog Timeout No information required Counter gt Value Specify the I O point to be monitored and the value to compare the Quadrature gt Value I O point against Totalize On gt Value Select the I O point from the drop down list or specify a new name Totalize Off gt Value for the point and configure it On Pulse gt Value Off Pulse gt Value Period gt Value Frequency gt Value Quadrature lt Value Frequency lt Value Counter lt Value MOMO Match See page 5 36 For analog I O units For this type of event Enter this information Watchdog Timeout No information required Analog Input gt Value Specify the I O point to be monitored the value to compare the I O Analog Input lt Value point against and the type of comparison value current average Analog Output gt Value maximum minimum or total Analog Output lt Value Select the I O point from the drop down list or specify a new name for the point and configure it F From the drop down list select the reaction to take in response to the event Complete additional fields that appear as described in the following tables For digital 1 0 units For this type of reaction Enter this
510. top OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Debugging Once the strategy is running if it doesn t appear to be working correctly you can use several tools in Debug mode to figure out what the problem is You can pause a chart step through it one block at a time or one line at a time watch it slowly step through the blocks or add a breakpoint to a block to stop the strategy just before it executes that block You can also step into subroutines The chart s status is shown in the lower left hand corner of its window This corner shows whether the chart is running stopped or suspended and whether the debugging tools such as stepping and breakpoints are in effect The chart must be running in order to use these tools Choosing Debug Level You can choose one of two levels of debugging e Minimal Debug lets you step from block to block but does not allow you to step within blocks Less information is downloaded to the controller for minimal debugging so downloading the strategy takes less time and less controller memory e Full Debug lets you step inside blocks so you can step through each instruction in an Action or Condition block and through each line of OptoScript code in an OptoScript block If you are using OptoScript you will probably want to spend the additional time to download your strategy at the full debug level To change debug level make sure you are in Configure mode From the Configure menu choo
511. trategy is running 5 44 configuring PID loops 5 25 configuring PID module 5 20 filter commands instructions 10 5 O unit commands 10 7 minimum maximum value 10 5 monitoring inputs 10 24 offset and gain commands instructions 10 5 10 6 point commands 10 5 point definition 2 4 totalizer 10 5 10 6 applications launching from OptoControl 2 26 archiving strategies restoring archives 4 23 to the controller 4 22 6 5 archiving strategy to computer 6 5 ARCNET network communication commands 10 37 peer to peer communication 10 38 port 4 6 4 11 port setup failed error A 10 send error A 10 troubleshooting communications A 10 argument 3 7 9 3 ASCII 10 34 auto stepping through a chart 6 15 automation 2 3 B batch file 6 10 binary 10 34 block block 0 7 2 changing color or size 7 3 7 13 connecting blocks 7 7 definition 2 5 7 3 deleting 7 13 drawing 7 6 finding in a chart 2 19 guidelines for use 3 9 moving 7 12 naming 3 10 7 7 selecting 7 11 Boolean converting Boolean true to standard true 10 33 breakpoints in a chart 6 16 C calling a subroutine 12 8 case statements programming example 3 16 OptoControl User s Guide Index 1 changing active controller 4 18 analog 1 0 while strategy is running 5 44 block color or size 7 3 7 13 chart background 7 3 column width in a dialog box 2 19 command instruction 9 5 connection line color or size 7 13 contro
512. troller Incorrect or loose communication wiring or CRC on High noise level on the communication line received Missing terminator on the ends of the communication message cable Twisted pair cable not used Two or more devices with the same address 46 Invalid limits Controller when Index into a string variable was negative zero or greater using the Get Nth than the string length Character command 47 NAK returned Controller NAK returned in response to an OPTOMUX command usually followed by an error code 48 String too short Controller Target string variable too short to hold response to an OPTOMUX or CRC command 49 String was Controller A command that expected a string variable to contain one empty or more characters 50 Invalid Controller Unexpected characters in the string passed to the characters in Configure Port command string OptoControl User s Guide B 9 o No Message Generated by Possible Causes 51 Invalid port Controller An attempt to acquire a port resource that doesn t exist Examples trying to send a command via ARCNET when there is no ARCNET card in your M4BUS controller using a number other than 8 9 or 10 for an Ethernet port or using the wrong number for an existing session 70 No Ethernet Controller An attempt to acquire an Ethernet resource that doesn t card exist for example trying to send a command via Ethernet when there is no Ethernet card in yo
513. trollers from the OptoTerm Utility 00 0 0 ccescecceseeeseeeeeseeseeeeteeeeees 4 21 Downloading Files to the Controller s decascches ed isticantuatendnncdeevicedetiiniastlaclaweadsidiaddvedacdaaloes 4 22 Archiving Strategies ast cesde ata cencccctesanon iakdacherawesebasee eedseutreislidessncniesednt sebetiabedtudssanxse 4 22 Archiving to the Controller ccccsscsesesesssssscesessesesesesessssesessesssesesseseeeeseeee 4 22 Restoring Archived Strategies from the Controller cccccccececeeetesestesesteseaee 4 23 vi OptoControl User s Guide EE ee Downloading Additional Files for a Strate Qy c cccccecesestesesteseeteseetesesteseseeeeseees 4 24 Downloading Files Without Opening OptoContrOl cc cccccseeseseeteeeteeeeeseees 4 26 Downloading Firmware to the Controller c ccccccccscscsseseetesesteseeteseeseseesescstesesteseseeneseees 4 26 Chapter 5 Working with I O scssisieicceistscccssstacsevscoretetssesssstsetudsecteisstnssetsiees 5 1 PR UE i te deselected etc coa ca ovncn acd E ke sneeceaneonean 5 1 Ni TRIS Ghaptet seiscientos 5 1 Configuring UOT Gs scaceacesstenecessotsannnianccaSenbantiteedsenie in ceutecaseshacsccseaicenentextesncaecstasehedessdonndts 5 1 Adding AM OU sca cst ecincnt case senses pcedans apedec ese Daasetenda naan yum coenashagnauaciassasamaansan 5 2 Configuration Example SNAP I O Unit except Ethernet 0 cece 5 4 Configuration Example SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 Unit ccccceeesceteseeeees 5 7 Co
514. ture in the zip file may not match what was originally on the computer The zip file structure is as follows Root cdb chart files inf Subroutines XIDs Controller files Controller_Name_1 Before run file After run file Controller_Name_2 Etc Downloading Additional Files for a Strategy Some strategies may depend on other files such as command libraries or initialization files that need to be downloaded immediately before or after your strategy download These files apply to a specific controller OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH CONTROLLERS Files to be downloaded before a strategy include library files Files to be downloaded after the strategy include the G4LC32 TRM file for the G4LC32 controller only and initialization files which contain custom initialization entries for numeric or string tables For more information on initialization files see Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables during Strategy Download on page 8 9 To download other files before or after your strategy follow these steps 1 With the strategy open double click the Controllers folder on the Strategy Tree The Configure Controllers dialog box appears Configure Controllers x Active Controller Controllers Associated with Strategy Set Active Add Modify Delete Download Options Set Up Controller Ports Cancel Help 2 Click Download Options Download Options x Before Ru
515. u click Apply any changes you made are lost 3 To change the value of the variable type the new value in the Value field and click Apply The field turns magenta until you click Apply For a string variable if your change lengthens the string beyond its maximum width the string is truncated to fit 4 To monitor the variable in a watch window click Add Watch If you have only one watch window and it is already open the variable appears immediately in the window for monitoring OptoControl User s Guide 8 13 USING VARIABLES D Otherwise the Add Watch Entry dialog box appears Add Watch Entry 2 x Name Time_of_Day Select Portions To Watch IV Yalue Select All Eear r Select Watch Window _ New Open Cancel Help 5 In the Add Watch Entry dialog box do one of the following e f the watch window you want to use to monitor the variable is open choose it from the Select Watch Window drop down list e f the watch window you want is not open click Open Navigate to it and double click it to open it e lf you want to monitor the variable in a new watch window click New For help see Creating a Watch Window on page 5 50 6 When the Add Watch Entry dialog box shows the correct items to watch and the watch window you want click OK The variable appears in the watch window Viewing Pointer Variables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On t
516. ual sl s2 F Subtract x y F Suspend Chart SuspendChart Chart F Suspend Chart on Error SuspendChartOnError F Suspend Default Host Task SuspendDefaultHostTask F Table Element Bit Clear TableElementBitClear Element Index Of P Integer Table Bit to Clear OptoControl User s Guide E 17 OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Table Element Bit Set TableElementBitSet Element Index Of P Integer Table Bit to Set Table Element Bit Test TableElementBitTest Element Index Of F Integer Table Bit to Test Tangent Tangent Of F Test Equal See Equal F Test Equal Strings See String Equal F Test Greater See Greater F Test Greater or Equal See Greater Than or Equal F Test Less See Less F Test Less or Equal See Less Than or Equal F Test Not Equal See Not Equal F Test Within Limits See Within Limits F Timer Expired HasTimerExpired Timer F Transmit Character via Serial TransCharViaSerialPort Character On Port F Port Transmit NewLine via Serial TransNewLineViaSerialPort On Port F Port Transmit String via ARCNET TransStringViaArcnet String On Port F Transmit String via Ethernet TransStringViaEthernet String Via F Session On Port Transmit String via Serial Port TransStringViaSerialPort String On Port F Transmit Tab
517. uide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL Ue Multitasking The controller can run several charts seemingly at once each performing a different task through a time slicing technique called multitasking also called multicharting The Opto 22 controller contains a multitasking kernel that allows it to run up to 32 tasks simultaneously by assigning each task a 500 microsecond time slice These tasks include the following e The host task is an invisible chart used to communicate to a PC The host task is assigned the first 500 microsecond time slice A strategy may have more than one host task for example if the PC is running OptoControl in Debug mode as well as OptoDisplay e f an M4SENET 100 adapter card is installed in the controller an Ethernet handler task will always be in the task queue e Each chart in a running or suspended state is placed in the task queue and assigned a time slice Charts that are suspended use very little time Charts that are stopped are not assigned a time slice When the Powerup chart is running it is always assigned the time slice after the host task When a chart ends or its time slice expires whichever occurs first control passes to the next task in the queue eventually returning to the host task and repeating the cycle Charts and host tasks that have greater priority can be given more than one time slice When 32 tasks are running each with a single time slice each chart will be executed at least once
518. uired command library file to be downloaded was not specified See Downloading Additional Files for a Strategy on page 4 24 A downloaded library file does not include the referenced command Typo exists in a file being downloaded library file G4LC32 TRM file or include file Timeout No response Possible cause bad cable bad address power shut off etc Communication cannot be completed within the time specified through the Port Setup dialog box When this error appears as an OptoControl error it indicates a problem between the computer and the controller See Resolving Timeout Errors 29 or 29 on page A 6 Send error Controller offline or address incorrect Controller is turned off or configured with wrong address For an ARCNET network make sure ARCNET is set as host port and see Resolving Send Errors 33 on page A 10 Timeout interval is too short See Resolving Timeout Errors 29 or 29 on page A 6 OptoControl User s Guide B 3 o Possible Causes Another device has acquired exclusive access to the host port while downloading to the controller This is not an error It is notification that the controller is busy The command that returned this code will not be executed Allocated word dictionary space is full Too many words were downloaded External library file is too large Might need to expand memory or reduce strategy size A word is being d
519. uments OptoScript Equivalent Example g Command Name Write Word to PC Memory writeWordToPcMemory Word To Address F ISA only Write Word to PC Port ISA WriteWordToPcPort Word To Address F only XOR x xor y F XOR See XOR F E 20 OptoControl User s Guide APPENDIX F OptoScript Language Reference Introduction This appendix includes the following reference information about the OptoScript language OptoScript Comparison with Standard Programming Languages page F 1 Notes to Experienced Programmers page F 6 OptoScript Lexical Reference page F 8 OptoScript Grammar Syntax Reference page F 11 OptoScript Comparison with Standard Programming Languages The tables on the following pages compare OptoScript functions and variables to those available in Pascal BASIC and C For more information on using OptoScript see Chapter 11 and Appendix E General Notes 1 2 3 The BASIC column is based on Microsoft s Visual Basic language The Pascal column is based on Borland s ObjectPascal language The use of logical statements in BASIC and Pascal is significantly different than in OptoScript and C BASIC and Pascal have a Boolean data type OptoScript and C use integers OptoScript and C treat a zero value as false and a non zero value as true In OptoScript you cannot use a break type of command in a loop OptoScript can test only one case in a switch at a time other languages can test more t
520. unning chart just before a block is executed You can set a breakpoint at any block in any chart whether the chart is running or stopped paused or auto stepped The strategy does not need to be running You can set up to 16 breakpoints in one chart However you cannot set a breakpoint inside a block or in a subroutine To set a breakpoint follow these steps 1 With the chart open and in Debug mode click the Breakpoint Tool button w The pointer turns into a hand 2 Click the target block to mark it with the breakpoint hand Dough_Chip_Control OY x The Powerup chart starts this chart This chart runs continuously once the Breakpoint hand Break On in status bar Running Step 0n Break On 2 003 Sec The breakpoint hand appears on the block and Break On appears in the status bar 3 Click other blocks to set additional breakpoints or click blocks currently marked with a hand to remove the breakpoint 4 When you have finished marking or removing breakpoints click the Breakpoint button again or click the right mouse button within the window OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH STRATEGIES When the chart runs it pauses just before executing the breakpoint block You can inspect variables or I O points disable strategy elements change values and so on to see the effect the block has 5 To single step past the breakpoint click the Step Block button Or to run t
521. ur M4BUS controller 71 No more Controller An attempt to open too many Ethernet sessions The sessions maximum number of sessions is 32 72 Open session Controller An attempt to open a session that did not succeed during timeout the timeout interval This timeout is about 30 seconds and is defined on the Ethernet expansion card This error typically occurs when trying to communicate with a device that is not physically present at the Ethernet address 73 Close session Controller An attempt to close a session that did not succeed during timeout the timeout interval This timeout is defined as 15 seconds 74 Session not Controller An attempt to use a session that is not open a number open between zero and 31 was passed for the session number 75 Invalid session Controller The passed session number is not between zero and 31 number 76 No session Controller There is no active session for the specified port selected 77 Wrong LC type Controller An attempt to use an invalid command for the current controller for example trying to use Ethernet commands on an G4LC32SxX controller 78 Bad address Controller Passing an invalid memory address when trying to access the PC bus via the G4LC32ISA card 79 Operation failed Controller Could not gain access to the PC bus via the G4LC32ISA card Ethernet The open request has timed out Make sure the IP address is correct and check that cables are properly connected 80 Character not Contro
522. ured width of the table String Data Extraction Examples To extract various pieces of information from a string use the command Find Substring in String Consider the following example 123 45 67 String_1 O P TJO 2 2 One way to get two separate pieces of information from this string is to get characters 1 4 and then get characters 6 and 7 as shown in the examples on the following page OptoControl User s Guide 10 17 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Find Substring in String Example 1 String_1 string variable Start At 1 integer literal Number Of 4 integer literal Move To SUB _1 string variable width 5 Results in Sub _1 O P T O Find Substring in String Example 2 String_1 string variable Start At 6 integer literal Number Of 2 integer literal Move To SUB _2 string variable width 5 Results in 123 45 Sub 2 212 String Building Example Strings are assembled using commands Move String Append Character to String and Append String to String Consider the following original string and the examples that follow 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 String_1 F AJCITIO R YJFILIOJOJIR Move String From Opto string literal To String_1 string variable Results in note that MOVE STRING erased the previous contents of the string 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 String_1 OIPITJO lt Length is gt
523. using For brief explanations of buttons move your mouse over the button and look in the status bar In Instructions dialog boxes let your mouse rest for a second on an instruction command and you ll see a list of the variable types used in that command To show or hide the variable types list in Configure mode choose OptoControl Options Show Hide Instruction Type Information To open online copies of OptoContro manuals and quick reference cards choose Help Manuals You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader to open these files OptoControl User s Guide 2 27 WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL 2 28 OptoControl User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Designing Your Strategy Introduction This chapter introduces you to OptoControl programming how to design an OptoControl strategy to control your automated process For additional important information on using OptoControl commands instructions to program your strategy effectively see Chapter 10 Programming with Commands and the individual command information in the OptoContro Command Reference In This Chapter Steps to Design c ccececcecseseseseseneees 3 14 Instruction EXAM PIGS 00c ccccecescesccsestecseccass 3 10 Basic Rules c ccccsceicssacescanescensesacacsacaseates 3 8 Optimizing Throughput cece 3 20 Steps to Design How do you get from your real world control problem to a working OptoControl strategy that solves it Here s an outline of the basic approach we ll
524. utine to appear in For example if you create a subroutine to tune a PID loop you may want to have the subroutine appear under the PID command group The default group is Subroutines 3 Optional Enter a comment to explain the purpose of the subroutine 12 4 OptoControl User s Guide USING SUBROUTINES rs 4 For each parameter do the following steps NOTE What you enter here appears in the Add Instruction dialog box when the subroutine is called from within the strategy See page 12 6 for an example a Highlight the first empty line and click Add to open the Add Subroutine Parameter dialog box Add Subroutine Parameter x Prompt Name Type 7 Cancel Heb In the Prompt field enter the prompt text you want to show in the Add Instruction dialog box in the strategy In the Name field enter the name of the parameter the argument as it will be referred to in the subroutine This name is used within the subroutine only From the Type drop down list choose the type of item to be passed into the subroutine Click OK The parameter appears in the Configure Subroutine Parameters dialog box Configure Subroutine Parameters olx Subroutine Name Group Variable Increase Notification Subroutines bd Subroutine s OptoS cript Name Variable_Inctease_Notification Reference Comment count ore Promt Type Name Ref Count IR Integer 32 Variable Counter 0 Modify ke Up
525. ver when you are viewing the remaining time in a down timer from the OptoControl Debug mode or by using commands in an OptoControl strategy the resolution depends on the amount of time remaining as shown in the following table Remaining Time Seconds Best Resolution Seconds 0 9 999 0 001 10 000 99 999 0 01 100 000 999 999 0 1 1 000 000 9 999 999 1 0 values gt 10 000 000 seven digits plus exponent 9 999999 x 10n OptoControl User s Guide 10 13 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS String Commands The following commands are used with strings Move String Move to String Table Move from String Table String Equal String Equal to String Table Element Test Equal Strings Get String Length Append Character to String Append String to String Convert Float to String Convert Number to String Convert Number to String Field Convert Hex String to Number Convert IEEE Hex String to Number Convert Number to Hex String Convert Number to Formatted Hex String Convert String to Float Convert String to Integer 32 Convert String to Integer 64 Using Strings Convert String to Lower Case Convert String to Upper Case Find Character in String Get Nth Character Set Nth Character Find Substring in String Get Substring Generate Checksum on String Verify Checksum on String Generate Forward CCITT on String Verify Forward CCITT on String Generate Reverse CCITT on String Verify Reverse CCITT on String Generate Forward CRC 1
526. vert F Number Convert IEEE Hex String to IEEEHexStringToNumber Convert F Number Convert Mistic I O Hex to MisticloHexToFloat Convert F Float Convert Number to NumberToFormattedHexString Convert P Formatted Hex String Length Put Result in Convert Number to Hex NumberToHexString Convert Put Result in P String Convert Number to Mistic O NumberToMisticIoHex Convert Put Result P Hex in Convert Number to String NumberToString Convert Put Result in P Convert Number to String NumberToStringField Convert Length Put P Field Result in Convert String to Float StringToFloat Convert F Convert String to Integer 32 StringToInt32 Convert F Convert String to Integer 64 StringToInt64 Convert F Convert String to Lower Case StringToLowerCase Convert P Convert String to Upper Case StringToUpperCase Convert P Copy Date to String DateToStringDDMMYY String P DD MM YY Copy Date to String DateToStringMMDDYY String P MM DD YY Copy Time to String TimeToString String P Cosine Cosine Of F CTS Off IsCtsOff On Port F CTS On IsCtsOn On Port F Decrement Variable Decrement Variable Variable x x l P Delay mSec DelayMsec Milliseconds P E 4 OptoControl User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT COMMAND EQUIVALENTS ee M Action Condition OptoScript Command with Arguments OptoScript Equivalent Example amp Command Name Del
527. vert Number to Formatted Hex String Command Convert to Siring Commands Parameters e2s o gt 29 TES aes 3 3 3 z EE 2235 85 Er gs fg S2 Tels ES 3s te 535 53L sc os o s D Sr o c zn zo za 58 59 5 Zu PE SH ux r t E o 22 4 585 e SI 6 fe 52 Eo gt a P Q So Zo Se EEG Oo 5 9 2 9 Z2 OSJ oO oO Oo to oo gt lt Ww 16 0 1 4 417FFFFF 16 0 10 1 6e 01 1 6e 01 16 0 2 4 417FFFFF aust 10 1 6e 01 1 6e 01 2 16 0 1 4 C17FFFFF ane FFFFFFFO 1 6e 01 1 6e 01 oO ix 1 23 1 4 3F9D70A4 1 2 1 1 23 1 23 12 3 1 4 4144CCCD 12 3 C 1 23e 01 1 23e 01 0 0 1 4 00000000 _0 0 0 ___0 0 16 1 4 0010 16 0 10 __16 16 n 16 2 4 0010 nee 10 __16 16 16 1 4 FFFO aes FFFFFFFO _ 16 16 7 0 1 4 0000 0 0 0 a 0 0 1000 1 2 E8 g 3E8 1000 1000 Indicates an overflow The whole number portion of the resulting string is too long for its space OptoControl User s Guide 10 21 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS eee ASCII Table The following table shows ASCII characters with their decimal and hex values For characters 0 31 equivalent control codes are also listed for example a carriage return character 13 is equivalent to a CTRL M shown in the table as M Dec Hex CC Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char o o0 NUL 32 20 Space 64 40
528. want to change Choose Select from the pop up menu From the sub menu choose the item type you want OptoControl User s Guide 7 5 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS For example to select all action blocks choose Select Action Blocks 2 Right click again in the chart and choose Properties Copy from Default from the pop up menu The color size and font of all selected items change to match the flowchart defaults Drawing Blocks Action condition OptoScript and continue blocks are all drawn the same way 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the tool you want to use ol for an action block for a condition block for an OptoScript block for a continue block As you move the mouse into the window you see an outline representing the block 2 Click where you want to place the block The new block appears as shown New_Chart iof x 3 Click in another location to place other blocks of the same type When you have finished using the tool click the right mouse button click another tool in the toolbar or press ESC 7 6 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Naming Blocks 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool R 2 Right click the block and choose Name from the pop up menu Name Block x Cancel 3 In the Name Block dialog box type the name and click OK Renaming Blocks 1 With the chart
529. watch window I O units digital and analog points PID loops event reactions variables even charts You cannot monitor subroutines or variables that are local to a subroutine in a watch window Unlike inspection windows watch windows can be created the way you want docked in a position most convenient for you and are saved with your strategy You cannot change strategy elements in a watch window but you can open the inspect dialog box from the watch window and change the element there Creating a Watch Window 1 With the strategy open and in Debug mode click the New Watch Window icon in the toolbar or choose Watch New 2 In the Create New Watch Window dialog box navigate to the location where you want the watch window file to be kept usually in the same folder as the strategy Enter the watch window file name and click Open The empty watch window appears a a E x lt gt Watch_1 C ype va 3 Add elements you want to watch in this window by clicking them on the Strategy Tree and dragging them into place in the watch window or by right clicking them and choosing Watch from the pop up menu You can add 0 units digital and analog points PID loops event reactions variables and charts You cannot add subroutines or variables that are local to a subroutine 5 50 OptoControl User s Guide WORKING WITH I O a M Depending on which element you add and how you add it it may appear immediately in the
530. while it is running You cannot add variables and 1 0 in Online mode but you can change ones that already exist NOTE When you change a chart in Online mode a new copy of that chart is downloaded to the controller but the old one is not deleted After you have made a few online changes the additional chart copies begin to take up memory To avoid memory problems be sure you stop the strategy after making several online changes and completely compile and download it to clear out old chart copies To change modes choose the mode you want from the Mode menu or click its button in the toolbar Toolbars Toolbars give you shortcuts for doing many things that also appear on menus Toolbars in OptoControl include standard Windows buttons like New and Help as well as special buttons for OptoControl functions Like the menu bar the tools that you can use depend on which mode you re in Tools that don t apply to a mode are grayed out The following toolbars are standard in OptoControl To change the buttons in them or to create your own toolbar see Customizing Toolbars on page 2 22 File Toolbar New Save Copy Delete Find Help Open i Cut Paste Replace Web links posel seex al OSG User s Guide About Drawing Toolbar Select Connect Text Condition Block Action Block Continue Block OptoScript Block 2 10 OptoControl User s Guide WHAT IS OPTOCONTROL as Configure Toolbar Controllers External Inst
531. x shows you the name and location of the archive file e To have an archive automatically created whenever the strategy is closed choose File Strategy Options In the Strategy Options dialog box click Archive strategy to disk when strategy is closed e To have an archive automatically created whenever the strategy is downloaded choose File Strategy Options In the Strategy Options dialog box click Archive strategy to disk when strategy is downloaded The archive file name will be in one of the following formats Archive method File name format Manual archive or archive when strategy is closed Path Filename Archive D02282000 T114351 zip Archive on download Path Filename Download D02282000 T 114351 zip Archive when downloading from online mode Path Filename Online D02282000 T114351 zip The date stamp D is in the format mm dd yyyy In the examples above the date is February 28 2000 The time stamp T is in the format hh mm ss In the examples above the time is 51 seconds past 11 43 A M Archiving to the Controller When you archive a strategy to the controller you are placing the zipped file in battery backed RAM If power to the controller is lost the archive is still there Archiving to the controller as well as the computer makes sure that an older strategy can always be found and updated even after personnel changes occur and years pass Make sure there is sufficient memory in the controller for th
532. xamples Sine Sine2 Sine _3 Bad examples _Sine OSine Keywords Reserved Words if for switch while Chr then to endswitch do else step case wend null elseif next endcase endif break repeat default until Operators The following table lists operators in order of highest to lowest precedence Operator Name Meaning Comments a negation not logical not bitnot bitwise not multiplication division modulo division E subtraction OptoControl User s Guide F 9 F 10 OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE Operator Name Meaning Comments T addition string append assignment lt lt bitwise left shift gt gt bitwise right shift equality lt gt non equality lt less than lt less than or equal to gt greater than gt greater than or equal to bitand bitwise and bitor bitwise or bitxor bitwise exclusive or and logical and or logical or xor logical exclusive or not logical not parentheses no precedence J brackets no precedence colon no precedence A semi colon no precedence i comma separator no precedence assignment no precedence amp address of no precedence Comments OptoScript has two kinds of comments single line and block Single line comments are indicated by two slashes followed by any sequence of characters until the end of the line Examples i a b this is a co
533. xpdcascanaetsceseanactacsnensila citmatentesesacianiansnessesases 8 16 Chapter 9 Using Commands sasiicccscicavsstteceucsesevsdecdesnctesvssnccdei sancsteessuvessssanl 9 1 fav e 0 Ue omer ener ne re eee rere nirnr env ny Ce eon Her PEPE re TE ne eISEnE Er Peer Tenn 9 1 WNS RO aE Gtaesdta selaaladiautaddaiaasiae 9 1 Adding Commands cts ciccsuccctactices eacotersctaspacaetictne chadsanacemeaschstaviaccdknescesiiahistthasscasensciaeaaiese 9 1 Changing or Deleting Commands sisi scisescisticnaedonidiainedbentactaceidatisanircendiieaanees 9 5 Changing a Command aoc cocci fanaa Deena rues damien stgubatbedaedextaneneaees 9 5 Deleting a COMMIT ANG fa ndcrcaccnedetdocksssuctonnsedddnasiesinstneseaced scbuccasiiendestactdes Gitdetaskewsneshacaste 9 5 Permanently Deleting a COMMANG c cccccccccscsesessesessesesceseseesescarssesseseateseaeesees 9 6 Commenting Qut a Command aceecccscesdancssastsascstescusdestestedosaedceteeiesuecsanads mastarsncadi 9 6 Cutting Copying and Pasting Commands c sccccsccssscsssecsssscssssessseesesscassessecssacassscaess 9 7 Cutting or Copying a OMNI INR ih st Saye ccf Zeca Dean tad eadnshtccdacecai 9 7 Pasting a HOM UMVINGL 40s cca srcca cites heibae dbaxecesea dlacbnes aa cen taicees tsenedctesondelend wedettetiesaats 9 7 Configuring a Continue BIOCK sc cciaceacascasesecepceesteaiessiecscudceacnese entctdlces peZsibeoseed oatteichasSuenastuckets 9 8 Viewing and Printing Chart Instructions sy fee aerate ela anteater
534. y so you may not see the flash unless you are looking directly at it When troubleshooting you may want to lower the baud rate to produce longer flashes that are easier to see Make sure you change the baud rate on both the PC software and the controller Under normal circumstances the TX RX LEDs on both ends of the serial link appear to flash simultaneously It might help to have someone help you troubleshoot so one person can watch the LEDs on the controller while another uses the PC Under normal circumstances TX RX LEDs go through the following sequence 1 The PC transmits a command to the controller 2 The RX LED on the controller flashes indicating that the PC s command was received If the LED does not flash the cabling from PC to controller may be wired incorrectly 3 The controller is addressed by the command processes the received command and sends a response causing the TX LED to flash If the TX LED does not flash the controller may have a different address or the baud rate protocol binary vs ASCII or host port may be incorrect Although the controller may receive a command it does not respond if the command was intended for another controller on the serial link 4 The computer receives the controller s response OptoControl User s Guide A 9 Resolving ARCNET Communication Problems Verifying that a Windows Driver Is Not Installed on the ARCNET Card Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows NT attemp
535. your computer via ARCNET or a serial link select Direct e lf the controller is connected via Ethernet select Ethernet e If itis connected to another computer on a network select Server Regardless of your choice you ll need to supply additional information to allow OptoControl to connect to the controller For a direct connection you need port and address information For an Ethernet connection you need Ethernet connection data such as Ethernet type and IP address For a server connection you need to select the computer on which OptoServer is running For our sample in the next several steps we ll assume a direct ARCNET connection 1 18 OptoControl User s Guide QUICK START 5 Click Direct and then click Next Configure Direct Connection Mody Delete 6 Enter Cookie Controller as the controller name The name can contain letters numbers spaces and most other characters except colons and square brackets Spaces cannot be used as first or last characters 7 Enter the controller s address You can read the address from a display if your controller has one or you can examine its address jumper configuration 8 Click Add to select a port on your computer through which OptoControl will communicate with the controller The Port Selection dialog box appears Opto 22 Port Selection OptoControl User s Guide 1 19 QUICK START o A The previous figure shows the dialog box as it appears o
536. your strategy you also need to configure input output hardware to do the work turning things on setting temperatures monitoring controls and so on This section shows how to configure O units which are groups of related input and output modules An 0 unit is often thought of as a rack which is a physical object that holds a brain and 1 0 modules But depending on the hardware you are using and specifically on how the brain addresses the I O modules the I O unit may or may not be the same as the rack e If you are using a SNAP B3000 brain except Ethernet the 0 unit is NOT the same as the rack A SNAP B3000 brain can address up to four groups of 16 points on the same rack Each group of 16 points must be configured as a separate 1 0 unit either analog or digital These separate O units can be an advantage for example when some digital points control one process and others on the same rack control another process Some OptoControl commands communicate with all the points on one 1 0 unit at once For more information on these commands see Using 1 0 Unit Commands on page 3 27 e If you are using an Opto 22 Classic non SNAP brain board or a SNAP Ethernet brain the 1 0 unit IS the same as the rack You configure the entire rack of points as one OptoControl User s Guide 5 1 WORKING WITH 1 0 1 0 unit because that s how the points are addressed by the brain Racks for classic brain boards are limited to 16 points of

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual de instruções Diafragma isolador CSB  マニュアル HiLoad Pump P-50  Harbor Freight Tools 240 Volt Inverter Plasma Cutter with Digital Display Product manual    NAD Electronics C320 User's Manual  LG LT123HNR Specification Sheet  tensiomètre poignet BEURER BC 58 FR  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file